Toshiba Telephone Ctx28 Users Manual Strata CTX Installation & Maintenance
DP5900 Toshiba CTX I&M Manual CTX 28 CTX 100 & CTX 670
2014-12-13
: Toshiba Toshiba-Telephone-Ctx28-Users-Manual-131832 toshiba-telephone-ctx28-users-manual-131832 toshiba pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 495
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
TOSHIBA Digital Solutions Division Digital Business Telephone Systems CTX28, CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670 Installation and Maintenance Manual June 2004 Strata CTX28, CTX100 and CTX670 General End User Information The Strata CTX28, CTX100 or CTX670 Digital Business Telephone System is registered in accordance with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission’s Rules and Regulations. one line should not exceed five (5.0B). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to ascertain the maximum REN for your calling area. 3. Network connection information USOC jack required: RJ11/14C, RJ21/2E/2F/2G/2HX/RJ49C (see Network Requirements in this document). Items 2, 3 and 4 are also indicated on the equipment label. FCC Requirements 4. Authorized Network Parts: 02LS2/GS2, 02RV2-T/O, OL13C/B, T11/12/31/32M, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN, 02IS5, 04DU9-BN/DN/1SN1ZN Means of Connection: The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules which permit the Strata CTX28, CTX100 or CTX670 system to be connected directly to the telephone network. Connection points are provided by the telephone company—connections for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on coin lines. Connections to party lines are subject to state tariffs. Incidence of Harm: If the system is malfunctioning, it may also be disrupting the telephone network. The system should be disconnected until the problem can be determined and repaired. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. If possible, they will notify you in advance, but, if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC. Service or Repair: For service or repair, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor. To obtain the nearest Toshiba telecommunications distributor in your area, log onto www.toshiba.com/taistsd/locator.htm or call (800) 222-5805 and ask for a Toshiba Telecom Dealer. Telephone Network Compatibility: The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, and procedures. If such changes affect the compatibility or use of the Strata CTX28, CTX100 or CTX670 system, the telephone company will notify you in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. Notification of Telephone Company: Before connecting a Strata CTX28, CTX100 or CTX670 system to the telephone network, the telephone company may request the following: 1. Your telephone number. 2. FCC registration number: • Strata CTX28, CTX100 or CTX670 may be configured as a Key, Hybrid or PBX telephone system. The appropriate configuration for your system is dependent upon your operation of the system. • If the operation of your system is only manual selection of outgoing lines, it may be registered as a Key telephone system. • If your operation requires automatic selection of outgoing lines, such as dial access, Least Cost Routing, Pooled Line Buttons, etc., the system must be registered as a Hybrid telephone system. In addition to the above, certain features (tie Lines, Off-premises Stations, etc.) may also require Hybrid telephone system registration in some areas. • If you are unsure of your type of operation and/or the appropriate FCC registration number, contact your local Toshiba telecommunications distributor for assistance. • CTX28 FCC/ACTA Registration Numbers Hybrid: CJ6MF03BDTCHS28, fully-protected multifunction systems Key: CJ6KD03BDTCHS28, key systems for analog applications • CTX100 Registration Numbers PBX: CJ6MUL-35931-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35930-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems Key: CJ6MUL-35929-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems • CTX670 Registration Numbers PBX: CJ6MUL-35934-PF-E, fully-protected PBXs Hybrid: CJ6MUL-35933-MF-E, fully-protected multifunction systems Key: CJ6MUL-35932-KF-E, fully-protected telephone key systems • Ringer equivalence number: 0.3B. The ringer equivalence number (REN) is useful to determine the quantity of devices which you may connect to your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your number is called. In most areas, but not all, the sum of the RENs of all devices connected to Radio Frequency Interference Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference. This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory. UL Requirement: If wiring from any telephone exits the building or is subject to lightning or other electrical surges, then secondary protection is required. Secondary protection is also required on DID, OPS, and Tie lines. (Additional information is provided in this manual.) ® Important Notice — Music-On-Hold In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license. CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1 Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION! Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.2 Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminal on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the Devices does not exceed 5. Publication Information © Copyright 2004 Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Digital Solutions Division, reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information publication for any reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of this document. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Digital Solutions Division Further, Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., Digital Solutions Division, also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such changes in equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may warrant. UL All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without express written permission of the publisher of this material. Strata and SmartMedia are registered trademarks of Toshiba Corporation. Stratagy is a registered trademark of Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their respective owners. CTX-MA-IM/MT-VE Version E, June 2004 TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC. (“TAIS”) Digital Solutions Division License Agreement IMPORTANT: THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (“YOU”) AND TAIS. CAREFULLY READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. USE OF ANY SOFTWARE OR ANY RELATED INFORMATION (COLLECTIVELY, “SOFTWARE”) INSTALLED ON OR SHIPPED WITH A TAIS DIGITAL SOLUTIONS PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU BY TAIS IN WHATEVER FORM OR MEDIA, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS, UNLESS SEPARATE TERMS ARE PROVIDED BY THE SOFTWARE SUPPLIER. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO THE LOCATION FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE RETURN POLICIES. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY TAIS, THIS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED FOR DISTRIBUTION ONLY TO END-USERS PURSUANT TO THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. 1. License Grant. The Software is not sold; it is licensed upon payment of applicable charges. TAIS grants to you a personal, non-transferable and non-exclusive right to use the copy of the Software provided under this License Agreement. You agree you will not copy the Software except as necessary to use it on one TAIS system at a time at one location. Modifying, translating, renting, copying, distributing, transferring or assigning all or part of the Software, or any rights granted hereunder, to any other persons and removing any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the Software is strictly prohibited; You agree violation of such restrictions will cause irreparable harm to TAIS and provide grounds for injunctive relief, without notice, against You or any other person in possession of the Software. You and any other person whose possession of the software violates this License Agreement shall promptly surrender possession of the Software to TAIS, upon demand. Furthermore, you hereby agree not to create derivative works based on the Software. TAIS reserves the right to terminate this license and to immediately repossess the software in the event that You or any other person violates this License Agreement. 2. Intellectual Property. You acknowledge that no title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you. You further acknowledge that title and full ownership rights to the Software will remain the exclusive property of TAIS and/or its suppliers, and you will not acquire any rights to the Software, except the license expressly set forth above. You will not remove or change any proprietary notices contained in or on the Software. The Software is protected under US patent, copyright, trade secret, and/or other proprietary laws, as well as international treaties. Any transfer, use, or copying of the software in violation of the License Agreement constitutes copyright infringement. You are hereby on notice that any transfer, use, or copying of the Software in violation of this License Agreement constitutes a willful infringement of copyright. 3. No Reverse Engineering. You agree that you will not attempt, and if you employ employees or engage contractors, you will use your best efforts to prevent your employees and contractors from attempting to reverse compile, reverse engineer, modify, translate or disassemble the Software in whole or in part. Any failure to comply with the above or any other terms and conditions contained herein will result in the automatic termination of this license and the reversion of the rights granted hereunder back to TAIS. 4. Limited Warranty. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TAIS AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTY OF NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, THE WARRANTY OF YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE, AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. NEITHER TAIS NOR ITS SUPPLIERS WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. HOWEVER, TAIS WARRANTS THAT ANY MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS FURNISHED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF DELIVERY TO YOU. 5. Limitation Of Liability. TAIS’ ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE AT TAIS’ OPTION REPLACEMENT OF THE MEDIA OR REFUND OF THE PRICE PAID. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION/DATA, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL TAIS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM BY A THIRD PARTY. 6. State/Jurisdiction Laws. SOME STATES/JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY MAY LAST, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO STATE/JURISDICTION. 7. Export Laws. This License Agreement involves products and/or technical data that may be controlled under the United States Export Administration Regulations and may be subject to the approval of the United States Department of Commerce prior to export. Any export, directly or indirectly, in contravention of the United States Export Administration Regulations, or any other applicable law, regulation or order, is prohibited. 8. Governing Law. This License Agreement will be governed by the laws of the State of California, United States of America, excluding its conflict of law provisions. 9. United States Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government, its agencies and/or instrumentalities is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (October 1988) or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. 10. Severability. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be affected or impaired. 11. No Waiver. No waiver of any breach of any provision of this License Agreement shall constitute a waiver of any prior, concurrent or subsequent breach of the same or any other provisions hereof, and no waiver shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of the waiving party. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TAIS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Digital Solutions Division 9740 Irvine Boulevard Irvine, California 92618-1697 United States of America 5932 DSD 060204 Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc. Digital Solutions Division Limited Warranty Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc., (“TAIS”) warrants that this telephone equipment (except for fuses, lamps, and other consumables) will, upon delivery by TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer to a retail customer in new condition, be free from defects in material and workmanship for twenty-four (24) months after delivery. This warranty is void (a) if the equipment is used under other than normal use and maintenance conditions, (b) if the equipment is modified or altered, unless the modification or alteration is expressly authorized by TAIS, (c) if the equipment is subject to abuse, neglect, lightning, electrical fault, or accident, (d) if the equipment is repaired by someone other than TAIS or an authorized TAIS dealer, (e) if the equipment’s serial number is defaced or missing, or (f) if the equipment is installed or used in combination or in assembly with products not supplied by TAIS and which are not compatible or are of inferior quality, design, or performance. The sole obligation of TAIS or Toshiba Corporation under this warranty, or under any other legal obligation with respect to the equipment, is the repair or replacement by TAIS or its authorized dealer of such defective or missing parts as are causing the malfunction with new or refurbished parts (at their option). If TAIS or one of its authorized dealers does not replace or repair such parts, the retail customer’s sole remedy will be a refund of the price charged by TAIS to its dealers for such parts as are proven to be defective, and which are returned to TAIS through one of its authorized dealers within the warranty period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Under no circumstances will the retail customer or any user or dealer or other person be entitled to any direct, special, indirect, consequential, or exemplary damages, for breach of contract, tort, or otherwise. Under no circumstances will any such person be entitled to any sum greater than the purchase price paid for the item of equipment that is malfunctioning. To obtain service under this warranty, the retail customer must bring the malfunction of the machine to the attention of one of TAIS’ authorized dealers within the twenty-four (24) month period and no later than thirty (30) days after such malfunction, whichever first occurs. Failure to bring the malfunction to the attention of an authorized TAIS dealer within the prescribed time results in the customer being not entitled to warranty service. THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES FROM EITHER TOSHIBA AMERICA INFORMATION SYSTEMS, INC., OR TOSHIBA CORPORATION WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE FACE OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND FITNESS FOR USE, ARE EXCLUDED. No TAIS dealer and no person other than an officer of TAIS may extend or modify this warranty. No such modification or extension is effective unless it is in writing and signed by the vice president and general manager, Digital Solutions Division. Contents Introduction Organization ........................................................................................................................................xiii Conventions ......................................................................................................................................... xiv Related Documents/Media ................................................................................................................... xv General Description ....................................................................................................................... xv Programming Manual .................................................................................................................... xv User Guides ................................................................................................................................... xv Quick Reference Guides ................................................................................................................ xv CD-ROMs ...................................................................................................................................... xv Chapter 1 – CTX28 Installation Inspection ............................................................................................................................................1-1 Packaging and Storage ........................................................................................................................1-1 CTX28 FCC/ACTA Registration Numbers ........................................................................................1-1 Site Requirements ...............................................................................................................................1-2 Input Power ...................................................................................................................................1-2 Clearance and Location ................................................................................................................1-2 AC Power and Grounding Requirements ............................................................................................1-4 AC Power Ground Test ................................................................................................................1-5 Installing the CTX28 Cabinet .............................................................................................................1-6 Step 1: Mount the Cabinet on the Wall .........................................................................................1-6 PCB Installation ............................................................................................................................1-8 Step 2: Set Jumpers on the GMAU1A (Motherboard) ...............................................................1-10 Step 3: Install the GVMU1A Voice Mail PCB (optional) ..........................................................1-12 Step 4: Install the GCTU1A (Processor) ....................................................................................1-14 Step 5: Install the GCDU1A (DKT and Loop Start Interface) ...................................................1-16 Step 6: Install the GSTU1A ........................................................................................................1-17 Step 7: Install the GETS1A ........................................................................................................1-17 Step 8: Install the BSIS1A (optional) .........................................................................................1-18 Step 9: Install the HPFB-6 (Reserve Power Battery/Charger) ...................................................1-18 Step 10: Install Wiring ................................................................................................................1-19 Digital Telephone Connection ..........................................................................................................1-21 Loop Limits ......................................................................................................................................1-22 CTX28 Secondary Protection ...........................................................................................................1-23 MDF Wiring ......................................................................................................................................1-24 GVMU Administration PC Connections ..........................................................................................1-25 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 i Contents Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Overview .................................................................................................2-1 CTX100-S and CTX100 Processors ...................................................................................................2-2 CPU/Memory ................................................................................................................................2-2 Large Scale Integrated (LSI) Circuits ...........................................................................................2-2 Memory Protection Battery ..........................................................................................................2-2 Relay Control Interface ................................................................................................................2-2 External Page Interface .................................................................................................................2-2 Music-on-hold/Background Music Interface ................................................................................2-3 SmartMedia Memory ...................................................................................................................2-3 CTX100 Processor Optional Subassemblies ................................................................................2-3 CTX100 Cabinet Slots ........................................................................................................................2-3 Base Cabinet .................................................................................................................................2-3 Expansion Cabinets ......................................................................................................................2-3 CTX100-S/CTX100 License Control .................................................................................................2-4 Licensed Software Options ...........................................................................................................2-4 Strata CTX670 Overview ....................................................................................................................2-5 CTX670 Processor PCBs ....................................................................................................................2-5 CPU/Memory ................................................................................................................................2-5 Large-scale Integrated (LSI) circuits ............................................................................................2-6 Memory Protection Battery ..........................................................................................................2-6 Music-on-hold/Background Music Interface ................................................................................2-6 SmartMedia Memory ....................................................................................................................2-6 Network Interface .........................................................................................................................2-6 CTX670 Processor PCB Subassemblies .......................................................................................2-7 CTX670 License Control ....................................................................................................................2-7 Licensed Software Options ...........................................................................................................2-7 CTX670 Cabinet Slots ........................................................................................................................2-8 Base Cabinet .................................................................................................................................2-8 Expansion Cabinets ......................................................................................................................2-8 CTX670 Remote Expansion Cabinet ..................................................................................................2-9 System Capacities ...............................................................................................................................2-9 Universal Slot PCBs ..........................................................................................................................2-14 Station, Line and Option PCBs ...................................................................................................2-14 Functional Block Diagrams ...............................................................................................................2-18 Worksheet Description ......................................................................................................................2-22 CTX670 Remote Cabinet Configuration Considerations .................................................................2-22 Component Worksheets ..............................................................................................................2-22 Worksheet 1: Toshiba DKT and IP Telephones ..............................................................................2-23 Worksheet 2: Standard Telephone, Stratagy DK, IVP8 ...................................................................2-24 Worksheet 3: CO Line ....................................................................................................................2-25 Worksheet 4: Page/MOH/Control Relay ..........................................................................................2-26 Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots ......................................................................................2-26 CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples ............................................................................2-28 Digital Telephones and Loop Start Lines With or Without Caller ID ........................................2-28 Analog Loop Start Lines with or without Caller ID ...................................................................2-29 CTX100 Base Only: Digital Telephones and T1 and/or PRI lines .............................................2-32 CTX100 Base & Expansion: Digital Telephones and T1 and/or PRI lines ................................2-33 CTX100 Base Only: Digital Telephones and Analog Tie, DID, and/or Ground Start Lines .....2-34 ii Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Contents Chapter 3 – Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation CTX100: Analog Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines ..............................................................2-35 Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots ......................................................................................2-37 PCB Placement Guidelines .........................................................................................................2-38 Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check .....................................................................................2-42 Telephone/Device Power Factors ...............................................................................................2-44 Cabinet Power Factor Check .............................................................................................................2-45 CTX100 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-45 CTX670 ......................................................................................................................................2-46 Worksheet 8 – CTX Primary AC and Reserve Power ......................................................................2-47 CTX100 AC Power Considerations ...........................................................................................2-47 CTX670 AC Power Considerations ...........................................................................................2-47 Reserve Power (CTX100 and CTX670) ...........................................................................................2-48 Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware ......................................................................................2-49 CTX670 Cabinet AC Power Component Requirements for Wall Mounted Systems ................2-52 Worksheet 9 – Software Licenses .....................................................................................................2-54 Hardware Compatibility ....................................................................................................................2-55 Chapter 3 – Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Inspection ............................................................................................................................................3-1 Packaging and Storage ........................................................................................................................3-1 Site Requirements ...............................................................................................................................3-1 Input Power ...................................................................................................................................3-1 Cabinet Size and Weight ..............................................................................................................3-2 Clearance and Location ................................................................................................................3-2 Environmental Considerations .....................................................................................................3-4 AC Power and Grounding Requirements ............................................................................................3-4 Power Considerations ...................................................................................................................3-4 AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test .......................................................................................3-5 Alternate or Additional Ground ....................................................................................................3-5 Installing the CTX100 Cabinet ...........................................................................................................3-6 Step 1: Remove Cabinet Covers ...................................................................................................3-6 Step 2: Remove the Back Cover from the Cabinet(s) ..................................................................3-6 Step 3: Check the Base/Expansion Power Supply Jumper Plug ..................................................3-7 Step 4: Mount the Base Cabinet ...................................................................................................3-7 Step 5: Mount the Expansion Cabinet (if required) ......................................................................3-9 Step 6: Install Reserve Power .....................................................................................................3-10 Step 7: Check Power Supply Circuit Breakers and Fuses ..........................................................3-15 Step 8: Set Jumpers and Install Option PCBs onto the ACTU ...................................................3-19 Step 9: Install the Main Processor (ACTU) PCB .......................................................................3-21 Step 10: Install Other PCBs into the Cabinet(s) .........................................................................3-22 Step 11: Attach and Route PCB Cables ......................................................................................3-23 Chapter 4 – Strata CTX670 Installation Inspection ............................................................................................................................................4-1 Packaging and Storage ........................................................................................................................4-1 Site Requirements ...............................................................................................................................4-2 Input Power ...................................................................................................................................4-2 Clearance and Location ................................................................................................................4-2 Power Considerations ..........................................................................................................................4-4 Reserve Power ..............................................................................................................................4-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 iii Contents Chapter 5 – Rack Mount Cabinets FCC Registration Information .............................................................................................................4-5 Cabinet Installation Considerations ....................................................................................................4-6 Recommended Installation Sequence ...........................................................................................4-6 Step 1: Install Power Supply ...............................................................................................................4-6 Check the -24 Volt Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................4-7 Check the Power Factor Indicator and Reset Button ....................................................................4-8 Power Supply (BPSU672) Removal .............................................................................................4-8 Power Supply Replacement ..........................................................................................................4-8 Step 2: Mount Cabinets......................................................................................................................4-10 Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet .....................................................................................4-10 Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets ...........................................................................................4-11 Step 3: Install Data Cables .................................................................................................................4-16 Step 4: Ground the System.................................................................................................................4-18 Step 5: Install AC Power Components...............................................................................................4-20 AC Power Requirements ............................................................................................................4-20 Cabinet AC Power Component Description ...............................................................................4-21 AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview ........................................................................4-22 Cabinet AC Power Considerations .............................................................................................4-24 Cabinet AC Power Component Requirements for Wall Mounted Systems ...............................4-24 Step 6: Install Reserve Power ............................................................................................................4-29 Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables ............................................................................4-30 Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) ............................................................4-30 Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) ........................................................4-31 Cabinet Floor Mounting .............................................................................................................4-33 Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) ....................................4-42 Step 7: Install Processor and Universal PCBs....................................................................................4-43 PCB Installation Considerations .................................................................................................4-43 PCB Option Considerations ........................................................................................................4-43 BCTU1A/BEXU1A Installation .................................................................................................4-44 BECU/BBCU Installation ...........................................................................................................4-50 Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit .......................................................................................................4-55 Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions ...................................................................................4-56 Status Indicators .........................................................................................................................4-60 Monitor Port Communication Parameters ..................................................................................4-61 Monitor Port Pin Assignments ...................................................................................................4-61 Chapter 5 – Rack Mount Cabinets Basic Specifications ............................................................................................................................5-1 Inspection ............................................................................................................................................5-2 Site Requirements ...............................................................................................................................5-2 Space .............................................................................................................................................5-2 Ventilation ....................................................................................................................................5-2 Input Power ...................................................................................................................................5-3 Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................................5-3 Location ........................................................................................................................................5-3 Power Considerations ..........................................................................................................................5-3 Reserve Power ..............................................................................................................................5-3 FCC Registration Information .............................................................................................................5-4 Step 1: Prior to Cabinet Installation ....................................................................................................5-5 Step 1A:Assemble Rack ............................................................................................................... 5-5 iv Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Contents Chapter 6 – PCB Installation Step 1B:Move Flange Position (Optional) ................................................................................... 5-5 Step 2: Install First Cabinet..................................................................................................................5-5 Step 2A:Take Off Front and Back Covers.................................................................................... 5-6 Step 2B:Take Off Base of Cabinet ............................................................................................... 5-6 Step 2C:Attach Cabinet to Rack................................................................................................... 5-6 Step 2D:Reattach Cabinet to Base................................................................................................ 5-8 Step 3: Install Remaining Cabinet(s) ...................................................................................................5-8 Step 3A:Take Off Front and Back Covers.................................................................................... 5-8 Step 3B:Install and Attach Cabinet(s) to Rack............................................................................. 5-8 Step 4: Attach Amphenol Cable...........................................................................................................5-9 Step 5: Attach the AC Cable ..............................................................................................................5-10 Step 6: Connect Data and Ground Cables..........................................................................................5-11 Step 7: Verify Power Supply Settings................................................................................................5-12 Step 8: Fill Out Slot Assignments......................................................................................................5-12 Step 9: Attach Mesh Tie (B50MT) ....................................................................................................5-12 Step 10: Install Power Strip (BRPSB120A).......................................................................................5-13 Step 11: (Optional) Install Power Strip (BRPSB240A).....................................................................5-13 Step 12: (Optional) Install Reserve Power.........................................................................................5-14 Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables ............................................................................5-15 Install Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets ........................................................................5-16 Install Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets ....................................................................5-16 Install Reserve Power Battery Distribution Box (if required) ....................................................5-17 Step 13: Ground the System...............................................................................................................5-18 Step 14: Install Processor and Universal PCBs..................................................................................5-18 Step 15: Attach Front and Back Covers.............................................................................................5-18 Wiring for 7 Cabinet Configuration ..................................................................................................5-20 Primary Power Cabinet Hardware ....................................................................................................5-24 AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview ..............................................................................5-25 Cabinet AC Power Considerations ....................................................................................................5-27 AC Power Component Requirements ...............................................................................................5-27 Power Supply Unit (BRPSU672A) ...................................................................................................5-28 Check the Power Factor Indicator and Reset Button ..................................................................5-28 Check the -24 Volt Circuit Breakers ..........................................................................................5-29 Changing Plug for Power Strip BRPSB240A ...................................................................................5-30 Step 1: Remove NEMA 6-20P from Power Strip........................................................................5-30 Step 2: Attach NEMA L6-20P Plug to Power Strip ...................................................................5-31 AC Cabling ........................................................................................................................................5-33 Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit .......................................................................................................5-35 Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions ...................................................................................5-35 Chapter 6 – PCB Installation PCB Chapter Layout ...........................................................................................................................6-1 PCB Hardware/Software Options .......................................................................................................6-2 CTX100 ACTU Processor PCBs ........................................................................................................6-2 CTX670 BCTU/BEXU Processor PCBs ............................................................................................6-2 CTX670 BECU/BBCU Processor PCBs ............................................................................................6-2 PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations ..................................................................................6-2 ADKU – Digital Telephone Interface Unit .........................................................................................6-3 ADKU Hardware Options ............................................................................................................6-3 ADKU Installation ........................................................................................................................6-3 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 v Contents Chapter 7 – ISDN Interfaces ASTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit (CTX100 only) .............................................................6-4 ASTU Installation .........................................................................................................................6-4 ASTU1 Wiring .............................................................................................................................6-4 BDKU/BDKS – Digital Telephone Interface Unit .............................................................................6-7 BDKU Hardware Options ............................................................................................................6-7 BDKS ............................................................................................................................................6-7 BDKU Installation ........................................................................................................................6-7 BIOU – Option Interface Units ...........................................................................................................6-9 BIOU Installation .........................................................................................................................6-9 BSTU/RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit ..........................................................................6-11 R48S -48 Volt Supply Subassembly Installation .......................................................................6-11 BSTU/RSTU Installation ............................................................................................................6-11 BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit ...................................................................................6-15 BVPU Configuration ..................................................................................................................6-15 BVPU Installation .......................................................................................................................6-15 BWDKU1A – Digital Telephone Interface Unit ..............................................................................6-17 BWDKU1A Installation .............................................................................................................6-17 Programming .....................................................................................................................................6-18 PDKU2 – Digital Telephone Interface Unit ......................................................................................6-19 PDKU2 Hardware Options .........................................................................................................6-19 PDKU2 Installation ....................................................................................................................6-19 RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS – Caller ID Interface .....................................................................................6-20 RCIS PCB ...................................................................................................................................6-20 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation .................................................................................6-20 RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit .........................................6-22 RCOS Installation (Internal Option) ...........................................................................................6-22 RCOU Installation ......................................................................................................................6-25 RDDU – Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit ........................................................................6-28 RDDU Installation ......................................................................................................................6-28 RDSU – Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit ........................................................................6-30 Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option) .....................................................................6-30 Installing RSTS (Internal Option) ..............................................................................................6-30 RDSU Installation .......................................................................................................................6-30 RDTU2 – T1 Interface Unit ..............................................................................................................6-32 REMU2A – Tie Line Unit .................................................................................................................6-32 REMU2A and REMU Installation .............................................................................................6-32 PEMU Installation ......................................................................................................................6-32 RGLU2 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit .....................................................................6-36 RGLU2 Installation ....................................................................................................................6-36 RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface ....................................................................6-38 RCMS Subassemblies Installation ..............................................................................................6-38 RMCU Installation .....................................................................................................................6-39 Network Requirements ......................................................................................................................6-42 Chapter 7 – ISDN Interfaces PRI Overview ......................................................................................................................................7-1 BRI S/T Overview ...............................................................................................................................7-1 BRI U Overview .................................................................................................................................7-1 Strata CTX ISDN Reference Model .............................................................................................7-2 vi Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Contents Chapter 8 – T1 BPTU/RPTU Overview ......................................................................................................................7-3 CSU Requirements .......................................................................................................................7-3 Slot Assignments ..........................................................................................................................7-3 BPTU Interface Unit ...........................................................................................................................7-4 BPTU Installation ................................................................................................................................7-4 Power Factor .................................................................................................................................7-4 BPTU Self Test .............................................................................................................................7-6 BPTU Cable Length Equalizer Switches .....................................................................................7-6 BPTU Loop Back Jumper Plugs ...................................................................................................7-7 BPTU Front Panel Indicators .......................................................................................................7-7 Ferrite Core ...................................................................................................................................7-7 BPTU Cabling ..............................................................................................................................7-7 RPTU Interface Unit ...........................................................................................................................7-8 RPTU Installation ................................................................................................................................7-8 BPTU and RPTU Cabling .................................................................................................................7-11 RBSU/RBSS Interface Units .............................................................................................................7-14 Overview ....................................................................................................................................7-14 RBSU Connection Options .........................................................................................................7-14 Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information ......................................................................................7-15 PS-1 Backup Power Option ........................................................................................................7-16 RBSU/RBSS Installation ............................................................................................................7-16 Modular Jack Pin Configurations ...............................................................................................7-19 RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines ..................................................................................7-21 Connecting RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) ........................................................................7-23 Connecting RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) ..............................................................7-24 RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations ..................................................................................7-26 RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit .............................................................................................................7-27 RBUU Installation ......................................................................................................................7-27 RBUU/RBUS Wiring Guidelines ...............................................................................................7-30 ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................7-33 BRI-U, LT Interface Terminal Loop Back Test .........................................................................7-33 Loop-back Test ...........................................................................................................................7-34 Timing and Synchronization .............................................................................................................7-35 PRI/BRI Call Monitoring ..................................................................................................................7-37 Call Monitor Output for ISDN ..........................................................................................................7-37 BRI Call Monitor ........................................................................................................................7-40 Chapter 8 – T1 Program Channels ...............................................................................................................................8-1 Select Slot Assignments ......................................................................................................................8-1 RDTU3 - T1 Interface Unit .................................................................................................................8-2 RDTU Installation ...............................................................................................................................8-4 Power Factor .................................................................................................................................8-4 RDTU3 Cabling ............................................................................................................................8-5 RDTU3 Self Test and CSU Test Switch ......................................................................................8-8 RDTU3 Equalizer Switches ..........................................................................................................8-8 RDTU3 Loop Back Jumper Plugs ................................................................................................8-8 RDTU3 Front Panel Indicators .....................................................................................................8-8 Call Data Monitor Jack .................................................................................................................8-9 Loop Back ....................................................................................................................................8-9 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 vii Contents Chapter 9 – IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP RDTU3A Call Data Information .......................................................................................................8-10 Commands ..................................................................................................................................8-10 Indicators ....................................................................................................................................8-11 RDTU1 & 2 - T1 Interface Unit ........................................................................................................8-15 RDTU1 and 2 Cable Installation ................................................................................................8-18 CSU Installation ................................................................................................................................8-19 Loop Back Testing ............................................................................................................................8-19 RDTU Self Test ..........................................................................................................................8-19 Network/CSU T1 Span Test .......................................................................................................8-20 Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test ................................................................................................8-20 Test RDTU Lines ........................................................................................................................8-21 Chapter 9 – IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines ..................................................................................................................9-1 Client Firewall Considerations .....................................................................................................9-2 Dos and Don’ts for Setting Up the System ...................................................................................9-2 Step 1: Perform a LAN Voice Readiness Assessment ........................................................................9-3 Methods of Estimating Bandwidth Requirements ........................................................................9-3 Step 2: Install BIPU-M2A ...................................................................................................................9-6 Connect BIPU-M2A to LAN or VPN Server ...............................................................................9-6 BIPU-M2A Interface Unit ............................................................................................................9-7 Step 3: Install IP Telephones ...............................................................................................................9-8 IPT Operation Notes .....................................................................................................................9-9 IPT Telephone Options ...............................................................................................................9-10 IP Telephone Add-on Modules ...................................................................................................9-10 Tilt Stand Installation .................................................................................................................9-10 External Speaker Unit (HESB) Option .......................................................................................9-10 Handset/Headset Option Straps ..................................................................................................9-11 Step 4: Connect IPTs to Network ......................................................................................................9-13 IPT Connections .........................................................................................................................9-13 IPT Anywhere .............................................................................................................................9-13 Security Requirements ................................................................................................................9-15 Addressing ..................................................................................................................................9-16 Power over LAN ...............................................................................................................................9-16 Installing and Operating the SoftIPT ................................................................................................9-18 Hardware/Software Required .....................................................................................................9-19 Before You Begin .......................................................................................................................9-19 Step 1: Install SoftIPT ................................................................................................................9-20 Upgrading the SoftIPT ................................................................................................................9-21 Step 2: Start the SoftIPT .............................................................................................................9-21 Making a Call .............................................................................................................................9-22 Switching a Call to Your Headset ..............................................................................................9-22 Creating a Directory ...................................................................................................................9-23 Using the Directory to Call .........................................................................................................9-23 Labeling Feature Buttons ............................................................................................................9-24 Using the Call Log ......................................................................................................................9-25 Uninstalling the SoftIPT .............................................................................................................9-25 Application Notes for Wireless 802.11 Networks ......................................................................9-26 Tested Platforms .........................................................................................................................9-28 CTX IP Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................9-29 viii Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Contents Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring IP Telephone Ping Test ...............................................................................................................9-29 LCD Network Failure Displays ..................................................................................................9-30 Collect CTX Trace Data on CTX SmartMedia Card .................................................................9-30 Collect BIPU Logs ......................................................................................................................9-30 Check Log0.log/Log0.err for Error Message Output .................................................................9-31 Check Whether Message Associated Warnings/Errors Were Printed ........................................9-31 Verify CTX/BIPU/IPT Hardware, Software and Firmware Version .........................................9-32 CTX System Configuration ........................................................................................................9-32 Network Information ..................................................................................................................9-33 Capture Points .............................................................................................................................9-35 How To Capture Packets ............................................................................................................9-35 Requirement for Capture Tool ....................................................................................................9-36 IP Troubleshooting Resolutions .................................................................................................9-36 Private Networking Over Internet Protocol ......................................................................................9-40 BIPU-Q1A - Strata Net QSIG over IP Interface Unit ................................................................9-40 Strata Net QSIG Over IP and IPT Bandwidth Requirements .....................................................9-41 BIPU-Q1A Installation ...............................................................................................................9-42 Connect BIPU-Q1A to LAN, Server or Router ..........................................................................9-42 Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring Station Loop Lengths ........................................................................................................................10-2 Station Wiring Diagrams ...................................................................................................................10-4 ADKU and BDKU/BDKS Digital Station Wiring .....................................................................10-5 PDKU Digital Station Wiring .....................................................................................................10-8 Digital Telephone DSS and DDCB External Power Connection ...............................................10-9 RDSU Wiring ...........................................................................................................................10-11 RSTU or PSTU Analog Devices Wiring ..................................................................................10-13 Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs ..............................................................10-15 CO Line Wiring Diagrams .......................................................................................................10-17 RGLU2, RCOU or PCOU Wiring ............................................................................................10-17 RCOU/RCOS Wiring ...............................................................................................................10-19 RMCU/RMCS Wiring Diagram ...............................................................................................10-20 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Wiring .....................................................................................10-21 DID and Tie Line Wiring .........................................................................................................10-22 PEMU Wiring ...........................................................................................................................10-24 Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagram ...........................................................................................10-26 Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus 3000-series Digital Telephones Telephone .......................................................................................11-1 3000-series Telephone Installation ...................................................................................................11-2 Digital Telephone System Connection .......................................................................................11-2 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs ................................................................................................11-3 Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (BVSU) ...............................................11-5 Telephone Headset (BHEU) Upgrade ........................................................................................11-7 Telephone Option Straps ............................................................................................................11-9 TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades for 3000-series Telephones (BPCI) ........11-11 Install TAPI Service Provider .........................................................................................................11-12 Add/Edit TSP Configuration Information .......................................................................................11-13 Test/Use TAPI Service Provider .....................................................................................................11-13 IPT Telephone .................................................................................................................................11-13 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ix Contents Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus 3000-series, IPT1020-SD Button Layouts ......................................................................................11-14 Telephone Settings ..........................................................................................................................11-17 3000-Series/IPT Telephones .....................................................................................................11-17 3000-Series Telephones ............................................................................................................11-19 Digital Add-on Module Installation ................................................................................................11-21 Tilt Stands .......................................................................................................................................11-23 Tilt Stand Installation with Add-on Modules ...........................................................................11-24 Tilt Stand for DKT/IPT + Two ADMs .....................................................................................11-26 Telephone Wall Mounting ..............................................................................................................11-27 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection .........................................................11-29 DSS Console Connections ........................................................................................................11-29 Standard Telephones .......................................................................................................................11-29 Cordless Digital Telephones ...........................................................................................................11-30 Cordless Telephone Installation ......................................................................................................11-31 Step 1: Review Safety Instructions............................................................................................11-31 Step 2: Select Location .............................................................................................................11-33 Step 3: Place DKT3000-series Telephones into 2000-Mode ...................................................11-33 Step 4: Connect Telephone Cables ...........................................................................................11-34 Step 5: Connect and Apply Power ............................................................................................11-35 Step 6: Wall Installation (Optional) ..........................................................................................11-36 Step 7: Raise the Base Unit Antenna ........................................................................................11-39 Step 8: Install Handset Battery Pack ........................................................................................11-39 Step 9: Charge Batteries for First Time ....................................................................................11-39 Step 10: Install Headset (Optional) ..........................................................................................11-40 Step 11: Attach Belt Clip (Optional) ........................................................................................11-40 Cordless Telephone Troubleshooting and Specifications ...............................................................11-41 Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................................11-41 Low Battery ..............................................................................................................................11-42 Cleaning Charging Unit Contacts .............................................................................................11-42 Charging Spare Battery Packs (DKT2204-CT only) ................................................................11-43 Simultaneous Conversation Channels .............................................................................................11-43 DKT2204-CT ............................................................................................................................11-43 DKT2304-CT ............................................................................................................................11-43 Range and Performance ..................................................................................................................11-44 Radio Interference ...........................................................................................................................11-44 Telephone Line Problems ...............................................................................................................11-44 Privacy .............................................................................................................................................11-44 Specifications ..................................................................................................................................11-45 2000-series Telephones ...................................................................................................................11-46 2000-series Telephone Option PCBs ........................................................................................11-46 Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU/BVSU) .................................11-46 HHEU Installation ....................................................................................................................11-48 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps ...............................................................................................11-50 Beep Strap .................................................................................................................................11-50 Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) ......................................11-50 Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option .................................11-51 External Power Straps ..............................................................................................................11-51 DIP Switches ............................................................................................................................11-52 DKT2020-FDSP Full-Duplex Speakerphone with External Microphone ................................11-53 Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT2001 only) ......................................................................11-57 x Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Contents Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces ...............................................................................................12-1 Network Interface Connections ..................................................................................................12-2 Music-On-Hold/Background Music Interfaces .................................................................................12-8 External Page with BIOU Interface ................................................................................................12-10 Control Relays with BIOU Interface ........................................................................................12-13 Door Phone/Door Lock with DDCB Interface ................................................................................12-14 DDCB and MDFB Cabling ......................................................................................................12-14 DDCB Wall Mounting ..............................................................................................................12-14 Door Phone Wire Connections .................................................................................................12-14 Calling from a Door Phone .......................................................................................................12-15 Calling a Door Phone ...............................................................................................................12-15 Door Lock Control ....................................................................................................................12-15 Door Phone/Lock Programming ...............................................................................................12-15 MDFB Wall Mounting .............................................................................................................12-15 External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options ..........................................................................................12-17 Telephone External Ringer .......................................................................................................12-17 Telephone (BHEU) to External Speaker (HESB) Cable Connection .......................................12-18 Amplified Page Speaker Option ...............................................................................................12-21 Talkback Amplified Page Speaker with Talkback Option .......................................................12-23 HESB Wall Mounting ..............................................................................................................12-24 Power Failure Options .....................................................................................................................12-25 Reserve Power ..........................................................................................................................12-25 Power Failure Transfer Unit .....................................................................................................12-25 Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation .........................................................12-26 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ...................................................................................12-27 SMDR Record Types ................................................................................................................12-27 Index .......................................................................................................................................................IN-1 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 xi Contents Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation xii Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Introduction This manual provides detailed step-by-step instructions for installing and maintaining the Strata CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670 digital business telephone systems. It is intended for qualified service technicians and system programmers. Use this manual in conjunction with the Strata CTX Programming Manual which covers the programs related to the Strata CTX28, CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670 systems discussed in this book. Organization This manual is organized into these sections/chapters for your convenience: • Chapter 1 – Strata CTX Configuration explains how to configure a Strata CTX28, CTX100S, CTX100 or CTX670 system. It also provides worksheets for determining hardware and station equipment placement and requirements. • Chapter 2 – CTX28 Installation covers site requirements, input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements, and grounding requirements for the CTX28. • Chapter 3 – CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation covers site requirements and Base and Expansion cabinet installation for the CTX100-S and CTX100. Also includes input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements, and grounding requirements. • Chapter 4 – Strata CTX670 Installation covers site requirements and Base and Expansion cabinet installation for the Strata CTX670. Explains how to remove and replace cabinets on installed systems. Also includes input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements, and grounding requirements. • Chapter 5 – Rack Mount Installation provides installation instructions for the rackmountable Strata CTX670 Base and Expansion cabinets. • Chapter 6 – PCB Installation provides procedures for Strata CTX system Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) for installation into universal slots. Includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB. • Chapter 7 – ISDN Interfaces contains an overview of the ISDN hardware with specific information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). It includes instructions for installation, hardware requirements, wiring requirements, and some programming considerations. • Chapter 8 – T1 provides information on T1/DS-1 interfacing for the Strata CTX. • Chapter 9 – IPT provides installation and hardware information for the IP telephone interface PCB (BIPU-Mxx), the IP telephone (IPT1020-SD) and the add-on module (DADM3120). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 xiii Introduction Conventions • Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies to the Strata CTX systems. • Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata CTX systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles, PC and conventional attendant consoles, and door phones also appear. • Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata CTX systems. The instructions include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming considerations. • Index Conventions Conventions Description Note Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to specific items. Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information. CAUTION! Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely. WARNING! Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death. [DN] Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or intercom number. [PDN] Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number for the telephone). [SDN] Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on another telephone is considered an SDN. [PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN). Arial Bold Courier xiv Represents telephone buttons. Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display. “Type” Indicates entry of a string of text. “Press” Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press Enter. Plus (+) Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry. Example: # + 5. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Introduction Related Documents/Media Conventions Tilde (~) Description Means “through.” Example: 350 ~ 640 Hz frequency range. ³ Denotes the step in a one-step procedure. ³ Denotes a procedure. Start > Settings > Printers See Figure 10 Denotes a progression of buttons and/or menu options on the screen you should select. Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM or FYI Internet download), cross-references appear in blue hypertext. Related Documents/Media Note Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM or in print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on the back of the document’s title page. General Description • Strata CTX General Description Programming Manual • Strata CTX Programming Manual User Guides • Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone • Strata CTX DKT3001/2001 Digital Single Line Telephone • Strata CTX Standard Telephone • Strata CTX DKT2204-CT/DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephone Quick Reference Guides • Strata CTX DKT/IPT Telephone CD-ROMs • Strata CTX WinAdmin Application Software and CTX/DK/Partner Products Documentation Library • Strata CTX Call Center Solutions Application Software and Documentation Library (includes Strata CTX ACD software and documentation, Net Server software and documentation, and Voice Assistant software and documentation) • OAISYS (includes software and documentation for OAISYS Chat, Call Router, and Net Phone) For authorized users, Internet site FYI (http://fyi.tsd.toshiba.com) contains all current Strata CTX documentation and enables you to view, print and download current publications. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 xv Introduction Related Documents/Media xvi Strata CTX I&M 06/04 1 CTX28 Installation CTX28 Installation This chapter explains how to install the Strata CTX28 system. It includes information on site requirements, wiring diagrams, and step-by-step instructions on how to install the unit(s), the ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (battery backup) cabling, and Printed Circuit Board (PCB) cabling. Inspection 1. When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. 2. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. 3. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Packaging and Storage CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges. ³ When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet. PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. CTX28 FCC/ACTA Registration Numbers • ACTA/FCC Part 68 Registration for Key System Code (KD): CJ6KD03BDTCHS28 • ACTA/FCC Part 68 Registration for Multifunction Code (MF): CJ6MF03BDTCHS28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 1-1 CTX28 Installation Site Requirements Site Requirements This section defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the CTX28. Also included are grounding requirements. Input Power The system requires an input power source of 115VAC ± 10VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 amps. The AC outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched. (See “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on page 1-4.) This eliminates interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like, and to prevent accidental power-off. To avoid accidental power turn-off, Toshiba recommends that you do not use an On/Off wall switch on this dedicated AC circuit. For the Strata CTX28, a reserve power source (HPFB-6) may be connected to the system to serve as a power failure backup (See Step 8 on page 1-18). Clearance and Location The minimum clearance requirements for the Strata CTX28 Base cabinet is shown in Figure 1-1. Refer to Figure 1-5 on page 1-7 for CTX28 KSU mounting instructions. Top View 3.5" 3 Feet Consider the following conditions when selecting a location for the KSU(s): Wall The location must be: • Dry and clean • Well ventilated • Well illuminated • Easily accessible Front View 2" The location must not be: 12.25" 2" 2" CTX28 Base KSU • Subject to extreme heat or cold • Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants 18" • Subject to excessive vibration • Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment If reserve power (HPFB-6) is to be installed for the Strata CTX28, the batteries will require a well-ventilated location close to the CHSU28A. 1-2 7062 Figure 1-1 2" CTX28 Base KSU Clearance Requirements Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Site Requirements Table 1-1 provides a summary of the electrical and environmental characteristics. Summary of Electrical/Environmental Characteristics CTX28 Primary Power Input AC (Power Supply Specification) AC frequency Power AC input current 100~240VAC 50/60 Hz CTX28 - 100 watts maximum 1.5A maximum CTX28 Installation Table 1-1 Environmental Specifications Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature 32~104° F (0 ~40° C) 20~80% relative humidity without condensation -4~140° F (-20~60° C) Power Input DC 15V to use the factory-shipped AC adapter Power Converter DC voltage output specification -24VDC (-26.3~-28.3VDC) +5VDC (+4.5~+5.5VDC) Standard Telephone Ring Circuit (GMAU and GSTU) Ring Voltage 180V p-p square wave Ringing capability 1 REN, 1 circuit - one telephone per circuit Strata CTX I&M 06/04 1-3 CTX28 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements AC Power and Grounding Requirements The CTX28 requires a solid earth ground for proper operation. The AC power cord connects to a standard AC power outlet. The ground for the CTX28 must originate at the building’s main power distribution panel and have a solid connection to earth ground. (See Figure 1-2.) CTX28 Cabinet TB2 TB3 on GMAU P10 Wire Connector to HPFBG Battery Connector TB1 to HPFB6 FG (#10 AWG Wire) Dealer-supplied wire (#10 AWG gauge or larger to pass ground specification test) AC Adapter Cord plugs into GMAS Grounding Rod or Electrical Building Ground (Main Power Distribution Box) 7126 AC Voltage 90VAC ± 264VAC AC Current 1.5 amps max. Figure 1-2 Ground to AC Power Cord CAUTION! Lack of proper ground may cause improper operation and, in extreme cases, system failure. WARNING! Failure to provide a proper ground may be a safety hazard to service personnel or lead to confusing trouble symptoms, such as noise on the talk path including GVMU greetings and messages. In extreme cases, system failure may result because the system is not properly protected from lightning or power transients. 1-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements AC Power Ground Test WARNING! Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage. CTX28 Installation Test the “wire ground” for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the TB3 terminal (earth ground) on the GMAU and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the following earth ground test procedure. ³ To perform the earth ground test procedure 1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC. 2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC. 3. Move one of the meter probes to TB3 terminal (green wire ground). Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained. 4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe to the second voltage terminal. CAUTION! If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to TB3 wire, black wire to TB3 wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit Steps 5 and 6, and see following CAUTION! 5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a reading of 100~125VAC on the other terminal is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet. 6. Set the meter to the “OHMS/Rx1” scale. Place one probe on the TB3 ground terminal, and the other probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than one ohm. CAUTION! If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded. If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected. Table 1-2 Grounding Wiring Summary Grounding Requirement From To System connects to earth ground Earth ground TB3 on GMAU FG of HPFB-6 connect to GMAU HPFB-6 FG Screw TB1 on GMAU HPFB-6 Ground Feed TB1 on GMAU TB3 on GMAU GETS connects green ground wire to GMAU GETS ground wire TB2 on GMAU Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Description Less than 1 ohm 1-5 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Check the items shipped. • • • • • • CHSU28A cabinet GCTU1A processor PCB AC adapter Tie wrap for cable clamp Tie wrap for AC adapter Velcro strap for AC adapter cord Step 1: Mount the Cabinet on the Wall The Base cabinet is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. WARNING! To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply switch is turned Off. ³ To mount the Base KSU 1. Make sure the location for the CTX28 meets the minimum clearance requirements specified in Figure 1-1 on page 1-2. 2. Loosen the screws on the front cover and the side cover of the Base KSU, remove the covers (see Figure 1-3). Cover Screws (6) DC Power LED Base Cover Side Cover = Six cover screws to be removed before mounting KSU Model: CHSU28A Strata CTX28 Label on edge of Base KSU 7125a Figure 1-3 1-6 CTX28 Cabinet Exterior Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet CTX28 Installation 3. Place the Base KSU on the desired location on the mounting surface and mark the location of the four screw holes. See Figures 1-4 and 1-5. 4. Using a hard board between the KSU and the wall, secure the hard board to the wall first, making certain that screws are aligned with studs. See Figure 1-5. 5. Drill holes on these marks and secure screws approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the mounting surface. 6. Hang the unit from the top two screws and then secure the top screws completely into the mounting surface. 7. Finish securing the unit to the mounting surface by completely screwing the bottom two screws into the wall. 7104 Figure 1-4 Plaster Board Stud CTX28 Base KSU Interior Method 2 Hard Board (1/2 Inch Plywood) Base KSU 7114 Figure 1-5 KSU Wall Mounting 8. Ground system according to “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on page 1-4. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 1-7 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet PCB Installation Overview Instructions The following is an overview for installing the Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) into the Strata CTX28. After reading this section, proceed to the step-by-step instructions for each PCB. 1. Apply proper settings on the GMAU1A (motherboard Figure 1-7). 2. If applicable, set SW6 battery jumper to ON and install the GVMU1A Voice Mail card (Figures 1-8 and 1-9). 3. Set P601 battery jumper to ON and install the GCTU1A (processor Figures 1-6 and 1-10). 4. If applicable, install the GCDU1A (3 CO, 3 CLID and 8 DKT circuits Figure 1-11). 5. If applicable, install GSTU1A (standard telephone interface Figure 1-12). 6. If applicable, install the GETS1A 100Base-TX I/F PCB (Figure 1-13). 7. If applicable, install the BSIS1A for SMDR (Figure 1-6). 8. If applicable, install HPFB-6 battery/charger (Figure 1-14). 9. Connect wiring (Table 1-14). 10.Connect AC Adaptor to P2 of the CTX28 sub-motherboard (GMAS, Figures 1-15 and 1-16) and plug the AC Adaptor into AC power. 11. Turn the System ON by sliding the SW1 ON/OFF switch down. The ON/OFF LED located by STANDBY will turn on (Figure 1-15). PCB Descriptions This describes the CTX28 cabinet PCBs (see Table 1-3 and Figure 1-6.) Table 1-3 CTX28 (CHSU28) Cabinet circuit cards Part 1-8 Title GMAU1A Main Motherboard GMAS1A Sub-motherboard Description The GMAU motherboard supports 3 CO lines, 3 CLIDs, 8 Digital Telephones, 1 Standard Telephone. The GCTU, GVMU, and AC power adaptor plugs into the GMAS sub-motherboard dedicated slots. GCTU1A Processor Shipped with cabinet. GVMU1A Voice Mail Circuit Card (Optional) Voice Mail. GCDU1A CO, CLID, DKT circuit card (Optional) Supports 3 CO lines, 3 CLIDs, 8 Digital Telephones. The GCDU1A plugs onto the motherboard. GSTU1A Standard Telephone Circuit Card (Optional) Provides 1 Standard Telephone port. GETS1A 100BaseT I/F (Optional) Ethernet 100Base T cable.(optional) BSIS1A RS232C (Optional) RS232-C. Provides 4 serial I/O ports. HPFB6 External Battery (Optional) Provides backup Reserve power. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet SmartMedia Card CTX28 Installation BSIS (RS232-C) GCTU (Processor) GVMU (Voice Mail) installs beneath the GCTU GETS (100Base TX) GSTU (Standard Telephone) GMAU (Main Motherboard) GCDU (CO, CLID, DKT) 7108 Figure 1-6 Strata CTX I&M CTX28 Interior with PCBs 06/04 1-9 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Step 1: Set Jumpers on the GMAU1A (Motherboard) The GMAU1A (shown in Figure 1-7) supports up to 6 CO lines with Caller ID (CLID). SW1 ON STANDBY P5 P6 P8 P7 P4 SW1 ON/OFF (Standby) TB2 CO1 TB3 CO2 CO3 SW400 (3db/0DB) SW500 (3db/0DB) SW600 (3db/0DB) 7113 Figure 1-7 Table 1-4 GMAU PCB GMAU Controls, Switches and Indicators Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description 2-position slide switch Power Switch: [STANDBY] = no DC power supply. [ON] = DC voltage supplied. [ON] activates the reserve power from HPFB-6 battery pack. 2-position slide switch 3dB Pad switch CD6 LED Power indicator; when SW1 is [ON], turned on. Red both AC power and 3Reserve power. SW1 is [STANDBY], turned off. TB1 Plate with screw Grounding for HPFB-6 external battery TB2 Plate with screw Grounding for GETS Ethernet card TB3 Plate with screw Grounding for CTX28 system, connect to earth ground P1 50-pin Amphenol connector DKT, SLT and Power Failure Transfer interface P3 44-pin DIN connector GMAS interface SW1 SW400 SW500 SW600 1-10 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Table 1-4 GMAU Controls, Switches and Indicators (continued) Type of Component P4 16-pin female connector P5 13-pin female connector P6 10-pin female connector P7 13-pin female connector P8 10-pin female connector P9 6-pin female connector GCDU interface P10 3-pin connector HPFB-6 external battery interface P11 3-pin female connector GSTU standard telephone interface P400 P500 F1 GSTU standard telephone interface Modular connector Interface for CO Line circuit (CO2) 2.0A Fuse -24VDC Over current protection Interface for CO Line circuit (CO3) GMAS (Sub-motherboard) Control/Indicator/Connector P1 P2 J1 J2 J3 Strata CTX I&M GCDU DKT and loop start interface Interface for CO Line circuit (CO1) P600 Table 1-5 Description CTX28 Installation Control/Indicator/Connector 06/04 Type of Component 44-pin DIN male connector Pin Jack 44-pin DIN female connector Description GMAU interface DC-IN (DC15V) jack GVMU interface 44-pin DIN female connector GCTU interface 1-11 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Step 2: Install the GVMU1A Voice Mail PCB (optional) 1. In the CTX28 cabinet, remove the two screws and the PCB stopper (Figure 1-8). 2. On the GVMU, set the SW6 battery jumper to ON and set the Greeting language switch (Figure 1-9). Default language is “English.” See Table 1-6 for other language settings. 3. Turn off system power and if GCTU is installed remove GCTU before installing the GVMU. 4. Install the GVMU into the lower slot of the GMAS (sub-motherboard) (see Figure 1-8). 5. Install the GCTU per Step 3 and turn system power ON. Note To program GVMU, refer to Strata CTX28 Voice Processing Programming Manual and use XADM4 Admin software. ³ To re-initialize GVMU to default data after it has been in use (see CAUTION! below) 1. Turn off CTX28 system power and uninstall GCTU and GVMU. 2. Remove the GVMU battery jumper for two minutes. 3. Place the GVMU battery jumper back to the ON position, then install the GVMU and GCTU. 4. Turn system power back on. CAUTION! Table 1-6 Initializing GVMU to default data will erase all Names, Security codes and saved Messages. English/French Greetings Settings on the GVMU1A Jumper English French English to French French to English SW2 SW3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON Jumper Admin PC Real Time Debug Monitor SW4 OFF (default) ON (used for debug information, i.e., log and trace data by TTY. SW5 Not used. SW6 Battery Jumper – must be in ON position GVMU PCB Stopper GCTU GVMU 7252 7162 Figure 1-8 1-12 GVMU/GCTU PCB Stopper Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet 7395 CTX28 Installation Status LED VM Port LEDS (Ch1 ~ Ch4) Busy/Idle RS232C Maintenance Jack Note: For details, see GVMU Admin PC Connections later in this chapter. SW2 - Language Jumper SW3 - Language Jumper SW4 - Admin PC/Debug Monit SW6 - Battery Jumper SW5 - Not Used Figure 1-9 Table 1-7 Close Up of PCB Stopper for GCTU and GVMU LED Indicators on the GVMU1A Indication/ State Power On (Initialize Sequence*) GVMU1A LEDs Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Status All LEDs turn ON (Red), then all LEDs turn OFF and cycle ON/OFF through all ports for one to two minutes while initializing and then all LEDs turn off. Normal (Busy/Idle) OFF OFF OFF OFF ON = Busy; OFF = Idle Blinking Failure Blinking Blinking Blinking Blinking OFF Shut Down ON ON ON ON OFF Back Up/Restore ON ON ON ON ON No 1.8V input Voltage in GVMU ON OFF OFF ON ON Not mounted/defective Light flickers and switches from the LED to LED (from Ch1~Ch4) + Status LED * The initialize sequence operates each time the CTX28 power is cycled off/on or the CTX28 processor is reset or initialized – GVMU program data remains saved. However, if the GVMU battery jumper is removed, GVMU program data and saved messages will be erased. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 1-13 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Step 3: Install the GCTU1A (Processor) The GCTU1A is the main processor for the CTX28. It is shipped with the CTX28 Base cabinet. ³ To install the GCTU1A into the CTX28 1. Skip this step if you have installed a Voice Mail PCB and already removed the PCB stopper. If you have not done this, then in the CTX28 cabinet, remove the two screws and the PCB stopper (see Figure 1-8). 2. Set the P601 battery jumper to ON (see Figure 1-10) and insert the GCTU1A (shipped with the cabinet) in the upper slot of the GMAS sub-motherboard (see Figure 1-6). Place it next to the guide rail of the PCB stopper (see Figure 1-8). 3. Secure the PCB stopper with the original two screws. 4. Insert the SmartMedia card (gold contacts face left, notched corner faces forward and up) into the SmartMedia slot on the GCTU1A (see Figure 1-6). SmartMedia LED Heart Beat LED P601 Battery ON BATT OFF SmartMedia Slot P903 P2 (for BSIS) DC Power On/Off LED P902 P1 (for GETS) MOH External Speaker P901 Control Relay Contact 7264 Figure 1-10 GCTU PCB 1-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet GCTU Control/Indicator/ Connector P1 Type of Component Description 60 pin connector GETS Interface P2 60 pin connector BSIS Interface P501 SmartMedia house SmartMedia interface P601 Jumper plug Must always be in the “ON” position to maintain customer data P801 RCA Jack Paging interface and BGM/MOH interface P901 2 pin screw terminal Relay contact P902 44-pin male DIN connector CTX28 Back plane connector P903 44-pin male DIN connector CTX28 Back plane connector CD101 LED Processor operation indication CD501 LED SmartMedia access indicator CD908 LED Green DC power indicator for CTX28 system. Shown on front cover (see Figure 1-3). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Table 1-8 1-15 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Step 4: Install the GCDU1A (DKT and Loop Start Interface) The GCDU1A PCB adds an additional 3 CO lines, 3 Caller ID units, and 8 digital telephone circuits with a single PCB. It attaches to the GMAU1A motherboard. With the GCDU1A installed, the CTX28 supports up to 16 digital telephones (DKTs), 6 CO lines and 6 Caller ID circuits. ³ To install the GCDU1A ³ Carefully place the GCDU1A pins over the GMAU connectors (see Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-11). Press down on the PCB to secure the pins to the connectors (see Table 1-9). 0 60 0 SW W50 00 S W4 S CO4 CO5 CO6 7260 Figure 1-11 GCDU1A PCB Table 1-9 GCDU1A Controls, Indicators and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description SW400 SW500 2-position slide switch 3dB Pad switch SW600 P4 16-pin male connector P5 12-pin male connector P6 9-pin male connector P9 6-pin male connector P400 P500 P600 1-16 GMAU interface Interface for CO Line circuit (CO4) Modular connector Interface for CO Line circuit (CO5) Interface for CO Line circuit (CO6) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Step 5: Install the GSTU1A ³ To install the GSTU1A, align the GSTU1A pins over the GMAU1A motherboard and press down firmly (see Figure 1-6). CTX28 Installation The GSTU1A provides one additional standard telephone interface. 7259 Figure 1-12 GSTU1A PCB Table 1-10 GSTU1A Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component P7 12-pin male connector P8 9-pin male connector P11 3-pin male connector Description GMAU interface Step 6: Install the GETS1A The GETS1A supports 100Base TX Ethernet. ³ To install the GETS1A 1. Place option PCB arrow side up over the plastic stand-off with the connectors and stand-off holes on the GCTU1A. The “UP” arrow should point down. Snap GETS1A securely into place. 2. Attach the FG ring to TB2 on the GMAU1A motherboard with the screw shown in Figures 1-2 and 1-13. To TB2 On GMAU FG Green Wire Ethernet Plug 7261a Figure 1-13 GETS (100Base TX) Table 1-11 GETS (100Base TX) Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description CD1 LED CD2 LED Transmission and receive indicator P1 60 pin connector GCTU interface P2 RJ45 Network interface port Strata CTX I&M 06/04 LAN link indicator 1-17 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Step 7: Install the BSIS1A (optional) The BSIS provides RS-232 serial ports. ³ To install the BSIS1A, align the BSIS1A pins over the GCTU1A and press down firmly (see Figure 1-6). Step 8: Install the HPFB-6 (Reserve Power Battery/Charger) One or two HPFB-6 optional units can be added to the CTX28 to provide reserve power. The amount of reserve power time depends on the hardware (see Table 1-12). The table below is an estimate of battery backup time based on the premise that the HPFB-6 unit(s) are fully charged at the time of AC power failure. This estimated backup time is based on low call traffic, the time estimates will be reduced by as much as half with extreme heavy traffic volumes. Table 1-12 CTX28 Reserve Power Duration Estimates Hardware 1 HPFB-6 2 HPFB-6 3CO/8DKT - No GVMU 1 hr. 40 min. 3 hr. 20 min. 3CO/8DKT - with GVMU 1 hr. 30 min 3 hr. 6CO/16DKT - No GVMU 1 hr. 5 min. 2 hr. 10 min. 6CO/16DKT - with GVMU 1 hr. 2 hr. 1. Place the HPFB-6 directly below the Strata CTX28 KSU. See Figure 1-14 for minimum clearance requirements. A second HPFB-6 can be installed directly below the unit to supply backup reserve power. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Mark the location of the two screw holes, then drill holes. Screw the two screws two-thirds into the mounting surface. Hang the HPFB-6 on the screws then tighten the screws into the mounting surface. Plug the first HPFB-6 connector into BATT connector P10 on GMAU. Connect a #10 ground AWG wire from the HPFB-6 “FG” screw to the CTX28 screw labeled “TB1” (Figure 1-2). Note The CTX28 should be plugged into AC power and the DC power switch should be turned On when installing the HPFU-6. The HPFU-6 will not start to operate if AC power is not available during the initial installation. 7. The 24VDC LED on the HPFB-6 should light. If it does not light, press the battery Off switch with a pencil point or other small-tipped object. 8. Dress and tie-wrap the HPFB-6 cables. 9. To mount a second HPFB-6, repeat Steps 1~4, then plug the second HPFB-6 connector in the first HPFB-6 and connect an FG wire between each HPFB-6 FG screw. 10. To test the HPFB-6, remove the CTX28 AC plug from the AC outlet. The CTX28 AC LED will go out, but the CTX28 DC LED remains on. Also the system remains in normal working order and the HPFB-6 24V LED remains on. 11. If it is desired to turn off the HPFB-6 (after loss of AC power), use a pencil or other sharp object to press the Battery Off switch. CAUTION! 1-18 Once the HPFB-6 is turned Off or unplugged (during AC power loss) it will not operate again until AC power is restored to the CTX28 KSU. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet Note The CTX28 KSU does not provide a battery charger, the HPFB-6 contains built-in CTX28 Installation batteries and a battery charger; therefore, do not connect any other type of batteries to the CTX28. To P10 Connector (see Fig. 1-2) 2“ #10 AWG HPFB FG Wire to TB1 (see Fig. 1-2) HPFB Unit: Reserve Power Battery and Charger (optional) 7253 From Second HPFB (optional) 2“ 2“ 2“ Figure 1-14 HPFB-6 Reserve Power Installation Step 9: Install Wiring 1. Refer to Figure 1-15 for the following steps. Loosen the screw on the Amphenol clamp and remove the clamp. Plug in the 25-pair Amphenol connector and replace the clamp to hold the Amphenol connector in place. 2. Connect all other PCB wiring (e.g., modular CO line cords, LAN cable, etc.). Slide the shorter tie-wrap through the holder. Then fasten wiring to the unit with the tie wrap that comes with the Base KSU. 3. Connect the end of the AC adapter cable to the GMAS PCB as shown in Figures 1-15 and 1-16. 4. Connect the other end of the GETS (100Base TX) LAN cable to the LAN connected to the CTX WinAdmin PC. 5. Plug the AC adapter into a power strip connected to an power outlet. 6. Put the On/Standby switch into “On” position. The DC LED should light green. The CTX28 is now ready to program. WARNING! Do not smoke near batteries. Avoid creating any electrical sparks near batteries. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 1-19 CTX28 Installation Installing the CTX28 Cabinet BSIS (4 RS-232C) P10 (to HPFB Battery Cord) 100 Base TX Music On Hold (MOH) TB1 (to HPFB FG) External Speaker (Paging) SW1 ON CO, CLID, DKT STANDBY SW1 ON/OFF (Standby) Amphenol Connector secured under clamp Tie Wrap (supplied) Tie Wrap (supplied) AC Adapter 7158 Figure 1-15 Standard Unit Wiring (without option units) and AC Adapter 1-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation Digital Telephone Connection CTX28 Installation 1 2 3 4 7257 Figure 1-16 AC Adapter Wiring Procedure Digital Telephone Connection The Strata CTX28 supports any Toshiba 2000 and 3000-series digital telephones, including the new DKT3007-SD telephone (shown right). The DKT3007-SD only works on the CTX28. The DKT3007-SD works just like the DKT3020-SD and DKT3010SD, except that it has seven flexible buttons. The CTX28 supports all DKT2000 and DKT3000-series Add-on Modules and DSS Consoles. CTX28 supports Handset Offhook Call Announce (OCA), but not Speaker OCA. Figure 1-17 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 DKT3007-SD Telephone 1-21 CTX28 Installation Loop Limits Loop Limits This section provides the maximum loop lengths for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies. The following information applies to only the Strata CTX28 system (see Table 1-13). Diagrams that are applicable to all systems, including the CTX28, can be found in Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. Table 1-13 Digital Telephone/DIU/DDSS Console/ADM/Loop Limits Mode DKT3000-series or DKT2000-series models, DKT with BVSU or DVSU or BHEU or HHEU. DKT with BPCI DKT with BPCI and BHEU DDSS3060 or 2060 DDCB3A BATI, RATI DKT with 1 ADM DKT with 2 ADMs CTX28 KSU or Battery Backup1 Maximum line length (24 AWG) 1 Pair feet meters CTX28 KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 695 204 CTX28 KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 500 151 CTX28 KSU 1000 303 1 Pair plus external power2 Battery Backup 500 151 CTX28 KSU 1000 303 1000 feet Battery Backup 675 204 303 meters CTX28 KSU 165 50 Battery Backup 500 151 CTX28 KSU 1000 303 Battery Backup 1000 303 CTX28 KSU 675 204 Battery Backup 165 50 CTX28 KSU 500 151 Battery Backup 33 10 1. Battery backup applies to instances when the system is being powered by batteries exclusively. 2. Digital cable runs must not have the following: Cable splits (single or double) Cable bridges (of any length) High resistance or faulty cable splices 1-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation CTX28 Secondary Protection The following diagram (see Figure 1-18) shows where secondary protectors must be installed for outside wiring. Building #1 Building #2 HESB Standard Telephone GMAU GSTU DDSS Console GMAU GCDU CTX28 Installation CTX28 Secondary Protection Digital Telephone Digital Telephone or Cordless Base MDFB DDCB MDFB GMAU GDCU Loop CO Line Secondary protectors – standard voltage 7255 (Earth Ground) Secondary protectors – low voltage Figure 1-18 CTX28 Secondary Protector Diagram Important! Strata CTX I&M 06/04 To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of these manufacturer. 1-23 CTX28 Installation MDF Wiring MDF Wiring For Registration information refer to “CTX28 FCC/ACTA Registration Numbers” on page 1-1. Table 1-14 Station Wiring for Amphenol Connector (P1) on GMAU1 Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal Station 1 VR1 26 VT1 DKT #1 2 VR2 27 VT2 DKT #2 3 VR3 28 VT3 DKT #3 4 VR4 29 VT4 DKT #4 5 VR5 30 VT5 DKT #5 6 VR6 31 VT6 DKT #6 7 VR7 32 VT7 DKT #7 8 VR8 33 VT8 DKT #8 9 VR9 34 VT9 DKT #9 10 VR10 35 VT10 DKT #10 11 VR11 36 VT11 DKT #11 12 VR12 37 VT12 DKT #12 13 VR13 38 VT13 DKT #13 14 VR14 39 VT14 DKT #14 15 VR15 40 VT15 DKT #15 16 VR16 41 VT16 DKT #16 17 (NC) 42 (NC) 18 PF1R 43 PF1T 19 (NC) 44 (NC) 20 (NC) 45 (NC) 21 (NC) 46 (NC) 22 (NC) 47 (NC) 23 CR1 48 CT1 24 (NC) 49 (NC) 25 CR2 50 CT2 PFT circuit* STU #1 STU #2 * Connect a Standard Telephone to PFT pair to provide access to CO Line1 during a power failure. T1 R1 CO LINE CABLING BRIDGING CLIPS 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 48 48 49 49 50 50 T1 R1 R GN R1 T1 BK Y W BL 2 3 4 5 MODULAR CORD 5 4 3 2 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK 7262 NETWORK JACK: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 Figure 1-19 MDF Wiring to CO Lines (GMAU and GCDU) 1-24 GMAU GCDU 6 5 4 3 2 1 R2 R1 T1 T2 GMAU GCDU PIN-OUT 6 543 21 1 1-6 TO NETWORK CO1~6 MODULAR JACKS Strata CTX I&M 06/04 CTX28 Installation GVMU Administration PC Connections CTX28 Installation GVMU Administration PC Connections Strata CTX28 6-wire Modular Cord - telephone cross-pinned type (modular jack locking tabs on the same side of the cord). Toshiba PPTC or PPTC9 connectors to PC COM port GVMU RS232C Jack PC with GVMU XADM Software 7407 Strata CTX28 Serial Port Modular Pins 1 RD (Data from GVMU) 2 3 4 5 6 TD DSR DTR CD SG (Data to GVMU) (Data Set Ready from GVMU) (Data Terminal Ready to GVMU) (Carrier Detect from GVMU) (CTX/Terminal Signal Ground) GVMU RJ11 (Six-pin jack) Figure 1-20 GVMU Serial Port Interface Connection Dealer Supplied Modem Strata CTX I&M Telephone Network CO Line Ext. Modem RS-232 Cable Remote GVMU PC using XADM software Figure 1-21 CO Line Strata CTX28 RS232C Maintenance Jack Toshiba PPTC25-MDM connector to Modem GVMU 3-Pair Modular Cord - telephone cross-pinned type (modular jack locking tabs on the same side of the cord). 7406 GVMU PC Modem Interface Connection 06/04 1-25 CTX28 Installation GVMU Administration PC Connections PPTC-9 2 3 6 4 1 5 (female) Connect to PC 9-pin COMX Port (DTE) 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB9 Pinout (front view) 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD GVMU RS232C Maintenance Jack Modular Jack Pinout (front view) PPTC25-MDM (male) 2 3 20 6 8 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 7405 Connect to External Modem (DTE) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 Figure 1-22 1-26 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD GVMU RS232C Maintenance Jack Modular Jack Pinout (front view) Serial Port Adaptors Pin Numbers Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheets follow this information to aid in determining the actual cabinets and interface PCBs needed for particular proposals and how these PCBs should be placed in Strata CTX cabinet slots. (Worksheets begin on page 2-22.) Strata CTX Configuration This chapter contains information and worksheets to help configure the Strata CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670 hardware components. A system overview of the Strata CTX100-S, CTX100 and Strata CTX670 hardware components and the maximum station and line capacities available with the system processor is provided. Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Overview The Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 systems are compact systems, yet they provide large system features (see Figure 2-1 and Table 2-1). It is designed for wall mounting and occupies very little space. Base Expansion They are designed for wall mounting and occupy very little space. The CTX100 processor (ACTU2A) comes with 32 ports (licensed) and can grow to 112 ports by adding 4-port licenses. The CTX100-S processor (ACTU2A-S) comes with 16 ports (licensed) and can grow to 32 ports by adding two eight-port licenses. Then, it can grow to 112 ports with four-port licenses. 5976 Figure 2-1 Note The Strata CTX100-S and CTX100 CTX100-S /CTX100 Base/Expansion Cabinets system capacities depend on the licenses stored on the system processor and the hardware described in this chapter. See “CTX100-S/ CTX100 License Control” on page 2-4. Important! The Strata CTX100-S uses the same hardware and configuration as the Strata CTX100, with a few exceptions. Whenever the CTX100 is mentioned in this book, it applies to both the CTX100-S and CTX100, unless specified otherwise. Each ACTU2 basic processor can be configured with a one or two cabinet system. A single (Base) cabinet system supports a combination of up to 64 Central Office (CO) lines and stations, while a two cabinet system (Base and Expansion) can support up to 112 CO lines and stations. System line and station capacity is expanded by adding CO line and station Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) and port licenses into its universal slot architecture. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-1 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100-S and CTX100 Processors The CTX100 easily connects to outside public and private telephone lines. All of the telephones (stations) tied to the system can have direct access to each other, as well as to the public and private network. All lines, stations, and options are tied together through the cabinets. Table 2-1 CTX100-S / CTX100 Cabinet Specifications Weight1 Height Width Depth Base Cabinet (CHSUB112A) 19.4 lbs. 14.6 in. 11.9 in. 10.2 in. Base + Expansion Cabinet (CHSUE112A) 34.6 lbs. 14.6 in. 19.9 in. 10.2 in. Cabinet 1. Weight includes the processor PCB in the Base Cabinet and four universal PCBs in each cabinet. CTX100-S and CTX100 Processors Each system operates with one processor PCB (ACTU2A-S for CTX100-S, ACTU2A for CTX100) that installs in a dedicated slot of the Base Cabinet. The processors incorporate the following hardware features CPU/Memory Either processor PCB uses a high-speed, 32-bit, RISC processor, Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) working memory, Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) with lithium battery for memory back-up, and flash program memory. Large Scale Integrated (LSI) Circuits The processors each have LSI circuits that support the following: • 16 DTMF receiver hardware processor are built into the ACTU2. Five or more DTMF receivers requires appropriate licenses. See “CTX100-S/CTX100 License Control” on page 2-4. • 16 Busy Tone (BT) detector circuits for Auto Busy Redial (ABR) are built into the ACTU2. • 64 built-in conference circuits (see Table 2-7 on page 2-12 for more information). • Built-in, adjustable, digital volume PAD technology enables audio volume to be adjusted in eight steps to compensate for conference and/or CO line network losses. Memory Protection Battery If commercial AC power is lost or if a system is moved or stored without power, either processor has an on-board battery that protects data and the customer’s programmed configuration from memory loss. This information will be maintained in a powerless system for at least six years. Relay Control Interface An on-board terminal strip provides an interface to a normally open relay contact which can be programmed to control a Night Bell, door lock or to mute BGM during an external page. External Page Interface A 600 ohm RCA jack is built into the processor to interface with a Toshiba External Amplified Speaker (HESB) or a customer-supplied page amplifier and speaker(s) for external paging, night ring over external page, and external BGM applications. 2-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Cabinet Slots Music-on-hold/Background Music Interface A 600-ohm RCA jack and volume controls are built into the processor to interface with Music-onhold and/or Background Music (BGM) sources (one of the jacks is for future use). With the CTX100, you can have up to 15 MOH/BGM source interfaces by adding: • Up to two BIOU PCBs, each provides three MOH/BGM input sources • An RSTU PCB that provides up to eight MOH/BGM input sources • An ASTU PCB provides one alternate BGM source Each processor has an on-board SmartMediaTM memory card slot. A SmartMedia flash memory card can be inserted into the slot to backup and restore customer program data. It also makes it easy to upload operating system data for software upgrades and is used for maintenance functions. Strata CTX Configuration SmartMedia Memory CTX100 Processor Optional Subassemblies Optional subassemblies can be attached to the ACTU2A-S or ACTU2A processors to provide additional features. The subassemblies are: • AMDS (Modem) – Provides a 33.6Kbps/V.34 modem for point-to-point local or remote connection to the CTX WinAdminTM administration PC. • BSIS (Serial Port Interface) – Provides up to two RS-232 interface ports for SMDR interface to Call Accounting devices, SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary interface to Voice Mail devices, and two future applications. CTX100 Cabinet Slots Base Cabinet The Base Cabinet has one dedicated slot used for the system processor PCB and four universal slots (S101~S104), that can accommodate station, line or option PCBs. It also houses a power supply that is packaged with the cabinet. Expansion Cabinets One expansion cabinet provides four universal PCB slots (S105~S108) that can accommodate station, line or option PCBs. It also houses a power supply that is packaged with the cabinet. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-3 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100-S/CTX100 License Control CTX100-S/CTX100 License Control The system size and feature capability is controlled using a software License Key Code. This key code is obtained from Toshiba Internet FYI during the ordering process and is installed onto the system processor via Strata CTX WinAdmin. Processor license codes activate system hardware capacities in the following increments. • The first 16 line/station ports on the CTX100-S do not require a license. The upgrade from 16 to 24 ports and from 24 to 32 ports requires the eight port upgrade LIC100S-8 PORTS license. Each additional set of 4 line/station ports requires the four port upgrade LIC100-4 PORTS license. • The first 32 line/station ports on the CTX100 do not require a license. Each additional set of four line/station ports requires one LIC100-4 PORTS license (maximum of 112 ports). • The ACTU2A-S and ACTU2 processors each provide 16 DTMF built-in receiver hardware circuits and 16 ABR circuits. The first four DTMF circuits and all ABR circuits do not require a license. Each additional set of four DTMF receiver circuits requires one LIC100-4DTMF license (maximum of 16 DTMF circuits). Note DTMF tone receiver circuits are required for standard telephones, Voice Mail DTMF integration, Tie, DID and DNIS line service. • The optional RS-232 serial port interface (BSIS) provides two circuits to interface with SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Voice Mail integration, Call Accounting SMDR, and two for future applications. The first circuit does not require a license, but circuits two through four each require one LIC100-SER PORT license. Licensed Software Options Some software options are activated with license codes. The following software options require a license: • Each CTX system (node) in a Strata Net QSIG Network (ISDN or IP) requires one LIC100QSIG NET license. A maximum of four serial network nodes are allowed in any one serial chain in the network topology. • The built-in LAN interface for all CTI Open Architecture applications. Each individual CTI Open Architecture application requires one LIC100-CSTA AP license (maximum nine). 2-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Strata CTX670 Overview Strata CTX670 Overview The Strata CTX670 system provides sophisticated telecommunication features in a modular system designed for growth. Its universal slot architecture enables you to select the combination of Central Office (CO) lines, stations, and peripheral options that best suit your needs. Strata CTX Configuration The CTX670 basic BCTU processor can be configured for smaller systems as a one or two cabinet system with a capacity of up to 192 CO lines and stations combined. It can expand to support up to seven cabinets with a capacity of up to 672 CO lines and stations combined with the BCTU/BEXU processors (see Figure 2-2). System line and station capacity is expanded by adding processor expansion Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), cabinets and line/station PCBs. The CTX670 easily connects to outside public and private telephone lines. All of the telephones (stations) tied to the system can have direct access to each other as well as to the public and private network. Note The Strata CTX670 system capacities depend on the licenses stored on the system processor and the hardware described in this chapter. See “CTX670 License Control” on page 2-7. 5398 Figure 2-2 CTX 670 Base/ Expansion Cabinets The Base Cabinet and optional Expansion Cabinets are the building blocks of the system. Each system has a Base Cabinet, and can have from one to six Expansion Cabinets. All lines, stations, and options are tied together through the cabinets. The overall weight and dimensions of the CTX670 cabinets are shown in Table 2-2. Table 2-2 CTX670 Cabinet Specifications Weight Height Width Depth Base Cabinet (CHSUB672A) Cabinet 31 lbs. 11.625 in. 26.5 in. 10.3 in. Expansion Cabinet (CHSUE672A) 29 lbs. 9.75 in. 26.5 in. 10.3 in. CTX670 Processor PCBs The system operates with the BCTU only or the BCTU and BEXU processor PCBs install in dedicated slots of the Base Cabinet. The BCTU and BEXU processor incorporates the following on-board hardware features: CPU/Memory The CTX670 uses a high-speed, 32-bit, Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC) processor, Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM) working memory, Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) with lithium battery for back-up memory, and flash program memory. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-5 Strata CTX Configuration CTX670 Processor PCBs Large-scale Integrated (LSI) circuits The processor has LSI circuits that support the following: • BCTU provides 16 built-in DTMF receivers; 32 available using the BCTU and BEXU. For five or more DTMF receivers, appropriate licenses are required. See “CTX670 License Control” on page 2-7. • BCTU provides 16 built-in Busy Tone (BT) detectors for Auto Busy Redial (ABR); 32 available using the BCTU and BEXU. • BCTU provides 64 built-in conference circuits; up to 96 conference circuits are available using the BCTU and BEXU. (See Table 2-7 on page 2-12 for more information). • Built-in, adjustable, digital volume PAD technology enables audio volume to be adjusted in eight steps to compensate for conference and/or CO line network losses. Memory Protection Battery If commercial AC power is lost or if a system is moved or stored without power, the processor has an internal battery that protects data and the customer’s programmed configuration from memory loss. This information will be maintained in a powerless system for at least six years. Music-on-hold/Background Music Interface An RCA jack and volume control are built into the processor to interface with a Music-on-hold and/ or Background Music source. With the CTX670, you can have up to 15 MOH/BGM sources by adding: • Up to two BIOU PCBs, each provides three MOH/BGM input sources. • An RSTU PCB that provides up to eight MOH/BGM input sources. • MOH/BGM source volume adjustment is controlled by software programming. SmartMedia Memory The processor has an on-board SmartMedia card slot. A SmartMedia flash memory card can be inserted to backup and restore customer program data. It also makes it easy to upload operating system data for software upgrades and is used for maintenance functions. Network Interface The processor has an on-board Ethernet 10base-T Ethernet circuit for connection to Open Architecture Computer Telephony Interface (CTI) applications. This provides extensive call control and telephone support for CTI applications. The Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC) port also enables connection to the following: • CTX Attendant Console • ACD server • Local and Remote CTX WinAdmin PC • Soft Key Control of Voice Mail features 2-6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX670 License Control CTX670 Processor PCB Subassemblies Subassemblies can be added to the BCTU processor PCB to provide additional features. The subassemblies are: • AMDS (Modem) – Provides a 33.6Kbps/V.34 modem for point-to-point local or remote connection to the CTX WinAdminTM administration PC. • BSIS interface PCB which attaches to the BCTU to provide up to four RS-232 interface ports for SMDR Call Accounting and SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Voice Mail interface. See Table 2-3 on page 2-9 for the number of cabinets and universal PCB slots for the Basic and Expanded systems. The system size and feature capability is controlled using a software License Key Code. This key code is obtained from the Toshiba Internet FYI site during the ordering process and is installed onto the system processor via Strata CTX WinAdmin. Processor license codes activate system hardware capacities in the following increments. Strata CTX Configuration CTX670 License Control • The first 64 line/station ports do not require a license. Each additional set of four line/station ports requires one LIC670-4PORTS license (maximum of 672 ports). • The on-board DTMF receiver circuit provides up to 32 DTMF receiver hardware circuits. The first four DTMF circuits do not require a license. Each additional set of four DTMF receiver circuits requires one LIC670-4DTMF license (max. total of 32 DTMF circuits). Note DTMF tone receiver circuits are required for standard telephones, Voice Mail DTMF integration, Tie, DID and DNIS line service. • The optional RS-232 serial port interface (BSIS) provides two circuits to interface with Voice Mail SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Voice Mail integration, Call Accounting SMDR, and two for future applications. The first circuit does not require a license, but circuits two through four each require one LIC670-SER PORT license. Licensed Software Options Some software options are activated with license codes. The following software options require a license: • Each CTX system (node) in a Strata Net QSIG Network requires one LIC670-QSIG NET license. A maximum of four serial network nodes are allowed in any one serial chain in the network topology. • Each individual CTI Open Architecture application requires one LIC670-CSTA AP license (maximum nine). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-7 Strata CTX Configuration CTX670 Cabinet Slots CTX670 Cabinet Slots Base Cabinet The Base Cabinet has two dedicated slots used for the system processor PCBs and eight universal slots, labeled “S101~S108,” that can accommodate station, CO line or option PCBs (see Figure 2-3). It also houses a power supply. B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 DC OUT -24V1 -24V2 BATT + - -24V3 -24V4 POW +5V AC IN -5V P.F. POWER ON RESET EXP BASE OFF FG B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 5002 6965 BEXU Figure 2-3 BCTU Strata CTX670 Base Cabinet Interior Expansion Cabinets One to six Expansion Cabinets can be added to increase the system station and CO line capacity. Each expansion cabinet provides 10 slots (S_01~S_10). Figure 2-4 shows an Expansion Cabinet. Refer to the following section for cabinet slot and station/line capacities. Tables 2-4 and 2-5 show the number of stations and CO lines allowed when additional cabinets and PCBs are used. DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 7 -27V1 -27V1 S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10 OFF OFF 5002 5002 5003 Figure 2-4 2-8 Strata CTX670 Expansion Cabinet Interior Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX670 Remote Expansion Cabinet CTX670 Remote Expansion Cabinet A CTX670 Expansion Cabinet can be located up to three kilometers from its Base Cabinet. Remote Expansion Cabinets are enabled by the RRCU PCB. One RRCU connects to up to two ribbon-type Data Cables and applies the inter-cabinet signal to a multi-mode fiber-optic pair. One fiber pair can support one or two expansion cabinets in one remote location using one RRCU in the Base Cabinet and another in the Remote Expansion Cabinet. The CTX670 Base Cabinet supports up to six Remote Expansion Cabinets (at least one RRCU PCB is required for each remote location). System Capacities Strata CTX Configuration Remote cabinets support the BIOU for external Page Zones, Night Bell, etc., and all CO line and trunk interface PCBs. Network clock synchronization can only be derived from digital trunks installed in the Base Cabinet (Master) location. This section contains Strata CTX100 and CTX670 capacities for stations and peripherals, CO lines, station buttons and system features. All tables apply to both systems unless otherwise noted. Important! Table 2-3 The maximum capacities listed for the CTX100 in Tables 2-3~2-7 are based on an expanded CTX100 (Base + Expansion cabinet). Cabinet and Slot Capacities CTX100 CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU Cabinets 1 or 2 1 to 2 1 to 7 Universal slots 4 or 8 8 or 18 8 to 68 112 192 672 CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU Cabinets/Slots/Ports Maximum capacity of ports (lines + stations) Table 2-4 Station/Peripherals System Capacities Stations CTX100 Base & Expansion Add-on modules (DADM3120, DADM3020) per Base Cabinet1 30 DKTs with 1 ADM 23 DKTs with 2 ADMs 55 DKTs with 1 ADM 43 DKTs with 2 ADMs 55 DKTs with 1 ADM 43 DKTs with 2 ADMs Add-on modules (DADM3020) per Expansion Cabinet1 31 DKTs with 1 ADM 24 DKTs with 2 ADMs 57 DKTs with 1 ADM 45 DKTs with 2 ADMs 57 DKTs with 1 ADM 45 DKTs with 2 ADMs 2 2 4 72/system (40 Base Cabinet) (40/Expan. Cab.) 552/system (72 Base Cabinet) (80/Expan. Cab.) 128 Base 160 Expansion 560 System 200 per cabinet 200 per system CTX Attendant consoles IPT telephones 64 per cabinet 72 per system IPT telephones with DADM31202 26 per cabinet 26 per system 152/system (72 Base Cabinet) (80/Expan. Cab.) 128 Base 160 Expansion 160 System 58 per cabinet 58 per system Cordless Telephones (DKT2004-CT, DKT2104-CT, DKT2204-CT, DKT2304-CT)1 72 152 552 Door locks 4 5 10 Door phone control boxes (DDCB) 2 3 8 DKT3000- and 2000-series DKTs1 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-9 Strata CTX Configuration System Capacities Table 2-4 Station/Peripherals System Capacities (continued) CTX100 Base & Expansion CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU Door phones 6 9 24 DSS consoles (DDSS) 3 5 16 ISDN BRI station circuits TE-1 and TA (2B+D per circuit) 12 28 96 Stations 64 144 544 35 66 66 Total Stations (Digital/Analog/ISDN BRI B channel combined) 72 160 560 Standard stations 64 144 544 Calls existing at the same time 56 96 366 CTX100 Base & Expansion CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU CO lines – loop start (analog - 8 lines/slot) 64 96 264 CO lines – ground start (analog - 4 lines/slot) 32 72 264 DID lines (analog - 4 lines/slot) 32 72 264 Tie lines (analog - 4 lines/slot) 32 72 264 8 20 20 64 96 264 64 96 256 48 96 264 48 96 264 Total lines (Analog, T1, ISDN BRI and PRI B channels combined) 64 96 264 Channel Groups 32 48 128 Number of groups w/ GCO Line buttons 32 50 128 Off-premise stations BPCI used for TAPI only: per cabinet 1 1. Limit is based on cabinet Power Factor (PF). 2. Based on the maximum allowed flexible buttons. Table 2-5 Line Capacities and Universal PCB Slots Lines 1 VoIP lines (4 lines/slot) T1 lines (DS-1) 2 ISDN BRI B channel lines3 ISDN PRI B channel lines 4 Strata Net over IP Channels 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2-10 5 Capacity is limited by FCC, Part 15, ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC) restrictions. T1 lines can be loop start, ground start, Tie or DID (maximum 24 lines per unit, any type or combination). BRI lines provide CO line services, including Caller ID, DID and Direct Inward Lines (DIL). PRI lines provide CO line services, including QSIG Networking, Calling Party Number/Name, DID, Tie, POTS, FX and DIT. Strata Net over IP channels provides Strata Net functionality. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration System Capacities Table 2-6 Station Buttons CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU Call Forward, Personal CF Buttons 72 160 560 CO Line Buttons 64 96 264 Group CO Line Buttons 64 96 264 Pooled CO Line Buttons 32 50 128 CO Group and Pooled Line Buttons 64 96 264 Station Loop Buttons 8 15 50 Door Unlock Buttons 4 8 16 Flexible Telephone Buttons 1600 3500 12000 Line Buttons in use at the same time 1440 3200 3200 Message Waiting Registration (DNs with MW) 130 230 800 Multiple Appearances of DNs on Telephones 2000 4000 12000 Night Transfer Buttons 32 64 128 One Touch Buttons 800 1750 6000 Primary Directory Numbers [PDNs] per system 72 160 560 Phantom Directory Numbers [PhDNs] per system 288 640 2240 [PhDNs] with Message Waiting Indication LED 18 38 128 96 (8 DNs/station) 224 (8 DNs/station) 768 (8 DNs/station) ISDN DNs Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Base & Expansion Station Buttons per System 2-11 Strata CTX Configuration System Capacities Table 2-7 System Feature Capacities CTX100 Base & Expansion CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU 100 200 256 Advisory LCD Messages (Set on a Telephone) 1 1 1 Advisory LCD Messages Lists (per System) 10 10 10 Attendant Groups 1 1 1 1 1 1 Call Forward, System CF Patterns 4 10 32 Call Park Orbits (General) 14 32 64 Features Pilot DNs Call Accounting SMDR Interface1 Call Park Orbits (Individual) Caller ID/ANI/CNIS Numbers stored (Call History records) 96 336 Up to 100/station Up to 100/station Up to 660/system Up to 1000/system Up to 2000/system CO Line Groups - Incoming Line Groups (ILG) 32 50 128 CO Line Groups - Outgoing Line Groups (OLG) 32 50 128 Outgoing Line Groups (OLG) Members per system (Trunks + ISDN Line Service Index) 96 144 392 Conference Circuits 64 64 96 Conferencing (three-parties simultaneously)2 20 21 21 Conferencing (eight-parties simultaneously)2 8 8 12 Conference Party types (up to 8 total lines + stations) 6 lines max. 8 stations max. 6 lines max. 8 stations max. 6 lines max. 8 stations max. Two-CO Line Conferencing – simultaneously2 (Two party only, no telephone or VM port) 32 48 132 Conference/Line Volume Adjustment (PAD) Groups 6 10 32 DID Numbers for Calling Number ID/system 225 500 1000 DNIS/DID Network Routing Numbers 200 400 1000 DNIS/DID Numbers 450 1000 2000 DTMF Receivers3 16 16 32 E911 Groups 8 8 8 Emergency Call Groups 8 8 8 Hunt Groups (Serial/Circular/Distributed combined) 90 200 640 Hunt Group Size (DNs per group) 72 160 560 Hunt Group Stations (per system) 360 800 2800 ISDN DNs 96 224 768 ISDN Line Service Indexes 32 48 128 Multiple Call Ring Group 16 32 64 Relay4 1 1 1 Night Transfer Control Relay 1 1 1 Off-hook Call Announce Handsets (simultaneous) 20 21 31 Night Bell Control 4 2-12 56 Up to 100/station Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration System Capacities Table 2-7 System Feature Capacities (continued) Features Off-hook Call Announce to Telephone Speakers 5 Page Mute External BGM Control Relay Page Zone Relays 4 4 CTX100 Base & Expansion CTX670 Basic Processor BCTU CTX670 Expanded Processor BCTU + BEXU 72 112 352 1 1 1 8 8 8 4 8 16 Paging – (Group Page – simultaneous stations paged) 72 120 120 Pickup Groups 5 10 32 Ring Tones (External Call Ring Tones for DKTs) 4 4 4 Ring Tones (Internal Call Ring Tones for DKTs) 1 1 1 1080 2400 5600 Speed Dial - System SD numbers per system 800 800 800 Stratagy DK Voice Mail Systems per system 1 1 1 Speed Dial - Station SD numbers per system6 Tenants 1 1 1 Destination Restriction Level (DRL) Classes 16 16 16 Verified Account Codes 135 300 1000 1 1 1 Voice Mail SMDI Interface1 Strata CTX Configuration Page Groups (Phones with or without External Zones) 1. SMDI and SMDR require BSIS serial port interface. 2. Conference circuits are used dynamically, so the maximum number of simultaneous conferences is affected by the number of conference members in each conference. The total number of members in simultaneous conferences cannot exceed the total number of conference circuits. Each conference can have up to eight members. 3. DTMF receivers are required for standard touch tone telephones, voice mail integration, Tie, DID and DISA lines. 4. An option BIOU is required for up to four zone page relays and four control relays on the CTX100 and CTX670. One control relay is provided on board the CTX100 processor. 5. Speaker OCA capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply. Requires BVSU option in telephone. Speaker OCA is not available on IPT1020-SD telephones. 6. Up to 100 Station SD numbers, allocated in increments of 10, can be programmed per station. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-13 Strata CTX Configuration Universal Slot PCBs Universal Slot PCBs Universal Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) installed in the Strata CTX100 or CTX670 cabinets provide interfaces for stations, lines, and peripherals. Each PCB measures 7.5 x 5.5 inches (190 x 140 mm) and mounts in the slot with a 44-pin backplane connector. PCB external connections to station equipment are made to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) using industry-standard connectors. Station, Line and Option PCBs The PCBs are categorized as station, CO line or option PCBs (see Tables 2-8~2-10). Feature subassemblies that plug onto a universal slot PCB, such as the Standard Telephone Interface Subassembly (RSTS), are listed below the associated PCB. Table 2-8 Station PCBs Digital Telephone Interface Unit (ADKU) (CTX100 only) Provides eight circuits for 3000 and/or 2000-series digital telephones. Interface Options: Provides the same interface options as the BDKU (see below), but does not support BDKS. Compatible only with CTX100. Standard Telephone Interface Unit (ASTU) (CTX100 only) Interface Options: Provides two standard telephone circuits. Maximum number of ringers per circuit is three Standard telephones (no message waiting) Other single-line devices Alternate BGM source Fax machines Voice mail devices Digital Telephone Interface Unit (BDKU) Interface Options: Digital telephones (with or without BHEU, BPCI, BVSU, DADMs, or digital cordless telephone). Supports BDKS. Provides eight circuits for 3000 and/or 2000-series digital telephones (BDKU) + eight more with BDKS (optional). Stand-alone digital cordless telephone DDSS console BATI DDCB Supports large LCD (DKT3014) features. Digital Telephone Interface Subassembly (BDKS) Provides eight additional circuits for 3000 and/or 2000series digital telephones. Attaches to BDKU. One per BDKU. Do not use BDKS for Speaker OCA telephones, except in slot 103 of the CTX100. Interface Options: Same as BDKU. Not compatible with ADKU or PDKU. Digital Telephone Interface Unit (PDKU2) Provides 8 digital telephone circuits. (2000-series phones only. Do not use the PDKU for 3000-series digital telephones. With 3000-series DKTs, the LCD display is only 16 characters wide and the Spdial button will not work. 2-14 Interface Options: Digital telephones (with or without BHEU or HHEU, DVSU, DADMs, or digital cordless telephone) Stand-alone digital cordless telephone DDSS console DDCB Does not support DKT3014-SDL features. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Universal Slot PCBs Table 2-8 Station PCBs (continued) Digital Telephone Interface Unit (BWDKU1A) Provides 8 or 16 digital telephone circuits. Compatible with Strata CTX and Strata DK. Jumper plugs on the PCB determine the number of DKT circuits and CTX or DK compatibility. It does not need a Ferrite Core. It has one protector for every two circuits. The BWDKU1A is similar to BDKU/BDKS, except DKT wiring is all 1 pair. Interface Options: Digital telephones (with or without BHEU or HHEU, DVSU, DADMs, or digital cordless telephone) Stand-alone digital cordless telephone DDSS console DDCB Internet Protocol Telephone (IPT) Interface Unit (BIPU-M1A, BIPU-M2A) Provides 16 IPT telephone circuits Built-in Digital Signal Processor (DSP) (BIPS1A-16) One RS-232 maintenance port Network Address Translation (NAT) compatible for remote IP telephones (BIPU-M2A) Interface Options: LAN, Virtual Private Network (VPN) Internet, VPN WAN, Intranet. Enhanced version of MEGACO+ for Voice over IP Strata CTX Configuration One 100Base-TX RJ45 port MEGACO+ mobility for Mobility Communications System (MCS) Roaming (BIPU-M2A) Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit (RDSU) Without RSTS, provides: Two standard telephone/ Four digital telephone circuits (2000-series phones only). With RSTS, provides: Four standard telephone/ Four digital telephone circuits (2000-series phones only). Interface Options: Digital – same as PDKU. Standard – same as RSTU (standard Message Waiting not available) Standard Telephone Interface Unit (BSTU, RSTU3) Interface Options: Provides eight standard telephone circuits. Stutter dial tone is provided for Message Waiting audible indication. Standard Telephone Subassembly (RSTS) Attaches to RDSU. Provides two additional standard telephone circuits. One maximum per RDSU. Standard telephones Voice mail ports Off-premises stations Other similar devices Alternate BGM source Auto Attendant digital announcer Message Waiting lamp Fax machines ACD announcer Interface Options: Same as RSTU, except no Message Waiting lamp. -48 Volt Supply Internal Option (R48S) Attaches to BSTU, RSTU and RDSU 48VDC circuit for up to eight standard telephone circuits. Interface Options: Optionally interfaces to the RSTU and RDSU to extend loop length of standard telephones from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. Required for OPS operation. Stratagy DK Provides two, four, six, or eight VM ports. All of the above Stratagy DK systems use eight station ports of Strata CTX capacity. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-15 Strata CTX Configuration Universal Slot PCBs Table 2-9 CO Line PCBs Strata Net Over VoIP Interface Unit (BIPU-Q1A) Provides 16 IP QSIG channels One 100Base-TX RJ45 port Interface Options: LAN, Virtual Private Network (VPN) Internet, VPN WAN, Intranet. One RS-232 maintenance port QSIG over IP standard protocol (ECMA-336) Voice coding G.711/G.729A Built-in Digital Signal Processor (DSP) (BIPS1A-16) NAT compatible Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit (BVPU) Provides four VoIP Circuits as E&M Tie lines One 10Base-T port One RS-232 maintenance port H.323 standard for Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Interface Options: LAN, Internet, WAN. Caller ID Interface Unit (RCIU2) Provides four Caller ID circuits. With RCIS: eight circuits. Interface Options: Caller ID Interface Subassembly (RCIS) Same as RCIU2. Provides Caller ID LCD display for analog loop or ground start lines with Caller ID. Requires: RCOU, RCOS, RGLU2, RGLU3 or PCOU. Not compatible with T1. Attaches to the RCIU2. Direct Inward Dialing Interface Unit (RDDU) Provides four DID circuits. Interface Options: DID analog lines. Enhanced 911 CAMA Trunk Interface Unit (RMCU/RCMS) E911 CAMA circuits. Provides up to four CAMA trunk circuits. The RMCU/RCMS eliminates the need for connection of adjunct terminal adapter equipment to E911 CAMA trunks. E911 analog CAMA trunks. Requires one or two RCMS PCBs for two or four CAMA lines respectively. CAMA Trunk Subassembly (RCMS) RCMS attaches to RMCU. Provides two E911 CAMA circuits. Up to two RCMSs per RMCU for four CAMA lines max. (One RCMS comes packaged with the RMCU.) Same as RMCU. Ground/Loop Start Interface CO Line Interface Unit (RGLU2, RGLU3) Provides four ground or loop start line circuits. Each can be individually set for ground or loop start operation. Interface Options: Analog loop or ground start analog lines. ISDN S/T-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBSU) Two ISDN BRI S/T point circuits (NT or TE). Each circuit is 2B+1D. (Host for the RBSS.) Interface Options: Network and/or station side. Basic Rate Interface Subassembly (RBSS) Interface Options: Station side only. Attaches to RBSU. One RBSS subassembly per RBSU. Two ISDN BRI, S point circuits (2B+D each). 2-16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Universal Slot PCBs Table 2-9 CO Line PCBs (continued) ISDN U-type Basic Rate Interface Unit (RBUU) Provides two ISDN BRI, U point circuits (2B+D each). Host for the RBUS. Interface Options: Network and/or station side. Network side requires a dealer-supplied NT1 interface. Basic Rate Interface Subassembly (RBUS) Attaches to RBUU. One RBUS subassembly per RBUU. Two ISDN BRI, U point circuits (2B+D each) subassembly for the RBUU. Interface Options: Network and/or station side. ISDN Primary Rate Interface Unit (BPTU1 or RPTU2) Interface Options: ISDN PRI POTS FX Tie (senderized) Tie (cut through) OUTWATS (intra-LATA) OUTWATS (inter-LATA) InWATS QSIG Strata CTX Configuration Provides (1~8B + D), (1~16B + D), or (1~23B + D) channels (lines), depends on system programming. BPTU or RPTU2 is required for QSIG Networking. Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit (RCOU) Provides four CO analog loop start line circuits. With RCOS, provides eight CO analog loop start line circuits. Interface Options: CO analog loop start lines Loop Start CO Line Interface Subassembly (RCOS) Provides four additional Loop Start CO lines. One RCOS subassembly per RCOU. Same as RCOU. T1/DS-1 Interface Unit (RDTU2) Provides T1 (DS1) Interface: 1~8, 1~16, or 1~24 channels (lines), depends on system programming. Interface Options: T1 Loop start lines Ground start lines Tie lines (wink or immediate) DID/DOD lines (wink or immediate) Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit (RRCU) Supports two CTX670 remote cabinets. 62.5 mµ, multi-mode fiber. Remote cabinet not supported by main system reserve power. Tie Line Unit (REMU2) Provides four analog Tie line circuits. Table 2-10 Interface Options: E&M Tie lines Two- or four-wire transmission Type I signaling Type II signaling Immediate start Wink start Option PCBs Option Interface Unit (BIOU) Interface Options: Provides Paging output (600 ohm and three-watt amp), four zone paging relays, three MOH interfaces and four control relays (Night Transfer and BGM mute). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-17 Strata CTX Configuration Functional Block Diagrams Functional Block Diagrams The Functional Block Diagrams show the PCBs and interface connectors used for connecting the station. Up to Four Programmable Serial (RS-232) Port Modular Jacks Available SMDR Call Accounting ACTU Processor PCB BSIS 1 SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Integration Stratagy ES Voice Mail Conference SW with PAD (Optional) MOH/BGM Jack +Volume Control Toshiba Proprietary Soft Key LCD Link AMDS 1 Remote Maintenance Modem Remote CTX WinAdmin PC Hub or LAN ACD (CSTA) Ethernet Interface Relay Contact (Programmable) RCA Jack (600 ohm Page Output) Local CTX WinAdmin DTMF/ABR Receivers 25 Pair 2 License Smart Media Maintenance and Customer Database Data and Speech Highway RJ45 Internet Amplified Page Output (3 Watts) 1 BIOU Interface PCB (one or two per system) Music Source: External Zone Page Background Music ASTU Virtual slot 09 Relay Contacts Door Lock Control Relay MOH/BGM RCA Jacks Night Bell Control Relay MOH/BGM Volume Controls External Zone Page Relays (4 Zones) External Page Amplifier (600 ohm Output) APSU112 BGM Mute Control Relay Cabinet Power Supply ABCS 1 Battery Charger 12V Battery 12V Battery (2 or 4 Batteries) Night Control Relay ABTC - 3m Cable 1 Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Music Source 1: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold Music Source 2: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold Music Source 3: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold Figure 2-5 2-18 Notes 1. Optional. 2. License Control. On this page, all equipment, except Stratagy ES, connected to the system processor PCBs and BIOU PCB is customer-supplied. 6752 CTX100 System Processor and Option Interface PCBs Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Functional Block Diagrams Up to Four Programmable Serial (RS-232) Port Modular Jacks Available SMDR Call Accounting BCTU Processor PCB BSIS SMDI and Stratagy ES Integration Stratagy ES Voice Mail Conference SW with PAD (Optional) AMDS1 Remote Maintenance Modem Internet Hub or LAN Memory Time Switch Smart Media Maintenance and Customer Database RJ45 2 Ethernet Interface License ACD (CSTA) BEXU Memory Processor PCB DTMF/ABR Receivers ( Built-In ) Time Switch Local CTX WinAdmin 25 Pair Amplified Page Output (3 Watts) MOH/BGM RCA Jacks BIOU Interface PCB Strata CTX Configuration Toshiba Proprietary Soft Key LCD Link Remote CTX WinAdmin PC DTMF/ABR Receivers( Built-In ) Data and Speech Highway MOH/BGM Jack +Volume Control 3 Relay Contacts, Page Output MOH/BGM Volume Controls Music Source: External Zone Page Background Music Door Lock Control Relay BPSU672 Night Bell Control Relay Cabinet Power Supply Battery Charger External Zone Page Relays (4 Zones) 12V Battery 12V Battery (2 or 4 Batteries) External Page Amplifier (600 ohm Output) BGM Mute Control Relay Notes 1. Optional. Night Control Relay 2. Optional. See description of License Control earlier in this chapter. Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Music Source 1: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold Music Source 2: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold 3. Optional one or two per system. On this page, all equipment, except Stratagy ES, connected to the system processor PCBs and BIOU PCB is customer-supplied. Music Source 3: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold Figure 2-6 Strata CTX I&M 6942 CTX670 System Processor and Optional Interface PCBs 06/04 2-19 Strata CTX Configuration Functional Block Diagrams CTX Expansion Cabinets Optical Fiber Cable 3 km/(1.86 mi.) RRCU Remote Cabinet Interface Card Remote Location(s) Mode Msg Spdial Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Page Scroll Feature With or without VPN Router or Server Vol Hold With or without VPN Router or Server IP Network BIPU-M2A IP Telephone Remote Node(s) CTX 100Base-TX IP Network BIPU-Q1A BIPU-Q2A Strata Net QSIG Over IP Unit CTX / DK Remote Location(s) Mode Page Scroll BVPU Voice Over IP Unit (4 Circuits) Feature MCK EXTender Msg 10Base-T IP Network BVPU MCK Gateway IP Network BDKU/BDKS or PDKU (CTX100 & CTX670) or Spdial Vol Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Hold Remote Location(s) ADKU (CTX100 only) Digital Telephone RCIU2 Network Demarcation Point 4 Caller ID Circuits (Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks) (Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks) RCIS 4 Caller ID Circuits RCOU3 4 Loop Start Co Lines (Analog) (Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks) Central Office Centrex PBX Common Carrier Other Telephone System E911 Public Safety Answer Point (PSAP) 4 Priviate Networking Lines (Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks) (Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks) RCOS (Optional PCB on RCOU Only): 4 Loop Start CO Lines (Analog) RGLU2, RGLU3 Data and Speech Highway • • • • • • • • 4 Loop or Ground Start CO Lines (Analog) MDF 1 (Two 4-Wire Modular Jacks) RDDU 4 DID CO Lines (Analog) Secondary Protectors 2 (REMU, Four 8-Wire Modular Jacks) 25-pair Amphenol TOSHIBA NDTU Cable DB15 REMU 4 E&M Tie Lines (Analog) RDTU2 or RDTU3? • 2T1 / DS1(24 Channels / Lines) • Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie, DID Channel Service 2 Unit (CSU) PLL Synchronization Circuits RMCU Trunk Circuits for E911 CAMA Line (2-wire Modular Jacks) RCMS 2 Trunk Circuits RCMS 2 Trunk Circuits CAMA Line (2-wire Modular Jacks) Toshiba RPRI-CBL-KIT Channel Service 2 Unit (CSU) BPTU1 or RPTU1 or 2 2 1. RCIU2/RCIS tip/ring cross connected to RCOU, RCOS, or RGLU tip/ring at MDF. 2. Customer-supplied equipment. 3. U, S, T, R, are ISDN reference model termination points. 4. RPTU2 is required for QSIG Networking. NT1 per circuit 3 U ISDN PRI (23B+1D channels) Digital Voice/Data 4 QSIG networks (RPTU2) 8-wire Modular Jacks RBSU ISDN BRI (S/T) 2 Circuits (TE) Voice/Data (2B+D) RBUU ISDN BRI (U) 2 Circuits (NT-1?) Voice/Data (2B+D) RBUS ISDN BRI (U) 2 Circuits (NT-1) Voice/Data (2B+D) 8-wire Modular Jacks 3 T 3 8-wire Modular Jacks U 3 U 8-wire Modular Jacks 6739 Figure 2-7 2-20 CTX100 and CTX670 CO Line Side Functional Block Diagram Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Functional Block Diagrams BWDKU 8 or 16 Digital Telephone Circuits Cordless DKT Digital Telephone (DKT) and Add-on Module Mode Msg Spdial Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Page Scroll Feature Vol Hold BDKU 8 Digital Telephone Circuits and BDKU/BDKS 16 Digital Telephone Circuits Mode ADKU 8 Digital Telephone Circuits (max). Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT) Connects audio path to Attd Console Handset 4 BATI Digital Telephone with BPCI-DI 4 1 Pair Modular Cord Page Scroll Feature TAPI PC Msg 1 Spdial Vol Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Hold RS-232 Cable DDCB (CTX100 only) MDFB Door Phones and Lock Controls 8 Digital Telephone Circuits Mode Transformer RDSU Music on-hold source (up to 8) 4 Data and Speech Highway R48S (Option PCB) 2 Standard Telephone Circuits (Option PCB, RDSU/RSTU3 Only) -48 Volt Loop Supply Spdial Mic Redial Cnf/Trn Scroll Feature Digital Telephone with DSS Console Vol 4 Digital Telephone Circuits 2 Standard Telephone Circuits RSTS Msg Spkr Page Mode Page Scroll Hold Strata CTX Configuration 4 PDKU2 Feature Digital Telephone Msg Spdial Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Vol Hold Standard Telephone Stratagy ES Voice Mail VM Ports iES32 4~32 Voice Mail Circuits (Programmable) PC 1 RS-232 Cables IVP8 2~8 Voice Mail Circuits (Programmable) Modem Auto Attendant (Dealer supplied) ASTU (CTX100 only) 2 Standard Telephone Circuits 1-pair Modular Cords Fax 1 2 RSTU3/BSTU 8 Standard Telephone Circuits RBSU 2B+1D/Circuit (2-NT Circuits) R48S (Option PCB, RDSU/RSTU3 Only) -48 Volt Loop Supply DPFT Power Failure Transfer Unit Power Failure 1 Standard Telephone (8 max.) Secondary Protector 1 RBSS Off-premises Station 2B+1D/Circuit (2-NT Circuits) PC 3 S R 3 COM Port TA 3 S RBUU 2B+1D/Circuit (2-LT Circuits) RBUS 2B+1D/Circuit (2-LT Circuits) U U 3 3 1 ISDN Telephone (TE-1, S-Type) 1 PC with Video Card (TE-1, U-Type) ISDN Telephone (TE-1, U-Type) Modular Jacks 6966 1. Customer-supplied equipment. Main Distribution Frame (MDF) 2. RSTU2 or above is required for standard telephone message waiting lamp. 3. U, S, T, R are ISDN reference model termination points. 4. PDKU and RDSU should only be used for 2000-series digital telephones. They do not support all of the 3000-series digital telephone features, including LCD. The PDKU also does not support BPCI, BATI and the CTX Attendant Console. Figure 2-8 Strata CTX I&M CTX100 and CTX670 Station Side Functional Block Diagram 06/04 2-21 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet Description Worksheet Description These configuration worksheets cover Strata CTX telephones, PCBs and cabinets; they do not cover other peripheral equipment requirements. Knowledge of all customer telephone requirements is needed to complete the worksheets. These include all telephone sets, CO line types and Strata CTX system feature options for the main location (with the Strata CTX Base Cabinet) and each remote location. A set of worksheets for the main system location and a separate set of worksheets for each remote location must be completed. CTX670 Remote Cabinet Configuration Considerations Several items must be considered when configuring a CTX670 system with Remote Cabinets. (CTX100 systems do not support remote cabinet configurations). 1. Each location must be configured independently. Separate worksheets are needed for each location to break down the line, trunk and service circuits by locations. Use the rules provided in this chapter to determine the required quantities of PCBs. 2. Estimate the number of cabinets according to normal configuration worksheets. 3. Account for RRCU PCBs at each remote location (see Table 2-52 on page 2-38 in Worksheet 6). An RRCU PCB can support up to two Expansion Cabinets at one remote location. For example, 18 PCBs at one remote location would require two Expansion Cabinets and one RRCU card for the remote location. 4. If necessary, adjust the number of cabinets required. The maximum number of Expansion Cabinets per system is six. The maximum number of remote locations is also six. The maximum number of cabinets supported by one fiber connection is two. 5. Determine the total number of RRCU PCBs required at all remote locations (see Table 2-52 on page 2-38 in Worksheet 6). Add the same number of RRCU cards to the configuration of the Base Cabinet. 6. Validate the configuration. A valid configuration answers “yes” to the following questions. • Do all cabinets (local and remote) comply with power limitations? The RRCU has a power factor of 4.0. See Table 2-58 on page 2-43 in Worksheet 7. • Are there six or fewer remote locations? • Are there six or fewer RRCU cards in the Base Cabinet? 7. Order one cabinet cover (BCTC) and cable mesh shield (B50MT) for each remote location. 8. Digital Trunks – A Remote Cabinet can support all PCBs that can be installed in a local Expansion Cabinet, including digital trunk cards. However, the system cannot derive network clock synchronization from a digital trunk installed in a remote cabinet. This requires a digital trunk installed in the Base Cabinet or in a local Expansion Cabinet connected to the Base by a standard ribbon cable. For each Remote Cabinet location, local trunks may be required for correct 911 service. Component Worksheets Fill in Worksheets 1~8 for each location to determine system cabinet and PCB requirements for: Customer Name _____________________ Location Description_____________________ Main Location _______________ 2-22 Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4___ 5___ 6___ Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 1: Toshiba DKT and IP Telephones Worksheet 1: Toshiba DKT and IP Telephones Main Location _______________ Item# Remote Location 1___ 2____ 3____ 4____ 5____ 6____ Digital Telephone Equipment Required for Cabinet Number __________ DT01 DKT3010-S - 10 button Digital Speakerphone (gray) DT02 DKT3010-S (W) - 10 button Digital Speakerphone (white) DT03 DKT3010-SD - 10 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (gray) DT04 DKT3010-SD (W) - 10 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (white) DKT3020-S - 20 button Digital Speakerphone (gray) DT06 DKT3020-S (W) - 20 button Digital Speakerphone (white) DT07 DKT3020-SD - 20 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (gray) DT08 DKT3020-SD (W) - 20 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (white) DT09 DKT3014-SDL - 14 button Digital with large LCD (gray) DT10 DKT3014-SDL - 14 button Digital with large LCD (white) DT11 DDSS3060 - 60 button Digital Direct station Select Console (gray) DT12 DDSS3060 - 60 (W) button Digital Direct station Select Console (white) DT13 IPT1020-SD - 20 button IP Telephone (gray) DT14 DKT2010-S -10 button Digital Speakerphone (gray) DT15 DKT2010-S (W) -10 button Digital Speakerphone (white) DT16 DKT2010-SD -10 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (gray) DT17 DKT2010-SD (W) -10 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (white) DT18 DKT2020-S -20 button Digital Speakerphone (gray) DT19 DKT2020-S (W) -20 button Digital Speakerphone (white) DT20 DKT2020-SD -20 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (gray) DT21 DKT2020-SD (W) -20 button Digital Speakerphone with LCD (white) DT22 DKT2020-FDSP -20 button Digital Full-Duplex Speakerphone with LCD (gray) DT23 DDSS2060- 60 button Digital Direct Station Select Console (gray) DT24 DDSS2060 (W) -60 button Digital Direct Station Select Console (white) DT25 DDCB - Digital Door Phone Control Box (supports 3 MDFB Door phones) DT26 Pre-wired Digital Telephone Ports (allocates spare, hot wired digital ports) DT27 DKT2204-CT - Digital Cordless Phone (digital spread spectrum - sharing port with DKT)1 DT28 DKT2204-CT - Digital Cordless Phone (digital spread spectrum - stand alone) DT29 DKT2304-CT - Digital Cordless Phone (digital narrow band sharing port with DKT)1 DT30 DKT2304-CT - Digital Cordless Phone (digital narrow band - stand alone) DT31 Total Digital ports required (Add DT01 Qty. ~ DT29 Qty.) DT32 Total BDKU, BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS or ADKU PCBs/Slots required (DT30, Qty./8 or DT30 Qty./16)2 DT33 Total RDSU PCBs/Slots required to add 4 DKT/2 SLT Devices DT34 Total RDSU/RSTS PCBs/Slots required to add 4 DKT/4 SLT Equipment Item IP Telephone IPT01 IPT1020-SD IPT02 Total BIPU-M2A PCBs/slots required (IPT01 quantity/16) Strata CTX Configuration DT05 Qty Qty 1. Do not count shared ports into the Total (DT20) BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS ports required. 2. Round up these totals to the nearest whole number. Important! Strata CTX I&M 06/04 The maximum number of DKTs per cabinet is 80. This is a power factor limitation (see Worksheet 7) 2-23 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 2: Standard Telephone, Stratagy DK, IVP8 Miscellaneous Digital Telephone Equipment (See Table 2-52) DT34 RFDM - External Microphone for DKT2020-FDSP Full Duplex Digital Speakerphone DT35 MDFB - Door Phone connected to Digital Door Phone Control Box (requires 1DDCB output) DT36 Door Lock connected to Digital Door Phone Control Box (requires 1DDCB output) DT37 BVSU - Interface for Digital Telephones that require Speaker OCA (DKT3000 and DKT2000) DT38 BPCI - PC/TAPI Interface for digital telephone (gray) (DKT3000) DT39 Secondary Protectors for any Digital station devices located off-premise. DT40 BHEU - Telephone Headset Interface (DKT2000 and DKT3000) DT41 DADM3020 - 20-button Add-on module (gray) DT42 DADM3020(w) - 20-button Add-on module (white) DT43 DADM2020 -20 button Digital Add-on Module (gray) DT44 DADM2020 (W) -20 button Digital Add-on Module (white) DT45 DADM3120 - 20 button IP or DKT Add-on module (gray) Worksheet 2: Standard Telephone, Stratagy DK, IVP8 Main Location _______________ Item# Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4____5___ 6____ Dealer Supplied Standard Telephone (SLT) Equipment Required ST1 Standard Tone-Dial Telephone ST3 External Modem and/or Fax Devices ST4 External Voice Mail Ports to support Stratagy or other VM (not for Stratagy DK) ST5 Other Devices, not listed, requiring standard telephone circuit interface ST6 Alternate BGM Source connected to Std.Tel. port (allocates ASTU, BSTU, RSTU ports) Qty ST7 Pre-wired Standard Telephone ports (to allocate spare, hot wired, standard tel. ports) ST8 Total ASTU, BSTU, RSTU PCBs/Slots required (ST1~ST9, QTY/8)* ST9 Total RDSU PCBs/Slots required to add 4 DKT/2 SLT Devices ST10 Total RDSU/RSTS PCBs/Slots required to add 4 DKT/4 SLT Equipment ST11 R48S PCB for up to 8 Standard Telephone Off Premise Station (OPS) circuits ST12 Secondary Protector for Standard telephone equipment located off premise ST13 DPFT, Power Failure Transfer Unit for up to 8 standard telephone/loop start lines ST14 Each Stratagy Voice Mail PCB provides up to 8 Voice Mail ports and uses 8 ports of system capacity. No other PCBs are required to interface with Stratagy DK or IVP8. (One allowed per CTX system.) Miscellaneous Standard Telephone (SLT) Equipment Required Stratagy DK or IVP8 Equipment Required 2-24 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 3: CO Line Worksheet 3: CO Line Main Location _______________ Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4____5___ 6____ Line Qty /X= PCB Qty PCB Name Slots Required1 Item # CO Line Type Required CO1 Analog Loop Start CO Lines with RCOU /4= RCOU CO2 Analog Loop Start CO Lines with RCOU/RCOS /8= RCOU/RCOS CO3 Analog Ground Start CO Lines with RGLU /4= RGLU 1 Slot/RGLU = 1 Slot/RCIU = 1 Slot/RCOU = 1 Slot/RCOU/RCOS = Caller ID Line interface with RCIU /4= RCIU CO5 Caller ID Line interface with RCIU/RCIS /8= RCIU/RCIS CO6 BVPU VoIP Circuits 2 /4= BVPU CO7 Analog Tie Lines with REMU /4= REMU 1 Slot/REMU = CO8 Analog DID Lines with RDDU /4= RDDU 1 Slot/RDDU = CO9 T1 Digital Lines with RDTU2 /24= RDTU2 2 Slots/RDTU2 = CO10 T1 Digital Lines with RDTU2 /16= RDTU2 1 Slot/RDTU2 = CO11 T1 Digital Lines with RDTU2 /8= RDTU2 1 Slots/RDTU2 = 1 Slot/RCIU/IS = 1 Slot/BVPU = CO12 IP with BIPU-Q1A /8= BIPU-Q1A 1 Slot/BIPU-Q1A = CO13 IP with BIPU-Q1A /16= BIPU-Q1A 1 Slot/BIPU-Q1A = CO14 ISDN and/or QSIG with RPTU or BPTU /23 RPTU2 1 Slot/RPTU2 = CO15 ISDN and/or QSIG with RPTU or BPTU /16 RPTU2 1 Slot/RPTU2 = CO16 ISDN and/or QSIG with RPTU or BPTU /8 RPTU2 1 Slot/RPTU2 = CO17 ISDN BRI Circuit3, U-type with RBUU /2= RBUU 1 Slot/RBUU = Strata CTX Configuration CO4 1 CO18 ISDN BRI Circuits , U-type with RBUU/ RBUS /4= RBUU/RBUS CO19 ISDN BRI Circuits1, S/T-type with RBSU /2= RBSU /4= RBSU/RBSS /4= RMCU/RCMS 1 Slot/RMCU/RMMS= Circuits1, CO20 ISDN BRI RBSU/RBSS CO21 E911 CAMA Circuits (RMCS/RCMS=2 circuits, add another RCMS for 4 circuits S/T-type with CO22 1 Slot/RBUU/US = 1 Slot/RBSU = 1 Slot/RBSU/RBSS = Total Slots required for line PCBs Miscellaneous CO Line Equipment CO23 Dealer-supplied NT-1 S/T BRI Line Circuits Number of NT-1s No slots required. CO24 Dealer-supplied CSU for BPTU or RPTU and/or RDTU2 Number of CSUs No slots required. CO25 Cable kits for BPTU or RPTU2 Number of RPRI-CBL-KIT No slots required. CO26 Cable Kits for BPTU or RPTU2 Number of RPRI-CBL-KIT No slots required. CO27 Secondary Protectors For RDDU and REMU Number of Protectors. No slots required. 1. Round up fractions to the nearest whole number. 2. Maximum of five PCBs with CTX670 and two BVPU PCBs with CTX100 because of FCC Part 15 emissions requirement. 3. Each ISDN BRI circuit can be configured to provide two CO lines or interface to one BRI station. Each circuit uses 2 CO lines and 2 station ports of system capacity regardless of how it is configured (line or station). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-25 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 4: Page/MOH/Control Relay Worksheet 4: Page/MOH/Control Relay Up to two BIOU interfaces can be installed to provide the following interfaces: Main Location _______________ Feature Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4___ 5___ 6___ 1 BIOU 2 BIOUs Page Zone Relays 4 8 Control Relays1 4 8 MOH/BGM Device Interface2 Page Outputs3 3 6 1 2 Enter No. of Required BIOUs 1. The CTX100 processor provides one built-in control relay. 2. CTX100 and CTX670 processors each provide one built-in MOH/BGM interface (RCA jack). 3. CTX100 processor provides one built-in 600 ohm page output. Each BIOU provides a 600 ohm and 3-watt page output on the CTX670 only. 4. Control relays provide closures for a door lock, page mute, night service and night bell contact. Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots Write in the PCBs installed in each cabinet slot in the Cabinet Diagram below. Use the PCB placement guideline below to place PCBs in the correct slots. A number of tables provide CTX100 capacities and configuration examples in this section. CTX Base Cabinet Slots ACTU S101 S102 S103 CTX Expansion Cabinet Slots S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 (AETS___) (AMDS__) (ARCS__) (BSIS__) S109 (ASTU__) For cost-effective configurations, try to fit all PCBs into the CTX100 Base Cabinet. This allows up to 16 loop start COs by 32 DKTs, and up to 24 T1 or PRI COs by 40 DKTs. • If loop start CO and DKT combinations are required, use CTX100-ECONOPKG (RCOU, ADKU with common equipment) for up to four CO by eight DKTs or CTX100-ECONOTWO (two RCOU, two ADKU with common equipment) for eight CO lines by 16 DKTs or greater. Otherwise, use CTX100-0X8PKG. • If more than 16 channels are required on an RDTU, BPTU, RPTU, place PCB in S103. Slot 104 is available for another PCB. • BIPU-M2A, BIPU-M1A or BIPU-Q1A can be installed in any slot to provide 16 channels. • If 9~16 DKTs require Speaker OCA, place BDKU/BDKS PCBs in S103 if it is available. • Place other required PCBs according to the guidelines herein. • Consult the following tables of maximum system capacity slot configurations as guidelines for PCB slot placement. • Check system capacities in Tables 2-3~2-7 to confirm that the features to be used are within limitations. 2-26 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots Notes 1. Always check the cabinet power factors using Worksheet 7 to make sure the installed PCBs and telephones do not exceed the power factor limitations. 2. ACTU processor optional subassembly functions (see “CTX100 Processor Optional Subassemblies” on page 2-3). Any PCB plus its PCB subassembly can be installed in any slot with the exception of RDTU, BPTU, RPTU PCBs that support more than 16 channels, and BDKU/BDKS PCBs that support Speaker OCA. 3. RDTU, BPTU, RPTU PCBs can be placed in any odd numbered slot using the following rules: • If RDTU, BPTU or RPTU is placed in Slots 101, 105, or 107 with 8 or 16 channels, another PCB can still be installed in the next slot; however, if 17~24 channels are required the next even slot must be vacant. • RDTU and/or BPTU or RPTU can be placed in any odd slot. If more than 16 channels are required, the next slot must be vacant, except if the PCB is placed in slot 103, which provides up to 32 time slots for RDTU, BPTU, or RPTU. Max. BPTU or RDTU channels = 64; max. RPTU channels = 48. Strata CTX Configuration • If RDTU, BPTU or RPTU is placed in Slot 103 (preferred) with 8, 16 or 24 channels, another PCB can still be installed in S104. • If only 16 B channels of PRI are needed, another card can be installed in the next slot. The position of D-channels can still be set to the 24th channel because the data of the D-channel is passed through the data highway, not the PCM highway. The position of the D-channel doesn’t affect the installation of cards in the CTX. 4. Digital telephone PCBs that support Speaker OCA can be placed in slots using the following rules: • If ADKU, BDKU (without BDKS) or PDKU must support Speaker OCA, it can be installed in any slot; another PCB can be installed in the next even slot. • If a BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS PCB must support Speaker OCA it can only be installed in Slot 103; another PCB can be installed in S104. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-27 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples The tables in this section summarize the maximum capacities of digital telephones with various types of line circuits. A PCB placement diagram for each numbered configuration follows tables. Digital Telephones and Loop Start Lines With or Without Caller ID Table 2-11 CTX100 Base Cabinet with Analog, Loop Start Lines 4 Universal Slots 40 Stations (Max.) 24 CO lines (Max.) 44 Stations + Analog loop start lines combined (Max.) Table No. Stations 2-12 40 2-13 32 8 (all can have Caller ID) 2-14 32 16 (none can have Caller ID) 2-15 16 16 (8 can have Caller ID) 2-16 1 24 Analog loop start lines 4 (none can have Caller ID) 8 (none can have Caller ID) 1. Using ADKU. Table 2-12 CTX100 Base: 40 stations, 4 loop start lines, 0 CLID S101 S102 S1031 S104 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS ADKU RCOU 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 DKTs 4 lines 1. S103 is only 8 DKTs and S104 is only 4 lines because of cabinet power factor 2-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples Table 2-13 CTX100 Base: 32 stations, 8 loop start lines, 8 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 CLID Table 2-14 CTX100 Base: 32 stations, 16 loop start lines, 0 CLID S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines Table 2-15 CTX100 Base: 16 stations, 16 loop start lines, 8 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 8 CLID Table 2-16 Strata CTX Configuration S101 CTX100 Base: 24 stations with ADKU, 8 loop start lines, 0 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 ADKU ADKU ADKU RCOU/ RCOS 8 DKTs 8 DKTs 8 DKTs 8 lines Analog Loop Start Lines with or without Caller ID Table 2-17 CTX100 Base and Expansion Cabinet with Analog Loop Start Lines 8 Universal Slots 72 Stations (Max.) 56 CO lines (Max.) 92 Stations + Analog Loop Start Lines combined (Max.) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Table No. Stations Analog loop start lines 2-18 72 20 (none can have Caller ID) 2-19 72 16 (8 can have Caller ID) 2-20 64 32 (none can have Caller ID) 2-21 64 24 (8 can have Caller ID) 2-22 64 16 (all can have Caller ID) 2-23 48 40 (none can have Caller ID) 2-24 48 32 (8 can have Caller ID) 2-25 48 24 (16 can have Caller ID) 2-26 32 48 (none can have Caller ID) 2-27 32 40 (8 can have Caller ID) 2-28 32 32(16 can have Caller ID) 2-29 32 24 (24 can have Caller ID) 2-30 16 32 (24 can have Caller ID) 2-29 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples Table 2-18 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 72 stations, 20 loop start lines, 0 CLID S101 S102 S1031 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU ADKU BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 4 lines 8 DKTs 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 1. S103 is only 4 lines and S104 is only 8 DKTs because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-19 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 72 stations, 16 loop start lines, 8 CLID S101 S102 S103 S1041 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCIU/RCIS ADKU BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 CLID 8 DKTs 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 1. S104, only 8 DKTs because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-20 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines Table 2-21 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 64 stations, 24 loop start lines, 8 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 CLID 8 lines 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines Table 2-22 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 64 stations, 16 loop start lines, 16 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 CLID 8 lines 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 CLID 8 lines Table 2-23 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 48 stations, 40 loop start lines, 0 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines Table 2-24 2-30 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 64 stations, 32 loop start lines, 0 CLID CTX100 Base & Expansion: 48 stations, 32 loop start lines, 8 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples Table 2-25 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 48 stations, 24 loop start lines, 16 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 CLID 8 lines 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines Table 2-26 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 32 stations, 48 loop start lines, 0 CLID S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines Table 2-27 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 32 stations, 40 loop start lines, 8 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines Table 2-28 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 32 stations, 32 loop start lines, 16 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines Table 2-29 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 32 stations, 24 loop start lines, 24 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 CLID 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines Table 2-30 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 16 stations, 32 loop start lines, 24 CLID S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS RCIU/RCIS RCOU/ RCOS 16 DKTs 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines 8 CLID 8 lines Strata CTX I&M Strata CTX Configuration S101 06/04 2-31 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples CTX100 Base Only: Digital Telephones and T1 and/or PRI lines RPTU2 (PRI) is limited to 48 channels; RDTU2 and BPTU (T1) are limited to 64 channels. Table 2-31 CTX100 CTX Base Cabinet with T1 and/or PRI lines 4 Universal Slots 40 Stations (Max.) 48 lines (Max.) 64 Stations + T1 and/or PRI or IP-QSIG lines combined (Max.) Table No. Stations T1 and/or PRI lines 2-32 40 24/23 2-33 32 40/40 2-34 16 48/46 Table 2-32 CTX100 Base: 40 stations and 24 T1 and/or PRI lines S101 S102 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs S103 S1041 RxTU22 ADKU 24 lines 8 DKTs 1. S104, only 8 DKTs because of cabinet power factor. 2. RxTU2 could be RDTU2 (T1), RPTU2 or BPTU (PRI). Table 2-33 CTX100 Base: 32 stations and 40 T1 and/or PRI lines S101 S102 RxTU2 16/15 lines BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTS S103 RxTU21 24/23 lines S104 BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTS 1. RxTU2 could be RDTU2 (T1), RPTU2 or BPTU (PRI). Table 2-34 CTX100 Base: 16 stations and 48 T1 and/or PRI lines S101 S102 RxTU2 Vacant (Shared) 24/23lines S103 RxTU21 24/23 lines S104 BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTS 1. RxTU2 could be RDTU2 (T1), RPTU2 or BPTU (PRI). 2-32 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples CTX100 Base & Expansion: Digital Telephones and T1 and/or PRI lines 8 Universal Slots 72 Stations (Max.) 64 lines (Max.) 112 Stations + T1 and/or PRI or IP-QSIG lines combined (Max.) T1 and/or PRI lines1 72 40/40 64 48/48 56 56/48 48 64/48 Strata CTX Configuration Stations 1. PRI lines are limited to 48B channels. Table 2-35 CTX100 Base and Expansion: 72 stations and 40 T1 and/or PRI lines S101 S102 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs S103 S1041 S105 RxTU2 ADKU RxTU22 24 lines 8 DKTs 16 lines S106 S107 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs S108 1. S104, only 8 DKTs because of cabinet power factor. 2. RxTU2 could be RDTU2 (T1), RPTU2 or BPTU (PRI). Table 2-36 CTX100 Base and Expansion: 56 stations and 56 T1 and/or PRI lines S101 S102 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs S103 S1041 S105 RxTU2 ADKU RxTU22 24 lines 8 DKTs S106 Vacant (Shared) 24 lines S107 RDTU2 S108 BDKU/ BDKS 8 lines 16 DKTs S107 S108 RDTU2 ADKU 1. S104, only 8 DKTs because of cabinet power factor. 2. RxTU2 could be RDTU2 (T1), RPTU2 or BPTU (PRI). Table 2-37 CTX100 Base and Expansion: 48 stations and 64 T1 and/or PRI lines S101 S102 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTS 16 DKTS S103 S1041 S105 RxTU2 ADKU RxTU22 24 lines 8 DKTS S106 Vacant (Shared) 24 lines 16 lines 8 DKTs 1. S104, only 8 DKTs because of cabinet power factor. 2. RxTU2 could be RDTU2 (T1), RPTU2 or BPTU (PRI). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-33 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples CTX100 Base Only: Digital Telephones and Analog Tie, DID, and/or Ground Start Lines Table 2-38 CTX100 Base Cabinet with Analog Tie, DID and /or Ground Start Lines 4 Universal Slots 40 Stations (Max.) 16 CO lines (Max.) 40 Stations + Analog Tie, DID, Ground Start Lines combined (Max.) Analog Tie, DID, and/or Ground Start Lines Table No. Stations 2-39 40 4 line (Ground Start only) 2-40 32 8 lines (4 Tie/DID max.). 2-41 24 8 line any type 2-42 16 12 line any type 2-43 0 16 line any type Table 2-39 CTX100 Base: 40 stations, 4 Ground Start Lines S101 S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS ADKU RGLU1 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 DKTs 4 lines 1. RGLU ground start lines only because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-40 CTX100 Base: 32 stations, 4 Tie or DID and 4 Ground Start Lines S101 S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RxxU1 RGLU2 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie) or RDDU (DID). 2. RGLU ground start lines only because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-41 CTX100 Base: 24 stations, 8 Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines S101 S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS ADKU RxxU1 RxxU 16 DKTs 8 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. 2-34 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples Table 2-42 CTX100 Base: 16 stations, 12 Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines S101 S102 S103 S104 BDKU/ BDKS RxxU RxxU1 RxxU 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. Table 2-43 CTX100 Base: 0 stations, 16 Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines S102 S103 S104 RxxU RxxU RxxU 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines Strata CTX Configuration S101 RxxU1 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. CTX100: Analog Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines Table 2-44 CTX100 Base and Expansion Cabinet with Analog Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines 8 Universal Slots 72 Stations (Max.) 32 CO lines (Max.) 80 Stations + Analog Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines combined (Max.) Table 2-45 Table No. Stations Analog Tie, DID, and/or Ground Start Lines 2-45 72 12 lines (4 Tie/DID max.) 2-46 64 16 lines (8 Tie/DID max.) 2-47 56 16 lines (12 Tie/DID max.) 2-48 48 16 lines any type 2-49 48 20 lines (16 Tie/DID max.) 2-50 32 24 lines any type 2-51 16 28 lines any type CTX100 Base & Expansion: 72 stations, 4 Tie or DID and 8 Ground Start Lines S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS ADKU RGLU2 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RxxU1 RGLU2 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 8 DKTs 4 lines 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. 2. RGLU can not be substituted with REMU or RDDU because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-46 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 64 stations, 8 tie or DID and 8 Ground Start Lines S101 S102 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 RxxU RGLU2 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RxxU1 RGLU2 4 lines 4 lines 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. 2. RGLU can not be substituted with REMU or RDDU because of cabinet power factor. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-35 Strata CTX Configuration CTX100 Max. Capacity Configuration Examples Table 2-47 S101 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 56 stations, 12 Tie or DID and 4 Ground Start Lines S102 BDKU/ BDKS ADKU 16 DKTs 8 DKTs S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 RxxU RxxU BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS RxxU1 RGLU2 4 lines 4 lines 16 DKTs 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. 2. RGLU can not be substituted with REMU or RDDU because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-48 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 48 stations, 16 Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS ADKU RxxU1 RxxU BDKU/ BDKS ADKU RxxU RxxU 16 DKTs 8 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 16 DKTs 8 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. Table 2-49 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 48 stations, 16 Tie or DID and 4 Ground Start Lines S101 S102 BDKU/ BDKS BDKU/ BDKS 16 DKTs 16 DKTs S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 RxxU1 RGLU2 BDKU/ BDKS RxxU RxxU RxxU 4 lines 4 lines 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. 2. RGLU can not be substituted with REMU or RDDU because of cabinet power factor. Table 2-50 S101 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 32 stations, 24 Tie, DID and/or Ground Start Lines S102 BDKU/ BDKS RxxU1 16 DKTs 4 lines S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 RxxU RxxU BDKU/ BDKS RxxU RxxU RxxU 4 lines 4 lines 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. Table 2-51 CTX100 Base & Expansion: 16 stations, 28 lines S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 BDKU/ BDKS RxxU1 RxxU RxxU RxxU RxxU RxxU RxxU 16 DKTs 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 4 lines 1. RxxU can be REMU (Tie), RDDU (DID), or RGLU ground start lines. 2-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots The cabinet diagram below enables you to write in the PCBs installed in each cabinet slot. Use the PCB placement guideline below to place PCBs in the correct slots. Fill in the PCBs that go into each slot from the PCB quantities determined in the worksheets on the previous pages and the information provided in this worksheet. After completing Worksheet 6, Worksheet 7 must be completed to verify that the cabinet power factors do not exceed 85. Main Location _______________ Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4___ 5___ 6___ CTX Cabinet Slots Base B102 BEXU BCTU BECU BBCU S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 (AMDS, BSIS) (BEXS, BSIS) (BBMS) Cab 2 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207* S208* S209* S210* S301 S302 S303 S304 S305 S306 S307* S308* S309* S310* S401 S402 S403 S404 S405 S406 S407* S408* S409* S410* S501 S502 S503 S504 S505 S506 S507* S508* S509* S510* S601 S602 S603 S604 S605 S606 S607* S608* S609* S610* S701 S702 S703 S704 S705 S706 S707* S708* S709* S710* PCB Type Cab 3 PCB Type Cab 4 PCB Type Cab 5 PCB Type Cab 6 PCB Type Cab 7 Strata CTX Configuration PCB Type B101 PCB Type Notes ● ● ● B101/B102 – Main processor slots. AMDS, BEXS, BBMS, BSIS are optional subassembly PCBs (see “CTX100 Processor Optional Subassemblies” on page 2-3). Cabinet slots marked with * provide 8 time slots; all other slots provide 16 time slots. BIPU-M and BIPU-Q can be installed in slots with 16 time slots only. Slots that provide 8 time slots (marked with *) do not support BIPU cards. BIPU PCBs can only be placed in 16 channel slots. Important! ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● If a BIPU-M or BIPU-Q is installed RCOU1A, RCOS1A RDDU1A, RGLU1A, RGLU2A, and two-wire REMU cards should not be installed to avoid excessive Echo Return Loss (ERL). Any combination of up to 96 (basic processor) or 264 (expanded processor) RPTU, BPTU and RDTU channels can be installed in the CTX670. RDTU, BPTU and RPTU PCBs can only be placed in odd slots of the Base Cabinet and slots S_01, S_03, and S_05 in any Expansion Cabinet. If 17 or more channels are used, the next highest slot adjacent to the RDTU, BPTU, or RPTU slot cannot be used. Slots adjacent to 8 or 16 channel RDTU, BPTU or RPTU PCBs can be used. The maximum number of RDTU and/or RPTU cards is determined by the CTX system line capacity. Any number of line interface cards (RDTU, RPTU, BPTU, RCOU/RCOS, REMU, RDDU, RGLU, BIPU-Q1A) can be installed, providing that the quantity of lines and channels do not exceed the CTX system’s line capacity. If only 16 B channels of PRI are needed, another card can be installed in the next slot. The position of D-channels can still be set to the 24th channel because the data of the D-channel is passed through the data highway, not the PCM highway. The position of the D-channel doesn’t affect the installation of cards in the CTX. Network clock signals can only be derived from digital trunk PCBs, such as the RDTU and RPTU, that are installed in the Base Cabinet (Master) location. Do not install these digital trunk cards into the Remote Cabinets. BDKU, PDKU, RDSU without Speaker OCA can be in any available slot in any cabinet. BDKU, PDKU, RDSU with Speaker OCA can be in any available slots in the Base and S_01~S_06 in all Exp. Cabs. BDKU/BDKS or BWDKU without Speaker OCA can be in any available slots in the Base and S_01~S_06 in the Expansion Cabs. It is recommended you not install Speaker OCA telephones on the BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS. If you do, it must be in an odd slot and the next slot must be vacant. If the BWDKU is placed in slots 7~10, it must be set for 8 circuits with PCB jumper and in Program 100. Maximum 80 digital telephones per shelf due to the Power Factor restriction. For more details, see the following Placement Guidelines section. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-37 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots PCB Placement Guidelines Install the RRCU PCBs in the Base Cabinet first. Station, line and option PCBs can be mixed in cabinets in any pattern. Do not skip slots except for vacant slots that provide RDTU, BPTU or RPTU capacity. Also, do not skip slots except for vacant slots that provide for BBKU/BDKS with Speaker OCA. Refer to Tables 2-54 and 2-55. Toshiba recommends placing the RDTU, BPTU or RPTU, BWDKU and BDKU/BDKS PCBs first because they have special placement rules. Use the following numbered sequence as a guide to installing the PCBs. Important! When placing PCBs, do not install more than five BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS PCBs in the same cabinet. Five BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS PCBs support 80 digital telephones, which brings the cabinet power factor to 82.25. Adding more PCBs of any type to a cabinet that has five BWDKU or BDKU/BDKS PCBs may cause the cabinet to exceed its power factor (85 max.). See Worksheet 7. Step 1: Processor PCBs • BCTU (slot B102) or the older BECU (Slot B101)/ BBCU (slot B102), are required for system operation. • The BCTU will support up to two cabinets without the BEXU. With the BEXU, up to 7 cabinets are supported. • The BECU/BBCU supports up to two cabinets without the BEXS/BBMS expansion subassemblies. BEXS and BBMS subassembly PCBs are required for 3 to 7 cabinet systems. • BSIS subassembly PCB is required for SMDR and/or SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Voice Mail RS-232 interface. Note The BECU/BBCU and BCTU is licensed for 64 ports and four DTMF receivers from the factory. If more capacity is required additional licenses must be uploaded to the processor. See “Worksheet 9 – Software Licenses” on page 2-54. Step 2: Remote Cabinet PCBs • RRCU PCBs installed in the main location must be placed in Base Cabinet slots S102~S108 in any order. Before installing other PCBs make sure there is a Base Cabinet slot available for each RRCU PCB needed. An RRCU may occupy a vacant slot adjacent to RDTU, BPTU or RPTU. An RRCU PCB in a remote location can support one or two remote cabinets and can be installed in any slot of either cabinet. The number of RRCU PCBs required in the Base and Remote Cabinet locations is shown in Table 2-52: Table 2-52 Main Processor PCB/ Remote Cabinet Configuration RRCU PCBs Needed in Base Cabinet 2-38 Remote Cabinet Configuration RRCU PCBs Needed at Remote Location (s) 1 1 or 2 Remote Cabinets in one location 1 2 2 to 4 Remote Cabinets in two locations or 3 to 4 Remote cabinets in one location. 2 3 3 cabinets if cabinets are in separate remote locations. 3 4 4 cabinets if cabinets are in separate remote locations. 4 5 5 cabinets if cabinets are in separate remote locations. 5 6 6 cabinets if cabinets are in separate remote locations. 6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots • Cables are provided according to the connectors on the RRCU card to which they are attached. See Table 2-53 for connector information. Table 2-53 Remote Cabinet Data Cables and Connectors RRCU Connectors Data Cables BDCL1A-MS1 M1 S1 X X M2 BDCL1A-M2 S2 X BDCL1A-S2 X X = Applies to connector. • Up to two BIOU PCBs can be installed in any local/remote cabinet slot, except the BIOU may not occupy a vacant slot adjacent to RDTU, BPTU or RPTU. See “Worksheet 4: Page/MOH/ Control Relay” on page 2-26 for BIOU functions. Strata CTX Configuration Step 3: BIOU Interface PCB Step 4: T1 Digital Line PCBs • See Worksheet 3: CO Line to determine RDTU PCB requirements. • RDTU must be placed in designated slots as shown in Table 2-54. The RDTU PCB can provide up to 16 or 24 T1 lines. The RDTU slot provides 16 T1 lines, an additional eight lines requires that the cabinet slot adjacent to RDTU be vacant. Up to 11 RDTU PCBs can be installed in a fully expanded system Table 2-54 RDTU PCB Cabinet Slot Configuration T1 Channels Needed per Cabinet Slots Needed 1~16 1 17~24 2 RDTU PCBs Needed1 RDTU cabinet slot placement1 Base Cabinet 24~40 3 41~48 4 49~64 5 65~72 6 1~16 1 17~24 2 1 2 3 S103-RDTU S104-vacant2 S105-RDTU S106-vacant2 S107-RDTU S108-vacant2 Second through seventh cabinets 25~40 3 41~48 4 49~64 5 65~72 6 1 2 3 S_01- RDTU S_02-vacant2 S_03- RDTU S_04-vacant2 S_05-RDTU S_06-vacant2 1. RDTU PCBs do not have to be installed in the order shown in this table. Example: If only one RDTU is needed, it can be installed in any RDTU slot shown in the table so long as the slot is supported by the installed processor. 2. The slot occupied by RDTU supports 1-16 channels; the slot adjacent to RDTU must be vacant if channels 17 through 24 are needed. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-39 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots Step 5: ISDN PRI Digital Line PCBs See Worksheet 3: CO Line to determine RDTU PCB requirements. The BPTU or RPTU must be placed in designated slots as shown in Table 2-55. The BPTU or RPTU PCB can provide up to 16 or 23 ISDN PRI lines. The BPTU or RPTU slot provides 16 PRI lines, an additional seven lines requires that the cabinet slot adjacent to BPTU or RPTU be vacant. Up to 11 RDTU PCBs can be installed in a fully expanded system. Important! BPTU1 or RPTU2 is required for QSIG Networking. Table 2-55 BPTU or RPTU PCB Cabinet Slot Configuration PRI Lines Needed per Cabinet Slots Needed BPTU or RPTU PCBs Needed1 BPTU or RPTU cabinet slot placement1 Base Cabinet 1~16 1 17~23 2 24~39 3 40~46 4 47~62 5 63~69 6 1 2 3 S103 – BPTU or RPTU S104-vacant2 S105 – BPTU or RPTU S106-vacant2 S107 – BPTU or RPTU S108-vacant2 Second through seventh cabinets 1~16 1 17~23 2 24~39 3 40~46 4 47~62 5 63~69 6 1 S_01 – BPTU or RPTU S_02-vacant2 2 3 S_03 – BPTU or RPTU S_04-vacant2 S_05 – BPTU or RPTU S_06-vacant2 1. BPTU or RPTU PCBs do not have to be installed in the order shown in this table. Example: If only one BPTU or RPTU is needed, it can be installed in any BPTU or RPTU slot shown in the table so long as the slot is supported by the installed processor. 2. The slot occupied by RPTU supports 1-16 channels; the slot adjacent to RPTU must be vacant if channels 17 through 23 are needed. Step 6: Digital and Standard Telephone Station PCBs and the Stratagy DK Voice Mail PCB • See Worksheet 2: Standard Telephone, Stratagy DK, IVP8 to determine station PCB requirements. • BDKU (+ optional BDKS), PDKU, ASTU, BSTU, RSTU, RDSU/RSTS and the Stratagy DK: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. Refer to the Notes under the cabinet diagram in Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots to determine into which slots these PCBs can be installed. BDKU/BDKS, PDKU, ASTU, BSTU, RSTU and RDSU/RSTS PCBs cannot be installed in slots left vacant for RDTU or BPTU or RPTU. Each PCB provides up to eight circuits for the type of stations or Voice Mail ports it supports, except BDKU with BDKS which provides 16 circuits for digital telephones. 2-40 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots Step 7: ISDN BRI Digital Station PCBs • See Worksheet 3: CO Line to determine BRI station PCB requirements. • RBUU, RBUU with RBUS, RBSU, RBSU with RBSS: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. These PCBs can be installed in any slot, except a slot is left vacant to provide capacity for RDTU, BPTU or RPTU as shown in Tables 2-54 and 2-55. Each single PCB provides two BRI circuits and combination PCBs provide four BRI circuits, for the type of BRI stations it supports. Each ISDN BRI station requires one BRI circuit. Step 8: Analog and VoIP Tie Line PCBs • RDDU, RCOU, RCOU with RCOS, RGLU, REMU, and BVPU: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. These PCBs can be installed in any slot, except a slot that is left vacant to provide capacity for RDTU, BPTU or RPTU as shown in Tables 2-54 and 2-55. Each PCB provides up to four circuits for the type of lines it supports, except RCOU with RCOS which provides eight circuits. Strata CTX Configuration • See Worksheet 3: CO Line to determine Analog and BVPU line PCB requirements. Step 9: ISDN BRI Digital Line PCBs • See Worksheet 3: CO Line to determine ISDN BRI line PCB requirements. • RBUU, RBUU with RBUS, RBSU, RBSU with RBSS: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. These PCBs can be installed in any slot, except a slot that is left vacant to provide capacity for RDTU, BPTU or RPTU as shown in Tables 2-54 and 2-55. Each single PCB provides 2 BRI circuits (four lines) and combination PCBs provide four BRI circuits (8 lines), for the type of BRI Line it supports. Each ISDN BRI circuit provides two lines for the Strata CTX system. Step 10: Power Factor • After the Cabinets are configured calculate the power factor of each cabinet using Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check. Step 11: Check Systems Capacities • Check systems capacities in Tables 2-3~2-7 to confirm the features to be used are within limitations. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-41 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check The Strata CTX power supply was engineered for maximum cost efficiency to provide power for the most configurations. Because of this design, there are some -24VDC power limitations for telephone option hardware. Each telephone/device and PCB has been assigned Power Factors (PFs) that reflect the amount of power supply resources they consume. The Power Supply Unit has also been assigned Power Factors that reflect how much power it can supply. To make sure the cabinet power supply is operating within its limit, it is necessary to add up the PFs of each telephone/device and PCB installed in each cabinet to verify that their total PFs do not exceed the Power Supply PF. Use the worksheets on pages 2-44~2-45 to calculate that each cabinet’s PF is within limits. Important! Power Factor Considerations: • The individual PCB and telephone power factors can be found on pages 2-43 and 2-44. • The sum of all PCB and telephones –24VDC PFs in a given cabinet cannot exceed: 85 for CTX670 45 for CTX100 • The sum of all PCB +5VDC PFs in a given cabinet cannot exceed: 40 for CTX670 20 for CTX100 Telephones do not have +5VDC PFs. • If a cabinet PF is exceeded it is necessary to reconfigure the cabinet to meet PF limits. • If a cabinet’s Power Factor is exceeded, cabinet or connected peripherals may malfunction during ringing or voice paging, whereas normal operation will occur for idle telephones. • The Strata CTX100 and CTX670 power supplies provide a PF alarm LED and reset button. If this LED is on, reset it with the reset button. Then recheck the cabinet PFs to make sure they are within limits. PCB Power Factor calculation examples are shown in Tables 2-56 and 2-57. Table 2-56 Strata CTX Base Cabinet Example PCB Quantity +5VDC PF -24VDC PF PDKU 2 1.6 0.6 RBSU + RBSS 1 3.1 0.3 RCOU + RCOS 1 3.6 4.0 BBCU 1 4.5 2.0 BECU 1 4.5 2.0 Total 6 17.3 8.9 Table 2-57 Strata CTX Expansion Cabinet Example PCB RBSU + RBSS 2-42 Quantity +5VDC PF -24VDC PF 1 3.1 0.3 RCOU + RCOS 1 3.6 4.0 Total 2 6.7 4.3 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check Table 2-58 shows the individual PCB +5VDC and -24VDC power factors. -24VDC PF numbers for telephones and devices are shown on page 2-44; telephones do not require +5VDC PF considerations. Table 2-58 PCB and Power Supply Power Factors PCB Type -24VDC PF PCB Type +5VDC PF -24VDC PF ACTU1, 2 1.1 0.5 ADKU 0.8 0.3 RCIS1 0.3 0.1 RCIU1, 2 0.7 0.2 AETS 0.2 0.1 RCIU2 0.7 0.2 ARCS 0.0 0.0 RCMS1 0.6 0.3 AMDS 1.3 0.5 RCOS1, 2 1.7 2.0 ASTU 0.3 0.5 RCOU (4 CO) 2.5 2.0 BCTU 8.5 3.4 RCOU + RCOS (8 CO) 3.6 4.0 BEXU 4.0 1.6 RCOU1, 2 1.9 2.0 BBCU1 4.5 2.0 RDDU1 2.6 7.0 BECU1 4.5 2.0 RDSU1 (-24VDC) 1.1 0.3 RDSU1 + R48S1 (-48VDC) 1.1 0.5 RDTU1, 2 1.8 1.0 BEXS1 2.0 1.0 BBMS1 0 0 BDKU1 0.8 0.3 RDTU3 0.2 0.6 BDKS1 0.4 0.15 REMU2/PEMU1 1.0 7.5 BIOU1 1.5 6.6 RGLU1, 2 2.1 2.5 BIPU-M2A, BIPU-M1A/ BIPU-Q1A 0.1 3.0 RMCU1 0.7 0.3 BPTU1 2.3 0.7 RPTU1, 2 2.6 1.0 BSIS1 1.0 0.5 RSTU1, 2, 3 (-24VDC) 1.4 0.5 BSTU1 (-24VDC) 1.4 1.0 RSTU1+ R48S (-48VDC) 1.4 1.0 BSTU1 + R48S (48VDC) 1.4 2.3 RSTU2, 3 + R48S (-48VDC) 4.0 2.3 BVPU1‘ 0.0 3.5 RRCU1 0.0 4.0 0 14 0 14 4.0 2.3 BWDKU 0.8 0.3 Stratagy iES32, 32 circuits PCOU1, 2 1.9 2.0 Stratagy iES32, 16-circuits PDKU1, 2 0.8 0.3 Stratagy IVP8 R40S1 0.0 2.8 Power Supply APSU112 (CTX100) (20.0) (45.0) RBSS1 0.6 0.3 Power Supply BPSU672 (CTX670) (40.0) (85.0) RBSS2 0.0 0.3 RBSU + RBSS 3.1 0.3 RBSU1 2.5 1.0 RBSU2 0.0 1.0 RBUS1 0.0 0.3 RBUU1 0.0 1.0 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration +5VDC PF 2-43 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check Telephone/Device Power Factors The power supply of each cabinet supplies a limited amount of power. Use the Worksheet below to calculate the total Telephone/Device -24 VDC PF for each cabinet. Add it to the appropriate cabinet in “Cabinet Power Factor Check” on page 2-45. Telephones do not have +5VDC PFs. Main Location _______________ Telephone/ Device Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4____ 5___ 6____ Cabinet 1 (Base) Cabinet 2 (Exp.) Cabinet 3 (Exp.) -24 VDC PF -24 VDC PF -24 VDC PF Qty. Total Qty. Total Qty. Cabinet 4 (Exp.) Total -24 VDC PF Qty. DKT (any series) x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = DDCB (with MDFB) x 1.2 = x 1.2 = x 1.2 = x 1.2 = DDSS Console x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = Add-on Module (DADM) x 0.4 = x 0.4 = x 0.4 = x 0.4 = BATI x 0.7 = x 0.7 = x 0.7 = x 0.7 = Integrated BPCI x 0.2 = x 0.2 = x 0.2 = x 0.2 = Standard Phone (-48VDC) x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = Standard Phone (-24VDC) x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Power Failure Unit (DPFT) x 3.0 = x 3.0 = x 3.0 = x 3.0 = HHEU or BHEU x 0.1 = x 0.1 = x 0.1 = x 0.1 = BVSU or DVSU x 0.2 = x 0.2 = x 0.2 = x 0.2 = Total Power Factor (PF) Telephone PF ____ Telephone PF ____ Cabinet 5 (Exp.) Telephone/Device Qty. -24 VDC PF Total Telephone PF ____ Telephone PF ____ Cabinet 6 (Exp.) Qty. -24 VDC PF Total Cabinet 7 (Exp.) Qty. -24 VDC PF DKT (any series) x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = DDCB (w.MDFB) x 1.2 = x 1.2 = x 1.2 = DDSS Console x 0.8 = x 0.8 = x 0.8 = Add-on Module x 0.4 = x 0.4 = x 0.4 = BATI x 0.7 = x 0.7 = x 0.7 = Integrated BPCI x 0.2 = x 0.2 = x 0.2 = Standard Telephone (-48VDC) x 1.0 = x 1.0 = x 1.0 = Standard Telephone (-24VDC) x 0.5 = x 0.5 = x 0.5 = Power Failure Unit (DPFT) x 3.0 = x 3.0 = x 3.0 = HHEU or BHEU x 0.1 = x 0.1 = x 0.1 = BVSU or DVSU x 0.2 = x 0.2 = x 0.2 = Total Power Factor (PF) Telephone PF ____ Telephone PF ____ Total Total Telephone PF ____ Note PF varies by number of telephones because of station paging limit of 32 telephones. Always use “1.0” for DKT telephones when calculating PFs for individual cabinets. 2-44 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Cabinet Power Factor Check Cabinet Power Factor Check 1. Enter the PCB Type and PCB Power Factor for each cabinet slot (see Worksheets 5 and 7 for PCB slot configuration). 2. Total the PCB PF for each cabinet. 3. Enter the Total Telephone PF for each cabinet (from the Telephone/Device Worksheet on the previous page). 4. Make sure the Total Cabinet PFs do not exceed the limits noted below. If either PF exceeds its limit, adjust the PCB/telephone placement to meet the PF requirement. CTX670 cabinet. Total -24VDC PF of PCBs and telephones must be less than 45 for each CTX100 cabinet and 85 for each CTX670 cabinet. CTX100 CTX100 Base Cabinet Slot PCB Type PCB +5VDC PF ACTU ACTU 2.6 CTX100 Expansion Cabinet PCB -24VDC PF Slot 1.11 S105 S101 S106 S102 S107 PCB Type S103 S108 S104 Total PCB PF S109 Strata CTX Configuration Note Total +5VDC PF of PCBs must be less than 20 for each CTX100 cabinet and 40 for each PCB +5VDC PF PCB -24VDC PF ASTU Total PCB PF Total Phone PF Total Phone PF Total Cabinet PF Total Cabinet PF 1. Power factor includes ACTU and all ACTU option PCBs. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-45 Strata CTX Configuration Cabinet Power Factor Check CTX670 CTX670 Cabinet 1 (base) Slot PCB Type PCB +5VDC PF CTX670 Cabinet 2 PCB -24VDC PF B101 S201 B102 S202 S101 S203 S102 S204 S103 S205 S104 S206 S105 S207 S106 S208 S107 S209 S108 PCB -24VDC PF Total PCB PF Total Phone PF Total Phone PF Total Cabinet PF Total Cabinet PF CTX670 Cabinet 3 CTX670 Cabinet 4 PCB PCB PCB Type +5VDC PF -24VDC PF PCB PCB PCB Type +5VDC PF -24VDC PF Slot CTX670 Cabinet 5 Slot S301 S401 S501 S302 S402 S502 S303 S403 S503 S304 S404 S504 S305 S405 S505 S306 S406 S506 S307 S407 S507 S308 S408 S508 S309 S409 S509 S510 PCB Type PCB PCB +5VDC PF -24VDC PF S310 S410 Total PCB PF Total PCB PF Total PCB PF Total Phone PF Total Phone PF Total Phone PF Total Cabinet PF Total Cabinet PF Total Cabinet PF CTX670 Cabinet 6 Slot PCB Type PCB +5VDC PF CTX670 Cabinet 7 PCB -24VDC PF Slot S601 S701 S602 S702 S603 S703 S604 S704 S605 S705 S606 S706 S607 S707 S608 S708 S609 S709 S610 S710 Total PCB PF Total Phone PF Total Cabinet PF 2-46 PCB +5VDC PF S210 Total PCB PF Slot Slot PCB Type PCB Type PCB +5VDC PF PCB -24VDC PF Total PCB PF Total Phone PF Total Cabinet PF Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 8 – CTX Primary AC and Reserve Power Worksheet 8 – CTX Primary AC and Reserve Power CTX100 AC Power Considerations The power supply in each Strata CTX100 Base and Expansion Cabinet furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the interface peripherals (see Table 2-59). The primary AC power for each cabinet is 120VAC. Table 2-59 Strata CTX100 Electrical Characteristics Input AC AC Frequency Watts per cabinet (maximum) 120VAC 60 Hz, Single-phase (48Hz~62Hz) 100 watts (maximum) Strata CTX100 Primary Power Current Consumption (Rating in Amperes) Strata CTX Configuration Strata CTX100 Primary AC Power Voltage 120VAC 1 cabinet 2 cabinets 1.8 amps 3.6 amps Power Supply Unit (APSU112A) DC voltage output specification -24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC, 3.2 DC amps) +5VDC (+4.5~5.5VDC, 2.0 DC amps) -5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC, 0.2 DC amps) +3.3VDC (+3.0~3.6VDC, 0.5 DC amps CTX670 AC Power Considerations The power supply in each Strata CTX670 Base and Expansion Cabinet furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the interface peripherals (see Table 2-60). The primary AC power can be 120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC. Systems containing six or seven cabinets require 208VAC or 240VAC. Table 2-60 Strata CTX670 Electrical Characteristics Strata CTX670 Primary AC Power Voltage 115±10VAC or 208±20VAC or 240±20VAC 50/60 Hz, Single-phase (48~62Hz) 180 900 Input AC AC Frequency Watts per cabinet (continuous) Watts for five cabinet system Strata CTX670 Primary Power Current Consumption (Rating in Amperes) 1 cabinet 2 cabinets 3 cabinets 4 cabinets 5 cabinets 6 cabinets 7 cabinets 120VAC 208VAC 240VAC 3.2 amps 6.4 amps 9.6 amps 12.8 amps 16.0 amps N/A N/A 2.2 amps 4.4 amps 6.6 amps 8.8 amps 11.0 amps 13.2 amps 15.4 amps 2.0 amps 4.0 amps 6.0 amps 8.0 amps 10.0 amps 12.0 amps 14.0 amps Power Supply Unit (BPSU672) DC voltage output specification Strata CTX I&M 06/04 -24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC, 6.0 DC amps) +5VDC (+4.5~5.5VDC, 4.0 DC amps) -5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC, 0.8 DC amps) 2-47 Strata CTX Configuration Reserve Power (CTX100 and CTX670) Determine CTX670 system miscellaneous power components in the following worksheet. (See Tables 2-63 and 2-66 for component descriptions.) These components are not used on CTX100 systems. Enter the number of cabinet power components needed: Main Location ____________ Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4____5___ 6____ CTX670 Cabinet Power Components Spare Power Supply AC Power Strips 208/240VAC Power Supply Cord Battery Cables Battery DIstribution Box Conduit Box Floor Mount Stand Enter the Number Required BPSU672 RPSB2 BPSB240 BACL240 PBTC-3M BBTC1A-2.0M BBDB BCCB120 BCCB240 BFIF Reserve Power (CTX100 and CTX670) Two or four customer-supplied 12VDC reserve batteries (80 ampere-hours max.) can be connected to either system to maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Tables 2-61~2-64). The batteries are kept in a highly-charged state by the power supply’s battery charger and must be connected when the system is operating normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available, batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure. The battery changer is standard on the CTX670 power supply. An optional ABCS battery changer must be used in the CTX100 power supply. Table 2-61 CTX100 Reserve Power Characteristics Battery Charger Characteristics Charger: current limiting Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell Charge current: 280mA amps maximum Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC Table 2-62 Maximum Battery Charger Drain (-24VDC) Base Cabinet 3.15 amps Base + Expansion Cabinets 6.30 amps CTX100 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates1 Number of Cabinets 1 2 Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration 25 hr. 12.5 hr. Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 50 hr. 25 hr. DC Current Drain (-24VDC) 3.15 amps. 6.30 amps. 1. Assumes 80 ampere-hours with 12VDC batteries. 2-48 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware Table 2-63 CTX670 Reserve Power Characteristics Battery Charger Characteristics Maximum Battery Charger Drain (-24VDC) Charger: current limiting Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC 6.0 amps 2 cabinets 12.0 amps 3 cabinets 18.0 amps 4 cabinets 24.0 amps 5 cabinets 30.0 amps 6 cabinets 36.0 amps 7 cabinets 42.0 amps CTX670 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates1 Number of Cabinets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration 12.0 hr. 6.0 hr. 4.0 hr. 3.0 hr. 2.5 hr. 2.0 hr. 1.8 hr. Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 24.0 hr. 12.0 hr. 8.0 hr. 6.0 hr. 5.0 hr. 4.0 hr. 3.5 hr. DC Current Drain (-24VDC) 4.6 amps. 8.7 amps. 12.8 amps. 16.9 amps. 21.0 amps. 25.1 amps. 29.2 amps. Strata CTX Configuration Table 2-64 1 cabinet 1. Assumes 80 ampere-hours with 12VDC batteries. Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware The type of cabinet mounting can have an effect the power requirements. There are two types of mounting for the CTX100 and CTX670 (listed below). • Cabinet Wall Mounting – The lightweight and compact design of CTX100 and CTX670 enables easy wall mounting. Wall Mounting requires no special hardware. • Cabinet Floor Mounting – Only the CTX670 can be floor mounted (requires the BFIF hardware kit). If floor mounting three or more cabinets, AC and reserve power must be connected to the BCCB conduit connection box option by a licensed electrician. If more than two cabinets require reserve power batteries, the BBDB must be installed. Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) and local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting commercial AC and reserve power to the Strata CTX system. Tables 2-63 and 2-66 describe which assemblies may be required to meet UL and local electrical code standards. The power distribution hardware for the CTX100 is shown in Table 2-65. Table 2-65 CTX100 Cabinet Power Distribution Hardware Option APSU112 Description Strata CTX100 cabinet power supply is supplied with each cabinet. Operates with 120VAC as the system’s primary power source and requires 1.8 amps AC per cabinet. The power supply AC cord is 5 ft. long with a standard three prong plug. ABTC-3M A three-meter long battery cable is used to connect reserve power batteries to the ABCS battery charger when the system has less than three cabinets. One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet. ABCS Option battery charger that is installed on the APSU112 power supply. One per cabinet is required with the ABTC-3M if connecting reserve power batteries to the CTX100. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-49 Strata CTX Configuration Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware Table 2-66 Option BPSU672 CTX670 Power Cabinet Hardware Description Strata CTX670 cabinet power supply must be ordered for each cabinet. Operates with 120VAC, 208VAC, or 240VAC connected as the system’s primary AC power source. It automatically detects and adjusts to the type of primary AC power that is connected. The power supply is included with each cabinet ordered but must be installed in the field. Standard 9 ft. AC power cords with AC120VAC/15A plugs are provided with Strata CTX Base or Expansion cabinets. When AC208V or AC240V power is used, a special AC cord, BACL240, is required for each cabinet power supply and must be ordered separately. Cabinet power strip for 120VAC primary power – provides three standard 120VAC/15A outlets (NEMA5-15R) and nine ft. AC power cord with standard 120VAC/15A plug (NEMA5-15P). This unit is field installed inside system cabinet side panels. The system can use 12 amps. (max.). One RPSB2 is required for two cabinet systems if the local electric code allows only one AC power cord to be connected to the system. RPSB2 If the local electric code allows only one AC power cord to be connected to the system, 208VAC or 240VAC must be used as primary AC power for systems with four or more cabinets. One RPSB2 is required for a three or four cabinet system if the local electric code allows two AC power cords connected to the system. Two RPSB2s are required for a five cabinet system if the local electric code allows two AC power cords connected to the system. Cabinet power strip for 208VAC or 240VAC primary power - provides three 240VAC/20A outlets (NEMA 6-20R) and 9ft. AC power cord with a standard 240VAC/20A plug (NEMA 6-20P). This unit is field installed inside system cabinet side panels. The system can use 16 amps. (max.). One BPSB240 is required for two or three cabinet systems. Two BPSB240s are required for four or five cabinet systems. BPSB240 Local electric codes allow only one AC power cord to be connected to the system when using 208VAC or 240VAC as the primary AC power. BPSB240 conforms to the National Electric Code standards. If using 208VAC as primary power, the plug on the BPSB240 AC power cord that exits the cabinet (NEMA 6-20P) may have to be changed to a twist-lock type by a certified electrician to conform with local electric codes. AC208V or AC240VAC nine ft. power supply cord. The cord is rated at 10 amps. (max.) and must be used when the system is powered by 208VAC or 240VAC. One cord is required for each cabinet power supply and must be ordered separately only if using 208VAC or 240VAC as the system primary AC power. BACL240 PBTC-3M 2-50 The cord is equipped with a 250VAC/20A plug (NEMA 6-20P) which is standard for 240VAC. If using 208VAC as the system primary power this cord may have to be changed by a certified electrician for one or two cabinet installations. If using three or more cabinets, a BPSB240 power strip is required and the power strip plug may have to be changed by a certified electrician depending on local electric codes. A three-meter long battery cable is used to connect reserve power batteries to the system power supply when the system has less than three cabinets. One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet in a one or two cabinet system (wall or floor mount). The cable connects the Strata CTX670 cabinet power supply directly to the battery terminals (a BBDB is not required). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware Table 2-66 CTX670 Power Cabinet Hardware (continued) Option Description Strata CTX reserve power battery distribution box is required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets (wall or floor mount). The box is field installed into one of the Strata CTX cabinet side panels. BBDB The BBDB provides seven BBTC2A-2.0M, battery distribution cables to connect reserve power from the BDDB box to each individual cabinet power supply. One or two BBTC1A-2.0M must be ordered separately when using the BBDB battery distribution box. BCCB120 or BCCB240 A two-meter battery cable used to connect reserve power batteries to the BBDB battery distribution box. One reserve power cable is required in a three or four cabinet system and two cables are required for five, six or seven cabinet systems (wall or floor mount). The cable connects Strata CTX BBDB box directly to the battery terminals. Strata CTX conduit connection box is installed in the bottom cabinet, side panel. It is used to hardwire Primary AC power and reserve battery power connections through conduit. These boxes are required by UL for three or more floor mounted cabinets. Conduit boxes are not required for wall mounted systems with any number of cabinets or floor mounted system with one or two cabinets. They can be used as an option on any system. Strata CTX Configuration BBTC1A2.0M The BCCB120 is required when connecting AC120VAC as the primary power source and the BCCB240 is required when connecting AC208VAC or AC240VAC as the primary power source. BCCB conduit boxes must be field installed by a certified electrician. Floor mount fixture kit is required when floor mounting Strata CTX cabinets. BFIF Strata CTX I&M Provides two metal stands for mounting any number of Strata CTX cabinets on the floor. Three pairs or wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with BFIF to use when mounting three or more Strata CTX cabinets on floor. The wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes. 06/04 2-51 Strata CTX Configuration Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware CTX670 Cabinet AC Power Component Requirements for Wall Mounted Systems Tables 2-67 and 2-68 show the cabinet parts required to distribute AC power for various configurations of the Strata CTX cabinets. Table 2-67 Wall Mount Cabinet Power Component Requirements for 120VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code 2 Cabinets 3 Cabinets 4 Cabinets 5 Cabinets 6 Cabinets 7 Cabinets Allows only one 120VAC power cord from system 0 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Allows two 120VAC power cords from system 0 RPSB2 0 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 2 RPSB2 N/A N/A ● ● One dedicated, isolated, 20 amp. AC circuit breaker with dual outlets is required. N/A= If the system contains more than three cabinets and if the local code allows only one AC cord, the system requires a BCCB120 conduit box wired by a certified electrician when using 120VAC as primary power. Otherwise, 208VAC or 240VAC should be used as the primary power source (see cabinet power options listed below). If more than five cabinets are installed, 208VAC or 240VAC is required. Table 2-68 Wall Mount Cabinet Power Component Requirements for 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code Allows One AC power cord from system Important! 2-52 1 Cabinet 1 Cabinet 1 BACL240 2 Cabinets 3 Cabinets 4 Cabinets 5 Cabinets 6 Cabinets 7 Cabinets 1 BPSB240 1 BPSB240 2 BPSB240 2 BPSB240 3 BPSB240 3 BPSB240 2 BACL240 3 BACL240 4 BACL240 5 BACL240 6 BACL240 7 BACL240 The plugs and wall receptacles required by the local electrical code might differ for 208VAC and 240VAC. Thus in some areas of the U.S., the plug used on the Toshiba 240VAC power strip and 240VAC power supply cord (NEMA code 6-20P) can not be used for 208VAC installations. In this case, when using 208VAC, the AC plugs on the BPSB240 power strip cord that connects directly to the 208VAC wall outlet must be changed by a certified electrician per the local electrical code. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware Cabinet AC Power Component Installation After the cabinets have been floor mounted, the AC power components should be installed Tables 2-69 and 2-70 show the primary AC power components required for floor mounted systems. Table 2-69 Local Electrical Code 1 Cabinet 1 – BFIF 2 Cabinets 1 – BFIF 3 Cabinets 1 -BCCB1201 1 – BFIF 4 Cabinets 5 Cabinets 6 Cabinets 7 Cabinets 1 – BCCB1201 1 – BCCB1201 1 – BCCB1201 1 – RPSB2 2 – RPSB2 2 – RPSB2 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF N/A 1. A BCCB120 conduit connection box must be installed and wired by a certified electrician per the local electrical code. Table 2-70 Local Electrical Code Floor Mount Cabinet Component Requirements for 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power 1 Cabinet 3 or more 1 – BACL240 cabinets require a 1 – BFIF conduit box 2 Cabinets 1 – BCCB2401 2 – BACL240 1 – BFIF 3 Cabinets 4 Cabinets 5 Cabinets 6 Cabinets Strata CTX Configuration 3 or more cabinets require a conduit box Floor Mount Cabinet Component Requirements for 120VAC Primary Power 7 Cabinets 1 – BCCB2401 1 – BCCB2401 1 – BCCB2401 1 – BCCB2401 1 – BCCB2401 1 – BPSB240 1 – BPSB240 2 – BPSB240 2 – BPSB240 3 – BPSB240 3 – BACL240 4 – BACL240 5 – BACL240 6 – BACL240 7 – BACL240 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1. A BCCB240 conduit connection box must be installed and wired by a certified electrician per the local electrical code. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2-53 Strata CTX Configuration Worksheet 9 – Software Licenses Worksheet 9 – Software Licenses Enter the quantity of software license(s) required for your hardware configuration using the following worksheet. Strata CTX Software Licenses Comments LIC100-4 PORTS 4-port Line/Station License for CTX100. Required for every 4 ports used for trunks or stations beyond the 32 ports bundled with the CTX100 processor (maximum total of 112 ports). LIC670-4 PORTS 4-port Line/Station License for CTX670. Required for every 4 ports used for trunks or stations beyond the 64 ports bundled with the CTX670 processor (maximum total of 672 ports). LIC100-4 DTMF 4-port DTMF Receiver License for CTX100 Ports 5~16 and above. Required for activation of 4 DTMF receiver ports number 5 and above on CTX100 system. Maximum 16 DTMF receiver ports per system. ARCS required. LIC670-4 DTMF 4-port DTMF Receiver License for CTX670 Ports 9~32 and above. Required for activation of 4 DTMF receiver ports – number 5 and above on CTX670 system. Maximum 32 DTMF receiver ports per system. LIC100-SER PORT BSIS RS-232 serial port interface for SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary Voice Mail (VM) interface, Call Accounting SMDR and future applications. One circuit does not require a license, but circuits 2~4 each require one LIC100-SER PORT license. LIC670-SER PORT BSIS RS-232 serial port interface for SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary VM interface, Call Accounting SMDR and future applications. One circuit does not require a license, but circuits 2~4 each require one LIC670-SER PORT license. LIC100-QSIG NET Strata Net QSIG Networking Application License. One required per system to network multiple CTX100 systems using Strata Net QSIG networking features. LIC670-QSIG NET Strata Net QSIG Networking Application License. One required per system to network multiple CTX670 systems using Strata Net QSIG networking features. LIC SOFTDKT-1 Toshiba SoftDKTTM Licensing on the CTX will allow the concurrent connection of as many clients as you want, provided that each client has a license). SOFTDKT-LIC-PKG SoftDKT license and CD-ROM The license and CD-ROM can be purchased as a bundle. Part Number 2-54 Qty Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration Hardware Compatibility Hardware Compatibility PCB compatibility for the Strata DK424, DK424i, CTX100 and CTX670 systems is shown in Table 2-71.4. Table 2-71 Hardware Compatibility DK424i CTX100 CTX670 NC NC X BECU/BBCU with optional BBMS, BEXS, BSIS NC NC1 NC X B_CAU/B_CBU cards for DK424i NC X NC NC X NC NC NC Unit Name BCTU/BEXU Processor Card RCTU cards for DK424 ACTU1, 2A-S and subassemblies NC NC X NC BRCS-4/8/12 X X NC NC RRCS-4/8/12 X NC NC NC 16/32 Built-in X ARCS (16) NC NC Used for ACTU1. Built-in ACTU2. BIOU NC NC X BSIS NC NC X X PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, RSIS X X NC NC RSSU X X NC NC BSTU, RSTU3, RDSU/RSTS X X X X NC NC X NC X X NC NC ADKU NC NC X NC BDKU X X X X BWDKU1A X2 X X X BDKS NC NC X X BPCI NC NC X X PDKU2 (DKT2000-series phones only) X X X X RDSU, RSTS (DKT2000-series only) X X X X NC NC X X DTMF Receiver Unit Optional Interface Unit Standard Telephone Interface Electronic Telephone Interface Digital Telephone Interface IP Telephone Interface CO Line Interface ASTU (R1.3 and higher) PEKU, PESU BIPU-M2A, BIPU-M1A3 BVPU X X X X RCIU/RCIS X X X X RCMU/RCMS X X X X RCOU/RCOS4 X X X X RDDU X X X X RDTU2, 3 X X X X REMU X X X X RGLU2, RGLU3 X X X X RBSU/RBSS X2 X X X RBUU/RBUS X2 X X X BPTU1, RPTU2, RPTU X5 X X X6 Remote Expansion Cabinet Interface RRCU X X NC X Strata Net over IPQSIG Interface BIPU-Q1A3 NC NC X X4 ISDN Interface Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX Configuration DK280 & DK424 NC Category 2-55 Strata CTX Configuration Hardware Compatibility Table 2-71 Hardware Compatibility (continued) DK280 & DK424 DK424i CTX100 CTX670 EKT2000, EKT6000, EKT6500, HDSS, HDCB X X NC NC Existing Proprietary Attendant Console X X NC NC DK424 PC Attendant X X NC NC NC NC X X X X NC NC Category Stations and Terminal Equipment Unit Name Strata CTX PC Attendant Console, BATI RPCI (RS-232C) - Data or TAPI BPCI (RS-232C) - Data or Voice Record TAPI Stations and Terminal Equipment NC NC X X DKT10007 X X X X DKT2000 X X X X DKT3000 X8 X8 X X IPT1020-SD NC NC X X Used for ACTU1. Built-in ACTU2. Built-in Ethernet LAN AETS NC NC V.34 Admin Modem AMDS NC NC X Built-in X NC NC NC CHSUB672 NC X NC X CHSUB112 NC NC X NC DKSUE424 X NC NC NC CHSUE672 NC X NC X CHSUE112 NC NC X NC X NC NC NC DKSUB424 or DKSUB280 Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Data Cable for Strata DK424 Expansion Cabinet Data Cable for CTX670 Expansion Cabinet NC X NC X Data Cable for CTX100 Expansion Cabinet NC NC X NC RPSU424 (120VAC) Power Supply Unit Conduit Connection Box Battery Distribution Box Power Strip X NC NC NC BPSU672 (120VAC/208VAC/240VAC power supply) NC X NC X APSU112 (120VAC) NC NC X NC X NC NC NC BCCB120 (120V box) NC X NC X BCCB240 (240V box) NC X NC X RBDB2 X NC NC NC BBDB1 (new Battery Dist. Box, 7 BBTC2A2.0M) X X NC X RPSB1 (120VAC power strip) X NC NC NC RPSB2 (120VAC power strip) X X NC X NC NC NC X X X NC X RCCB2 BPSB240 (240VAC power strip) PBTC-3M Battery Cable Battery Charger X = Compatible BBTC1A-2.0M NC X NC X ABTC-3M NC NC X NC Built-in Built-in X Built-in ABCS1 NC = Not Compatible 1. If the BCTU, BEXU or BECU/BBCU replaces the DK424i processors, then the system is upgraded to a CTX670. 2. Jumper plugs on the BWDKU1A determine 8 or 16 DKT circuits and CTX or DK compatibility. 3. If a BIPU-M or BIPU-Q is installed RCOU1A, RCOS1A RDDU1A, RGLU1A, RGLU2A, and two-wire REMU cards should not be installed to avoid excessive Echo Return Loss (ERL). 4. The RCOS1A cannot be installed on the RCOU3A. The RCOS3 can be installed on the RCOU1A. 5. Requires Release 4.x software. 6. BPTU1, RPTU2, or BIPU-Q1A is required for QSIG Networking. 7. DKT1000-series telephones do not support continuous DTMF tones. 8. Functions as a DKT2000. 2-56 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation 3 This chapter explains how to install the Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 systems. It includes information on site requirements, wiring diagrams, and step-by-step instructions on how to install the unit(s), the ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (battery backup) cabling, and PCB cabling. Inspection Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation 1. When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. 2. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. 3. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Packaging and Storage CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges. ³ When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. Site Requirements This section defines the installation site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the CTX100. Also included are grounding requirements. Input Power The Base Cabinet or the Base and Expansion Cabinet together require an input power source of 120VAC, 60 Hz, 15 amps. Each cabinet plugs into an AC power outlet. Each cabinet requires 1.8 amps AC from the power source or 3.6 amps AC combined. The power supply cord for each cabinet is 4.5 ft. long with a standard three-prong 120VAC plug. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-1 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Site Requirements The AC outlet is recommended to be dedicated and unswitched, with a solid third-wire ground. (See “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on page 3-4.) This eliminates interference from branch circuit motor noise or the like, and to prevent accidental power-off. To avoid accidental power turn-off, Toshiba recommends that you do not use an On/Off wall switch on this dedicated AC circuit. For the Strata CTX100, a reserve power source (two or four customer-supplied 12VDC batteries) may be connected to the system to serve as a power failure backup. Cabinet Size and Weight The wall that will support the CTX100 should be able to support 35 lbs. The weight of each cabinet is shown in Table 2-1 on page 2-2. Clearance and Location The minimum clearance requirements for the Strata CTX100 Base and Expansion cabinets are shown in Figure 3-1. Consider the following conditions when selecting a location for the Cabinet(s): The location must be: • Dry and clean • Well ventilated • Well illuminated • Easily accessible The location must not be: • Subject to extreme heat or cold • Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants • Subject to excessive vibration • Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment If reserve power is to be installed for the Strata CTX100, the batteries will require a wellventilated location close (within nine feet) to the CTX100 (the optional Toshiba-supplied battery cable is nine feet in length). 3-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Site Requirements Front View 14.5" 19.9" 24" 24" 15.1" Exp Cabinet Side View Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation Base Cabinet Wall 10" 36" 36'' 5910 Figure 3-1 Strata CTX I&M CTX100 Base Cabinets and Expansion Clearance Requirements 06/04 3-3 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements Environmental Considerations Table 3-1 provides a summary of the environmental characteristics. Table 3-1 CTX100 Environmental Characteristics Environmental Specifications Operating temperature Operating humidity Storage temperature BTU Rating (Base plus Expansion Cabinet) ACTU (installed) BDKU (5 installed) RCOU/RCOS (1 installed) Digital Telephones (40 installed) 32~104° F (0~40° C) 20~80% relative humidity without condensation -4~140° F (-20~60° C) 190 Watts (56 watt hours for both cabinets) AC Power and Grounding Requirements The CTX100 requires a solid earth ground for proper operation. The five ft. AC power cord contains a conductor for the “third-wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet. The third-wire ground should be the only ground necessary for each CTX100 cabinet; this ground must originate at the building’s main power distribution panel and have a solid connection to earth ground. (See Figure 3-2.) Third Wire Ground from AC Power Cord Third Wire AC Ground CTX 100 Base Cabinet 4' 5" Power Supply A Electrical Building Ground (Main Power Distribution Box) Alternate Ground AC Voltage 120VAC AC Current 1.8 amps max. 5911 Figure 3-2 CTX100 Grounding Diagram CAUTION! Lack of proper ground may cause improper operation and, in extreme cases, system failure. An inter-cabinet ground wire connecting the Base and Expansion cabinets is not necessary. Power Considerations The power supply in each Strata CTX100 Base and Expansion Cabinet furnishes power to all of the PCBs and stations and some of the interface peripherals. The primary AC power for each cabinet is 120VAC (see Table 2-59 on page 2-47). 3-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation AC Power and Grounding Requirements AC Power and Third-wire Ground Test Test the “third-wire ground” for continuity by either measuring the resistance between the third prong terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a commercially available earth ground indicator. If neither procedure is possible, perform the following earth ground test procedure. WARNING! Hazardous voltages that may cause death or injury are exposed during the following test. Use great care when working with AC power line voltage. ³ To perform the earth ground test procedure CAUTION! If a reading of zero volts is obtained on both voltage terminals (white wire to green wire, black wire to green wire), the outlet is not properly grounded. Omit Steps 5 and 6, and see following CAUTION! 5. If a reading of zero volts on one terminal, and a reading of 100~125VAC on the other terminal is obtained, remove both probes from the outlet. 6. Set the meter to the “OHMS/Rx1” scale. Place one probe on the ground terminal, and the other probe on the terminal that produced a reading of zero volts. The reading should be less than 1 ohm. Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation 1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter, and set it for a possible reading of up to 250VAC. 2. Connect the meter probes between the two main AC voltage terminals (white and black wires) on the wall outlet. The reading obtained should be between 100~125VAC. 3. Move one of the meter probes to the third terminal (green wire ground). Either the same reading or a reading of zero volts should be obtained. 4. If the reading is zero volts, leave one probe on the ground terminal and move the other probe to the second voltage terminal. CAUTION! If the reading is more than one ohm, then the outlet is not adequately grounded. If the above tests show the outlet AC voltage is not in range or is not properly grounded, the condition should be corrected (per Article 250 of the National Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician before the system is connected. Alternate or Additional Ground If the “third-wire” AC ground can not practically be improved or if extreme motor noise or other disturbance causes system malfunction, or if local area lightning storms exist, a separate direct ground may be warranted. Connect an alternate earth ground from a cold water pipe or earth grounding rod directly to the screw terminal on the CTX100 power supply (see Figure 3-2). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-5 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 1: Remove Cabinet Covers WARNING! Ensure the power supply AC plug is not plugged into the AC outlet. 1. Loosen the screws from the front cover to remove it. 2. Loosen the four screws from the top cover and slide it off. 3. Loosen the four screws from each side cover and pull the covers forward to remove them. 6074 Figure 3-3 Cabinet Cover Removal Step 10: Remove the Back Cover from the Cabinet(s) 1. Remove and save the two screws from the back of the Base Unit. 2. Slide the metal cover about a half inch to the right (it will drop down and forward) to remove it. 3. If you are installing an Expansion Cabinet, remove one screw from the back of the Expansion Cabinet. Slide the metal cover to the right to remove it. Note The figure below show the position of the screws. Back covers should be removed before the Base and Expansion cabinets are attached to each other. EXPANSION BASE Remove 1 screw 5933 Figure 3-4 3-6 Base and Expansion Cabinet Back Covers Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 11: Check the Base/Expansion Power Supply Jumper Plug The APSU112A power supply is used in both CTX100 cabinets. ³ Check that the “BASE/EXP.” jumper plug is connected to the proper power supply connector as shown in Figure 3-14. The power supply has two connectors: one is labeled “BASE” and the other “EXP.” • If the power supply is mounted in the CTX100 Base Cabinet, the “BASE/EXP.” jumper plug must be plugged into the “BASE” connector. • If the power supply is mounted in the CTX100 Expansion cabinet, the jumper plug must be plugged into the “EXP.” connector. Step 12: Mount the Base Cabinet WARNING! To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply is not plugged into the AC outlet. Note The Base Cabinet AC power cord is four feet, five inches long. 2. Attach a 1/2” thick plywood back board to the wall where the CTX100 will be installed. Secure the back board to the wall with screws attached to the wall studs, shown in Figure 3-5. 3. Place the Base Cabinet back cover at the desired location on the back board using a level and mark the location of the four screw holes (there is one on each corner). 4. Drill holes on these marks. 5. Secure the top two screws approximately two thirds of the way into the top two holes on the back board. 6. Hang the Base Cabinet back cover from the top two screws and then secure the top and bottom screws completely into the back board. The base back cover should now be tightly secured to the back board. See Figure 3-5. 7. To mount the Base Cabinet, position the cabinet hanger holes onto back cover hangers (two on top and two on the bottom as shown in Figure 3-6). Slide the cabinet to the left. 8. Secure the Base Cabinet to the back cover with a screw through the left side bracket of the back cover to the Base Cabinet. (See Screw “A” in Figure 3-5.) 9. If you are installing an Expansion Cabinet, go to “Step 13: Mount the Expansion Cabinet (if required)” on page 3-9. Follow the steps, then return to these steps. 10. Ground the system according to “AC Power and Grounding Requirements” on page 3-4. 11. Go to “Step 16: Set Jumpers and Install Option PCBs onto the ACTU” on page 3-20. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation 1. Make sure the location of the Base Cabinet meets the minimum clearance requirements specified in Figure 3-1 on page 3-3. 3-7 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Stud Plaster Board Flange Screw A Ba se Hook Ex Ba pa se Ex ns pa ion ns ion Back Board (1/2 Inch Plywood) Flange Hook 5912 Figure 3-5 Cabinet Wall Mounting Back Cover Hanger Un Bottom left hanger is only used on the Base Cabinet m ou n rig t C ht abi an ne d tup Sl Hanger Hole id e 5937 Mo lef unt t C ab in et -S lid e Figure 3-6 3-8 Mounting CTX100 Cabinet on Back Cover Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 13: Mount the Expansion Cabinet (if required) WARNING! To prevent electrical shock, make sure the power supply is not plugged into the AC outlet. 1. Turn Base Cabinet DC power switch Off. Remove the four screws on the right side cover of the Base Cabinet. 2. Remove four screws from the right side of the Base Cabinet (since they will interfere with attaching the Expansion Cabinet to the Base Cabinet later). 3. Remove the Expansion Cabinet back cover from the Expansion Cabinet (see Figure 3-4). 4. Place the Expansion Cabinet back cover next to the Base Cabinet back cover, making sure expansion back cover hooks fit into the base back cover flanges (see Figure 3-5). 5. Mark the location of the four screw holes – there is one on each corner. Make sure the location of the Expansion Cabinet meets the minimum clearance requirements specified in Figure 3-1 on page 3-3. Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation 6. Drill holes on these marks. 7. Place the Expansion Cabinet back cover on the wall back board and secure the back cover to the back board with four screws. 8. On the right side of the AMAU motherboard inside the Base Cabinet, flip open the top and bottom locks for data ribbon cable plug. Plug in the data ribbon and close the locks. Feed the ribbon through the side hole of the Base Cabinet. 9. To mount the Expansion Cabinet, position it onto the back cover hangers. Note Position the cabinet over the bottom right hanger first, and then carefully tilt the cover over the top two hangers. 10.Slide the Expansion Cabinet to the left, feeding the data ribbon cable through the side hole of the Expansion Cabinet. 11. Finish by securing the Expansion Cabinet to the Base cabinet with the two screws in front of the cabinets where they join together. The expansion cabinet left-side flange fits over the Base cabinet right side flange (see Figure 3-7). 12. On the AMAU motherboard of the Expansion Cabinet, flip open the two data ribbon locks, plug in the data ribbon and close the locks. The data ribbon cable should now be connected to the Base and Expansion cabinets. 13. Install PCBs into the Expansion Cabinet; follow the instructions in “Step 18: Install Other PCBs into the Cabinet(s)”. Note The Base Cabinet DC power switch will be the master control for turning the DC power of both cabinets On/Off. 14. Attach the outside covers on the Expansion Cabinet. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-9 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Left side of Expansion Cabinet fits over the right side of the Base Cabinet. Flip open locks to plug in data cable. Push locks closed once cable is plugged in. Make sure locks are closed. 2 - Screws 5969 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 Figure 3-7 Base and Expansion Cabinet Interior Step 14: Install Reserve Power Skip this step if you are not going to install reserve power batteries. A reserve power source (two or four customer supplied 12VDC batteries) can be connected to the CTX100 power supply equipped with an ABCS battery charger to ensure uninterrupted system operation in the event of a power failure. The ABCS battery charger and a pre-assembled battery cable (ABTC-3M) for connecting the batteries is available from Toshiba (see Figure 3-8). ABCS1A Power Supply Four-Prong Connector (CN-501) Four-Wire Plug 5970 Figure 3-8 3-10 CTX100 Power Supply (Top view) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Reserve Battery Considerations Important! Local ordinances may dictate battery type and installation details. The batteries require a well-ventilated location within nine feet of the system (the interface cable is nine feet long). WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons, read and follow these instructions: Use only 12VDC gelcell batteries. ³ Do not dispose of the batteries in a fire. The cells may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. ³ Do not open or mutilate the batteries. Released electrolyte is corrosive and may cause damage to the eyes or skin. It may be toxic if swallowed. ³ Exercise care in handling batteries in order not to short the battery with conduction materials such as rings, bracelets, and keys. The battery or conductor may overheat and cause burns. ³ Charge the batteries provided with or identified for use with this product only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in this manual. ³ Observe proper polarity orientation between the batteries and battery charger. Step 6A: Install the Optional ABCS1A Battery Charger Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation ³ WARNING! Whenever the cabinet top cover is removed, use extreme caution. Do not touch any internal power supply components because hazardous voltages may be exposed. Whenever adding/removing power supply components or checking circuit breakers and fuses, unplug the power supply AC plug from the AC source outlet. 1. Attach the ABCS1A to the inside wall of the Power Supply (see photos below). Fit the two holes on the ABCS1A over the metal prongs of the power supply and align the two plastic tips of the ABCS1A over the holes on the inside wall of the power supply. Snap the ABCS1A into place. Pull on the ABCS1A to make sure that it’s securely installed. 2. Attach the ABCS1A four-wire plug onto the power supply four-prong connector (CN-501). Step 6B: Install the Battery Cable 1. A black jumper wire is supplied with the ABTC-3M cable. Connect the black jumper wire from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery (see Figure 3-9). 2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the ABTC-3M battery cable. 3. Connect the white lead of the ABTC-3M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-11 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet 2-Batteries/1-Cabinet 2-Batteries/2-Cabinets Base Cabinet Power Supply + ABCS CN-BAT – Connnector Black jumper wire Base Cabinet Power Supply + ABCS CN-BAT – Connnector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each Exp. Cabinet Power Supply + ABCS CN-BAT – Connnector ABTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) 10A Fuse 10A Fuse ABTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) 4-Batteries/2-Cabinets 4-Batteries/1-Cabinet Base Cabinet + ABCS CN-BAT – Connnector Base Cabinet Power Supply 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each + – All Jumper Wires must be 16 AWG Wire ABCS CN-BAT Connnector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each Expansion Cabinet + ABCS CN-BAT – Connnector ABTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) 10A Fuse 5934 10A Fuse Figure 3-9 ABTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) Battery Wiring Diagram 4. Run the ABTC-3M battery cable from the batteries to the ABCS battery charger located in the CTX100 power supply. Dress the battery cable within the CTX100 cabinet(s) carefully (see Figures 3-10~3-13). Important! The CTX100 must be connected to the live operating (hot) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switch set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power battery cable to the ABCS battery charger. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 5. Connect the ABTC-3M battery cable two-prong female plug to the power supply “CN-BAT” receptacle on the ABCS charger. 6. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plug from the source outlet while the power supply power On/Off switch in the On position. The AC and DC power lights should be Off. The system should continue to operate without interruption or dropped calls. 7. Plug the AC power cable back into the outlet; make sure the power supply switch is On. 3-12 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet 8. Confirm that the power supply is working properly. (AC Power lights should be On.) Connector of Battery Cable to Battery Charger CN-BAT Connector ABTC-3M Battery Cable to Battery Charger (Tuck into plastic retainer with AC power cord.) 5992 Base Cabinet Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation Figure 3-10 Cable Wiring for the Base and Expansion Cabinets (Top view) ABTC-3M Battery Cable to the Battery Charger ABTC-3M Battery Cable is secured with a tie wrap. 5993 Figure 3-11 Cable Wiring for a Base Cabinet Only (Side view) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-13 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Base Cabinet Base Cabinet (side view) 6078 ABTC-3M Cable Figure 3-12 Expansion Cabinet Run ABTC-3M Cable from Base Cabinet along shelf of Exp. Cabinet to Battery Charger Cable Wiring for the Base with an Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet ABTC-3M Battery Cable to Battery Charger ABTC-3M Battery Cable is secured with a tie wrap. 5996 Figure 3-13 3-14 Cable Wiring for the Expansion Cabinet (Side view) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 15: Check Power Supply Circuit Breakers and Fuses This step is only needed if you experience problems with the system. WARNING! Whenever the cabinet top cover is removed, use extreme caution. Do not touch any internal power supply components because hazardous voltages may be exposed. Whenever adding/removing power supply components or checking circuit breakers and fuses, unplug the power supply AC plug from the AC source outlet. Step 7A: Check the -24 Volt Circuit Breakers The APSU112 provides two -24v circuit breakers as shown in Figure 3-14. If a low resistance between –24 volts and ground exists the circuit breaker will trip. Usually the front panel DC green LED indicator will turn off but not always. Also if AC power is recycled the DC LED indicator may turn back on – even if the –24 volt circuit breaker is tripped. Circuit Breaker Location and Slot Assignments (see Figure 3-14) • The circuit breaker V2, located next to the BASE jumper connector, protects the third and fourth cabinet slots. Reset Circuit Breaker 1. A defective PCB or an external short on the MDF may cause the circuit breaker to trip. 2. If you suspect that a –24 volt circuit breaker has tripped, try to reset it by: Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation • The circuit breaker V1, located directly below the FG screw, protects the first and second cabinet slots. • Turn the power supply DC power switch off and unplug the power supply AC power cord from the AC outlet – the inside of the power supply has exposed voltages. • Gently press in each circuit breaker and listen for or try to feel it click. If the breaker was tripped, you will hear or feel it click back to the set position. • If the circuit breaker resets, pull the PCBs and check for MDF shorts associated with the slots assigned to the tripped circuit breaker. Remove any defective PCBs and MDF shorts. • Restore power and verify the system is working normally. 3. Replace the power supply if the circuit breaker continues to trip and a defective PCB or short cannot be found. See “Step 7D: Remove and Replace the Power Supply (if required)” on page 3-17. Step 7B: Check the AC Power Fuses The APSU112 provides two AC power fuse as shown in Figure 3-14. If low resistance to ground exists the fuse may blow. The front panel AC green LED indicator will turn off. If you suspect that a AC fuse has blown you may check it by: 1. Turn the power supply DC power switch off and unplug the power supply AC power cord from the AC outlet – the inside of the power supply has exposed voltages. 2. Remove each fuse and check that it is less than 0.3 ohms. Replace the fuse if it is defective. The fuse size is T6.3AH 250V. 3. If you replace the fuse and it continues to blow, pull the PCBs and check for cabinet shorts. Remove any defective PCBs and cabinet shorts. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-15 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet 4. Replace the power supply if the fuse continues to blow and a defective PCB or short cannot be found. See “Step 7D: Remove and Replace the Power Supply (if required)” on page 3-17. Step 7C: Check the Power Factor Indicator and Reset Button The front panel of APSU112 provides a Power Factor LED and Reset button. If the cabinet power factor is exceeded by overload of PCBs, the PF LED will turn on. ³ If the PF LED indicator turns on, press the PF reset button with a pointed tool or pencil. If the PF LED turns off and does not turn on again it may have been turned on by a current surge while installing a PCB while the power supply was turned-on. ³ When a PF alarm is indicated, check that the cabinet power factor is not exceeded using “Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check” on page 2-42. If the Power factor has been exceeded relocate any PCBs that are causing the PF to be exceeded. -24 Volt Circuit V1 Breakers: V2 AC Cord Third Wire Ground Screw AC Fuse AC-IN Connector AC Fuse Motherboard FG Wire Screw BASE Base Cabinet Power Supply Jumper Connector EXP Expansion Cabinet Power Supply Jumper Connector 5997 Figure 3-14 3-16 Power Supply Connectors Top View Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 7D: Remove and Replace the Power Supply (if required) The power supply (APSU112) comes factory-installed in the Base and Expansion Cabinets; if necessary, it can be removed and replaced. If you do not need to replace the power supply, skip this step. Removing the Power Supply WARNING! Whenever the cabinet top cover is removed, use extreme caution. Do not touch any internal power supply components because hazardous voltages may be exposed. Whenever adding/removing power supply components or checking circuit breakers and fuses, unplug the power supply AC plug from the AC source outlet. 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off and that the AC power cable is not plugged into an outlet. Confirm that the green AC LED is not lit (see Figure 3-15). 2. Remove the two screws in front of the Power Supply (see Figure 3-15). Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation 5998 Two screws Figure 3-15 Power Supply (APSU112) 3. Unplug reserve battery cable from CN-BAT connector of power supply. 4. Unplug the DC cable from the “CN OUT” connector (P16) and cut the tie-wrap. Be careful not to cut any wires. 5. Remove the FG screw from left side of power supply to free FG wire/terminal and ground wire. 6. Remove the Power Supply from the Cabinet (see Figure 3-16). 7. If you are going to remove the ABCS battery charger, use pliers to unlock the plastic holders of the ABCS1A. 8. Unplug the AC power cord from the AC-IN connector. Figure 3-16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ABCS Power Supply Removal 3-17 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Replacing the Power Supply 1. Make sure that the power supply switch is Off and that the AC power cable is not plugged into an outlet. 2. Set the power supply in its proper place in the cabinet (see Figure 3-16). 3. Secure the power supply to the cabinet with the screws. 4. Connect the green/green-yellow wire from the AMAU motherboard to the FG screw on the power supply. 5. Plug the DC cable into the CN OUT connector. 6. Install the ABCS battery charger. 7. Plug in the reserve battery cable to the CN-BAT connector of the ABCS battery charger. 8. Plug in the AC power cord connector into the AC-IN plug. 9. Insert and tight the two screws in front of the power supply (see Figure 3-15). 10.Plug the BASE/EXP jumper plug into the appropriate BASE or EXP connector on the power supply (see Figure 3-14). 3-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 16: Set Jumpers and Install Option PCBs onto the ACTU ³ To install the ACTU2A Refer to Figure 3-18 and perform the following steps on the ACTU2A. 1. Set the battery jumper, “BATT,” to the “On” position. 2. Make sure the WDT jumper plug is set to the ON position. Note Unlike the ACTU1A, the ACTU2A does not use the AETS or the ARCS option PCBs. NIC and DTMF circuits are built into the ACTU2. 3. Install needed option PCBs onto the ACTU (AMDS, BSIS). 4. Place option PCB arrow side up over the plastic stand-offs with the connectors and stand-off holes on the ACTU. Snap option PCB securely into place. 5. Insert the SmartMedia card (gold contacts face left, notched corner faces forward and up) into the SmartMedia slot on the ACTU. 6. Make sure the power supply switch is Off. 7. Install the ACTU into the Base Cabinet (see following photos). • ACTU2A requires R1.3 software or later. • MOH/BGM source volume is controlled by software PAD in Program 107-01, 02 and 03. Mu/ A law must be set to Mu law in software Program 105-35 for North America. • For details on jumpers and add-ons (subassemblies) for the ACTU, see Table 3-2 on page 3-22. Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation Notes Metal Spacer Note: The ACTU1A is a larger board and does not have the metal spacer. SmartMedia Card ACTU2 SmartMedia Slot P4 BSIS1A (RS232-C, SMDR and SMDI) P5 BATT ON OFF Place BSIS here P6 P601 Battery Backup Jumper Place AMDS here R806 10 Base-T Ethernet P3 ASTU plugs into P3 P2 Control Relay Terminal (Night Transfer, etc.) MOH2 MOH/BGM1 RCA Jack MOH1 600 ohm page output EX SP 600/600 600/600 600/600 Future MOH2 Jack 6636 Figure 3-17 Strata CTX I&M ACTU2A PCB (CTX100 Processor) 06/04 3-19 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet ³ To Install ACTU1A Refer to Figure 3-18 with the following steps. 1. On the ACTU PCB, set the battery jumper, “BATT,” to the “On” position. 2. On the ACTU, make sure the Mu/A jumper plug is set to the Mu position (U.S. and Canada). 3. On the ACTU PCB, set the BBMS jumper “ATTACHED BBMS,” to the “NO” position. Note If you are installing the AETS option PCB, before mounting the AETS, dress its green jumper wire under and behind the Ethernet port and out the top as shown in Figure 3-18. Remove the screw just above the AETS, place the jumper wire ring over the hole and replace the screw to hold the jumper wire ring in place. 4. Install needed option PCBs onto the ACTU (AETS, AMDS, BSIS, ARCS). 5. Place option PCB arrow side up over the plastic stand-offs with the connectors and stand-off holes on the ACTU. Snap option PCB securely into place. 6. Insert the SmartMedia card (gold contacts face left, notched corner faces forward and up) into the SmartMedia slot on the ACTU. 7. Make sure the power supply switch is Off. 8. Install the ACTU into the Base Cabinet (see following photos). Note For more details about the jumpers and add-ons (subassemblies) for the ACTU, see Table 3-2 on page 3-22. MU/A Law Jumper SmartMedia Slot Mu SmartMedia Card A ACTU1A P101 Not Used P301 NO Ground AETS Green Jumper Wire YES Not Used ATTACHED P302 BBMS AETS1A UP AETS1A (10 Base-T Ethernet) UP AMDS1A BSIS BSIS1A (RS232-C, SMDR and SMDI) P601 Control Relay Terminal (Night Transfer, etc.) ON BACK UP OFF UP Battery Backup Jumper ARCS1A 600/600 MOH/BGM1 RCA Jack 600/600 600 ohm page output UP P801 MOH1 MOH/BGM Volume Control 600/600 MOH2 Future MOH2 Jack ARCS1A (DTMF/ABR Circuits) 5897 Figure 3-18 3-20 ACTU PCB (CTX100 Processor) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 17: Install the Main Processor (ACTU) PCB The Strata CTX100 Base cabinet has one slot dedicated to the processor PCB. 1. Slide the ACTU processor PCB into the first slot on the left side of the cabinet (as shown). 2. Loosen the screw slightly, then slide the processor lock upwards. Tighten the screw so that the PCB is locked into place. Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation 6003 6004 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-21 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet Step 18: Install Other PCBs into the Cabinet(s) 1. Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB to the CTX100 cabinets. Configuration instructions for individual PCBs are in Chapter 6 – PCB Installation and Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation. 2. Use the PCB placement guide in “Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-26 to determine which PCB slot can be used for each PCB type. 3. Slide the PCB Slot Locking Bar to the right, then insert each of the PCBs; push the PCBs firmly toward the motherboard, making sure that the connectors are secured (see Figure 3-19). Lightly tug on each PCB to make sure that it’s installed PCB Slot Locking Bar securely. 4. After all the PCBs are installed, slide the PCB Slot Locking Bar to the left to lock the PCBs into place. 5. Configure the PCBs for software options through programming. Refer to the Strata CTX Programming Manual for more detailed programming instructions. Note The Base and Expansion cabinets have four universal PCB slots each which can accept the same universal PCBs as the CTX670. CTX100-only components are shown in Table 3-2. Table 3-2 PCB Slot Locking Bar CTX100 Cabinet and Processor Components PCB Provides CHSUB112 Base Cabinet with power supply without battery charger. Provides 4 universal slots. CHSUE112 Expansion Cabinet with power supply without battery charger. Provides 4 universal slots. Power Supply for CTX100. Spare power supply. APSU112 ACTU ARCS (Optional) 3-22 6005 Figure 3-19 System Processor PCB. (Optional PCB attachments include: modem. Ethernet 10BaseT, DTMF Receiver/Busy Tone Detector and Serial Interface Unit. DTMF Receiver and ABR Circuits. Comments Installs On Base or Expansion Cabinet One per system. Supports 8 PCB slots (4 slots in the Base Cabinet + 4 more in the Expansion Cabinet). Note The ACTU2A works with software R1.3 and higher. One per system. Provides 16 DTMF and 16 ABR circuits. ACTU1 only Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet CTX100 Cabinet and Processor Components (continued) Table 3-2 PCB Provides Comments Installs On ACTU1 only AETS (Optional) Ethernet LAN (10 BaseT) One per system. Provides 10Mbps LAN by one RJ45 for WinAdmin. AMDS (Optional) V.34 Modem One per system to provide 33.6kbps maximum modem for WinAdmin. ACTU BSIS (Optional) Serial interface unit (same unit used for CTX670). Provides four RS-232 serial ports (SMDR, SMDI) ACTU ABCS (Optional) Battery Charger Circuit. One per Power Supply for connection of Reserve Power APSU112A (requires ABTC-3M Battery Cable). Step 19: Attach and Route PCB Cables 1. Determine the direction that you want the cables to exit the cabinet(s) from the following: Power Supply Power Supply AC Cord and Battery Cables Strata CTX100-S/ CTX100 Installation • Single Direction Cable Routing – Cabling from the Expansion Cabinet can run through the Base Cabinet and exit from the Base Cabinet (see Figure 3-20). 6006 Figure 3-20 Single Direction Cable Routing • Opposite Direction Cable Routing – Cabling from the Expansion Cabinet can run through the right and left sides (see Figure 3-21). Power Supply Power Supply AC Cord and Battery Cables 6007 Figure 3-21 Opposite Direction Cable Routing Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3-23 Strata CTX100-S/CTX100 Installation Installing the CTX100 Cabinet • Do Not Run Cables Out the Top – Cabling from either cabinet should be routed out the lower sides, not from the top of the cabinet(s) (see Figure 3-22). Power Supply Power Supply 6008 Figure 3-22 Avoid Improper Cable Routing 2. Remove the left or right cover(s) of the cabinet and knock out the rectangle(s) to create a hole for the cables, as needed (see Figure 3-23). To avoid heat problems, do not store items on top of the cabinets. Note Cables can be run out of either side of Base or Expansion cabinets. 3. Connect applicable wiring (e.g., modular CO line cords, 25-pair amphenol connector cables) to the front of the PCBs as described earlier. Run cables through cover knock-outs holes (on all side covers) Figure 3-23 5968 Base and Expansion Cabinet Cables and Connectors 4. Secure all Amphenol cables to the cabinets with tie wraps (see Figure 3-24). Figure 3-24 3-24 Tie-wrap Cables Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation 4 This chapter explains how to install the Strata CTX670 system. It includes information on site requirements and provides installation instructions for various cabinet configurations. It also explains how to install ground wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (Battery Backup) cabling, and Printed Circuit Board (PCB) cabling. Inspection When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges. Strata CTX670 Installation Packaging and Storage When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-1 Strata CTX670 Installation Site Requirements Site Requirements Input Power The CTX670 requires an input power source of 115±10VAC or 208±20VAC or 240±20VAC, 50/ 60 Hz, single phase. For up to five cabinets; 208VAC or 240VAC is required for six or seven cabinets. The system requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. Each Remote Expansion Cabinet requires 3.2 amps. maximum. The remote cabinet installation requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. See Cabinet Installation Considerations for complete AC power cabling, ground wiring and battery installation instructions for local and remote cabinets. CAUTION! To avoid accidental power turn-off, do not use an On/Off wall switch for AC circuits dedicated for the use of CTX670. A reserve power source (two or four customer-supplied 12VDC batteries) can be connected to the CTX670 to serve as a backup in case of power failure. Separate reserve power may be required for remote expansion cabinets. Clearance and Location The Base and optional Expansion Cabinets can be either floor or wall mounted. Figure 4-1 shows the minimum clearance requirements for up to seven cabinets. Notes • Floor mounting requires the following additional hardware: • BFIF – floor mounting stands and brackets. • BCCB – electrical conduit box, if three or more cabinets are installed. • Wall mounting requires a plywood (3/4 inch thick) backboard. When selecting a location for the cabinets, the location must be: • Dry and clean • Well-ventilated • Well-illuminated • Easily accessible The location must not be: • Subject to extreme heat or cold • Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants • Subject to excessive vibration • Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment Optional customer-supplied reserve batteries require a well-ventilated location close (within nine feet) to the CTX670 cabinets. 4-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Site Requirements Front View Top View Wall 26.5" 24" 26.5" 14.5" Cabinets Base Cabinet 10.65 " 24" Expansion Cabinet 36" 78" Wall Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 78" is minimum height requirements for Wall Mounting up to 7 cabinets. Expansion Cabinet 6" Floor Front View Top View Wall Base Cabinet 13.5" 2" Brackets (RWBF) 24" Cabinets Expansion Cabinet 36" Wall 75" 12.65 " Expansion Cabinet Strata CTX670 Installation 26.5" 24" 26.5" Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 3" Floor Mount Stands (BFIF) 75" is minimum height requirements for Floor Mounting up to 7 cabinets. 3" Floor 5459 Note The Base Cabinet may be mounted at the bottom of the stack. Figure 4-1 Strata CTX I&M CTX670 Minimum Clearance Requirements 06/04 4-3 Strata CTX670 Installation Power Considerations Power Considerations Each CTX670 Base and Expansion Cabinet houses a power supply that furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the cabinet (see Table 2-60, “Strata CTX670 Electrical Characteristics” on page 2-47). Reserve Power Two or four customer-supplied 12VDC reserve batteries can be connected to the system to maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Table 2-63 on page 2-49 and Table 2-60 on page 2-47). The batteries are kept in a highly-charged state by the standard power supply and must be connected when the system is operating normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available, batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure. Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) and local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting commercial AC and reserve power to the CTX670 system. Table 4-1 describes which assemblies may be required to meet UL and local electrical code standards. 4-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation FCC Registration Information FCC Registration Information The unit shall be configured only with those component assemblies specified in the installation instructions and mounted only in the locations specified. See installation manual for grounding requirement. DIGITAL BUSINESS TELEPHONE SYSTEM MODEL CHSUB672A V.1A No XXXXXX INPUT: 100-120/208-240VAC 50/60Hz DC OUT 3.2/2.2A -27V1 -27V2 AOI 49L7 E88891 AC IN + - -27V3 LISTED -27V4 POW JS +5V AC IN -5V TOSHIBA CORPORATION P.F. RESET POWER ON EXP BASE FG OFF 5002 This area shows through opening in cover. ATTENTION: Cet appareil peut être muni de plusieurs cordins d'alimentation électique: jusqu'a sept dans ceertains cas. Afin de réduire le risque de chocs éectriques, débranchez tous les cordons d'alimentatin, électrique avant l'entretien de l'appareil. Utiliser seulement avec un reseau téléphonique compreneant un dispositif de protection secondaire. Voir le manuel d' instructions. Utiliser seulement avec un reseau téléphonique comprenant un dispositif de protection Oneac Corp., type 6-AP. Voir le manuel d'instructions. 5035 Industry Canada Industrie Canada 248 3032 A Manufactured under one or more of the following U.S. patents: 4,491,693 4,511,764 4,532,378 4,605,825 5,535,262 Strata CTX670 Installation CAUTION: This unit may have more than one power cord, up to seven power cords may be provided. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, disconnect all power cords before servicing. Fore use only on telephone wiring containing secondary protection. See instruction manual. For use only on telephone protected by Oneac Corp., type 6-AP protector. see instruction manual. Complies with part 68, FCC rules FCC Registration number CJ69XA-10242-KF-E CJ69XA-10243-MF-E CJ6JPN-22758-PF-E Ringer equivalence0.2B(ac)0.0(dc),0.3B(ac)0.0(dc) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject ot the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. TOSHIBA CORPORATION This Class - A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet apparel numbérique de la class A est conforme á la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Figure 4-2 Strata CTX I&M Location of Approval Labels 06/04 4-5 Strata CTX670 Installation Cabinet Installation Considerations Cabinet Installation Considerations The Base (CHSUB672) and Expansion (CHSUE672) Cabinets can be wall or floor mounted. To make it easier to add cabinets (after the initial installation) when a customer needs to expand, install the Base Cabinet on top for wall-mount installations and on the bottom for floor-mount installations. The dimensions of the Base and Expansion Cabinets are: Height: Base Cabinet: 11 3/4 inches Height: Expansion Cabinet/Remote Expansion Cabinet: 10 inches Width: 26 1/2 inches Depth: 10 5/8 inches Weight: approx. 30.5 lbs. (14 kg.) Note The weight approximates a cabinet completely filled with PCBs. Weight may vary slightly, depending on PCBs. Recommended Installation Sequence Step 1. Install power supplies in cabinets. Reference Information “Install Power Supply” on page 4-6. “Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet” on page 4-10. 2. Mount cabinets on wall or floor. “Cabinet Floor Mounting” on page 4-33. 3. Install ground wiring. “Ground the System” on page 4-18. 4. Install AC power cabling to cabinets. “Install AC Power Components” on page 4-20. 5. Install reserve power cabling. “Install Reserve Power” on page 4-29. 6. Install PCBs and PCB cabling. Figures 4-38~4-23, 4-42 and the section titled “Install Processor and Universal PCBs” on page 4-43. Note Each cabinet requires four wood screws (#12 X 2 inch size) for wall mount installation. Wood screws are not provided with the system. Step 1: Install Power Supply The Base and Expansion Cabinets are factory-shipped without the power supply installed. The CTX670 cabinets use the BPSU672 power supply, which is different from the DK280 or DK424. ³ To install power supplies in cabinets of new or installed systems 1. Remove the power supply from its box. The power supply AC power cord for 120VAC and the power supply mounting screws are provided with the KSU cabinet. If the system is to be powered by 208VAC or 240VAC, another powered cord, BACL240 must be ordered separately for each power supply. 2. Make sure that the front and right side covers are removed from the cabinet (see Figure 4-5). 3. Slide the power supply into the right side of the cabinet so that its four mounting holes align with the four cabinet mounting holes. (Make sure that the two backplane FG wires are positioned between the FG wire holder and the power supply.) 4-6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Power Supply Note The backplane FG wires are not safety grounds: they are required for proper system CO line operation. 4. Plug the Back Plane DC OUT cable plug into the DC OUT connector on the power supply. (The plug has a guide key on it to ensure that it is plugged in correctly.) 5. Secure the FG wire spade lug to the power supply with the FG screw. 6. Secure the power supply to the cabinet with the four provided screws. 7. If the cabinet is the Base Unit, a standalone Remote Expansion Cabinet, or the first in a stack of Remote Expansion Cabinets. Set the Exp/Base switch to the “Base” position (see Figure 4-3). 8. If the cabinet is an Expansion Unit, set the Exp/Base switch to the “Exp” position. Important! The power supply set as “Base” is the master and has On/Off control over all other power supplies, which are designated as slaves. If the master power supply is turned Off or On, all other power supplies will automatically turn Off or On. (Individual slave power supplies must be turned On.) 9. See Figure 4-3 to ensure that the power supply is properly installed. 10. Install power supplies in all cabinets, using Steps 1~9 of this procedure. 11. Install the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets, ground wiring, and cabinet bonding plates, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on page 4-6. Check the -24 Volt Circuit Breakers The BPSU672A provides four -24v circuit breakers as shown in Figure 4-3. If a low resistance between –24 volts and ground exists the circuit breaker will trip. Usually the front panel DC green LED indicator will turn off but not always. Also if AC power is recycled the DC LED indicator may turn back on – even if the –24 volt circuit breaker is tripped. • The circuit breaker 24V1~24V4, located directly below DC-out cable, protects the cabinet slots as shown in the Circuit Breaker assignment table. Strata CTX670 Installation Circuit Breaker Location and Slot Assignments (see Figure 4-3) Reset Circuit Breaker 1. A defective PCB or an external short on the MDF may cause the circuit breaker to trip. 2. If you suspect that a –24 volt circuit breaker has tripped, try to reset it by: • Turn the power supply DC power switch off and unplug the power supply AC power cord from the AC outlet – the inside of the power supply has exposed voltages. • Gently press in each circuit breaker and listen for or try to feel it click. If the breaker was tripped, you will hear or feel it click back to the set position. • If the circuit breaker resets, pull the PCBs and check for MDF shorts associated with the slots assigned to the tripped circuit breaker. Remove any defective PCBs and MDF shorts. • Restore power and verify the system is working normally. 3. Replace the power supply if the circuit breaker continues to trip and a defective PCB or short cannot be found. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-7 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Power Supply Check the Power Factor Indicator and Reset Button The front panel of BPSU672A provides a Power Factor LED and Reset button. If the cabinet power factor is exceeded by overload of PCBs, the PF LED will turn on. ³ If the PF LED indicator turns on, press the PF reset button with a pointed tool or pencil. If the PF LED turns off and does not turn on again it may have been turned on by a current surge while installing a PCB while the power supply was turned-on. ³ When a PF alarm is indicated, check that the cabinet power factor is not exceeded using the “Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check” on page 2-42. If the Power factor has been exceeded relocate any PCBs that are causing the PF to be exceeded. Power Supply (BPSU672) Removal 1. Remove the front and right side covers (Figure 4-5) from the cabinet. Remove the right side covers of other cabinets as needed to disconnect wiring. 2. Turn the power supply Off, and disconnect the AC power cord, all ground wiring and reserve power cabling that is connected to the power supply. 3. Disconnect the back plane DC OUT cable plug from the DC OUT connector. 4. Loosen the four mounting screws securing the power supply to the cabinet and remove the power supply. Power Supply Replacement ³ Install the replacement power supply per “Install Power Supply” on page 4-6. 4-8 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Power Supply Back Plane DC Voltage Connector Back Plane DC Voltage Cable/Plug DC OUT -27V1 -27V2 BATT + - -27V3 -27V4 POW +5V AC IN -5V P.F. RESET POWER ON EXP BASE OFF FG B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 5039 Cabinet Support Post Wire Clamp Green/Green yellow wire is fastened with FG Screw Mounting Holes 24V Circuit Breaker Assignments: EXP. Cabinet Base Cabinet 24V-1 S101, S102 24V-1 S_01, S_02 24V-2 S103, S104 24V-2 S_03, S_04 24V-3 S105, S106 24V-3 S_05, S_06, S_07 24V-4 S107, S108 24V-4 S_08, S_09, S_10 DC Voltage Connector Jack -24V1 Power Factor (PF) alarm LED indicates the cabinet PF was exceeded. Correct the problem and press the RESET button to clear the alarm. + - AC IN AC Power Cord Jack -5V P.F. BATT (Volts) + -24V3 Battery Cable Connector POW +5V -5V (–4.5 ~ –5.5), 0.8 amps Expansion Cabinet only BATT -24V4 DC Voltage Specification +5V (+4.5 ~ +5.5), 4.0 amps -24V2 Strata CTX670 Installation DC OUT RESET 0 POWER ON EXP BASE -24V (–26.3 ~ –27.8), 6.0 amps – –26.3 ~ –27.8 OFF 2 FG 1. Back Plane DC Voltage Plug must be plugged into Power Supply when checking voltages. Expansion/ Base Switch 2. On BPSU672, the BATT output is 0 volts unless connected to good batteries. FG Frame Ground Screws DC Voltage Connector Plug Pin Wires Yellow Blue White Green Green Green -24 -5 +5 0 0 0 +5 Yellow Yellow Yellow Green Green Green Red -24 -24 -24 0 0 0 +5 Figure 4-3 Strata CTX I&M Red Power Supply Installation 06/04 4-9 Strata CTX670 Installation Mount Cabinets Step 2: Mount Cabinets There are two methods of mounting cabinets: wall or floor mounting. Wall mounting the most common and economical method is described below. The floor mounting description begins on page 4-33. Note Toshiba recommends installing cabinets (see Figures 4-4~4-10) from the top down, Base Cabinet on top, first Expansion Cabinet below it, second cabinet below that, etc. Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet Follow these instructions to wall mount the Base Cabinet or the first Remote Expansion Cabinet. A wooden backboard between the cabinet and the wall is necessary (see Figure 4-4). 1. Obtain a board, such as plywood, that is at least 3/4 of an inch thick. The board should be at least 6-1/2 feet high (completely expanded systems with seven cabinets require this much height) and 26 inches wide (minimum). Secure the board to the wall with wood screws with the bottom edge of the board is six inches above the floor. (If there are wall studs, make sure the screws align with the studs.) 2. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet (see Figure 4-5). Note The two screws on the front cover and the two screws on each side cover should be loosened just enough to slide the covers off. The front cover slides left and the side covers swing out and down for removal. 3. Hold the Base Cabinet back cover against the wall or backboard so that its two top mounting holes are approximately 6-1/2 feet (78 inches) above the floor. This allows up to seven cabinets to be installed (top-down) with a six-inch clearance between the floor and bottom cabinet (see Figures 4-6 and 4-7). 4. Use a level to make sure that the back cover is held level. 5. Trace the upper arch of the top mounting holes with a pencil. 6. Remove the back cover from the wall. Draw a line between the top two marking hole marks. 7. Drill holes on the line in the middle of the arch tracing. 8. Screw #12 X 2 inch size wood screws into the two drilled holes, leaving about 1/8 of an inch clearance between the screw heads and the wall. 9. Hang the Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet back cover from the top two screws and secure the screws into the wall. 10. Drill holes at the bottom two mounting holes of the back cover, and secure #12 X 2 inch wood screws into the two holes. 11. If installing a Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet back cover to the wall: Position the cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers, slide the cabinet right to the proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws on the right side of the cabinet. If installing Expansion Cabinets, skip to “Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets” on page 4-11. 12. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on page 4-6. 13. Fill out the slot identification label on the cabinet (see Figure 4-8). 14. Reinstall the front cover, top cover, and side covers onto the cabinet. 4-10 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Mount Cabinets Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets 1. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Expansion Cabinets. Note The two screws on the front cover and the two screws on each side cover should be loosened just enough to slide the covers off. The front cover slides left and the side covers swing out and down for removal. 2. Hold an Expansion Cabinet back cover against the wall so that its top locating parts align with the bottom locating parts of the Base Cabinet back cover (see Figure 4-4 on page 4-12). To secure the Expansion Cabinet back cover to the back board, repeat Steps 5~11 from “Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet” on page 4-10. 3. To install additional Expansion Cabinet back covers, repeat Step 2 above. 4. Starting with the top Expansion Cabinet back cover (which is fastened to the wall), position an Expansion Cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers. Slide the cabinet to the right to the proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws to the right side of the back cover. Repeat for all other Expansion Cabinets. 5. Loosen the bonding connection plates fastened on both sides of the first Expansion Cabinet (see Figure 4-9) then fasten the plates between the Base Cabinet and the first Expansion Cabinet. Repeat to connect the first Expansion Cabinet to the second Expansion Cabinet, etc. 6. Base Cabinet: Loosen data cable door locking screws and open data cable doors; then connect the first Expansion Cabinet data cable to the “CAB 2” (top) data cable connector on the Base Cabinet. Install data cables in appropriate connectors for all other Expansion Cabinets. (See Figure 4-12. 7. After all data cables are installed, close data cable doors and secure with the locking screw. Important! Data cable door screws must be firmly tightened for proper system operation. Data cables for DK280 and DK424 cabinets are not compatible with CTX670 cabinets. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation 8. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on page 4-6. 9. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet. 10. Reinstall covers onto cabinets. 4-11 Strata CTX670 Installation Mount Cabinets Locating Parts Plaster Board Wall 3/4" Plywood Backboard #12 X 2" (or long enough to secure to the wall stud) Wood Screws Use as many as necessary to secure plywood backboard. Dealer Supplied #12 X 1.25" Wood Screws (4 Screws Per Cabinet) Back Cover 5.0 ft. minimum for 5 cabinets or 6.5 ft. for 7 cabinets 6 inches between bottom cabinet and floor 5040 Floor Figure 4-4 4-12 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Mount Cabinets Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) nt Fro ht Rig Back Cover Right Side Cover Remove four screws to remove back cover Loosen two screws to remove the side cover (right and left covers) 5041 Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) Strata CTX670 Installation Loosen four screws to remove the top cover. Note: Do not remove the top cover if the Base Cabinet is the top cabinet. Front Cover 5038 Right Side Cover t ig R n ro F t h Loosen two screws to remove front cover Figure 4-5 Strata CTX I&M Loosen two screws to remove the side covers (right and left side covers) Cabinet Cover Removal and Installation 06/04 4-13 Strata CTX670 Installation Mount Cabinets Marking Hole 18 .8 IN. Trace Upper Arch 9.9 Back Cover 1459 Figure 4-6 IN. CTX670 Back Cover Mounting Holes Hang cabinet on back cover then slide to right. Hanger Back Cover Hanger Hole Back Cover Mounting Strip Important! After mounting cabinet to back cover use two screws to fasten cabinet to back cover. 1460 Figure 4-7 4-14 CTX670 Mounting Cabinet on Back Cover Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Mount Cabinets B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 B101 B102 B101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 DC OUT -24V1 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 -24V2 BATT + - -24V3 -24V4 POW +5V AC IN -5V P.F. POWER ON RESET EXP BASE OFF FG B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 5002 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 CABINET NO. 3 4 5 6 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 2 3 4 5 6 7 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 BASE BASE S_05 FG FG S201 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S 02 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 OFF OFF 5002 5002 S_10 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF 5002 5002 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF 5002 5002 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- Strata CTX670 Installation POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF 5002 5002 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF 5002 5002 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 OFF OFF 5002 5002 5460 Figure 4-8 Strata CTX I&M CTX670 Cabinet Interior 06/04 4-15 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Data Cables Step 3: Install Data Cables 1. After mounting the CTX670 cabinets, install the data cables. Then, install the bonding plate per Figure 4-9. Cab 2 Cable Left Side Base Cabinet CA B 2 CA B 3 CA B 4 CA B 5 CA B 6 CA B 7 Cable Guard Screw Cable Guard PCB Cable Data Cables Expansion Cabinet Front Data Cable Door (shown open) Expansion Cabinet 5342 Bonding Connection Plate (required for all wall mount expansion cabinets) To MDF Remote Cabinet Cable feed through hole Figure 4-9 4-16 Data Cables Shown in Cabinet Interior—Side View Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Data Cables 2. Wrap the cables in with the mesh tie. The purpose of the wrap is to shield the cables from EMI/ RFI effects. See Figure 4-10. Front Cable Shield (B50MT) Part No. B50MT comes with the Base Cabinet. It must be ordered separately for each Remote Cabinet pair. 1. Attach lead to grounding screw. 2. Wrap mesh around communication cables. 3. Secure with velcro strap. CAUTION! Mesh strap should not touch cabinet metal surfaces. 25-Pair Amphenol Cables Knock Out Plastic Strata CTX670 Installation Top To MDF 5045 To MDF Figure 4-10 Strata CTX I&M 25-Pair Amphenol Cables Cabinet Amphenol Cables 06/04 4-17 Strata CTX670 Installation Ground the System Step 4: Ground the System The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation and safety. The AC power cord(s) already contains a conductor for the “third wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet (see Figure 4-11, for grounding points “A” and “B”). An insulated conductor must connect the frame ground terminal on the Base Cabinet to a cold water pipe or the building ground (point “B”). Before connecting the system to the AC power source, measure the impedance of the building ground reference. If the ground path connected to the system has an impedance of 1 ohm or more, a better ground must be installed. In Figure 4-11, the grounding path between point “A” and the single point ground “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. The “third wire ground” coming from the primary AC power outlet must be dedicated and must be routed through the same conduit as the phase conductors serving the system. The conductor connected to the frame ground (FG screw) on the system power supply must be insulated and comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, but must not depend on the cord and plug of the system. If the CTX670 system consists of more than one cabinet, you must install the bonding connection plates that come attached to each expansion cabinet. Refer to Figure 4-9. Connect the mother board ground wires and the intercabinet ground wires per Figure 4-11. Wrap the cable mesh shield (part No. B50MT) around the 25-pair communication cables that carry stations over tip and ring, per Figure 4-10. WARNING! Failure to provide a proper ground may be a safety hazard to service personnel or lead to confusing trouble symptoms. In extreme cases, system failure may result because the system is not properly protected from lighting or power transients. 4-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Ground the System The Single Point Ground must always be connected to the Base Cabinet Power Supply FG Screw (Top cabinet - Wall Mount or Bottom cabinet - Floor Mount.) FG (Frame Ground) Screws Power Supply “B” Base Cabinet ONEAC 6-AP or 6-DP Solid State Secondary Protectors Point “B” is always on the Base Cabinet, whether it's on the top or bottom. Cabinet Motherboard Insulated Ground Wire “B” Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. AWG #6 Wire (minimum) Length: 60 Feet (maximum) Cabinet Motherboard Single Point Ground (SPG) Cold Water Pipe or Ground Rod Up to six Expansion Cabinets Cabinet Motherboard AWG #6 Wire (minimum) Length: 60 Feet (maximum) Cabinet Motherboard Note: The SPG cannot be structural steel members or conduit. Earth Ground: Per General Rules of Article 250 of the National Electric Code, NFPA70 120VAC System Primary Power ( 1-5 cabinets only ) Cabinet Motherboard “A” 5044 Green/Green Yellow ground wires from Motherboard FG Screws Inter-cabinet green wires supplied with each cabinet The cabinets must be located no more than 9 feet from the AC outlet. Third Wire AC Ground Note: The ground must be routed through the same conduit as the phase conductors serving the system. Note: The system may be powered by 120, 208, or 240VAC. Figure 4-11 Strata CTX I&M Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 115VAC ± 10VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 20 Amp Branch Circuit Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. Strata CTX670 Installation NEMA 5-15R, 120VAC 208 or 240VAC System Primary Power ( 1-7 cabinets ) NEMA 6-20R, 240VAC “A” Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 208VAC ± 20VAC (50/60 Hz) or 240VAC ± 20VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 20 Amp Branch Circuit. Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. If 208VAC is used, the plug may have to be changed by a licensed electrician. Cabinet Grounding 06/04 4-19 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components Step 5: Install AC Power Components AC Power Requirements The Strata CTX670 requires a single-phase, 50/60 cycles power source of 120, 208, or 240VAC, on a dedicated 20 ampere circuit breaker. 208VAC or 240VAC is required for six or seven cabinet systems. The CTX670 power supply, BPSU672, automatically detects and adjusts for the type of AC voltage (120/208/240) to which it is connected. Toshiba recommends that a dedicated AC service panel be used for the CTX670. AC outlets must be dedicated to CTX670 use, fused, and grounded. Equipment unrelated to the CTX670 must not be connected to the circuit or service panel dedicated to the CTX670. Note It may not always be possible to power a complete CTX670 from a single circuit breaker panel. For example, in the case where a cabinet is remotely located. To avoid accidental turn-off, do not configure the outlet serving the CTX670 with an On/Off switch. AC outlets serving the cabinets must be close enough so that the power cord from the cabinet power supply or power strip can reach the outlet (these power cords are nine ft.). AC wall outlets for the CTX670 must be on dedicated 20amp breakers. AC outlets must meet National Electrical codes specifications: NEMA 5-20R for 120VAC or NEMA 6-20R for 208VAC/240VAC. AC power cabling requirements vary, depending on: The method of cabinet installation (floor or wall mount), AC power source voltage (120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC) and the number of cabinets. Requirements for distribution of AC power within the cabinets of the CTX670 are as described in Cabinet AC Power Distribution section. 4-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components Cabinet AC Power Component Description The table shown below identifies the cabinet parts required to distribute AC power within the Strata CTX670 cabinets. Table 4-1 Power Cabinet Hardware Option Description Cabinet power strip for 120VAC primary power – provides three standard 120VAC/15A outlets (NEMA 5-15R) and nine ft. AC power cord with standard 120VAC/15A plug (NEMA 5-15P). This unit is field installed inside system cabinet side panels. The system can use 12 amps. (max.). See Figures 4-12~4-17. One RPSB2 is required for two or three cabinet systems if the local electric code allows only one AC power cord to be connected to the system. RPSB2 Note If the local electric code allows only one AC power cord to be connected to the system, 208VAC or 240VAC must be used as primary AC power for systems with four or more cabinets. One RPSB2 is required for a three or four cabinet system if the local electric code allows two AC power cords connected to the system. Two RPSB2s are required for a five cabinet system if the local electric code allows two AC power cords connected to the system. Cabinet power strip for 208VAC or 240VAC primary power. Provides three 240VAC/20A outlets (NEMA 6-20R) and nine ft. AC power cord with a standard 240VAC/20A plug (NEMA 6-20P). This unit is field installed inside system cabinet side panels. The cord is rated at 16 amps. (max.). See Figures 4-14~4-17. One BPSB240 is required for two or three cabinet systems. Two BPSB240s are required for four or five cabinet systems. BPSB240 Three BPSB240s are required for six or seven cabinet systems. ● ● BACL240 Local electric codes allow only one AC power cord to be connected to the system when using 208VAC or 240VAC as the primary AC power. If using 208VAC as primary power, the plug on the BPSB240 AC power cord (NEMA 6-20P) may have to be changed by a certified electrician depending on local electric codes. Strata CTX670 Installation Note AC208V or AC240VAC nine ft., 10 amps. (max.), power supply cord. This cord must be used when the system is powered by 208VAC or 240VAC. One cord is required for each cabinet power supply and must be ordered separately only if using 208VAC or 240VAC as the system primary AC power. Note The cord conforms with a National Electric Code standard plug (NEMA 6-20P) 208VAC/ 240VAC. The power strip plug that exits the system may have to be changed to a twistlock type by a certified electrician to conform with local electric codes. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-21 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview Figures 4-12 and 4-13 show an overview of the AC power and data cabling for the CTX670. Detailed illustrations of AC power strips and cords are on the following pages. 7 BBTC2A-2M battery cables supplied with BBDB Power Supply Motherboard CHSUB672A Cabinet 1 (base) 2 3 4 5 6 7 BPSU672A Power supply cord for: • 120VAC - supplied BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 2 (expansion) BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 3 (expansion) Power Strip • RPSB2 for 120VAC only BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 4 (expansion) BATT Battery Distribution Box • BBDB AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 5 (expansion) BATT AC IN Power Strip Cables to Primary AC Power outlets (9 ft.) with NEMA 5-15P plug BBTC1A-2M Cables to Reserve Power Batteries (2 m.) 5046 Data Cable (supplied with expansion cabinet) Figure 4-12 120VAC Power/Data Cabling for up to Five Cabinets 4-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components 7 BBTC2A-2M battery cables supplied with BBDB Power Supply Motherboard CHSUB672A Cabinet 1 (base) 2 3 4 5 6 7 Power supply cord for 240VAC/ 10 amps, ordered separately. BPSU672A BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 2 (expansion) Caution: Three 240VAC power strips are required for all systems with 6 or 7 cabinets. Only one power cord is allowed to be connected to the 208VAC/240VAC power outlet. BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 3 (expansion) BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 4 (expansion) Power Strip • BPSB240A for 208VAC/240VAC only BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 5 (expansion) BATT BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 6 (expansion) BATT Battery Distribution Box • BBDB AC IN • Power Strip Cord is (9ft.) • Power Strip Plug (NEMA 6-20-P) • To 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power Outlet (NEMA-6-20-R) BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 7 (expansion) Strata CTX670 Installation AC IN BATT BBTC1A-2M Cables to Reserve Power Batteries (2 m.) AC IN Data Cable (supplied with expansion cabinet) 5626 Figure 4-13 208VAC/240VAC Power/Data Cabling for up to Seven Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-23 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components Cabinet AC Power Considerations The CTX670 power supply works with either 120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC. CTX670 only requires 120VAC (up to three cabinets if one AC cord is allowed or five cabinets if two AC cords are allowed – see below). If the system has more then five cabinets, 208VAC or 240AVC is required for the primary AC power source. 208VAC or 240VAC can always be optionally used for systems with five or less cabinets for future growth or, if the electrical code requires. To determine AC power requirements, you need to check local electrical code requirements for 120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC primary power. Some electrical codes stipulate that: • 208VAC or 240VAC is required for telephones systems • Only one electrical cord can connect to the telephone system. • Only two electrical cords can connect to the telephone system. • No electrical cord can connect to the telephone system – must use conduit wiring installed by a certified electrician (example: when system is floor mounted). Cabinet AC Power Component Requirements for Wall Mounted Systems Tables 4-2 and 4-3 show the cabinet parts required to distribute AC power for various configurations of the CTX670 cabinets. Figures 4-14~4-17 show how to install these parts. Table 4-2 Wall Mount Cabinet Power Component Requirements for 120VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code 2 3 4 5 6 7 Allows only one 120VAC power cord from system 0 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Allows two 120VAC power cords from system 0 RPSB2 0 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 1 RPSB2 2 RPSB2 N/A N/A ● ● One dedicated, isolated, 20 amp. AC circuit breaker with dual outlets is required. N/A= If the system contains more than three cabinets and if the local code allows only one AC cord, the system requires a BCCB120 conduit box wired by a certified electrician when using 120VAC as primary power. Otherwise, 208VAC or 240VAC should be used as the primary power source (see cabinet power options listed below). Table 4-3 Wall Mount Cabinet Power Component Requirements for 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code Allows One AC power cord from system Important! 4-24 Cabinets 1 Cabinets 1 1 BACL240 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 BPSB240 1 BPSB240 2 BPSB240 2 BPSB240 3 BPSB240 3 BPSB240 2 BACL240 3 BACL240 4 BACL240 5 BACL240 6 BACL240 7 BACL240 The plugs and wall receptacles required by the local electrical code might differ for 208VAC and 240VAC. Thus in some areas of the U.S., the plug used on the Toshiba 240VAC power strip and 240VAC power supply cord (NEMA code 6-20P) can not be used for 208VAC installations. In this case, when using 208VAC, the AC plugs on the BPSB240 power strip cord that connects directly to the 208VAC wall outlet must be changed by a certified electrician per the local electrical code. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components Cabinet Right-Side-Panel Power Strip (RPSB2 or BPSB240) RPSB2/BPSB240 RPSB2 BPSB240 Screws provided with Power Strip 5219 To AC Outlet Cabinet Bonding Plate Power Strip for 208VAC or 240VAC (only) BPSB240 Power Strip for 120VAC (only) RPSB2 Receptacle Pass & Seymour 5858 NEMA No. 6-20R 16A max. Receptacle NEMA No. 5-15R Strata CTX670 Installation Cable Length 3 m. (Approx. 9 ft.) Plug NEMA No. 5-15P 12A max. 5219 Plug Pass & Seymour 5466-X NEMA No. 6-20P 16A max. WARNING! To prevent serious injury, always mount power strips with provided screws before inserting plug into AC power. Figure 4-14 Strata CTX I&M AC Power Strip Installation 06/04 4-25 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components One cabinet - one AC cord exits system Cabinet 1 Two or three cabinets - one AC cord exits system Right-side panel Power Supply Cabinet 1 Power Supply Front Notes 1, 2 (120/208/240VAC) Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply Two cabinets - two AC cord exit system Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 BPSB240 (208/240VAC) or RPSB2 (120VAC) Power Supply Power Supply Note 2 (120VAC only) Notes 1, 2 (120/208/240VAC) Note 2 (120VAC only) Four or five cabinets - two AC cords exit system Four or five cabinets - one AC cord exits system Cabinet 1 Power Supply Cabinet 1 Power Supply Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply BPSB240 Cabinet 4 Power Supply Cabinet 4 Power Supply BPSB240 Cabinet 5 Power Supply RPSB2 Note 2 (120VAC only) RPSB2 Cabinet 5 Power Supply Notes 1, 2 (120VAC only) Notes 1, 2 (208VAC or 240VAC only) 5033 Notes 1. 120VAC cord is supplied with cabinet. A special cord, BACL240, must be ordered for each cabinet if 208VAC or 240VAC is used. 2. Power Strips must plug into the following AC outlets: 120VAC to NEMA 5-15R, and 208/240VAC to NEMA 6-20R. Figure 4-15 4-26 AC Power Cords for One to Five Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components Six or Seven cabinets - one AC cord exits system Cabinet 1 Power Supply Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply Cabinet 4 Power Supply Cabinet 5 Power Supply Power Supply Cabinet 7 Power Supply Notes 1, 2 (208VAC or 240VAC only) 5462 Strata CTX670 Installation Cabinet 6 BPSB240 Figure 4-16 AC Power Cords in Six or Seven Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-27 Strata CTX670 Installation Install AC Power Components Right Side AC Power Cables Front Bonding Connection Plates (Required for all wall mounted expansion cabinets on both right and left sides) RPSB2 or BPSB240 Power Strip 120VAC power supply cord is shipped with each cabinet. A special AC power supply cord (BACL240) must be ordered separately for each power supply if using 208VAC or 240VAC power. Figure 4-17 4-28 5233 All Power Strip cords are 9 feet long. To AC Outlet AC Power Strips in Cabinet Interior Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Step 6: Install Reserve Power Two or four customer-supplied, 12VDC batteries (80 amp hours maximum) can be connected to the system as a power failure backup. In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches over to battery power without any interruption to existing calls or other normal system functions. Important! Batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available; they cannot be connected during an AC power failure situation. The length of time reserve power operates depends on the system, size and number of batteries provided, and the system load. Typical reserve power duration estimates and battery specifications are estimated with the following considerations (see Table 4-4): • Batteries have full charge at start of operation. • Two or four batteries connected per Figure 4-18. • Batteries are 12VDC, rated at 80 amp/hours each. • System is operating at full load traffic with LCD phones. • Batteries used for this test are gel-cell and maintenance-free. Reserve duration will vary depending upon battery type, age, and manufacturer. These figures should only be used as an estimate. Table 4-4 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimate Number of Cabinets 2 3 4 5 6 7 12.0 hrs. 6.0 hrs. 4.0 hrs. 3.0 hrs. 2.5 hrs. 2.0 hrs 1.8 hrs Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 24.0 hrs. 12.0 hrs 8.0 hrs 6.0 hrs. 5.0 hrs. 4.0 hrs 3.5 hrs WARNING! Some batteries can generate explosive gases. Therefore, ensure that batteries are located in a well-ventilated area. Strata CTX670 Installation 1 Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration Do not smoke near batteries. Avoid creating any electrical sparks near batteries. Use commercially available battery enclosures to reduce risk to nearby people and equipment. The procedure for installing reserve power varies, depending on the number of cabinets in the system and the mounting method employed in installing the cabinets. The following text details reserve power battery installation requirements. WARNING! Battery cables that exit the cabinet(s) are not UL listed because of possible incorrect installations. Have a licensed electrician install these cables. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-29 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables The part names and descriptions of the reserve battery cabinet components and cables are shown in Table 4-5. Table 4-5 Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables Option PBTC-3M Description A three-meter battery cable used to connect reserve power batteries to the system power supply when the system has less than three cabinets. One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet in a one or two cabinet system (wall or floor mount). The cable connects the CTX670 cabinet power supply directly to the battery terminals (a BBDB is not required). CTX670 reserve power battery distribution box is required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets (wall or floor mount). The box is field installed into one of the CTX670 cabinet side panels. BBDB The BBDB provides seven BBTC2A-2.0M, battery distribution cables to connect reserve power from the BDDB box to each individual cabinet power supply. One or two BBTC1A-2.0M must be ordered separately when using the BBDB battery distribution box. BBTC1A-2.0M A two-meter battery cable used to connect reserve power batteries to the BBDB battery distribution box. One reserve power cable is required in a three or four cabinet system and two cables are required for five or more cabinet systems (wall or floor mount). The cable connects CTX670 BBDB box directly to the battery terminals. Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) 1. Connect the black jumper wire (supplied with the PBTC-3M cable) from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery (Figure 4-18). 2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC-3M cable. 3. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable white lead to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. Important! The cabinet(s) must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switch set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT+/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 4. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable two-prong male plug to the Base Cabinet power supply BATT +/- receptacle. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to connect a PBTC-3M to the Expansion Cabinet. 6. To test reserve power operation, disconnect system AC power plugs with power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagram in Figure 4-18. 4-30 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) 1. Install the Battery Distribution Box (BBDB) to the bottom cabinet (see Figures 4-12 and 4-24). The BCCB is not required for wall mount systems. 2. Connect two Cable “C” jumper wires from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC batter, per Figure 4-18 (Cable “C” is supplied with the BBTC1A-2.0M cable). 3. Ensure that a serviceable 15-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the BBTC1A2.0M battery cable. 4. Connect the white lead of the BBTC1A-2.0M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. 5. Connect a second BBTC1A-2.0M in parallel to the first BBTC1A-2.0M cable per Steps 2, 3 and 4 instructions. 6. Plug the two BBTC1A-2.0M battery cables into the Battery Distribution Box. Important! The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switches set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 7. Connect the BBTC2A-2.0M cables from the Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/receptacle of individual power supplies per Figure 4-12 (BBTC2A-2.0M cables are supplied with an BBDB distribution box). 8. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plugs with the power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Note If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagrams in Figure 4-18. 4-31 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power 2-Batteries/1~7 Cabinets (with BBDB) BBTC1A-2M Cable consists of two (6.5 ft.) wires. 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each “C” Cable, supplied with BBTC1A-2M Cable White Wire A Cabinet 1~4 (only) 15A Fuse (2 each) B B Cabinet 5~7 (only) A 2-Batteries/1-Cabinet (without BBDB) Base Cabinet 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each + BPSU672 BATT – Connector PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) Black Wire To BPSU672 “BATT” Connectors (7 max.) +– A A +– B BATT 10A Fuse B BBDB BBTC2A-2M Cables (7 max.) supplied with BBDB BBDB Rating: 27.3VDC, 42A max. 4-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without BBDB) Base Cabinet + BPSU672 BATT – Connector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each Exp. Cabinet + BPSU672 BATT – Connnector 4-Batteries/1~7 Cabinets (with BBDB) 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) “C” Cables, supplied with BBTC1A-2M Cable BBTC1A-2M Cables (6.5 ft.) 15A Fuse (2 each) 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each A To BPSU672 “BATT” Connectors (7 max.) BBTC2A-2M Cables (7 max.) supplied with BBDB Figure 4-18 4-32 B 2nd cable required for 5 or more cabinets only 2-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without BBDB) Base Cabinet + BPSU672 BATT – Connector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each Fuses (12 AMP) + Exp. Cabinet BPSU672 BATT – Connnector 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) 5221 BBDB (cover removed) Battery Wiring Diagram (Two or Four Batteries) Wall Mount Only Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Cabinet Floor Mounting The part numbers and descriptions of the floor mounting hardware are shown in Table 4-6. Table 4-6 Floor Mount Hardware Option Description CTX670 conduit connection box that is installed in the base cabinet, side panel. It is used to hardwire Primary AC power and reserve battery power connections through conduit. These boxes are required by UL for three or more floor mounted cabinets. Conduit boxes are not required for wall mounted systems with any number of cabinets or floor mounted system with one or two cabinets. They can be used as an option on any system. BCCB120 or BCCB240 The BCCB120 is required when connecting AC120VAC as the primary power source and the BCCB240 is required when connecting AC208VAC or AC240VAC as the primary power source. BCCB conduit boxes must be field installed by a certified electrician. Floor mount fixture kit is required when floor mounting two or more CTX670 cabinets. Provides two metal stands for mounting any number of CTX670 cabinets on floor. Three pairs or wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with BFIF to use when mounting three or more CTX670 cabinets on floor. The wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes. BFIF Strata CTX670 Installation Floor Mounting One or Two Cabinets 1. Remove front, side, and top covers from cabinet(s) (Figure 4-5). Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver. 2. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (BPSU672A) are installed per “Install Power Supply” on page 4-6. 3. If installing just one or two cabinets, install the BFIF fixtures on each side of the bottom of the cabinet (Figure 4-19) and place the cabinet where it should be installed. 4. Set the bottom cabinet on the floor or mount surface, then set the top cabinet on the bottom cabinet. 5. Fasten the two cabinets together with the four screws provided: (two screws at front “A” and two at back “B” of cabinet. Place cabinet where it should be installed. 6. Connect the Expansion Cabinet data cable to the “CAB. 2” data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 4-9 and 4-12). ...or if installing a Remote Expansion Cabinet: see details in “Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions” on page 4-56. 7. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on page 4-6. 8. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on cabinet(s) (Figure 4-8). 9. Reinstall covers on to cabinets (Figure 4-5). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-33 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Floor Mounting Three or More Cabinets This section shows you how to mount three or more cabinets to a concrete, wood or computer room floor. Use the General Steps for all of these methods first, then the specific steps that follow for each method. 1. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (BPSU672A) are installed per “Install Power Supply” on page 4-6. 2. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets. Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using Phillips screwdriver (Figures 4-4 and 4-5). 3. Install a floor fixture (BFIF) on each side of the bottom cabinet. (Make sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. For Steps 3~10, see Figures 4-19~4-23. 4. Place cabinet two on top of the bottom cabinet and connect them together at points “A” and “B” with the screws provided. 5. Place cabinet three on top of cabinet two and connect them together at points “A” and “B” with the screws provided. 6. If installing more than three cabinets, install wall brackets (RWBF) on the top of cabinet three. Position the three cabinets parallel to the wall (two inches from the wall) and secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors as required. 7. For systems with just three cabinets, secure the floor fixtures (already attached to the bottom cabinet) to the floor with the customer-provided floor bolts. 8. Refer to the sub-sections that follow the appropriate procedure to anchor the system to concrete, wood, or computer room floor. 9. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and B with the screws provided. 10. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF) are installed on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three. 11. Check to make sure the cabinets are parallel to the wall. Secure the floor fixtures attached to the bottom cabinet to the floor with the customer-provided floor anchors. 12. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figure 4-9). (The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet should be connected to the connector labeled “CAB. 2”, the cable from the second Expansion Cabinet to the “CAB. 3” connector, etc.) 13. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on page 4-6. 14. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet and reinstall covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.) 4-34 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Top Cabinet Wall Securing Brackets (RWBF) (Left and Right Side) B B Front (2) Mouting Screws A Provided with BFIF Kit B Back (2) Mounting Screws Provided with BFIF Kit B B Base Cabinet (bottom) B Third Cabinet Wall Securing Bracket (RWBF) (Left and right side) A B A B A B A B A B A Anchor Bolts (2) Bottom Wall Securing Bracket (RWBF) 1 BFIF is inside of cabinet edge 5042 Figure 4-19 Anchor Bolts (2) Strata CTX670 Installation BFIF Mounting Screws Floor Fixture (BFIF) BFIF Mounting Screws CTX670 Cabinet Floor Installation Important! • BFIF (two-each) and RWBFA (six-each) are supplied with the floor installation kit BFIF. • Upper and third cabinets must be fixed to the wall with RWBFS on each side (use #12 x 2 inch wood screws and wall anchors, as required). • Floor fixture (BFIF) must be fixed to floor by either anchor bolts, or wall by RWBF wall brackets (see Figures 4-19 and 4-20). • Screw size for BFIF and A and B cabinet screws are metric M5 x 10, .80 pitch. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-35 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power RWBF RWBF RWBFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated RWBF “A” Front two screws, left and right sides “B” Back two screws, left and right sides RWBF A B A B RWBF BFIF RWBF BFIF A B A B A B RWBF A B A B A B A B RWBF RWBF BFIF RWBF BFIF A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B RWBF RWBF RWBF RWBF BFIF 5007 BFIFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated Note Figure 4-20 RWBF (3-pairs) and BFIF Stands (1-pair) are supplied with floor installation kit BFIF. Floor Mounting Cabinet Installation Bolt Cabinets to Concrete Floor 1. Mount the CTX670 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (see Figures 4-19 and 4-21). Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 2. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. Bottom Cabinet BFIF (Floor mount fixture) Bolt Lockwasher Bolt Anchor Concrete 3. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8Floor Plug inch bolt anchors. 4. Install the bolt anchors, with plugs, in the Figure 4-21 Installation on Concrete Floor drilled holes. 5. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor. 6. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor. 7. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. 5242 4-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Bolt Cabinets to Wooden Floor 1. Mount the CTX670 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (BFIF). See Figures 4-19 and 4-20. 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. Base Cabinet BFIF (Floor mount fixture) Bolt Lockwasher Wooden Floor 4. Drill pilot holes to make insertion of 3/8 inch lag bolts easier, and to prevent splitting Figure 4-22 Installation on Wooden Floor of wood flooring. 5. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor. 6. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using lag bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. 1468 Bolt Cabinets to Computer Room Floor 1. Mount the CTX670 Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (BIMF). See Figures 4-19 and 4-20. 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. Strata CTX670 Installation 4. Drill holes through tile for 3/8-inch threaded rods. 5. After the tiles have been drilled, insert threaded rods through the holes in the tile and mark the concrete floor directly beneath the holes in the tiles. 6. Remove the tiles. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors. 7. Install the bolt anchors with plugs in the drilled holes. 8. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive Bottom each bolt anchor into the floor. Cabinet 9. Screw threaded rods into each bolt anchor. BFIF (Floor 10. Install a hex nut, lock washer, and flat mount washer on each threaded rod. Screw the fixture) nuts down far enough to allow floor tiles to Floor Tiles be replaced over the threaded rods. Flat Washer Lock Washer 11. Replace tiles over threaded rods in their Lead Anchors Hex Nut original positions on the floor. Concrete 12. Reach under the tiles, and screw the hex nuts upward until the flat washers are touching the bottom of the tile. Figure 4-23 Installation on Computer Room 13. Use a hack saw to cut the threaded rods at a height of approximately 1.5 inches above the floor tile. 14. Move the Base Cabinet into position over the threaded rods. 1469 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-37 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power 15. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using flat washers, lock washer, and hex nuts on each threaded rod.Mount Cabinets to Computer Room Floor (Unbolted). 16. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (BPSU672A) are installed per “Install Power Supply” on page 4-6. 17. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 4-5). Note As shown in Figure 4-5, the two screws on each side cover and the three screws on the front cover (the bottom left screw must be completely removed) should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal. 18. Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver (Figure 4-4). 19. Install a floor fixture (BFIF) on each side of the bottom cabinet (Figures 4-19 and 4-23), making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. 20. Secure a wall bracket (RWBF) to both floor fixtures with the screws provided. Secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors. 21. Place a cabinet on top of the bottom cabinet and connect the cabinets together at points “A” and “B”17 with the screws provided. 22. Install wall brackets (RWBF) on the top of cabinet three and secure them to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors. 23. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and B with screws provided. 24. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF) are installed on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three. 25. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 4-9 and 4-12). The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet should be connected to the connector labeled “CAB. 2”, the cable from the second Expansion Cabinet to the “CAB. 3” connector, etc.). 26. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on page 4-6. 27. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet (see Figure 4-8), then reinstall covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.) 4-38 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Cabinet AC Power Component Installation After the cabinets have been floor mounted, the AC power components should be installed. Tables 4-7 and 4-8 show the primary AC power components required for floor mounted systems. Table 4-7 Floor Mount Cabinet Component Requirements for 120VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code Cabinets 1 2 Three or more cabinets 1 – BFIF require a conduit box 1 – BFIF 3 1 -BCCB1201 1 – BFIF 4 5 6 7 1 – BCCB1201 1 – BCCB1201 1 – RPSB2 2 – RPSB2 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF N/A N/A 1. A BCCB120 conduit connection box must be installed and wired by a certified electrician per the local electrical code (see Figure 4-24). Table 4-8 Floor Mount Cabinet Component Requirements for 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code Two or more cabinets require a conduit box Cabinets 1 1 – BACL240 1 – BFIF 2 1 – BCCB2401 2 – BACL240 1 – BFIF 3 1– BCCB2401 4 1– BCCB2401 5 1– BCCB2401 6 1– BCCB2401 7 1 – BCCB2401 1 – BPSB240 1 – BPSB240 2 – BPSB240 2 – BPSB240 3 – BPSB240 3 – BACL240 4 – BACL240 5 – BACL240 6 – BACL240 7 – BACL240 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1 – BFIF 1. A BCCB240 conduit connection box must be installed and wired by a certified electrician per the local electrical code (see Figure 4-25). Strata CTX670 Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-39 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Strata Up to 7 Cabinets Bottom Cabinet (Wall Mount) Second from Bottom Cabinet (Floor Mount) RPSB2 or BPSB240A Power Strips Cable from BCCB BBTCIA-2M BBDB1A Battery Distribution Box BBDB1A Battery Distribution Box BCCB120 or 240 Conduit Connection Box BBTC2A-2M Seven Cables Supplied with BBDB Floor Mounted Bottom Cabinet To BPSU672A Power Supply "BATT" Jack Cables to BBDB1A Conduit Reserve Batteries Primary AC Power Pannel Battery BFIF Floor Mount Stand 4784 Figure 4-24 4-40 AC Power BCCB120A or BCCB240 Conduit Connection Box Battery Distribution and Conduit Connection Box Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power F3 F1 F4 F2 F3 F1 F4 F2 BCCB120 (top view) 3 outlets NEMA:5-15R Fused: 250VAC/15A Rated: 125VAC/15A F1~F4 Battery Fuses 250VAC/15A To BBDB Battery Distribution Box BCCB240 (top view) 2 outlets NEMA:6-20R Not Fused Rated: 250VAC/20A BCCB BATT + - AC L N Battery Wire Specifications #10 AWG minimum (2 pairs) 42A max. AC Wire Specifications: 5047 Conduit Holes to 1/2 inch trade size From 20A dedicated circuit BBCB240 #12 AWG 18A max. Strata CTX670 Installation From reserve battery BCCB120 #10 AWG 29A max. WARNING! BCCB conduit boxes must be installed by a certified electrician. Figure 4-25 BCCB AC Power and Battery Connections Notes • When floor mounting the CTX670, the batteries must be installed by a licensed electrician per local electric code using conduit. (See Figure 4-25.) • Batteries should be installed in a customer-supplied commercial battery box or enclosed rack. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-41 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Reserve Power Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) Floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets require a Conduit Connection Box (BCCB) to connect reserve power cabling and AC power cabling to the system. Only a qualified electrician can install cabling between the reserve power batteries and AC power cabling to the conduit connection box. All other steps required to install reserve power, including installation of the Battery Distribution Box (BBDB), can be accomplished by the normal system installer. ³ To connect reserve power to floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets See Figures 4-12~4-17 and follow these steps: 1. Make sure that the Conduit Connection Box is installed on the bottom base cabinet (see Figure 4-24). The box can be installed by the regular system installer. 2. Have a licensed electrician install conduit and battery cabling to the Conduit Connection Box per local electrical codes. The remaining steps in this procedure can be performed by the regular system installer (see Figure 4-25). 3. Install the Battery Distribution Box on the second cabinet (the cabinet directly above the bottom cabinet), see Figure 4-24. 4. Plug the two Conduit Connection Box cables (coming from the left side of the BCCB box) into the Battery Distribution Box (BBDB). Important! The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switches set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 5. Connect cables from the (BBDB) Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/- receptacle of individual power supplies. BBTC2A-2M cables come with each BBDB distribution box (see Figure 4-12). 6. To test reserve power operation, turn off the system AC power circuit breaker with power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note AC/DC wiring and conduit must be installed by a licensed electrician per local electrical code (conduit trade size is 1/2 inch). See “Install Reserve Power” on page 4-29 for battery specifications and wiring guidelines. 4-42 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs Step 7: Install Processor and Universal PCBs This section provides procedures for the installation of CTX670 processor (or common control) PCBs. The CTX670 system Base and Expansion Cabinets are shipped empty. PCBs are not installed at the factory. Universal PCBs must be placed according to the configuration information obtained and developed in Chapter 1 – Configuration. PCB installation is in Chapter 6 – PCB Installation. • Install PCBs only after installing the Base Cabinet and, if applicable, Expansion Cabinets per the Cabinet Installation section in this chapter. • Be sure the power supply has been tested and the ground has been checked (see “Install Power Supply” on page 4-6. • Install universal slot PCBs per the CTX670 configuration guidelines (see “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37. • Install the metal mesh shield, B50MT around the 25-pair cables connected to PCBs per Figure 4-10. Important! After all PCBs are installed, be sure to slide the locking bar into the lock position to ensure that the PCBs remain in place (see Figure 4-3 on page 4-9). PCB Installation Considerations The Base Cabinet has ten slots. The first two slots, labeled “B101” and “B102” are reserved for the common control unit and future feature upgrades. The next eight slots (labeled “S101” ~“S108”) are universal and capable of hosting any of the station, line, and option interface PCBs compatible with the CTX670 systems. Cabinets are numbered from 1 to 7. The Base Cabinet is numbered 1; the first Expansion Cabinet, number 2; the second Expansion Cabinet, number 3, etc. See the CTX670 Configuration and PCB Installation section for details. Strata CTX670 Installation The Expansion Cabinets have ten universal slots, labeled “S_01,” “S_02,” etc., where the blank space of the label represents the number of the Expansion Cabinet. Like the universal slots in the Base Cabinet, these universal slots are capable of hosting any of the station, line, and option interface PCBs. PCB Option Considerations CTX670 PCBs can be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Hardware Options Some PCBs must be configured for hardware options prior to installation of the PCB in the cabinet. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter and in Chapter 6 – PCB Installation. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation. Software Options PCBs are configured for software options through programming, following the installation instructions of the PCBs. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the individual Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-43 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Strata CTX Programming Manual for detailed programming instructions. BCTU1A/BEXU1A Installation This section explains how to install the new BCTU/BEXU processor PCBs into Strata CTX670 telephone systems. The BCTU/BEXU processor PCBs require Strata CTX Release 2.1, or higher, software and CTX WinAdmin Release 2.1, or higher, software. The BCTU can be installed without the BEXU for a maximum capacity of 192 ports. It supports the Base and one Expansion cabinet. The BCTU by itself supports all the features and capacities equal to the BECU/BBCU without the BEXS and BBMS expansion PCBs. If the BEXU is installed with the BCTU, 672 ports are available, along with all the features and capacities equal to the BECU/BBCU with BEXS and BBMS expansion PCBs. The BCTU or BEXU do not have a built-in modem. The AMDS must be installed on the BCTU if remote administration is required over telephone lines. CAUTION! • Do not remove the plastic insulation shield from the back of the BEXU PCB. If the shield comes off, do not allow the back of the PCB to contact metal. • The BCTU and BEXU PCBs are shipped from the factory with the battery jumper in the “Off” position. Ensure it is moved to the “On” position before installing the processor to protect customer configuration information stored in the processor RAM. The battery will protect RAM for approximately six years. Otherwise, to conserve the lithium battery, move the jumper to the “Off” position. • When packaging the BCTU and BEXU PCBs, use only a nonconducting material enclosure, such as plain cardboard. Conductive material can cause the internal battery to discharge and erase memory in the BCTU and BEXU PCBs. • Make sure that the power supply is Off when installing the BCTU and BECU PCB or damage to the board could result. • When removing the BCTU1A and BEXU1A, first detach the cable connecting the BCTU and BEXU1A. 4-44 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs 1. On the BCTU PCB (see Figure 4-26), set the battery jumper, “BATT” to the “On” position. Although you can fit the jumper plug in a horizontal position, this would be incorrect. Be sure to place the “BATT” jumper in the correct vertical and upright position (see Figure 4-27.) Connect ribbon cable to BEXU1A AMDS Interface P7 IC501 P5 P4 P2 Backplane Connectors Place AMDS here 1 2 RJ45 LAN P801 BSIS Interface P3 P8 Smart Media Card Slot IC101 Place BSIS here BCTU1A BATT P802 ON P601 OFF RCA Jack BGM/MOH 6838 Strata CTX670 Installation Figure 4-26 BCTU1A Base Processor BATT BATT ON OFF ON OFF P601 P601 PCB Front Side Factory-shipped Position Memory Backup Position Proper Jumper Position Side View 6963 Figure 4-27 Correct Battery Jumper Position Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-45 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs 2. Install the AMDS on the BCTU if remote maintenance is required. 3. Install the BSIS on the BCTU if SMDR or SMDI is required. 4. Install the BCTU Base Unit processor in slot B102 (see Figure 4-28). Ensure the component side of the BCTU PCB is facing right when installing it in the Base Cabinet. 5. If you are installing more than one Expansion Unit, install the BEXU processor in slot B101 (see Figure 4-29). 6. Connect the two supplied ribbon cables from the BCTU to the BEXU by placing the ribbon connectors over the appropriate connector on the PCB (see Figure 4-30). Each ribbon connector has two locking tabs (top and bottom) that must be pressed down to lock the connector to the PCB. 7. Insert the SmartMedia card (gold contacts face right, notched corner faces forward and down) into the slot on the BCTU. CAUTION! • Heed any handling instructions in the SmartMedia Card User’s Manual. • Avoid bending or subjecting the card to impact. • When the card is not in used, store it in its sleeve. • Avoid touching the connectors and protect the card from dirt, dust and liquids. • Toshiba recommends backing up important data stored on the card. 8. Proceed with the system startup procedure in the Strata CTX Programming Manual. Notes Unlike the BBCU/BECU, the following are controlled by software programming for the BCTU/ BEXU: • MOH/BGM source volume adjustments • Mu/A Law selection 4-46 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs Unlike the BBCU/BECU, the internal modem is optional with the BCTU/BEXU processor. AMDS interface (optional) plugs onto the BCTU card. See Table 4-9. Ribbon Cables LINK (LAN link) TX/RX (LAN link transmitting/receiving) Network Interface Jack (RJ45, 8-pin modular) 1 BSIS Serial Ports (RJ11, 6-pin modular) 2 Smart Media Card Socket (Slide card in, gold contacts face right, notched corner down) 3 WinAdmin PC/Server ACD PC/Server Attendant Console PC / Server SMDR SMDI 4 SM (Smart Media Access Status LED) HB (Processor Heart Beat LED) MOH/BGM Input (RCA Jack) B101 B102 S_01 S_02 6920 BEXU BCTU Figure 4-28 BCTU/BEXU Processor PCB Connectors Strata CTX670 Installation P5 P4 P5 P4 IC404 P1 IC201 IC802 IC805 IC806 IC803 IC804 P2 IC403 IC801 OFF P901 IC402 ON BATT IC808 IC807 Important! White battery jumper must be moved to the ON position. 1 Backplane Connectors 2 BEXU1A 6839 Figure 4-29 BEXU1A Expansion Unit Processor Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-47 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs The following tables provide details about the connectors and indicators on the BCTU1A and BEXU1A PCBs. Table 4-9 BCTU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Description RJ45 LAN Network interface port P501 SmartMedia house SmartMedia Interface P802 RCA Jack BGM/MOH interface P2, P3 44-pin connectors Processor backplane P601 BATT Jumper Plug Must always be in the ON position to maintain customer data. LINK, TX, RX LED LAN link transmission and receive indicator SM LED SmartMedia access indicator HB LED Processor operation indication P7 60-pin connector AMDS interface (optional) P8 60-pin connector BSIS interface (optional) Connector P5 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to P4 (1) on the BEXU. Connector P4 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to P5 (2) on the BEXU. Table 4-10 BEXU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector 4-48 Type of Component P801 Type of Component Description Must always be in the ON position to maintain customer data. P901 BATT Jumper plug P4, P5 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to BCTU1A. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs 1 2 Plug to P5 (BEXU) Plug to P4 (BEXU) The short 60mm ribbon cable connects from BEXU1A 1 to BCTU1A 1 P5 The longer 120mm ribbon cable connects from BEXU1A 2 to BCTU1A 2 P4 P5 P4 BEXU1A IC404 P1 2 IC201 1 BCTU1A P7 IC501 P5 P4 Locking Tab BEXU1A P801 6962 1 P8 P3 2 Plug to (BCTU) 2 IC101 BATT ON BCTU1A P601 OFF P802 Strata CTX670 Installation Plug to P4 (BCTU) P2 P2 1 Figure 4-30 Detailed Ribbon Cable Connection for BEXU1A and BCTU1A Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-49 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs BECU/BBCU Installation CAUTION! • Do not remove the plastic insulation shield from the back of the BBCU PCB. If the shield comes off, do not allow the back of the PCB to contact metal. • The BBCU PCBs are shipped from the factory with the battery jumper in the “Off” position. Ensure it is moved to the “On” position before installing the BBCU to protect customer configuration information stored in the BBCU RAM. • When transporting the BBCU PCB, keep the battery jumper in the “On” position in order to save the configuration data stored in BBCU RAM. (The battery will protect RAM for approximately six years.) Otherwise, to conserve the lithium battery, move the jumper to the “Off” position. • When packaging the BECU and BBCU PCBs, use only a nonconducting material enclosure, such as plain cardboard. Conductive material can cause the internal battery to discharge and erase memory in the BECU and BBCU PCBs. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the battery jumper, “BATT,” on the BBCU PCB to the “On” position. On the BBCU, make sure the Mu/A jumper plug is set to the Mu position (U.S. and Canada). Before you install the BBMS, make sure the “ATTACHED BBMS” jumper is set to “NO.” After installing the BBMS, change the “ATTACHED BBMS” jumper to “YES.” If you are installing the Basic system, skip to Step 6. If you are installing the Expanded system, install the BBMS and BEXS onto the BBCU and BECU respectively. 6. Install the BBMS onto the BBCU (see Figures 4-31 and 4-32). Install the BEXS onto the BECU (see Figures 4-33 and 4-35). 7. If serial ports are required, install the BSIS onto the BECU (see Figures 4-34 and 4-35). 8. Make sure that the power supply is Off when installing the BBCU and BECU PCB or damage to the board could result. 9. Install the BECU in slot B101 and the BBCU in slot B102, then connect the two BECU ribbon cables to the BBCU, as shown in Figure 4-36. 10.Proceed with system startup procedure in the Strata CTX Programming Manual. ³ To adjust the CTX670 MOH/BGM source ³ Adjust the VR1 potentiometer to the desired volume level while listening to MOH or BGM (see Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation). 4-50 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs Network Interface RJ45 P5 P4 MU P1 P101 1 3 A BBMS1A BATT ATTACHED BBMS ON OFF YES NO P701 BBCU1A MU Law for U.S. & Canada P7 Set the jumper to "YES" only after installing the BBMS. P3 BBMS Memory Module P2 5254 Figure 4-31 BBCU Processor PCB CAUTION! Be careful installing the BBMS (Figure 4-32). It is fragile. B B M S 1 A Strata CTX670 Installation BBMS1A 5526 1. Hold the BBMS top-side up. The top side has five chips and “BBMS1A.” Figure 4-32 Strata CTX I&M 2. Slide the BBMS into the socket. 3. Push down on the outer edge of the BBMS. It should “snap” down. Installing the BBMS Backup Memory Module on the BBCU 06/04 4-51 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs BEXS1A IC401 IC402 BEXS1A UP IC403 IC404 IC402 IC403 IC401 UP IC404 5529 P4 5656 P1 P6 P8 P5 BECU1A BSIS1A 1 2 3 UP 4 5667 BECU1A Figure 4-33 Installing BEXS onto BECU Figure 4-34 Installing BSIS onto BECU BEXS1A IC402 P4 IC401 UP IC404 P5 5 CD 6 SG RJ11 ( 6-pin jack ) 1 2 3 4 UP P2 DTR P3 DSR 4 VR901 TD 3 Four Programmable Serial Ports RD 2 BSIS1A 1 P1 IC403 Serial Port Pins: BECU1A 5416 Figure 4-35 4-52 BECU with BEXS and BSIS Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs Ribbon Cables Built-in Modem (33.6 kbps, v.34 WinAdmin PC / Server) Processor Heart Beat LED (0.4 seconds on/0.4 seconds off.) Smart Media Access Status LED 1 BSIS Serial Ports (RJ11, 6-pin modular) SMDR SMDI MOH Volume Control (screw driver adjust) Smart Media Card Socket (Smart Media card slides in, gold contacts face right, notched corner down) 2 3 Network Interface Link Connection LED. Strata CTX Receive Network Data LED. Strata CTX Send Network Data LED. 4 Network Interface Jack (RJ45, 8-pin modular) MOH/BGM Input (RCA Jack) B101 B102 S_01 BECU S_02 5447 WinAdmin PC/Server ACD PC/Server Attendant Console PC / Server BBCU BBMS1A ATTACHED BBMS P1 NO P2 P5 YES Strata CTX670 Installation Insert Smart Media Card P3 11. Insert the BECU into the “B101” slot in the Base Cabinet (see Figure 4-36). Ensure the component side of the BBCU PCB is facing right when installing it in the Base Cabinet. 12. Insert the BBCU into slot B102. 13. Connect the supplied ribbon cables between BECU and BBCU. 14. Insert the SmartMedia card (gold contacts face right, notched corner faces forward and down) into the slot on the BBCU Figure 4-36 and 4-37. P4 BBCU/BECU Processor PCB Connectors Network Interface RJ45 P7 Figure 4-36 P101 1 3 MU BBCU1A Figure 4-37 ON OFF A P701 BATT 5670 SmartMedia Card Installation CAUTION! Heed any warnings or handling instructions in the SmartMedia Card User’s Manual. Avoid bending or subjecting the card to impact. When the card is not in used, store it in its sleeve. Avoid touching the connectors and protect the card from dirt, dust and liquids. Toshiba recommends backing up important data stored on the card. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-53 Strata CTX670 Installation Install Processor and Universal PCBs Table 4-11 BECU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Description VR901 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM sources. P3 RCA jack BGM/MOH interface Connector P5 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to BBCU. Connector P4 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to BBCU. BSIS Four ports of I/O RS-232 (Optional unit) Adds up to four serial ports. BEXS Time switch (Optional unit) Required for Expanded system, along with the BMMS. Table 4-12 BBCU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description BATT Jumper plug Must always be in the On position to retain processor RAM data. The Strata CTX will not operate properly if the jumper is in the Off position or if it is not installed. P7 RJ45 Network interface port. BBMS Module Subassembly module Memory module. (Optional unit) Required for Expanded system, along with the BEXS. ATTACHED BBMS (Yes/No) Jumper Jumper setting must always be set to “Yes,” regardless of whether the BBMS is installed or not. P4 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to BECU. P5 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to BECU. Jumper plug Jumper setting must be set to “Mu” law for Canada and the U.S. For more information on Mu law/A law settings, see “Country Settings On/Off” on page 11-20. SmartMedia Card socket Holds SmartMedia Card which is used to Backup/Restore Customer Data, Upgrade Operating System, Log and Trace Maintenance information. P10 Mu /A Law 4-54 Type of Component Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit The RRCU1A PCB enables a CTX670 Expansion Cabinet to be located up to three kilometers from its Base Cabinet. One RRCU1A connects to up to two ribbon-type Data Cables and applies the inter-cabinet signal to a fiber-optic pair. One fiber pair can support one or two expansion cabinets in one remote location using one RRCU1A in the Base Cabinet and another in the Remote Expansion Cabinet. Local CTX Cabinets Expansion Cabinet (2) 1 (M1) A CTX670 Base Cabinet will support up to six RRCU1A PCBs. A CTX670 will support up to six Remote Expansion Cabinets. 4 (S2) Optical Module Base Cabinet Remote CTX Cabinets Fiber Optic Connection Up to 3 Kilometers MSBU (Dealer Supplied) Remote Expansion Cabinet (4) 1 (M1) 2 (S1) Optical Module 3 (M2) 4 (S2) Remote Expansion Cabinet (3) 5820 Figure 4-38 Remote Expansion Cabinet Connection Strata CTX670 Installation An inter-cabinet Data Cable in the Base Cabinet is attached to an RRCU1A which converts the signal and uses an LED source to apply the signal to 500 MHz/km multi-mode fiber. Another RRCU1A in the Remote Expansion Cabinet receives the LED signal, converts it back to its original form and applies it to a ribbon Data Cable connected to the Remote Expansion Cabinet. See Figure 4-38. 2 (S1) 3 (M2) 2 3 4 5 6 7 This is a hardware solution and has no effect on software or administration. Remote cabinets support all line and trunk interfaces. Important! Network clock signals can only be derived from digital trunk PCBs, such as the RDTU and RPTU, that are installed in the Base Cabinet (Master) location. Do not install these digital trunk cards into the Remote Cabinets. RRCU1A cards are used at both the Base (Master) and Remote (Slave) Cabinet locations. The card set consists of an RRCU1A PCB and its ROMS1A daughter board. The RRCU1A connects to the inter-cabinet Data Cables, holds the Remote/Slave option jumpers, and has an RS-232C port for monitoring the fiber connection. (See Figure 4-41.) The ROMS1A daughter board holds an SC-type fiber connector, a connector for control of two 8-circuit DPFT units, and status LEDs. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-55 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions All instructions apply to both the Base Cabinet and the Remote Expansion Cabinet except where specifically noted. 1. Install cabinets according to the instructions given at the beginning of this chapter. Pay particular attention to wiring and grounding instructions given for Remote Expansion Cabinets. 2. If installing a standalone Remote Expansion Cabinet, or the first in a stack, set the “BASE/ EXP” switch to “BASE” in accordance with Figure 4-3. 3. Cabinets in which RRCU cards are installed must be modified to protect the routing of the cables through the cabinet. • Attach the plastic guide to the bracket provided with the RRCU1A card. See Figure 4-40. • Attach the bracket to the inner wall of the cabinet. 4. Install the RRCU Card • Select correct jumper options (see Figure 4-41). On the Master side, both option plugs connect the center pin to the upper pin (M1, M2). On the Slave side, both option plugs connect the center pin to the lower pin (S1, S2). • Remove the protective rubber cap from the fiber connector on the ROMS1A daughter board. See Figure 4-42. 5. Install a BCTC1A top cover on the topmost cabinet (see Figure 4-39). Top View Place lid over screws and slide it to the right. 5030 Figure 4-39 Remove/Replace Remote Cabinet Cover 4-56 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit When installing the RRCU, be sure to put the card in the slot before attaching the data cables. Detach the data cable before removing an RRCU1A. Failure to do so may cause interference with other data highways. Important! 6. Insert the cards • On the Master side, the RRCU card may be installed in Slots 1~8. • On the Slave side, the RRCU card may be installed in Slots 1~10. • The RRCU1A is a non-timeslot card and can be installed in slots normally left vacant adjacent to digital trunk cards. 7. Connect the data cables • At the Base Cabinet, attach an BDCL1A data cable from the data cable connector at the left of the cabinet to Connector M1 or M2 on the RRCU card. (Cables are provided according to the connectors on the RRCU card to which they are attached, see Table 4-13.) • The cabinet connected to M1 in the base emerges on connector S1 of the RRCU1A at the Remote Expansion Cabinet. Data Cable Door BDCL1A Data Cable • The cabinet connected to connector M2 of the RRCU in the base emerges on connector S2 of the RRCU1A at the Remote Expansion Cabinet. See Figure 4-41. Route the cable through the cabinet according to Figure 4-40. • Coil the excess and attach it to the grommet on the cabinet wall with a tie wrap. Be careful not to bind the cable tightly. • 4512 Spiral Tube Close the data cable doors. Strata CTX670 Installation • CA B 2 CA B 3 CA B 4 CA B 5 CA B 6 CA B 7 Clamp Bracket for Spiral Tube Figure 4-40 Table 4-13 Insert Optical Fiber Through Remote Cabinet Data Cables and Connectors Data Cables BDCL1A-MS1 BDCL1A-M2 BDCL1A-S2 RRCU Connectors M1 S1 X X M2 S2 X X X = applies to connector Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-57 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit 8. Connect the fiber optic cables • Pass the fiber optic cable through the protective tube. • Route the tube through the clamp attached to the inner cabinet wall and secure the clamp • Attach fiber to the SC connectors on the ROMS1A daughterboard. • The TX side of the Master connects to the RX side of the slave. • The RX side of the Master connects to the TX side of the slave. • TAIS recommends that the cables be marked within the cabinet for ease of maintenance. • Observe the minimum bend radius of 30mm. 9. Restore power. The RRCU PCB and its controls and connectors are shown in Figure 4-41 and Table 4-14. ROMS1A P6 Master 1 P3 P1 M1 Connect to Base Cabinet P7 Slave 1 M P10 S P4 S P8 P11 M2 Connect to Base Cabinet M Master 2 P2 S1 Connect to MSBU P9 Connect to MSBU Backplane Connector S2 Slave 2 RS-232 Port 4356 RRCU1A Figure 4-41 Remote Expansion Cabinet Printed Circuit Board (RRCU1A) Table 4-14 RRCU Controls Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Jumper Plug P10 Description Master Mode (M connections) 3-terminal Jumper Plug Jumper Plug P10 Slave Mode (S connections) The ROMS subassembly and fiber optic cable connectors is shown in Figure 4-42. Table 4-15 lists the fiber optic cable specifications. 4-58 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit 11 1 J3 1 SD RDER SYCF SYCS RST ROMS1A J1 -24v DG PFT-CONTROL CD1 CD2 CD3 CD4 CD5 15 1 J2 10 11 J4 1 4379 TX Side Optical Module RX Side Remove Rubber Cap to plug in Fiber Optic Cable Plastic Cap Fiber Optic Cable CAUTION! Inserting the fiber connector at an angle or too forcefully can cause ROMS1A Subassembly Table 4-15 Fiber Optic Specification Item Transmission Speed Specification Strata CTX670 Installation Figure 4-42 155.52 Mbps Optical Source LED, 1300 nm Fiber Type Multi-mode, Graded Index Fiber (GIF) Core Diameter Cladding Diameter 62.5 micrometers 125 micrometers Connector Type SC (2-pin transmit and receive) Maximum Fiber Length 3 km (500~1000 MHz/km fiber) 2 km (200~400 MHz/km fiber) Optical Budget (Loss) 9 dB (one way) Minimum Bend Radius 30 mm Round Trip Delay Time 30 micro seconds. Transmit Power >= -23.5 dBm Receiver Sensitivity <= -30 dBm The fiber connection must conform to both the Optical Budget and Fiber Length specifications. It is possible to have a fiber connection longer than 3 km with less than 9 dB of loss; however, the CTX670 Remote Expansion Cabinet is sensitive to signal delay and cannot be guaranteed to operate at distances greater than 3 km. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 4-59 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit Status Indicators The RRCU1A card set provides two status indicators: a set of LEDs on the ROMS1A card and an RS232C Monitor Port on the RRCU1A. Status indications are provided according to Tables 4-16 and 4-17. Binary Code Output is generated upon change of a reported condition. Table 4-16 RS-232C Binary Code Output BIT Label D0 SD D1 RDER D2 SYCF D3 SYCS D4 RST Function 1: Optical signal not detected 0 0: Optical signal detected 1: Code rule violation detected in received data 0 0: Code rule violation not detected in received data 1: Frame synchronization of received data not established 0 0: Frame synchronization of received data established 1: System synchronization between cabinets not established 0 0: System synchronization between cabinets established 1: Reset signal from CTU detected 0 0: Reset signal from CTU not detected D5 Not Used 0 D6 Not Used 1 D7 Not Used 0 Table 4-17 LED Status Indications LED PWR SD RDER SYCF SYCS RST 4-60 Normal Condition Function Blinking: Power is supplied Off: Power is not supplied On: Optical signal not detected Off: Optical signal detected On: Code rule violation detected in received data Off: Code rule violation not detected in received data On: Frame synchronization of received data not established Off: Frame synchronization of received data established On: System synchronization between cabinets not established Off: System synchronization between cabinets established On: Reset signal from CTU detected Off: Reset signal from CTU not detected Normal Condition Blinking Off Off Off Off Off Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit Monitor Port Communication Parameters Data rate: 9600 bps Data word bits: 8 Parity: None Stop bits: 1 Monitor Port Pin Assignments The monitor port pin connection and pin assignments are shown in Figure 4-43. RRCU1A PC with communication software - such as ProComm™ Monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 4439 Monitor jack (RJ12) pin numbering Strata CTX670 Installation Figure 4-43 Strata CTX I&M RRCU1A Monitor Jack 06/04 4-61 Strata CTX670 Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit 4-62 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5 Rack Mount Cabinets The Strata CTX Rack Mount Cabinets consist of a base cabinet (CRSUB672A) and expansion cabinets (CRSUE672A). The cabinets are made of plated sheet metal, dark gray in color. CAUTION! Toshiba does not support mixing floor/wall-mountable cabinets with Rack Mount cabinets in a system installation (local or remote). Mixing cabinets in an installation causes EMC, EMI, RFI and improper grounding problems. However, you do not have to match the remote cabinets to the local cabinets. For example, the local cabinets can be floor/wall-mountable while the remote ones are rack mount or vice versa. The 19 inch-wide rack must be supplied by the dealer. Basic Specifications Height: 10.5 inches (267mm) Dimensions of Base Cabinet Width: 1.58 feet (483mm—with bracket) Depth: 1.17 feet (358mm) Weight of Base Cabinet 22.04 lbs. (10 kg) Power Supply Unit (PSU) BRPSU672A (initially built in) 19" Rack Installation Dimension IEC297-1 (EIA RS 310-D) Installation Cannot be floor or wall mounted. 465.1mm (front face screw pitch – width) BRPSB120A Option RPSB2A Not applicable BPSB240A Not applicable BBDB1A Option PBTC1A-3M Option From BBDB to Battery Cable BBTC1A-2.0M Option AC240V Power Supply Cord BACL240A Option Conduit Connection Box BCCB120A Not applicable (No UL requirement.) BCCB240A Not applicable Reserve Power Battery Distribution Box2 From PSU to Battery Cable 3 Rack Mount Cabinets BRPSB240A Power Strip Box1 Optional Equipment Option 1. Power Strip Boxes for traditional cabinets cannot be used for rack mount cabinets. 2. Reserve batteries are connected using the same battery distribution box and battery cables as the CTX670 floor/wall-mountable cabinets. 3. Traditional cabinet floor mount conduit connection boxes cannot be used for rack mount cabinets. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-1 Rack Mount Cabinets Inspection Inspection When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Site Requirements Space • Do not install other devices between cabinets. • No gap should exist between the cabinets. This provides EMC by connecting 2 screws between cabinets. • The 3.28 ft. (1m) of space is necessary for the front and back of the rack to make installation and repair easy. Installation and wiring are done from the front and rear of the cabinets. • A space measuring 1.75 inches (44.5mm) must always be left above the top of the rack mounted cabinet for the purpose of ventilation. It is also necessary to have a space between the top/bottom cabinet and any other device (shown below). Side View Front View Other Device 1.75 inches (44.5mm) CRSUB672A 3.28' 3.28' Wall CRSUE672A 10.5 inches (267 mm) CRSUE672A Other Device Figure 5-1 Required Space Ventilation • 50% or more of the front and back of the cabinet must be left open for ventilation. • Cabinet rack must always be left open for ventilation. 5-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Power Considerations Input Power The Rack Mount Cabinets require an input power source of 115±10VAC or 208±20VAC or 240±20VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase, for up to five cabinets; 208VAC or 240VAC is required for six or seven cabinets. The system requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. CAUTION! To avoid accidental power turn-off, do not use an On/Off wall switch for AC circuits dedicated for the use of the Rack Mount Cabinets. A reserve power source (two or four customer-supplied 12VDC batteries) can be connected to serve as a backup in case of power failure. Environmental Conditions CAUTION! Equipment is for use in a Restricted Access Location. • Operating Temperature: 0~104 degree Fahrenheit (0~40 degree Centigrade) • Operating Humidity: 20~80% relative humidity without condensation Location When selecting a location for the cabinets, the location must be: • • • • Dry and clean Well-ventilated Well-illuminated Easily accessible The location must not be: • • • • Subject to extreme heat or cold Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants Subject to excessive vibration Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment Power Considerations Reserve Power Two or four customer-supplied 12VDC reserve batteries can be connected to the system to maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Table 2-63 on page 2-49 and Table 2-60 on page 2-47). The batteries are kept in a highly-charged state by the standard power supply and must be connected when the system is operating normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available, batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure. Rack Mount Cabinets Each Rack Mount Base and Expansion Cabinet houses a power supply that furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the cabinet (see Table 2-60, “Strata CTX670 Electrical Characteristics” on page 2-47). Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) and local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting commercial AC and reserve power to the rack mount system. Table 5-3 describes which assemblies may be required to meet UL and local electrical code standards. See “(Optional) Install Reserve Power” on page 5-14 for instructions on installing reserve power. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-3 Rack Mount Cabinets FCC Registration Information FCC Registration Information The unit shall be configured only with those component assemblies specified in the installation instructions and mounted only in the locations specified. See installation manual for grounding requirement. Manufactured under one or more of the following U.S. patents: 4,491,693 4,511,764 4,532,378 4,605,825 5,535,282 CAUTION: This unit may have more than one power cord, up to seven power cords may be provided. To reduce the risk of electrical shock, disconnect all power cords before servicing. Fore use only on telephone wiring containing secondary protection. See instruction manual. For use only on telephone protected by Oneac Corp., type 6-AP protector. see instruction manual. DIGITAL BUSINESS TELEPHONE SYSTEM MODEL CRSUB672A V.1A No. XXXXXX INPUT: ATTENTION: Cet appareil peut être muni de plusieurs cordins d'alimentation électique: jusqu'a sept dans ceertains cas. Afin de réduire le risque de chocs éectriques, débranchez tous les cordons d'alimentatin, électrique avant l'entretien de l'appareil. Utiliser seulement avec un reseau téléphonique compreneant un dispositif de protection secondaire. Voir le manuel d' instructions. Utiliser seulement avec un reseau téléphonique comprenant un dispositif de protection Oneac Corp., type 6-AP. Voir le manuel d'instructions. 100-120/208-240VAC 50/60Hz 3.2/2.2A LISTED IC:248B-3032A 49L7 E88891 DCL TOSHIBA CORPORATION Complies with part 68, FCC rules FCC Registration number CJ69XA-10242-KF-E CJ69XA-10243-MF-E CJ6JPN-22758-PF-E Ringer equivalence0.2B(ac)0.0(dc),0.3B(ac)0.0(dc) POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY MODEL V.1A C BRPSU672A US E135386 NO. 0 3 Y 0 0 1 2 IN : 100-120V/208 240V~50/60HZ 5A/3A OUT : -27V6A, +5V4A, -5V0.8A, BAT -27V0.6A TOSHIBA CORPORATION DCL MADE IN INDONESIA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject ot the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. TOSHIBA CORPORATION This Class - A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet apparel numbérique de la class A est conforme á la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 7093 Figure 5-2 5-4 Location of Approval Labels Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 1: Prior to Cabinet Installation Step 1: Prior to Cabinet Installation Important! When wiring optical fiber cable for the RRCU (remote cabinet), make sure the cable bends at >1.18 inches (30mm) radius. Step 1A: Assemble Rack ³ Follow the rack manufacturer’s safety instructions when assembling the rack. The rack must be secured to the floor. CAUTION! Never move a rack by yourself. Due to the weight and height of the rack, at least two people should perform the task. WARNING! Before installation of the cabinets, make sure that the rack is both level and stable. Step 1B: Move Flange Position (Optional) The unit ships with the flange in the front position but it can be moved to a center position (shown below). 6968 Front Position Flange (suitable for cabinet rack) Center Position Flange (suitable for open rack) Step 2: Install First Cabinet • Because of the weight of the cabinet(s), it is recommended that two people load the rack from the bottom up. • If the rack has stabilizing devices, make sure to install them before installing or servicing the rack mount cabinets. • Do not step or stand on any cabinet when servicing other cabinets in the rack. Rack Mount Cabinets WARNING! To prevent bodily injury when installing or maintaining these cabinet(s): It is recommended you start mounting the bottom cabinet first and then mount the remaining cabinets above the bottom cabinet. The base cabinet can be either the top or bottom cabinet. You need to plan for any future cabinet additions when you mount the initial configuration. If cabinets will be added in the future they can be added above or below the mounted cabinets. The following procedures cover both top-down and bottom-up installation. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-5 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 2: Install First Cabinet Step 2A: Take Off Front and Back Covers 1. Unscrew the two screws holding the front cover to the unit and slide the cover off. 2. Unscrew the four screws holding the back cover to the unit and take the cover off. Step 2B: Take Off Base of Cabinet Important! ³ If two people are installing these cabinets, you can skip this step and proceed to item 3 under Step 2C. Unscrew the two screws holding the base of the cabinet secure and slide the cabinet back off the base (shown below). 6971 Screws Step 2C: Attach Cabinet to Rack In order to line up the first cabinet installed in the rack, you must position the bottom-most hole on the flange with the top of two holes on the rack (marked Start on Figure 5-3). The holes on the rack form a pattern of three-holes. A single hole 5/8” above the previous hole, followed by two holes (1/2” apart) for a total space of 1-1/8”. Important! If you do not start the cabinet installation in one of the holes marked Start in Figure 5-3 on page 5-7, the next cabinet will not match with the holes on the rack. 1. Attach the base of the cabinet to the rack with two screws on each flange (shown below). Refer to the rack manufacturer’s documentation for screw size. Toshiba does not provide rack screws. 19" Start (see Fig. 4-3) Start (see Fig. 4-3) 6973 2 Screws per Flange Mounting Pillar of 19" Rack 2. Put the cabinet on the base and slide the cabinet back so that it completely covers the base. 5-6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 2: Install First Cabinet 3. Screw the cabinet and flange to the rack using four screws on each side (shown below). Refer to the rack manufacturer’s documentation for screw size. Toshiba does not provide rack screws. Cabinet (2 screws) Cabinet (2 screws) Flange (2 screws) Flange (2 screws) 7087 1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 1/2" 5/8" Flange Start 5/8" 5/8" 7080 Note: Always install the bottom cabinet first. The bottom cabinet screw should be lined up with the Start screw hole of the rack as shown above. Figure 5-3 Strata CTX I&M Rack Mount Cabinets Start 1/2" Rack Hole Positions 06/04 5-7 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 3: Install Remaining Cabinet(s) Step 2D: Reattach Cabinet to Base Note Skip this step if you did not perform Step 2B. ³ Using the two screws removed in “Step 2B: Take Off Base of Cabinet” on page 6, reattach the cabinet to the base. Step 3: Install Remaining Cabinet(s) Step 3A: Take Off Front and Back Covers 1. Unscrew the two screws holding the front cover to the unit and slide the cover off. 2. Unscrew the four screws holding the back cover to the unit and take the cover off. Step 3B: Install and Attach Cabinet(s) to Rack Note See “Step 2C: Attach Cabinet to Rack” on page 5-6 for special instructions on positioning the cabinets before attaching. 1. Place the base of the next cabinet 10.5 inches from the base of the upper base/expansion cabinet (as shown below). Start (see Fig. 4-3) 6U = 10.5 inch or 267 mm Start (see Fig. 4-3) 7101 2. Screw the cabinet flange to the rack using two screws on each flange (four total). 5-8 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 4: Attach Amphenol Cable 3. Attach the upper and lower cabinets with 2 screws (shown below). 2 screws 2 screws 7144 Step 4: Attach Amphenol Cable ³ The cable can be wired either from the left front (shown below) 7082 Front View ...or the center back (shown below). Fix cable by plastic clamp Rack Mount Cabinets Amphenol Cable 6977 Front View Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Back View 5-9 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 5: Attach the AC Cable Step 5: Attach the AC Cable The Rack Mount Cabinet(s) require a single-phase, 50/60 cycles power source of 120, 208, or 240VAC, on a dedicated 20 ampere circuit breaker. 208VAC or 240VAC is required for six or seven cabinet systems. Toshiba recommends that a dedicated AC service panel be used. AC outlets must be dedicated to rack mount cabinet use, fused, and grounded. Equipment unrelated to the rack mount cabinet(s) must not be connected to the circuit or service panel dedicated to the rack mount cabinet(s). Note It may not always be possible to power a complete rack mount cabinet system from a single circuit breaker panel. For example, in the case where a cabinet is remotely located. To avoid accidental turn-off, do not configure the outlet serving the rack mount cabinets with an On/Off switch. AC outlets serving the cabinets must be close enough so that the power cord from the cabinet power supply or power strip can reach the outlet (these power cords are nine ft.). AC wall outlets for the rack mount cabinets must be on dedicated 20amp breakers. AC outlets must meet National Electrical codes specifications: NEMA 5-20R for 120VAC or NEMA 6-20R for 208VAC/240VAC. AC power cabling requirements vary, depending on: The method of cabinet installation (i.e., rack, floor or wall mount), AC power source voltage (120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC) and the number of cabinets. ³ The cable can be wired from the right front of the cabinet (shown right). ...or AC Cable goes through plastic clamp the cable can be wired from the back (as shown below). Front View Back View (with back cover) AC cable clamp in back cover 6981 6987 AC Cable is wired to the back AC Cable Hole in Back Face AC cable CAUTION! Arrange the rest of the AC cables outside the cabinet. Noise from the cables influence electrical components (e.g., motherboard) when the cables are located inside the cabinet. 5-10 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 6: Connect Data and Ground Cables Step 6: Connect Data and Ground Cables 1. Wire the data cable between the base and expansion cabinet (shown below). CAB 5 Back View Base Cabinet View from Top CAB 6 CAB 7 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 Data Cable CAB 7 7007 Back View Base Cabinet 6985 To MSBU of respective Exp. Cabinet 2. Wire the FG cable between the base and expansion cabinet by passing it through the hole in the base of the expansion cabinet. Secure the FG wire spade lug to the power supply with the FG screws (as shown below). Front View Screw FG Cable from upper cabinet Screw FG Cable from lower cabinet FG Cable 6987a 6986a Note The backplane FG wires are not safety grounds: they are required for proper system CO line operation. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Pass FG Cable through this Hole 5-11 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 7: Verify Power Supply Settings Step 7: Verify Power Supply Settings ³ If the cabinet is the Base Unit set the Exp/Base switch to the “Base” position (see “Power Supply Unit (BRPSU672A)” on page 5-28). ...or if the cabinet is an Expansion Unit, set the Exp/Base switch to the “Exp” position. Important! The power supply set as “Base” is the master and has On/Off control over all other power supplies, which are designated as slaves. If the master power supply is turned Off or On, all other power supplies will automatically turn Off or On. (Individual slave power supplies must be turned On.) Step 8: Fill Out Slot Assignments The slot identification label appears on the lower right side of the cabinet interior (shown below). Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 6999 B101 B102 S101 S102 6998 CABINET NO. S103 2 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 3 4 5 6 7 S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10 Step 9: Attach Mesh Tie (B50MT) ³ Wrap the cables in with the mesh tie. The purpose of the wrap is to shield the cables from EMI/RFI effects. See Figures 5-6, 5-7 and 3-10 for additional information. Note One mesh tie is required to wrap cables individually in each cabinet. One mesh tie is required to wrap all cables where they exit the system. A B50MT Mesh Tie is included with each base and expansion cabinet. 5-12 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 10: Install Power Strip (BRPSB120A) Step 10: Install Power Strip (BRPSB120A) ³ Using 2 screws attach the BRPSB120A to the back cover of the expansion cabinet (as shown at right). Back view See also Table 5-3, “Power Cabinet Hardware for Rack Mount Cabinets” on page 5-24 for additional information. 6989 Step 11: (Optional) Install Power Strip (BRPSB240A) Note If you are installing 4 or more cabinets, you must use the BRPSB240A power strip. See page 5-30 for additional requirements. ³ Back view Using 2 screws attach the BRPSB240A to the back cover of the expansion cabinet (as shown at right). See also Table 5-3, “Power Cabinet Hardware for Rack Mount Cabinets” on page 5-24 for additional information. 6990 Important! You can disconnect the MSBU and reconnect it to the back side of the expansion cabinet to make it easier to perform maintenance (shown right). Back view Side view 6994 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets MSBU common to that of CHSUE672A 5-13 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 12: (Optional) Install Reserve Power Step 12: (Optional) Install Reserve Power Two or four customer-supplied, 12VDC batteries (80 amp hours maximum) can be connected to the system as a power failure backup. In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches over to battery power without any interruption to existing calls or other normal system functions. The procedure for installing reserve power varies, depending on the number of cabinets in the system. The following text details reserve power battery installation requirements. Important! Batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available; they cannot be connected during an AC power failure situation. The length of time reserve power operates depends on the system, size and number of batteries provided, and the system load. Typical reserve power duration estimates and battery specifications are estimated with the following considerations (see Table 5-1): • Batteries have full charge at start of operation. • Two or four batteries connected per Figure 5-4. • Batteries are 12VDC, rated at 80 amp/hours each. • System is operating at full load traffic with LCD phones. • Batteries used for this test are gel-cell and maintenance-free. Reserve duration will vary depending upon battery type, age, and manufacturer. These figures should only be used as an estimate. Table 5-1 Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimate Number of Cabinets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration 12.0 hrs. 6.0 hrs. 4.0 hrs. 3.0 hrs. 2.5 hrs. 2.0 hrs 1.8 hrs Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 24.0 hrs. 12.0 hrs 8.0 hrs 6.0 hrs. 5.0 hrs. 4.0 hrs 3.5 hrs WARNING! Some batteries can generate explosive gases. Therefore, ensure that batteries are located in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke near batteries. Avoid creating any electrical sparks near batteries. Use commercially available battery enclosures to reduce risk to nearby people and equipment. 5-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 12: (Optional) Install Reserve Power Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables WARNING! Battery cables that exit the cabinet(s) are not UL listed because of possible incorrect installations. Have a licensed electrician install these cables. The part names and descriptions of the reserve battery cabinet components and cables are shown in Table 5-2. Table 5-2 Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables for Rack Mount Cabinets Option PBTC1A-3M Description A three-meter long battery cable is used to connect reserve power batteries to the system power supply when the system has less than three cabinets. One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet in a one or two cabinet system. The cable connects the Strata rack cabinet power supply directly to the battery terminals (a BBDB1A is not required). Strata CTX reserve power battery distribution box is required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets. The box is field installed into one of the Strata CTX cabinet side panels. BBDB1A The BBDB1A provides seven BBTC2A-2.0M, battery distribution cables to connect reserve power from the BDDB1A box to each individual cabinet power supply. One or two BBTC1A-2.0M must be ordered separately when using the BBDB1A battery distribution box. BBTC1A-2.0M Important! A two-meter battery cable used to connect reserve power batteries to the BBDB1A battery distribution box. One reserve power cable is required in a three or four cabinet system and two cables are required for five, six or seven cabinet systems. The cable connects Strata CTX BBDB1A box directly to the battery terminals. Reserve batteries can be installed in various configurations depending on backup time (Table 5-1) and the number of cabinets (Figure 5-4). Use the guide in Figure 5-4 for installing batteries, as required. Rack Mount Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-15 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 12: (Optional) Install Reserve Power Install Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets 1. Connect the black jumper wire (supplied with the PBTC1A-3M cable) from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery (Figure 5-4). 2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC1A-3M cable. 3. Connect the PBTC1A-3M battery cable white lead to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. Important! The cabinet(s) must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switch set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT+/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 4. Connect the PBTC1A-3M battery cable two-prong male plug to the Base Cabinet power supply BATT +/- receptacle. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to connect a PBTC1A-3M to the Expansion Cabinet. 6. To test reserve power operation, disconnect system AC power plugs with power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagram in Figure 5-4. Install Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets 1. Install the Battery Distribution Box (BBDB1A). See “Install Reserve Power Battery Distribution Box (if required)” on page 5-17 and Figure 5-4. The BCCB is not required. 2. Connect two Cable “C” jumper wires from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery, per Figure 5-4 (Cable “C” is supplied with the BBTC1A-2.0M cable). 3. Ensure that a serviceable 15-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the BBTC1A-2.0M battery cable. 4. Connect the white lead of the BBTC1A-2.0M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. 5. Connect a second BBTC1A-2.0M in parallel to the first BBTC1A-2.0M cable per Steps 2, 3 and 4. 6. Plug the two BBTC1A-2.0M battery cables into the Battery Distribution Box. Important! The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switches set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 7. Connect the BBTC2A-2.0M cables from the Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/receptacle of individual power supplies per Figure 5-4 (BBTC2A-2.0M cables are supplied with a BBDB1A distribution box). 8. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plugs with the power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagrams in Figure 5-4. 5-16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 12: (Optional) Install Reserve Power 2-Batteries/1~7 Cabinets (with BBDB1A) 2-Batteries/1-Cabinet (without BBDB1A) BBTC1A-2.0M Cable consists of two (6.5 ft.) wires. Base Cabinet 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each + BRPSU672 BATT – Connector PBTC1A-3M Cables (9 ft.) 10A Fuse 2-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without BBDB1A) Base Cabinet + 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each “C” Cable, supplied with BBTC1A-2.0M Cable BRPSU672 BATT – Connector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each + 2nd cable (B required for 5 or more cabinets only 15A Fuse (2 each) B A +– A Black Wire A To BRPSU672 “BATT” Connectors (7 max.) Exp. Cabinet BRPSU672 BATT – Connnector White Wire +– B BATT BBDB1A Rating: 27.3VDC, BBDB1A 42A max. B BBTC2A-2.0M Cables (7 max.) supplied with BBDB1A 10A Fuse 4-Batteries/1~7 Cabinets (with BBDB1A) PBTC1A-3M Cables (9 ft.) “C” Cables, supplied with BBTC1A-2.0M Cable 4-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without BBDB1A) Base Cabinet + BRPSU672 BATT – Connector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each BBTC1A-2.0M Cables (6.5 ft.) 15A Fuse (2 each) 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each Exp. Cabinet A + BRPSU672 BATT – Connnector To BRPSU672 “BATT” Connectors (7 max.) B 2nd cable required for 5 or more cabinets only Fuses (12 AMP) 10A Fuse PBTC1A-3M Cables (9 ft.) BBTC2A-2.0M Cables (7 max.) supplied with BBDB1A BBDB1A (cover removed) 5221 Battery Wiring Diagram (Two or Four Batteries) Install Reserve Power Battery Distribution Box (if required) If a BBDB1A is required (see Figure 5-4), follow this procedure: ³ Using 3 screws attach the BBDB1A (as shown at right) to an expansion cabinet somewhere in the middle of the system. Notes • The BBDB1A can also be installed in the base cabinet. • With a 7 cabinet installation, do not install the BBDB1A in the top or bottom cabinet. The 6.56 ft. (2m) BBTC2A-2.0M cables are not long enough to reach from the bottom cabinet to the top cabinet Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Back View Rack Mount Cabinets Figure 5-4 Using 3 screws attach the BBDB1A 6988 5-17 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 13: Ground the System Step 13: Ground the System The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation and safety. The AC power cord(s) already contains a conductor for the “third wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet (see Figure 5-5, for grounding points “A” and “B”). An insulated conductor must connect the frame ground terminal on the Base Cabinet to a cold water pipe or the building ground (point “B”). Before connecting the system to the AC power source, measure the impedance of the building ground reference. If the ground path connected to the system has an impedance of 1 ohm or more, a better ground must be installed. In Figure 5-5, the grounding path between point “A” and the single point ground “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. The “third wire ground” coming from the primary AC power outlet must be dedicated and must be routed through the same conduit as the phase conductors serving the system. The conductor connected to the frame ground (FG screw) on the system power supply must be insulated and comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, but must not depend on the cord and plug of the system. If the CTX670 system consists of more than one cabinet, you must install the bonding connection plates that come attached to each expansion cabinet. Refer to Figure 5-5. Connect the mother board ground wires and the intercabinet ground wires per Figure 5-5. On each cabinet, wrap the cable mesh shield (part No. B50MT) around the 25-pair communication cables that carry stations over tip and ring, per Figures 5-6 and 5-7. WARNING! Failure to provide a proper ground may be a safety hazard to service personnel or lead to confusing trouble symptoms. In extreme cases, system failure may result because the system is not properly protected from lighting or power transients. Step 14: Install Processor and Universal PCBs See section entitled “Install Processor and Universal PCBs” on page 4-43. Step 15: Attach Front and Back Covers 5-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Step 15: Attach Front and Back Covers The Single Point Ground must always be connected to the Base Cabinet Power Supply FG Screw (Top cabinet - Wall Mount or Bottom cabinet - Floor Mount.) FG (Frame Ground) Screws Power Supply “B” Base Cabinet ONEAC 6-AP or 6-DP Solid State Secondary Protectors Point “B” is always on the Base Cabinet, whether it's on the top or bottom. Cabinet Motherboard Insulated Ground Wire “B” Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. AWG #6 Wire (minimum) Length: 60 Feet (maximum) Cabinet Motherboard Single Point Ground (SPG) Cold Water Pipe or Ground Rod Cabinet Motherboard Up to six Expansion Cabinets AWG #6 Wire (minimum) Length: 60 Feet (maximum) Cabinet Motherboard Note: The SPG cannot be structural steel members or conduit. Earth Ground: Per General Rules of Article 250 of the National Electric Code, NFPA70 120VAC System Primary Power ( 1-5 cabinets only ) NEMA 5-15R, 120VAC Cabinet Motherboard “A” 7076 Green ground wires from Motherboard Inter-cabinet green wires supplied with each cabinet Third Wire AC Ground Note: The ground must be routed through the same conduit as the phase conductors serving the system. Note: The system may be powered by 120, 208, or 240VAC. Figure 5-5 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 115VAC ± 10VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 20 Amp Branch Circuit Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. 208 or 240VAC System Primary Power ( 1-7 cabinets ) NEMA 6-20R, 240VAC “A” Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 208VAC ± 20VAC (50/60 Hz) or 240VAC ± 20VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 20 Amp Branch Circuit. Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. Rack Mount Cabinets The cabinets must be located no more than 9 feet from the AC outlet. FG Screws If 208VAC is used, the plug may have to be changed by a licensed electrician. Rack Mount Cabinet Grounding 5-19 Rack Mount Cabinets Wiring for 7 Cabinet Configuration Wiring for 7 Cabinet Configuration The following illustrations show an overview of the cabling for a 7 cabinet configuration. Bottom Down Configuration Back View CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 6 Data Cable to MSBU PCB. CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 6 Mesh Tie (B50MT) CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 6 Expansion Cabinet CAB 5 CAB 6 MSBU CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 6 CAB 6 2 CAB 2 3 CAB 3 4 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 4 CAB CAB 5 5 CAB 5 5 CAB CAB 6 6 6 CAB 7 7 Amphenol Cable CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 Base Cabinet Mesh Tie (B50MT) 7005 Screw Position of Mesh Tie (B50MT) Mesh Tie (B50MT) Amphenol Cable Figure 5-6 5-20 Note: Wrap all cabinet cables. Bottom Up Configuration (Center back wiring) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Wiring for 7 Cabinet Configuration Top Down Configuration Back View Screw Position of Mesh Tie (B50MT) Note: Wrap all cabinet cables. Mesh Tie (B50MT) To MDF 2 3 4 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 7 Data Cable to MSBU PCB CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 2 5 6 7 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 Amphenol Cable CAB 5 CAB 5 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 6 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 Expansion Cabinet CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 5 CAB 2 CAB 6 CAB 3 CAB 4 Rack Mount Cabinets MSBU CAB 2 Base Cabinet CAB 6 CAB 6 CAB 2 CAB 5 Mesh Tie (B50MT) CAB 5 Amphenol Cable CAB 5 CAB 6 Mesh Tie (B50MT) 7008 Figure 5-7 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Top Down Configuration (Center back wiring) 5-21 Rack Mount Cabinets Wiring for 7 Cabinet Configuration Side View Front View Power Supply Cords Amphenol Cables Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Mesh Tie (B50MT) Amphenol Cables Base Cabinet Base Cabinet Amphenol Cables Screw position of Mesh Tie (B50MT). Please move the screw from screw position of Mesh Tie on the back. Mesh Tie (B50MT) Note: Wrap all cabinet cables. Figure 5-8 5-22 Bottom Up Configuration (Left Front wiring) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Wiring for 7 Cabinet Configuration Screw position of Mesh Tie (B50MT). Please move the screw from screw position of Mesh Tie on the back. Amphenol Cables Note: Wrap all cabinet cables. Amphenol Cables Mesh Tie (B50MT) Base Cabinet Base Cabinet Power Supply Cords Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet -Front ViewFigure 5-9 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Amphenol Cables -Side View- Top Down Configuration (Left Front wiring) 5-23 Rack Mount Cabinets Primary Power Cabinet Hardware Primary Power Cabinet Hardware The type of cabinet mounting can have an effect on the power requirements. Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) and local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting commercial AC and reserve power to the Strata CTX system. Table 5-3 describes which assemblies may be required to meet UL and local electrical code standards. Table 5-3 Power Cabinet Hardware for Rack Mount Cabinets Option Description Cabinet power strip for 120VAC primary power – provides three standard 120VAC/15A outlets (NEMA5-15R) and nine ft. AC power cord with standard 120VAC/15A plug (NEMA515P). This unit is field installed outside the system cabinet on the back cover. The system can use 12 amps. (max.). One BRPSB120A is required for two cabinet systems if the local electric code allows only one AC power cord to be connected to the system. BRPSB120A Note If the local electric code allows only one AC power cord to be connected to the system, 208VAC or 240VAC must be used as primary AC power for systems with four or more cabinets. One BRPSB120A is required for a three or four cabinet system if the local electric code allows two AC power cords connected to the system. Two BRPSB120As are required for a five cabinet system if the local electric code allows two AC power cords connected to the system. Cabinet power strip for 208VAC or 240VAC primary power - provides three 240VAC/20A outlets (NEMA 6-20R) and 9ft. AC power cord with a standard 240VAC/20A plug (NEMA 620P). This unit is field installed outside the system cabinet on the back cover. The system can use 16 amps. (max.). One BRPSB240A is required for two or three cabinet systems. Two BRPSB240As are required for four or five cabinet systems. Three BRPSB240As are required for six or seven cabinet systems. BRPSB240A Note ● ● Local electric codes allow only one AC power cord to be connected to the system when using 208VAC or 240VAC as the primary AC power. BRPSB240A conforms to the National Electric Code standards. If using 208VAC as primary power, the plug on the BRPSB240A AC power cord that exits the cabinet (NEMA 6-20P) may have to be changed to a twist-lock type by a certified electrician to conform with local electric codes. AC208V or AC240VAC nine ft. power supply cord. The cord is rated at 10 amps. (max.) and must be used when the system is powered by 208VAC or 240VAC. One cord is required for each cabinet power supply and must be ordered separately only if using 208VAC or 240VAC as the system primary AC power. BACL240A 5-24 Note The cord is equipped with a 250VAC/20A plug (NEMA 6-20P) which is standard for 240VAC. If using 208VAC as the system primary power this cord may have to be changed by a certified electrician for one or two cabinet installations. If using three or more cabinets, a BRPSB240A power strip is required and the power strip plug may have to be changed by a certified electrician depending on local electric codes. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview Figures 5-10 and 5-11 show an overview of the AC power and data cabling for the Rack Mount Cabinets. Detailed illustrations of AC power strips and cords are on the following pages. 7 BBTC2A-2.0M Battery Cables supplied with BBDB1A Power Supply BRPSU672A 120 VAC Power Supply Cord (supplied) Back View Front View Motherboard 2 CRSUB672A Cabinet 1 (Base) 3 4 5 6 BATT 7 AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 2 (Expansion) BATT Power Strip BRPSB120A for 120VAC only AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 3 (Expansion) BATT Power Strip BRPSB120A for 120VAC only Power Strip Cables to Primary AC Power outlets (9 ft.) with NEMA 5-15P plug AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 4 (Expansion) BATT Battery Distribution Box (BBDB1A) AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 5 (Expansion) BATT AC IN BBTC1A-2.0M Cables to Reserve Power Batteries (2 m.) 7095 Data Cable (supplied with expansion cabinet) Strata CTX I&M 120VAC Power/Data Cabling for up to Five Cabinets 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Figure 5-10 5-25 Rack Mount Cabinets AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview 7 BBTC2A-2.0M Battery Cables supplied with BBDB1A Power Supply BRPSU672A 240 VAC/10 amps. Power Supply Cord (ordered separately) BACL240 Back View Front View Motherboard 2 CRSUB672A Cabinet 1 (Base) 3 4 5 6 BATT 7 AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 2 (Expansion) BATT AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 3 (Expansion) BATT Power Strip BRPSB240A for 280VAC/240VAC only AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 4 (Expansion) BATT Power Strip BRPSB240A for 280VAC/240VAC only Caution: Three 240VAC power strips are required for all systems with 6 or 7 cabinets. Only one power cord is allowed to be connected to the 208VAC/240VAC power outlet. AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 5 (Expansion) BATT Power Strip BRPSB240A for 280VAC/240VAC only AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 6 (Expansion) BATT • Power Strip Cord is (9ft.) • Power Strip Plug (NEMA 6-20P) • To 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power Outlet (NEMA-6-20-R) Battery Distribution Box (BBDB1A) AC IN CRSUE672A Cabinet 7 (Expansion) BATT AC IN BBTC1A-2.0M Cables to Reserve Power Batteries (2 m.) 7096 Data Cable (supplied with expansion cabinet) Figure 5-11 5-26 208VAC/240VAC Power/Data Cabling for up to Seven Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Cabinet AC Power Considerations Cabinet AC Power Considerations The rack mount cabinet power supply works with either 120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC. The rack mount only requires 120VAC (up to three cabinets if one AC cord is allowed or five cabinets if two AC cords are allowed – see below). If the system has more then five cabinets, 208VAC or 240AVC is required for the primary AC power source. 208VAC or 240VAC can always be optionally used for systems with five or less cabinets for future growth or, if the electrical code requires. To determine AC power requirements, you need to check local electrical code requirements for 120VAC, 208VAC or 240VAC primary power. Some electrical codes stipulate that: • • • • 208VAC or 240VAC is required for telephones systems Only one electrical cord can connect to the telephone system. Only two electrical cords can connect to the telephone system. No electrical cord can connect to the telephone system – must use conduit wiring installed by a certified electrician (example: when system is floor mounted). AC Power Component Requirements Table 5-4 show the cabinet parts required to distribute AC power for various configurations of the Strata CTX cabinets. Table 5-4 Rack Mount Cabinet Power Component Requirements for 120VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code Cabinets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Allows only one 120VAC power cord from system 0 BRPSB120A 1 BRPSB120A 1 BRPSB120A N/A N/A N/A N/A Allows two 120VAC power cords from system 0 BRPSB120A 0 BRPSB120A 1 BRPSB120A 1 BRPSB120A 2 BRPSB120A N/A N/A ● ● Table 5-5 Rack Mount Cabinet Power Component Requirements for 208VAC or 240VAC Primary Power Local Electrical Code Allows One AC power cord from system Cabinets 1 1 BACL240A Important! Strata CTX I&M 06/04 2 3 4 5 1 BRPSB240A 1 BRPSB240A 2 BRPSB240A 2 BRPSB240A 3 BRPSB240A 3 BRPSB240A 2 BACL240A 3 BACL240A 4 BACL240A 5 BACL240A 6 6 BACL240A 7 Rack Mount Cabinets One dedicated, isolated, 20 amp. AC circuit breaker with dual outlets is required. N/A= If the system contains more than three cabinets and if the local code allows only one AC cord, the system requires a BCCB120 conduit box wired by a certified electrician when using 120VAC as primary power. Otherwise, 208VAC or 240VAC should be used as the primary power source (see cabinet power options listed below). If more than five cabinets are installed, 208VAC or 240VAC is required. 7 BACL240A The plugs and wall receptacles required by the local electrical code might differ for 208VAC and 240VAC. Thus in some areas of the U.S., the plug used on the Toshiba 240VAC power strip and 240VAC power supply cord (NEMA code 6-20P) can not be used for 208VAC installations. In this case, when using 208VAC, the AC plugs on the BPSB240 power strip cord that connects directly to the 208VAC wall outlet must be changed by a certified electrician per the local electrical code. 5-27 Rack Mount Cabinets Power Supply Unit (BRPSU672A) Power Supply Unit (BRPSU672A) The BRPSU672A Power Supply Unit (shown below) comes factory installed in each Rack Mount Base and Expansion Cabinet. It furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the cabinet. The BRPSU672A automatically detects and adjusts for the type of AC voltage (120/208/240) to which it is connected. Mounting Holes 24V Circuit Breaker Assignments: EXP. Cabinet Base Cabinet 24V-1 S101, S102 24V-1 S_01, S_02 24V-2 S103, S104 24V-2 S_03, S_04 24V-3 S105, S106 24V-3 S_05, S_06, S_07 24V-4 S107, S108 24V-4 S_08, S_09, S_10 DC Voltage Connector Jack -24V1 -24V2 -24V3 -24V4 DC OUT + POWER ON OFF POW +5V DC Voltage Specification -5V AC IN P.F. BATT (Volts) +5V (+4.5 ~ +5.5), 4.0 amps RESET -5V (–4.5 ~ –5.5), 0.8 amps Expansion Cabinet only + -24V (–26.3 ~ –27.8), 6.0 amps – Battery Cable Connector BATT Power Factor (PF) alarm LED indicates the cabinet PF was exceeded. Correct the problem and press the RESET button to clear the alarm. 0 EXP –26.3 ~ –27.8 2 AC Power Cord Jack FG BASE FG 7000 1. Back Plane DC Voltage Plug must be plugged into Power Supply when checking voltages. Expansion/ Base Switch 2. On BRPSU672, the BATT output is 0 volts unless connected to good batteries. FG Frame Ground Screws DC Voltage Connector Plug Pin Wires Yellow Blue White Green Green Green Red -24 -5 +5 0 0 0 +5 Yellow Yellow Yellow Green Green Green Red -24 -24 -24 0 0 0 +5 Figure 5-12 Power Supply Unit (BRPSU672A) Check the Power Factor Indicator and Reset Button The front panel of BRPSU672A provides a Power Factor LED and Reset button. If the cabinet power factor is exceeded by overload of PCBs, the PF LED will turn on. ³ If the PF LED indicator turns on, press the PF reset button with a pointed tool or pencil. If the PF LED turns off and does not turn on again it may have been turned on by a current surge while installing a PCB while the power supply was turned-on. ³ When a PF alarm is indicated, check that the cabinet power factor is not exceeded using the “Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check” on page 2-42. If the Power factor has been exceeded relocate any PCBs that are causing the PF to be exceeded. 5-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Power Supply Unit (BRPSU672A) Check the -24 Volt Circuit Breakers The BRPSU672A provides four -24v circuit breakers as shown in figure above. If a low resistance between –24 volts and ground exists the circuit breaker will trip. Usually the front panel DC green LED indicator will turn off but not always. Also if AC power is recycled the DC LED indicator may turn back on – even if the –24 volt circuit breaker is tripped. Circuit Breaker Location and Slot Assignments • The circuit breaker 24V1~24V4, located directly below DC-out cable, protects the cabinet slots as shown in the Circuit Breaker assignment table. Reset Circuit Breaker 1. A defective PCB or an external short on the MDF may cause the circuit breaker to trip. 2. If you suspect that a –24 volt circuit breaker has tripped, try to reset it by: • Turn the power supply DC power switch off and unplug the power supply AC power cord from the AC outlet – the inside of the power supply has exposed voltages. • Gently press in each circuit breaker and listen for or try to feel it click. If the breaker was tripped, you will hear or feel it click back to the set position. • If the circuit breaker resets, pull the PCBs and check for MDF shorts associated with the slots assigned to the tripped circuit breaker. Remove any defective PCBs and MDF shorts. • Restore power and verify the system is working normally. 3. Replace the power supply if the circuit breaker continues to trip and a defective PCB or short cannot be found. Rack Mount Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-29 Rack Mount Cabinets Changing Plug for Power Strip BRPSB240A Changing Plug for Power Strip BRPSB240A You must use a 240VAC power strip (BRPSB240A) if only one AC power cord is connected to a system with four or more cabinets. Most 240VAC wall outlets and UPS systems (ONEAC or other) have twist locks. Twist locks are mostly used at the wall outlet or UPS to prevent accidental unplugging. Power Strip for 208VAC or 240VAC (only) BRPSB240A If you are plugging the Strata rack mount power strip (BRPSB240A) into a twist lock outlet/UPS, you will need to change the power strip plug that exits the cabinets to a twist lock plug. Important! Receptacle Pass & Seymour 5858 NEMA No. 6-20P 16A max. Only the 240VAC power strip that exits the cabinets (see page 5-33) should be changed. This procedure shows how to change the one plug on the power strip (shown right). Recommended parts: Pass & Seymour, L620-P (NEMA Config. No. L6-20P). Cable Length 3 m. (Approx. 9 ft.) 6944 Plug Pass & Seymour 5466-X NEMA No. 6-20P 16A max. Figure 5-13 Power Strip (BRPSB240A) Step 1: Remove NEMA 6-20P from Power Strip 1. Unplug the power strip from the AC. 2. Loosen a screw on both the power plug case and power plug. 3. Slide out the power plug case (shown below). 4. Loosen a screw on the power plug for cable. 5-30 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Changing Plug for Power Strip BRPSB240A 5. Pull out cable from the power plug (shown below). Step 2: Attach NEMA L6-20P Plug to Power Strip 1. Strip 1.49 inches (38mm) of cover off the electrical wire. 2. At the wire tip, strip approx. .47 inches (12mm) from the outer cover of the wire (shown below). 3. Each of the three electrical wires are inserted in a power plug and a screw tightened. The torque of a screw is 0.8[Nm]. The wires and power plug matches in the following manner (shown below): • G (FG) matches the green wire. • Y matches the black wire. • X matches the white wire. Rack Mount Cabinets Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-31 Rack Mount Cabinets Changing Plug for Power Strip BRPSB240A 4. Put the power plug in a case and secure with a screw (shown below). Note A key is arranged when a power plug and a case are fixed. 5. Tighten the screws (torque is 0.8[Nm]) and push cover and plug together (as shown below). 5-32 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets AC Cabling AC Cabling Note 1, 2 or 3 power strips are used depending on how many cabinets are installed (see diagrams shown below. One cabinet - one AC cord exits system Cabinet 1 Two or three cabinets - one AC cord exits system Power Supply Back View Front View Front Cabinet 1 Power Supply Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply Notes 1, 2 (120/208/240VAC) BRPSB240A (208/240VAC) or BRPSB120A (120VAC) Two cabinets - two AC cord exit system Cabinet 1 Power Supply Front Cabinet 2 Power Supply Note 2 (120VAC only) Notes 1, 2 (120/208/240VAC) Note 2 (120VAC only) Four or five cabinets - two AC cord exits system Front View Four or five cabinets - one AC cord exits system Front View Back View Back View Cabinet 1 Power Supply Cabinet 1 Power Supply Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 2 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply BRPSB240A Cabinet 4 Power Supply Cabinet 4 Power Supply BRPSB240A Cabinet 5 Power Supply Cabinet 5 Power Supply BRPSB120A Note 2 (120VAC only) BRPSB120A Notes 1, 2 (208VAC or 240VAC only) 7002 Notes Rack Mount Cabinets Notes 3 (120VAC only) 1. 120VAC cord is supplied with cabinet. A special cord, BACL240A, must be ordered for each cabinet if 208VAC or 240VAC is used. 2. Power Strips must plug into the following AC outlets: 120VAC to NEMA 5-15R, and 208/240VAC to NEMA 6-20R. 3. If four cabinets are installed only one BRPSB120A is required. You can plug the fourth cabinet power supply directly into the 120VAC outlet. Figure 5-14 AC Cabling (One to Five Cabinets) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 5-33 Rack Mount Cabinets AC Cabling Six or Seven cabinets - one AC cord exits system Front View Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Back View Power Supply FrontPower View Back View Supply Cabinet 3 Power Supply BRPSB240A Cabinet 4 Power Supply BRPSB240A Cabinet 5 Power Supply Cabinet 6 Power Supply Cabinet 7 Power Supply BRPSB240A Plug Pass & Seymour 5466-X NEMA No. 6-20P (208VAC or 240VAC only) 7003 Figure 5-15 AC Cabling (Six to Seven Cabinets) 5-34 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit The RRCU1A PCB enables a Rack Mount Expansion Cabinet to be located up to three kilometers from its Base Cabinet. One RRCU1A connects to up to two ribbon-type Data Cables and applies the inter-cabinet signal to a fiber-optic pair. One fiber pair can support one or two expansion cabinets in one remote location using one RRCU1A in the Base Cabinet and another in the Remote Expansion Cabinet. All instructions apply to both the Base Cabinet and the Remote Expansion Cabinet except where specifically noted. Note See “Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit” on page 4-55 for additional information. Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions 1. Install cabinets according to the instructions given at the beginning of this chapter. Pay particular attention to wiring and grounding instructions given for Remote Expansion Cabinets. 2. If installing a standalone Remote Expansion Cabinet, or the first in a stack, set the “BASE/ EXP” switch to “BASE” in accordance with Figure 5-12. 3. Cabinets in which RRCU cards are installed must be modified to protect the routing of the cables through the cabinet. • Attach the plastic guide to the bracket provided with the RRCU1A card (shown right). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Rack Mount Cabinets • Attach the bracket to the wall of the Optical Fiber cabinet. 4. Install the RRCU Card (see Figure 4-36 on page 4-53 for a detailed description of RRCU) • Select correct jumper options. On the Master side, both option plugs connect Clamp Bracket Spiral Tube For Spiral Tube the center pin to the upper pin (M1, M2). On the Slave side, both option plugs connect the center pin to the lower pin (S1, S2). • Remove the protective rubber cap from the fiber connector on the ROMS1A daughter board. Important! When installing the RRCU, be sure to put the card in the slot before attaching the data cables. Detach the data cable before removing an RRCU1A. Failure to do so may cause interference with other data highways. 5. Insert the cards • On the Master side, the RRCU card may be installed in Slots 1~8. • On the Slave side, the RRCU card may be installed in Slots 1~10. • The RRCU1A is a non-timeslot card and can be installed in slots normally left vacant adjacent to digital trunk cards. 5-35 Rack Mount Cabinets Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit 6. Connect the data cables • At the Base Cabinet, attach an BDCL1A data cable from the data cable connector on the back of the cabinet (shown right) to Connector M1 or M2 on the RRCU card. (Cables are provided according to the connectors on the RRCU card to which they are attached, see Table 5-6.) • The cabinet connected to M1 in the base emerges on connector S1 of the RRCU1A at the Remote Expansion Cabinet. CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 2 CAB 3 CAB 4 CAB 4 BDCL1A cable CAB 5 CAB 5 CAB 6 CAB 6 CAB 7 CAB 7 To RRCU1A card on front of cabinet 7077 • The cabinet connected to connector M2 of the RRCU in the base emerges on connector S2 of the RRCU1A at the Remote Expansion Cabinet. Note Coil the excess tie it with a tie wrap. Be careful not to bind the cable tightly. Table 5-6 Remote Cabinet Data Cables and Connectors Data Cables BDCL1A-MS1 RRCU Connectors M1 S1 X X BDCL1A-M2 M2 S2 X BDCL1A-S2 X X=applies to connector 7. Connect the fiber optic cables • Attach fiber to the SC connectors on the ROMS1A daughterboard. • The TX side of the Master connects to the RX side of the slave. • The RX side of the Master connects to the TX side of the slave. • TAIS recommends that the cables be marked within the cabinet for ease of maintenance. • Observe the minimum bend radius of 30mm. 8. Restore power. 5-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6 PCB Installation This chapter contains information on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) which can be used in the cabinet slots of the Strata CTX systems. Note Prior to PCB installation, the power supply must be tested and the ground checked. PCB Chapter Layout Each PCB outline begins with the PCB’s designation and title (the outline appears in the chapter in alphabetical order by designation). A brief synopsis of the PCB appears next and includes a notation of the system(s) that the PCB can be used in, the circuits supplied by the PCB, what equipment the PCB interfaces with, and a list of the PCB’s older version(s) with a brief description of their differences. Installation instructions follow the synopsis with a table showing the PCB’s controls, indicators and connectors and an illustration of the board. PCB Installation RDDU - Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit PCB Title System: RDDU - Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit Systems: Circuits per PCB: Interfaces with: Older Versions: Strata CTX100 four DID lines DID (one or two-way) lines none Gives the type of system that is compatible with the given PCB. Be sure to read this information before attempting to use a PCB with your system application. The RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single office code along with a block of extensions. Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations, Distributed Hunt or ACD Group, or an external telephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations or groups of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI features. RDDU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 4-17 and described in Table 4-9. Circuits per PCB: 6040 Type and number of circuits available on the PCB. Interfaces with: Type of line/hardware the PCB can accept. Older Version(s): Describes older version or versions of the PCB. PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-1 PCB Installation PCB Hardware/Software Options PCB Hardware/Software Options PCBs can be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. • Hardware Options – Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to connection of peripheral equipment, such as background music, voice mail, etc.). Each PCB must be configured for the applicable hardware options prior to installation of the PCB. Configurations for internal hardware options are in this chapter and Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. Configurations for external hardware options appear in Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation. • Software Options – After installation of the PCBs in the KSU, configure the PCBs for software options through programming (see the Strata CTX Programming Manual). CTX100 ACTU Processor PCBs System: Strata CTX100 Base Cabinet Current Version: ACTU1A Older Version(s): None For information about the CTX100 ACTU processor, see “CTX100-S and CTX100 Processors” on page 2-2 and “Set Jumpers and Install Option PCBs onto the ACTU” on page 3-19. CTX670 BCTU/BEXU Processor PCBs System: Strata CTX670 Base Cabinet Current Version: BECU1A/BBCU1A Older Version(s): None For information about the BECU/BBCU CTX670 processor PCBs, see “CTX670 Processor PCBs” on page 2-5 and “BCTU1A/BEXU1A Installation” on page 4-44. CTX670 BECU/BBCU Processor PCBs System: Strata CTX670 Base Cabinet Current Version: BECU1A/BBCU1A Older Version(s): None For information about the BECU/BBCU CTX670 processor PCBs, see “CTX670 Processor PCBs” on page 2-5 and “BECU/BBCU Installation” on page 4-50. PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations WARNING! The power supply must be Off whenever removing or installing the processor PCBs (see Figure 3-17 on page 3-19 and Figure 4-3 on page 4-9). Toshiba recommends turning the power supply be Off whenever possible when removing or installing the other PCBs. 6-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation ADKU – Digital Telephone Interface Unit ADKU – Digital Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: all Toshiba digital telephones (corded and cordless, DDCB, DSS, ADM, BPCI) Older Version(s): none ADKU Hardware Options The ADKU digital telephone interface unit only works with the CTX100. Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DDCBs, and DDSS consoles to the ADKU, as well as how to upgrade digital telephones with these options: a PC Interface Unit (BPCI), a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrade (BVSU), and a Headset/ External Speaker (BHEU). ADKU Installation ³ Insert the ADKU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-3 PCB Installation ASTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit (CTX100 only) ASTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit (CTX100 only) Circuits per PCB: two standard telephone circuits maximum number of ringers per circuit is three Interfaces with: standard telephones (no message waiting) other single-line devices alternate BGM source FAX machine voice mail devices Older Version(s): none The ASTU works with the CTX100 Base system with R1.3 and higher software. It provides two standard telephone ports and connects to a unique slot on the side of the CTX100. It does not occupy one of the universal slots. ASTU Installation 1. Turn the power to the CTX100 off (press the DC power switch) and unplug the system. 2. Remove the front and left-side covers from the CTX100. 3. Refer to Figure 6-1 and Table 6-2. Make sure the SW2 switch is in the “Mu law” position for the U.S. and Canada. 4. Align the holes on the ASTU with the white plastic posts on the left side of the CTX100 Base Cabinet. Firmly press the ASTU onto the posts to attach it to the CTX100. Make sure that you can still reach all attached cables and wires. 5. Slip the spade of the FG1 (green wire) under the grounding screw on the CTX100 and tighten the screw. 6. From the CTX100, locate the multi-colored five wire cable (white connector) and plug it into the P1 connector on the ASTU. 7. On the ASTU, locate the 10-wire P2 connector cable and plug it into the front of the ACTU processor PCB on the CTX100 (see Figure 6-2). Press firmly so that both black flip-locks snap shut. (To remove, flip up the front and back locks.) 8. Connect the standard telephone(s) or devices to J1 and J2 on the ASTU. 9. Plug in the CTX100 power and turn on the DC power switch in the front of the CTX100. If everything seems to be working, re-attach the outside covers. 10. Power down and power up the CTX100 and the system will automatically recognize the ASTU in virtual slot 09. Otherwise, you can use CTX WinAdmin R1.3 or later to assign the ASTU in the 0109 position. ASTU1 Wiring 1. 300 ohms loop resistance max., including the telephone or other devices DC off-hook resistance. 2. ASTU requires secondary protectors with standard voltage for outside wiring. See Table 6-1 for electrical characteristics. 6-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation ASTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit (CTX100 only) FG1 Frame Ground P1 Power Connector J2 J1 RJ11 Connections for single-line devices P2 Connects to ACTU P8 6634 Figure 6-1 Table 6-1 ASTU Controls and Interface Connectors ASTU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description P1 5-wire connector cable Connects to the motherboard for supply power. P2 10-wire connector cable Connects to the processor PCB for data and signal highway. J1, J2 RJ11 - 6-pin modular Interfaces with single-line devices. SW2 Jumper plug Factory shipped in “Mu law” position. For countries requiring “A Law,” switch to “A.” FG1 Green Wire Connects to the chassis with a screw (frame ground). Table 6-2 ASTU Electrical Characteristics Item Description RJ11 Connector Ringer Type Square Wave Ringer Voltage 190Vp-p Open Voltage (Square Wave) Line Voltage -24V Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation Single line device interface 6-5 PCB Installation ASTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit (CTX100 only) 663 Wire from ASTU (P2) plugs into ACTU (P8) Figure 6-2 6-6 ASTU/ACTU Wire Connection Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation BDKU/BDKS – Digital Telephone Interface Unit BDKU/BDKS – Digital Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits (plus eight more with the BDKS PCB) Interfaces with: all Toshiba digital telephones (corded and cordless, DDCB, DSS, ADM, BPCI) Older Version(s): none BDKU Hardware Options BDKU can be equipped with a BDKS piggyback PCB to provide a total of 16 circuits. Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DDCBs, and DDSS consoles to the BDKU/BDKS, as well as how to upgrade digital telephones with these options: a PC Interface Unit (BPCI), a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrade (BVSU), and a Headset/External Speaker (BHEU). The BDKU can be installed alone, or with the BDKS subassembly. BDKS The BDKS can be installed onto the BDKU to add eight more digital telephone circuits. ³ To install the BDKS ³ Match the BDKS connectors to the BDKU, as shown in Figure 6-4. Press firmly to ensure that the connectors are snug. BDKU Installation 1. Set the BDKU/PDKU switch for the appropriate system (refer to Figure 6-4 and Table 6-3). 2. Insert the BDKU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Refer to “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37 to ensure the BDKU is in a suitable slot. S104 3. Install the Ferrite Core (comes with Ferrite Core the BDKU) onto the 25-pair cable that connects the BDKU to the MDF: Flip open the two snaps on the Ferrite Tie Wrap Core, then snap it shut around the BDKU cord as shown in Figure 6-3. The core must be as close as possible to the BDKU. 5845 The core is needed to comply with FCC requirements. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 BDKU Ferrite Core PCB Installation 4. Some Ferrite Cores require a tie-wrap Figure 6-3 at the bottom to keep it from sliding. For those, feed the tie-wrap through the slots in the Ferrite Core, then cinch it. 6-7 PCB Installation BDKU/BDKS – Digital Telephone Interface Unit J20 J11 J30 P30 See P2 "Setting" below. P2 BDKU PDKU P10 BDKU1 J10 P20 J1 P1 J41 J40 Optional BDKS, adds eight more DKT ports. BDKU1A V.1 P40 5498 Figure 6-4 Table 6-3 BDKU/BDKS PCB BDKU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Strata CTX: set P2 to BDKU for all slots to enable: 3000-series telephone features and buttons and the BDKS to be operational. Strata DK: set P2 to PDKU for all slots: P2 BDKU/PDKU Jumper Plug All DK Cabinet slots (BDKS does not function on the Strata DK) If the switch is set to the PDKU mode, the DKT3000-series telephone LCD will be 16 characters, and the Spdial and LCD Feature buttons will not work. 6-8 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation BIOU – Option Interface Units BIOU – Option Interface Units Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces) Interfaces with: three music-on-hold sources, system page and control relays Older Version(s): none The BIOU provides a Paging Output (amplified and non-amplified), four zone paging relays, three Music-on-hold (MOH) interfaces and four control relays (Night Transfer, Night Bell and Background Music (BGM) mute). One or two BIOUS can be installed in a Strata CTX. BIOU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-5 and described in Table 6-4. BIOU Installation J3 J2 MOH3 600/600 Insert the BIOU (component side facing right) into any available PCB slot in the cabinet. See “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 600/600 ³ SP0 SW600 SP1 SP0 SP1 MOH2 J1 MOH1 MOH3 600/600 SW600 600/600 SP MOH2 MOH1 SP Mu Mu A SW1 B B B B N.C A SW100 SW1 B B B B N.C BIOU1A M M M M N.O M M M M N.O 5805 Control Relay Jumpers Figure 6-5 BIOU PCB PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-9 PCB Installation BIOU – Option Interface Units Table 6-4 BIOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector 6-10 Type of Component Description SW600 Page Output Switch SP0=600 ohms. SP1 = 3-watt amp. J1, J2, J3 RCA jack for connecting MOH/BGM source Interface connector for MOH/BGM source 1, 2, or 3. MOH1, MOH2, MOH3 Screwdriver volume control Adjusts volume of respective MOH jacks 1, 2, and 3. SP Screwdriver volume control Adjusts volume of SP1; 3-watt page amplifier. B/M Break/Make control relay jumpers Set in the Make (close) or Break (open) position, depending upon which one should occur when the application relay activates. N.C/N.O Jumper plug Not used. SW1 Mu/A Jumper plug Select Mu law for U.S. and Canada. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation BSTU/RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit BSTU/RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: eight standard telephone circuits Interfaces with: standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM sources auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp Older Version(s): RSTU3, RSTU2, RSTU1 The BSTU and RSTU are basically the same and are interchangeable. Ringer Capacity for the BSTU is three telephones or devices per circuit. RSTU1, 2 and 3 allow one telephone or device per circuit. Notes • For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF receiver unit must be equipped on the processor PCB (ARCS subassembly must be installed on ACTU processor of the CTX100. DTMF receivers are standard on CTX670 processors). • BSTU and RSTU3 provides Message Waiting (MW). RSTU1 and RSTU2 do not provide MW. R48S -48 Volt Supply Subassembly Installation R48S is required for line loop resistance greater than 600 ohms. The maximum loop resistance allowed with 48S = 1200 ohms; without 48S = 600 ohms. ³ Mate the R48S connectors P6 and P7 (Figures 6-6~6-9) with the R48S connectors P6 and P7 on the BSTU or RSTU. Note BSTU and RSTU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned so that the R48S only fits in the proper position. P6 Figure 6-6 1374 P7 R48S Interface Connectors BSTU/RSTU Installation 1. Make sure the factory-installed SBSS (BSTU subunit) or SRSS (RSTU subunit) is securely attached to the BSTU or RSTU (Figures 6-8 and 6-9). Note “RSTU” can be substituted for “BSTU” in these instructions. 2. Insert the BSTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation WARNING! The shield on the back of the BSTU and RSTU is designed to protect you from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do NOT remove this shield. 6-11 PCB Installation BSTU/RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit 3. After installing the BSTU, gently pull the BSTU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. Note When installing the RSTU3 into an existing system, system power must be cycled only if the MW mode (P11) is changed. Table 6-5 BSTU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description R48S connector P6 9-pin connector R48S connector P7 6-pin connector Interface connector to P7 of R48S. Mu/A P10 3-terminal jumper Mu Law or A Law PCM companding. (Must be set to Mu Law in the U.S. and Canada). No strap = Mu Law. Ring-time P12 3-terminal jumper Always set jumper to “REN3.” Table 6-6 Interface connector to P6 of R48S. RSTU1, 2 and 3 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description R48S connector P6 (RSTU) 9-pin connector Interface connector to P6 of R48S. R48S connector P7 (RSTU) 6-pin connector Interface connector to P7 of R48S. Mu/A P10 (RSTU3 only) 3-terminal jumper Mu Law or A Law PCM companding. (Must be set to Mu Law in the U.S. and Canada). No strap = Mu Law. CON = Electronically controlled message waiting light (U.S. and Canada). NOR = Relay controlled message waiting light. Do not use this in the U.S. and Canada since this option may cause message waiting crosstalk noise in some installations. 3-terminal jumper P6 P7 R48S BSTU1A P6 MW (Message Waiting) Mode P11 (RSTU3 only) Optional P7 RING-TIME Mu P12 P10 A SBSS Subunit 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Backplane Connector 6592 Figure 6-7 6-12 BSTU Controls and Interface Connectors Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation BSTU/RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit RSTU3A MW-Mode Mu A R48S P6 P10 P7 P6 CON NOR P11 Optional P7 SRSS Subunit 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Backplane Connector 5896 Figure 6-8 RSTU3 Controls and Interface Connectors PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-13 PCB Installation BSTU/RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit RSTU OR RSTU2 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Backplane Connector P7 UP R48S P6 5809 P6 R48S Optional P7 UP R48S Installed on RSTU2 Figure 6-9 6-14 SSTU Subunit R48S Installed on RSTU1 RSTU or RSTU2 Controls and Interface Connectors Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits; one 10BaseT Ethernet connection Interfaces with: Appears as: H.323 version 2 terminals over an IP network 4 E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I and II Signaling Immediate and Wink Start Older Version(s): none BVPU Configuration Note Maximum of five BVPUs for CTX670 and a maximum of two BVPUs for CTX100 because of FCC Part 15 Electromagnetic Capability (EMC) emissions restrictions. BVPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-10 and described in Table 6-7. BVPU Installation 1. Insert the BVPU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 2. Attach the 10BaseT Ethernet connection to the LAN connector. 3. Connect a PC equipped with Maintenance Console Software (MCS) to the serial port according to the drawing below. A serial connection is necessary to establish the IP address of the BVPU. Once the IP address is established, maintenance may be conducted over the Ethernet port. 4. After installing the BVPU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. BVPU PC with maintenance console software Monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 1 2 3 4 5 6 5243 Figure 6-10 Strata CTX I&M BVPU Monitor Jack 06/04 PCB Installation Call-monitor jack (RJ12) pin numbering 6-15 PCB Installation BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit Table 6-7 BVPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Serial Port Description RS-232C maintenance connection LAN Connector RJ45 SW0 DIP Switch 10BaseT ethernet connection Unused. All switches = Off LED 1 Green LED On = Tie trunk 4 active LED 2 Green LED On = Tie trunk 3 active LED 3 Green LED On = Tie trunk 2 active LED 4 Green LED On = Tie trunk 1 active LED 5 Green LED Power On/Off LED 6 Yellow LED Line Status (On=Busy / Off = Idle) LED 7 Red LED Alarm (On = Abnormal) On-Line On = Operating LED 8 Green LED Off = Starting up or Off Slow Flash = Detected error in BVPU Fast Flash = Shut down mode LED 9 Yellow LED Link Indication (On = Normal) LED 10 Green LED Data (On = Data communication in progress) LED 11 Yellow LED Collision (On = collisions occurring) VPIS1A 4 3 2 Line in Use LEDs UP CN2 1 SPORT JTAG Serial Port LEDs LINK ONLINE ALARM BUSY POWER BDM LAN ON LSB 12345678 MSB Backplane Connector CN1 LED7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BVPU1A 5806 TBO Ground Terminal Figure 6-11 6-16 BVPU PCB Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation BWDKU1A – Digital Telephone Interface Unit BWDKU1A – Digital Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: 16 digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: all Toshiba digital telephones (corded and cordless, DDCB, DSS, ADM, BPCI) CAUTION! Existing SpectraLink interface units are not compatible with the BWDKU1A. A firmware update will be available from Spectralink in the near future. When installing Add-on modules, be sure to check Table 10-1 on page 10-2 to verify maximum line lengths. BWDKU supports 1 pair wiring per Table 10-2 on page 10-6. Older Version(s): none The BWDKU1A is very similar to the BDKU + BDKS, but it supports 16 DKT circuits with a single PCB. It is also compatible with Strata DK but only supports eight circuits. BWDKU1A Installation 1. See Table 6-8 and Figure 6-12, then make any jumper adjustments needed for DKT or slot requirements. The BWDKU1A can be installed in any slot; however, if it is installed in expansion slots S_07~S_10, you must move the jumper plug to the “8 CCT” position. Important! Do not detach the SWDR1A subassembly. The BWDKU1A will not work properly without it. 2. Insert the BWDKU1A (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Table 6-8 BWDKU1A Slot Placement Slot Numbers Base & Expansion S_0 ~S_06 Available Circuits BWDKU1A Jumper Settings 16 The CTX identifies the BWDKU1A as a BDKU + BDKS. Leave jumper plug 503 in the “BDKU” position and leave P504 in the “16 CCT” position. Move jumper 504 to the “8 CCT” position when the BWDKU1A is placed in slots S_07~S_10. The BWDKU1A will work like a BDKU on a CTX system. Expansion S_07~S_10 8 Note If the BWDKU1A is installed on DK system, move jumper P503 to the “PDKU” position. PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-17 PCB Installation 02106 02106 02106 J6 02106 J5 02106 02106 02106 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) J2 Backplane Connector 02106 02106 02106 UP SWDR1A 02106 J3 J4 02106 J1 P504 16 CCT 8 CCT UP 02106 PDKU P503 BWDKU1 BDKU 02106 Programming 02106 02106 IC502 BWDKU1A 6837 Figure 6-12 BWDKU1A PCB Note The BWDKU1A does not need a Ferrite Core. A comparison of the BWDKU1A and the BDKU/BDKS is shown in Table 6-9. Table 6-9 BWDKU1A and BDKU/BDKS Comparison BWDKU1A BDKU/BDKS DKT wiring is all 1 pair. Line length is shorter than the BDKU. DKT wiring is 2 pairs (BDKU) and 1 pair (BDKS) mixed. One protector circuit for every two circuits. One protector circuit for every one circuit. The power factor for the BWDKU1A is +5VDC = 0.8, -24VDC = 0.3. Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DADMs and DDSS consoles to the BWDKU1A. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for instructions on connecting Door Phones (DDCBs). Programming In Strata CTX Program 100, use the same CTX WinAdmin selections as the BDKU or BDKU/ BDKS. A “BWDKU” selection will be added to Program 100 in a future version of CTX WinAdmin. In Strata DK, Program 03, code selection 61, 62, or 64 for the “BWDKU.” 6-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation PDKU2 – Digital Telephone Interface Unit PDKU2 – Digital Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital telephones (with or w/o ADM) (See Notes under Hardware Options)DDSS console (circuit 8 only) cordless digital telephones (DKT2004-CT, DKT2104-CT) DKT2001 single line digital telephones Older Version(s): PDKU1 (identical to PDKU2 except it does not support continuous DTMF tones w/DKT2000-series telephones, DIUs can only be connected to circuits 1~7) PDKU2 Hardware Options PDKU2 does not have to be configured for any option. Refer to Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DADMs, and DDSS consoles to the PDKU2. Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for instructions on connecting Door Phones (DDCBs). Notes • BPCI, RPCI-DI and PDIU-DI are not supported on Strata CTX. • With the DKT3000-series telephones, limitations are 16 (not 24) character LCD display, Spdial and LCD Feature buttons don’t work and the BPCI cannot be used There are no controls or indicators on the PDKU (Figure 6-13). PDKU2 Installation 1. Insert the PDKU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 2. After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Backplane Connector Strata CTX I&M PDKU2 PCB 06/04 PCB Installation 5807 Figure 6-13 6-19 PCB Installation RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS – Caller ID Interface RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS – Caller ID Interface Circuits per PCB: four Caller ID circuits Interfaces with: loop or ground start lines w/Caller ID (requires RCOU or RGLU2) Older Version(s): none The RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB provides the Caller ID feature, also known as Calling Number Delivery (CND). Caller ID can be provided on analog loop start lines (PCOU or RCOU PCBs) and analog ground start lines (RGLU2 PCB) only. It is not available on any other type of analog lines (RDDU/DID and/or REMU, PEMU Tie) or any type of digital lines (RDTU- T1, including ground start, loop start, DID and Tie lines). ³ An RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS circuit must be available in addition to each RCOU, RGLU, etc., line that is to receive Caller ID. When ordered from the factory, the RCIU1, RCIU2 PCB comes equipped with four Caller ID circuits. RCIS PCB An RCIS piggy-back PCB can be installed onto the RCIU to provide an additional four Caller ID circuits. Hence, an installed RCIU/RCIS can provide a maximum of eight Caller ID circuits per cabinet slot. To provide up to eight circuits, always install RCIS onto RCIU1 or RCIU2 instead of installing two RCIU PCBs (Program 100 code 009 always assigns each RCIU slot with eight software Caller ID circuits). Each RCIU/RCIS Caller ID circuit has a two-wire tip/ring interface which must be bridge-wired across its corresponding ground or loop start CO line tip/ring on the MDF (see Figure 10-11 on page 10-20). Each RCIU/RCIS modular jack provides interface for two Caller ID circuits. RCIU1 or RCIU2 Installation ³ Install the RCIU1/RCIU2 PCBs in any universal cabinet slot of the Strata CTX670 (except slot 11 or slot 12 if the RSIU is installed in slot 11). Note It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines. RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Installation 1. Install the RCIS onto the RCIU1 or RCIU2 as required (see Figures 6-14 and 6-15). 2. Install the RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS into the appropriate cabinet slot. The circuit modular jack numbering and the tip/ring cross connect wiring of BECU to RCOU, PCOU, or RGLU is shown in Figure 10-8 on page 10-13. Note It is not necessary to install the RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIU1/RCIS, or RCIU2/RCIS PCBs in the same cabinet as their associated CO lines or in slots adjacent to the lines. 6-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RCIU1, RCIU2, RCIS – Caller ID Interface J12 J13 RCIU1 Secondary Protectors P12 P13 20K/20K J4 RCIS1A (reverse) 20K/20K RCIU1A or RCIU2A (front) J3 20K/20K J2 J11 20K/20K J10 J1 P10 RCIU1A P11 V.1 1392 Figure 6-14 RCIU1/RCIS PCB RCIS RCIU1 or RCIU2 4-wire Modular Jack (4) Not Used T2 T1 R1 R2 Not Used CKT 7 & 8 CKT 3 & 4 CKT 5 & 6 CKT 1 & 2 SXX Figure 6-15 Strata CTX I&M RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS PCB Modular Jack Positions 06/04 PCB Installation 1393 6-21 PCB Installation RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: four loop start CO line circuits Interfaces with: loop start lines Older Version(s): RCOU1 (does not have Mu Law/A Law jumper plug) PCOU2 (does not have ABR circuitry, uses RCTU, K4RCU ABR circuits) PCOU1 (has ABR circuitry, identical and interchangeable w/PCOU2) The RCOU3A and RCOU provide ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold circuitry. Each RCOU line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and has surge absorbers for secondary protection. The RCOU3A and RCOU PCBs are shown in Figures 6-18 and 6-19 and described in Table 6-12. RCOS Installation (Internal Option) An RCOS3A PCB can be installed on the RCOU3A or RCOU1A for four more loop start lines (for a total of eight lines–the RCOS circuits provide the same options as the RCOU). Each RCOS circuit has surge absorbers for secondary protection. Excessive loudness which is caused by close proximity to a CO or PBX telephone can be fixed through the RCOS and RCOU decibel (dB) Pad switches. RCOS dB switches SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 and RCOU dB switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and CO when set to position 3. Switches are factory-set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. The RCOS3A and RCOS1A PCBs are shown in Figures 6-16 and 6-17 and described in Tables 6-10 and 6-11. ³ To install an RCOS3A PCB 1. If the Strata CTX system is within one mile of the PBX or CO, set the RCOS dB Pad switches SW501, SW601, SW701, and SW801 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. Set the RCOU dB Pad switches to position 3 also. Note RCOU male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 are positioned to allow installation of the RCOS only in the proper position. 2. Mate the RCOS3A female connectors J11, J12, J13, and J14 (Figure 6-16) to the RCOU3A or RCOU1A male connectors P11, P12, P13, and P14 (Figures 6-18 or 6-19). 3. (RCOS3A only) For Mexico, the U.K, or Asia, insert the short jumper plug on the A Law side. For the U.S. and Canada, no plug is required. (No plug is the Mu Law assignment). 4. Apply firm, even pressure to the RCOS to ensure proper mating of connectors. Note The RCOS1A cannot be installed on the RCOU3A. 6-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit Table 6-10 RCOS3A Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 5~8 indicators Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J3 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 5 and 6. J4 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 7 and 8. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. 11-pin female connector Interface connector for RCOU3A. RCOS3A can be connected with RCOU3A and RCOU1A. 3-terminal jumper No jumper plug is the default for the U.S. and Canada. For countries requiring A Law, insert the jumper plug (provided in the PCB box) on the A Law side. Pad switch SW501 (circuit 5) Pad switch SW601 (circuit 6) Pad switch SW701 (circuit 7) Pad switch SW801 (circuit8) RCOU3A connector J11, J12, J13, J14 Mu Law/A Law jumper plug P2 (RCOS3A only) Table 6-11 RCOS1A Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 5~8 indicators Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J3 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 5 and 6. J4 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 7 and 8. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. Female connector Interface connector for RCOU 4-circuit loop start CO line unit. Pad switch SW501 (circuit 1) Pad switch SW601 (circuit 2) Pad switch SW701 (circuit 3) Pad switch SW801 (circuit 4) RCOU connector J11, J12, J13, J14 PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-23 PCB Installation RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit RCOU Connectors P1 J12 J11 Plug is not used in the U.S. and Canada 0 SW801 0 A 0 SW701 Mu 0 SW601 3 SW501 3 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 5 and 6 J3 3 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 7 and 8 3 J14 J13 4 3 2 1 J4 Chip LEDs CO Line LEDs 5907 RCOU Connectors Figure 6-16 RCOS3A PCB CO Line LEDs 4 3 SW401 1 0 3 PAD 2 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 0 3 PAD SW301 0 3 PAD SW201 0 3 PAD SW101 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 5811 Figure 6-17 6-24 RCOS PCB Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit RCOU Installation Note The decibel (dB) Pad switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a Central Office or PBX telephone office by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or CO when set to the 3 position. Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. ³ To install an RCOU3A or RCOU1A PCB 1. If the Strata CTX system is within one mile of the PBX or Central Office, set the RCOU dB Pad switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 2. (RCOU3A only) For Mexico, the U.K, or Asia, insert the short jumper plug on the A Law side. For the U.S. and Canada, no plug is required. (No plug is the Mu Law assignment). 3. Insert the RCOU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. PCOU2 can be installed in place of RCOU, see the appropriate Configuration chapter. 4. After installing the RCOU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Table 6-12 RCOU3A and RCOU1A Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1~4 indicators Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. (CO line indicator will not light unless RCOU is connected to a CO line). J1 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2. J2 connector Modular connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4. 2-position slide switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. 10-pin male connector Interface connector for RCOS 4-circuit loop start CO line unit. 3-terminal jumper No jumper plug is the default for the U.S. and Canada. For countries requiring A Law, insert the jumper plug (provided in the PCB box) on the A Law side. Pad switch SW101 (circuit 1) Pad switch SW201 (circuit 2) Pad switch SW301 (circuit 3) Pad switch SW401 (circuit 4) RCOS connector P11, P12, P13, P14 Mu Law/A Law jumper plug P2 (RCOU3A only) PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-25 PCB Installation RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit RCOS Connectors P14 P13 0 SW401 3 4 3 2 1 Chip LEDs CO Line LEDs Plug is not used in the U.S. and Canada P2 0 SW301 3 Mu A CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 0 SW201 3 J2 0 SW101 3 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 Backplane Connector J1 P12 P11 5904 RCOS Connectors Figure 6-18 RCOU3A PCB RCOS Connectors P14 P13 0 SW401 3 4321 Red LEDs 0 SW301 3 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 3 and 4 0 SW201 3 J2 0 SW101 3 CO Line Modular Jack Circuits 1 and 2 Backplane Connector J1 P12 P11 5810 RCOS Connectors Figure 6-19 6-26 RCOU PCB Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RCOU3A, RCOS3A – Four-Circuit Loop Start CO Line Interface Unit Table 6-13 PCOU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description CO line circuit 1 CD112 Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. CO line circuit 2 CD212 Red LED CO line circuit 3 CD312 CO line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to a CO. CO line circuit 4 CD412 J1 connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 1 and 2. Modular connector J2 connector Interface connector for CO line circuits 3 and 4. Pad switch SW101 (circuit 1) Pad switch SW201 (circuit 2) Enables -3dB signal level drop for CO line circuit. 2-position slide switch Pad switch SW301 (circuit 3) Pad switch SW401 (circuit 4) RCOU Connectors 8 7 6 5 J13 J14 Red LEDs 3 SW701 3 SW601 3 SW501 3 J4 0 SW801 Trunk Modular Jack Circuits 7 and 8 0 0 J3 Trunk Modular Jack Circuits 5 and 6 J11 0 J12 5812 RCOU Connectors Figure 6-20 PCOU2 PCB PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-27 PCB Installation RDDU – Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit RDDU – Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: four DID lines Interfaces with: DID (one or two-way) lines Older Version(s): none The RDDU provides four Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines, each of which can have a single office code along with a block of extensions. Each extension can be assigned to ring a station [DN] that appears on one or multiple stations, Distributed Hunt or ACD Group, or an external telephone number selected in system programming. This enables calls over the same line to be routed to different stations or groups of stations. An extension can also be assigned to ring the maintenance modem. Each RDDU can be set for either wink start or immediate. All RDDU lines support DNIS and ANI features. RDDU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-21 and described in Table 6-14. RDDU Installation Note Switches are factory-set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. 1. If the KSU is located within one mile of the PBX or CO, set dB Pad switches SW101 through SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position to control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to the PBX or CO. 2. Sensitivity jumpers P101~P401 are used mostly for dial pulse operation, to adjust for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. If close to the central office, the sensitivity should be set for low (L); as the loop length increases, it should be set to medium (M), then high (H). 3. Insert the RDDU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 4. After installing the RDDU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Table 6-14 RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description Pad switch SW101 (circuit 1) Pad switch SW201 (circuit 2) 3-position slide switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. J1 connector Modular connection Interface connector for DID line circuits 1 & 2 J2 connector Modular connection Interface connector for DID line circuits 3 & 4 DID line circuit 1 CD122 Red LED (top) DID line circuit 2 CD222 Red LED Pad switch SW301 (circuit 3) Pad switch SW401 (circuit 4) DID line circuit 3 CD322 Red LED DID line circuit 4 CD422 Red LED (bottom) Lights to indicate line circuit is in operation. (Trunk indicator will not light unless RDDU is connected to a DID line.) Jumper plug P101 Jumper plug P201 Jumper plug P301 3-terminal jumper plug Adjusts for dial pulsing at different loop lengths. Jumper plug P401 6-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RDDU – Direct Inward Dialing Line Interface Unit P401 HML 3 0 P301 HML RDDU SW401 4 3 2 1 LEDs 3 0 SW301 P201 HML J2 3 0 SW201 P101 HML J1 Backplane Connector 3 0 SW101 RDDU 5813 Figure 6-21 RDDU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-29 PCB Installation RDSU – Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit RDSU – Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: (with RSTS) four standard telephone (circuits 1~4)/four digital telephone (circuits 5~8) (without RSTS) two standard telephone circuits (1 and 2)/four digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital circuits (see PDKU) digital telephones standard circuits standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp Older Version(s): none An optional Standard Telephone Interface Subunit (RSTS) can be attached to the RDSU to provide two more standard telephone ports (circuits 3 and 4). RDSU and RSTS controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-22. RDSU interface connectors are described in Table 6-15. Note For the system to recognize the DTMF tones generated by incoming DID lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS -4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the processor PCB. Installing R48S Ring Generator (Internal Option) An optional R48S unit can be connected to the RDSU or RSTU to change the standard telephone loop voltage from -24VDC to -48VDC, extending the standard telephone circuit loop length (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. The features provided by the R48S apply to the RSTS circuits as well as the basic RDSU standard telephone circuits. ³ To install the R48S on the RDSU ³ Mate the R48S connectors R6 and R7 with the RDSU connectors R6 and R7. RDSU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned to allow installation of the R48S only in the proper position (Figure 6-5). Installing RSTS (Internal Option) ³ Mate the RSTS connectors P2~P5 with the RDSU connectors P2~P5. RDSU connectors P2~P5 are positioned to allow installation of the RSTS only in the proper position (Figure 6-22). RDSU Installation 1. Ensure the SSTU subunit and optional subassemblies are securely attached to the RDSU (Figure 6-22). WARNING! The protective shield on the back of the RDSU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do not remove this shield. 2. Insert the RDSU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 6-30 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RDSU – Digital/Standard Telephone Interface Unit 3. After installing the RDSU gently pull the RDSU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. Table 6-15 RDSU, RSTS Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector RSTS connector P2/P3 RSTS connector P4/P5 Type of Component Connector for RSTS subassembly that provides two standard telephone circuits. 10-pin connector R48S connector to P6 8-pin connector R48S connector to P7 6-pin connector Description Interface connector for R48S. P3 P2 RSTS P5 P4 P6 R48S P7 P6 P3 P2 P7 P5 P4 RDSU1 1377 Figure 6-22 RDSU, RSTS PCBs PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-31 PCB Installation RDTU2 – T1 Interface Unit RDTU2 – T1 Interface Unit See Chapter 8 – T1 for RDTU PCB installation information. REMU2A – Tie Line Unit Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits Interfaces with: E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I and II Signaling Immediate and Wink Start Older Version(s): REMU1 (Does not have Mu Law/A Law jumper plug) PEMU (Type I signaling & immediate start only, does not provide Pad switches) The REMU2A has four decibel (dB) Pad switches which can be set to reduce excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to the PBX or central office. (Pad is for Transmit and Receive for 2W operation, and Transmit only is for 4W operation.) REMU2A and REMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figures 6-23, 6-24 and described in Table 6-16. PEMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-25 and described in Table 6-17. REMU2A and REMU Installation 1. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs SW103~SW403 to the appropriate positions. 2. Set the P102/104, P202/204, P302/304, and P402/404 jumper plugs for Type 1 or Type 2 signaling. 3. If the system is located within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the REMU dB Pad switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 4. (REMU2A only) Make sure the jumper plugs for P105, P205, P305 and P405 are set to the TYP1,2 (default), unless the unit is used in the U.K. or Japan, in which case the plug should be moved to DC5. 5. (REMU2A only) Do not change the position of the jumper plug on P2 selects Mu Law (default). However, if the unit is used in Mexico, the U.K, or Asia, move the jumper plug to A Law. 6. Insert the REMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 7. After installing the REMU, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PEMU Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 6-32 Determine if the E&M Tie lines will be configured for 2- or 4-wire transmission. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs P103, P203, P303, and P403 to the appropriate positions. Set the FG jumper plug P3 to the “2-3” position. Set all GND/BAT jumper plugs to the “BAT” position for connection to the telephone network. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation REMU2A – Tie Line Unit Note The “GND” position is used to connect PEMU circuits back-to-back on premises only, 1000 feet maximum (E&M lead wires must be crossed). 5. Insert the PEMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors.) 6. After installing, gently pull the PEMU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Table 6-16 REMU2A and REMU1A Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description Tie trunk circuits 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation. E&M Tie trunk connector circuits 1~4 (J101, 201, 301, and 401) Modular connector Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit. 2-position slide switch Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. 3-terminal jumper Enables line circuit to be set for Type 1 or Type 2 signaling. 2-position slide switch Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie line circuit. 3-terminal jumper For most countries, use the default position (TYP1,2). In the U.K. and Japan, place the jumper plug on DC5. 3-terminal jumper Do not move the jumper plug which is in the default for the U.S. and Canada. For countries requiring A Law, place the jumper plug (provided in the PCB box) on the A Law side. Pad switch SW101 (circuit 1) Pad switch SW201 (circuit 2) Pad switch SW301 (circuit 3) Pad switch SW401 (circuit 4) TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P102/104 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P202/204 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P302/304 TYP1/TYP2 jumper plugs P402/404 2W/4W switch 102 (circuit 1) 2W/4W switch 202 (circuit 2) 2W/4W switch 302 (circuit 3) 2W/4W switch 402 (circuit 4) TYP1,2/DC5 jumper plugs P105, P205, P305, P405 (REMU2A only) Mu Law/A Law jumper plug P2 (REMU2A only) PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-33 PCB Installation REMU2A – Tie Line Unit SW102 SW202 SW302 SW402 2W 4W 4W 2W 4W 4W P2 3 SW401 2W 0 TYP1/BATT Mu (Default) A 3 SW301 0 3 SW201 0 P204 TYP1/2 3 SW101 0 TYP2/GND TYP1/BATT P104 J101 P105 Backplane Connector DC5 P304 TYP2/GND TYP1/BATT TYP1/BATT TYP2/GND TYP1/2 J201 DC5 TYP1/BATT TYP1/BATT TYP2/GND DC5 J301 TYP1/2 P404 TYP1/BATT TYP2/GND TYP1/2 J401 DC5 TYP2/GND 2W 4 3 2 1 Chip LEDs SW102 SW202 SW302 SW402 2W 2W 4W P304 P302 P404 P402 4W TYP1 TYP2 4 3 2 1 LEDs P205 TYP2/GND TYP1/BATT 2W 2W 4W TYP1 TYP2 SW401 J401 3 0 4W TYP1 TYP2 J301 TYP1 TYP1 TYP2 SW201 SW301 TYP2 3 0 J201 3 0 TYP1 TYP1 TYP2 TYP1 TYP2 P102 TYP2 Backplane Connector J101 P202 P204 P104 3 SW101 0 06/04 Strata CTX I&M 6-34 REMU PCB Figure 6-24 REMU2A PCB Figure 6-23 P305 TYP2/GND P405 P402 P102 P202 P302 E48S1A CO Line LEDs REMU2A 5905 PAD switch REMU 5814 PCB Installation REMU2A – Tie Line Unit Table 6-17 PEMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description Tie trunk circuit 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that Tie line is in operation. E&M Tie line connector J101, 201, 301,and 401 (circuit 1~4) Modular connector Interface connector for E&M Tie line circuit. FG jumper P3 3-terminal jumper Enables or disables -48VDC ground to FG. GND/BAT jumper P101 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 1) GND/BAT jumper P102 Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. GND/BAT jumper P201 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 2) GND/BAT jumper P202 GND/BAT jumper P301 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 3) GND/BAT jumper P302 GND/BAT jumper P401 M-lead origination for Tie line (must be in BAT position per FCC requirements. 3-terminal jumper (Tie line 4) GND/BAT jumper P402 2W/4W switch P103, 203, 303, and 402 (circuit 1~4) Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M Tie line circuit. 3-terminal jumper SP1020 -48 Volt Supply LEDs FG P303 P403 P3 2W 4W 2W 4W 123 4 3 2 1 Tie Line 4 P203 J401 4W 2W 4W 2W P401 P402 P302 P301 J301 P103 Tie Line 3 P202 P201 J201 Tie Line 2 J101 Backplane Connector P102 P101 Tie Line 1 5815 Figure 6-25 Strata CTX I&M PEMU PCB 06/04 PCB Installation Ground/Battery Jumpers (Leave In Factory Positions) 6-35 PCB Installation RGLU2 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit RGLU2 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: four line circuits Interfaces with: loop or ground start lines Older Version(s): RGLU1 (does not have hookflash to CO) The RGLU2 also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold. Each RGLU2 line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signaling and gas tube secondary protection. RGLU2 controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 6-26 and described in Table 6-18. RGLU2 Installation Note The decibel (dB) Pad switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 control excessive loudness resulting from close proximity to a central office or PBX telephone office by providing a -3 dB signal level drop to, or from, the PBX or central office when set to the 3 position. Switches are factory set to the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. ³ To install an RGLU2 PCB 1. If the Strata CTX670 is within one mile of the PBX or central office, set the dB Pad switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 2. Set each line for ground start (GND) or loop start (LOOP) by setting the following jumper plugs: SW103 for line 1, SW203 for line 2, SW303 for line 3, and SW403 for line 4. 3. Insert the RGLU2 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 4. After installing the RGLU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Table 6-18 RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description Line circuit 1 Line circuit 2 Line circuit 3 Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. Red LED CO line indicator will not light unless RGLU2 is connected to a line. Line circuit 4 J1 connector Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 1 and 2. J2 connector Modular connector RJ14 modular Interface connector for trunk circuits 3 and 4. 2-position slice switch Enables -3dB signal level drop for trunk circuits. Pad switch SW101 (circuit 1) Pad switch SW201 (circuit 2) Pad switch SW301 (circuit 3) Pad switch SW401 (circuit 4) 6-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RGLU2 – Loop/Ground Start CO Line Interface Unit Table 6-18 RGLU2 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors (continued) Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description LOOP/GND jumper SW103 (configures line 1) LOOP/GND jumper SW203 (configures line 2) 3-terminal jumper LOOP/GND jumper SW303 (configures line 3) Used to configure line for loop or ground start. LOOP/GND jumper SW403 (configures line 4) 3 PAD 0 3 PAD 0 SW101 SW403 SW303 SW203 SW103 3 PAD 0 SW201 J1 LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND LOOP GND 3 PAD 0 SW301 J2 SW401 RGLU 4 3 2 1 Red LEDs Backplane Connector 5816 Figure 6-26 RGLU2 PCB PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-37 PCB Installation RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface Circuits per PCB: four circuits Interfaces with: enhanced 911 locator services Older Version(s): none The E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface card (RMCU) enables cost-effective connection to the Enhanced 911 locator services without third-party equipment. Figure 6-29 shows the RMCU. The RMCU supports two subassemblies (RCMS) that provide a total of up to four ports as shown in Figure 6-27. Only one RMCU PCB can be installed in a Strata CTX670 system. The RMCU has no CAMA circuits. It requires one RCMS subassembly to provide one or two CAMA trunks and two RCMS PCBs to provide up to four CAMA trunks. Location of the RCMS LEDs are shown in Figure 6-30 and the functions of the RCMS LEDs are given in Table 6-19. RCMS Subassemblies Installation 1. Attach one or two subassemblies (RCMS) to the connectors on the RMCU as shown in Figure 6-27. If only one RCMS is to be installed, install it in the bottom position. 2. Apply firm even pressure to ensure that the connectors are properly seated in the RMCU connector blocks. If they are seated properly, a light resistance is felt when you pull the units away from the RMCU. RCMS1A ® UP RMCU1A RMCU1A ABCDEFGHK P6 P5 UP P7 P3 RCMS1A P2 ® UP ABCDEFGHK P4 RMCU1A - C M V. 1 UP Figure 6-27 6-38 2758 Placement of RCMS Subassemblies on the RMCU Interface Card Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface NB CB NB J5 J4 CB RCMS1A J2 J3 PAD PAD SW101 600 / 600 RCMS1A -CM V.1 600 / 600 0 3 0 3 SW201 J1 RCMS1 5817 Figure 6-28 Table 6-19 RCMS Subassembly (stand-alone) RCMS Subassembly Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Controls, Indicators, & Connectors Type of Component Description SW101 Switch 3-dB Pad switch for circuit 1 or 3. SW201 Switch 3-dB Pad switch for circuit 2 or 4. J1 J2 Jacks to connect to RMCU. Connector Blocks J3 RJ11 Jacks to connect to RMCU. Jacks to connect to RMCU. 6-pin modular connector Network interface jack to CAMA trunk. RMCU Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation 1. Insert the RMCU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. 2. Gently pull the unit outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a light resistance is felt. 3. Wire the RCMS jacks, J4 and J5, to the network CAMA trunks per Figure 10-9 on page 10-17. 4. Test the CAMA trunk and set the 3-dB Pad switches, SW101 and SW 201, for the appropriate volume level. 6-39 PCB Installation RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface RMCU1A RMCU1A P6 P5 RMCUV.1 P7 TC35354F P3 P2 RMC21B Backplane Connector P4 RMCU1A -CM V.1 5818 Figure 6-29 RMCU Interface Card TOP RMCU1A RCMS1A (2/2) RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector CAMA #4 Network Busy (NB) LED Customer Busy (CB) LED CAMA #3 LEDs (indicate Trunk Condition) NB LED CB LED RCMS1A (1/2) CAMA #2 NB LED CB LED CAMA #1 NB LED CB LED 2796 Figure 6-30 6-40 Location of the RCMS LEDs Strata CTX I&M 06/04 PCB Installation RMCU/RCMS – E911 CAMA Trunk Direct Interface RCMS LEDs Customer Busy (CB) LEDs – The RMCU firmware controls this LED synchronizing with off-hook status inside switch. Network Busy (NB) LEDs – RMCU hardware controls this LED synchronizing with the supply of voltage from the carrier. Table 6-20 LED Indications (Normal Operation) Status NB LED (Network Busy) CB LED (Customer Busy) 1 No network connection. RMCU is in stand-by mode. On Off 2 Network connected. RMCU is in stand-by mode. Off1 Off Off On Flashing On On On 6 Network is disconnecting first and then the RMCU disconnects. On then Off NB is turned off, then approx. 400 msec after CB is turned off. On then Off 7 RMCU is disconnecting first and then the network disconnects. On then Off NB is turned off within 700 msec after CB is turned off. On then Off 3 4 5 Network is in stand-by mode and the RMCU is off hook. Network is connected and the RMCU MF sending dial tone. Network is seizing and the RMCU is offhook. Network is connecting, before ANI is sent, and the RMCU is sending. Network is connecting and the RMCU is communicating. 1. If the NB LED stays On, even if the modular connector of the network is connected, check the following: ● Tip and Ring could be reversed. ● Network could be busy. PCB Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6-41 PCB Installation Network Requirements Network Requirements The system network requirements are provided in Table 6-21. Table 6-21 PCB Network Requirements PCB/Interface Facility Interface Code Network Jack Ringer Equivalence Universal Service Order Code RSTU2/RDSU1 (Off-premises Station) OL13B (RSTU2, –24V) OL13C (RSTU2, RDSU with R48S-48V) RJ21X N/A 9.0F RCOU/RCOS2 (loop start line) 02LS2 RJ14C/RJ21X (all others) 0.3B N/A RDDU 02RV2-T (Dealer-supplied CSU) RJ14C/RJ21X 0.0B AS.2 REMU type 1 or type 2 TL11M, 2-wire TL31M, 4-wire TL12M, type 2, 2-wire TL32M, type 2, 4-wire RJ2EX RJ2GX RJ2FX RJ2HX Not Available (N/A) 9.0F RGLU22 (ground or loop start line) 02GS2 (ground) 02LS2 (loop) RJ14C/RJ11CX 0.3B N/A RDTU (DS-1/T1)3 (See last bullet note on Note 2 below.) RJ48C/RJ48X/ RJ48M N/A 6.0P RCIU2/RCIS (Caller ID) N/A RJ21X/RJ14C 0.3B N/A RPTU (PRI)4, 5 04DU9-1SN (Dealer-supplied CSU) RJ48C/RJ48M N/A 6.0P RPTU (QSIGI) 04DU9-1SN (Dealer-supplied CSU) RJ48C/RJ48M RBSU/RBSS (S/T, BRI)3 02IS5 (Dealer-supplied NT-1) RJ48C/RJ48X RBUU/RBUS (U, BRI)3 02IS5 RJ48C/RJ48X RMCU/RCMS (CAMA) 02RV2-O RJ11C/RJ21-X 1. Only RDSU ckts. 1~4 provide Off-premises Station (OPS) ability. RDSU must use OL13A or OL13B if providing –24 volt loop voltage. If equipped with the –48 volt loop option PCB (R48S), OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C may be used for OPS connection. 2. Loop current requirements for Strata loop and ground start lines: 20 milliamperes (mA) min./120 mA max. 3. When ordering DS-1/T1 circuits, six items must be specified: • The number of channels per T1 circuit, fractional increments are normally 8, 12, or 16 channels, full service is 24 channels. Unused channels must be bit-stuffed. • CO line types assigned to each channel: Loop Start, Ground Start, Tie (Wink or Immediate Start), DID (Wink or Immediate). • Frame Format Type: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF). The T1 provider normally specifies the Frame Format to be used, either is adequate for CO digital voice lines. ESF provides a higher level of performance monitoring, but requires trained personnel and the ESF CSU normally costs more than an SF only CSU. • Line Code Type: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) or Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). The T1 provider normally specified the Line Code to be used, either is adequate for T1 CO digital voice lines. • The customer may have to provide the Channel Service Unit (CSU) to interface the CTX T1 circuit to the Telco T1 circuit. (CSUs are a Telco requirement.) • RDTU Network Channel Interface Codes: 04DU9-BN, 04DU9-DNZZ, 04DU9-1SN, 04DU9-1KN, 04DU9-1ZN. 4. For information on how to order ISDN PRI/BRI circuits, you should refer to the Toshiba ISDN Training CBT. ISDN circuits may require a customer-provided CSU for PRI and/or Terminal Adapter or Network Terminal units for BRI. In U.S. CSU/TAs must be UL-listed in the U.S. In Canada, they must be CSA certified. 5. RPTU2 is required for QSIG private networking. 6-42 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Interfaces 7 This chapter covers information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). PRI Overview For PRI services, the Strata CTX uses a BPTU or RPTU PCB to connect to a Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI line using a UL listed (or CSA certified in Canada) Channel Service Unit (CSU) in most locations in the U.S. Each BPTU or RPTU provides 23B + D channels. The B-channels support CO speech and data connections on the PSTN side only. The Strata CTX also uses a BPTU or RPTU2 PCB to connect Strata Net QSIG network nodes using DS-1. A DS-1 may be obtained in several ways, most commonly, leasing it from a carrier. BRI S/T Overview BRI S/T is available with the RBSU PCB. The RBSU provides two BRI S/T circuits to connect to the PSTN BRI line using an external UL listed NT1; or, on the station-side, connect to: • S-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-S) • S-type Terminal Adapters (TA-S) with non-ISDN devices Each TE-1-S and TA1-S device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data as shown in Figure 7-1. The station-side BRI S/T circuits are point-to-multipoint. A subassembly (RBSS) can be attached to the RBSU for two additional BRIs for S-type stationside connections only. The RBSU PCB and the RBSS subassembly are shown in Figures 7-11 and Figure 7-12 on page 7-17. The combination of RBSU and RBSS uses only one slot to provide up to four BRI S/T circuits. Note Each installed RBSU or RBSS circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. BRI U Overview For BRI U services, the RBUU provides two BRI U circuits that connect directly to PSTN BRI lines; or, on the station side, connect to: • U-type ISDN telephones and Terminal Equipment (TE-1-U) • U-type Terminal Adapters (TA-U) with non-ISDN devices Each TE-1-U and TA-U device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data depending on the device (see Figure 7-1). The station-side BRI U circuits are point-to-point. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-1 ISDN Interfaces BRI U Overview A subassembly (RBUS) can be attached to the RBUU for two additional BRIs for PSTN and/or U-type station connections. The RBUU PCB and the RBUS subassemblies are shown in Figures 7-23 and Figure 7-24 on page 7-28. The combination of RBUU and RBUS uses only one slot to provide up to four U-type BRI circuits. Notes Each installed RBUU or RBUS circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two CO lines regardless of the circuit application, even if the circuit is not actually connected. ● Strata CTX ISDN Reference Model A block diagram of the Strata CTX ISDN PCBs and reference points is provided in Figure 7-1. Demarcation Point CTX (NT2) R SLT U RSTU RBUU/RBUS DKT RJ48C 8-wire BRI Loop Termination PDKU T S TE-1-S (Voice or Data) SLT R TA-S PC NT1 RJ48C 8-wire BRI Loop Termination BPTU or RPTU (TE) CSU (NT1) RJ48C 8-wire PRI Office Channel Unit Dealersupplied CSU and NT1 U TE-1-U (Voice or Data) SLT RBSU/RBSS (NTs (P-MP) RBSU R PC 6643 TA-U Telcosupplied Jacks ISDN SWITCH Office Channel Unit, or OCR, is the CO Channel Service Unit RBUU/RBUS (LT) (P-P) R, T, S, and U are ISDN standard reference points TE-1 = Terminal Equipment, Type 1 TA = Terminal Adapter P-P = Point-to-Point P-MP = Point-to Multipoint (passive bus) Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) Customer Premises Equipment Figure 7-1 7-2 ISDN Reference Model Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces BPTU/RPTU Overview BPTU/RPTU Overview The BPTU or RPTU is a DS-1 divided into 24 TDM channels using standard T1 electrical signal format. The BPTU or RPTU’s D-channel is typically the 24th channel and can control the signaling of 23 of its own B-channels and 24 B-channels of another designated BPTU or RPTU. Each BPTU or RPTU can also use its own D-channel for control. ISDN Interfaces Both the BPTU and RPTU provides 24 channels for ISDN PRI service. The BPTU is fully compatible with RDTU2 and will replace the RPTU. Network connection using BPTU or RPTU PRI interface requires installation of a customer-provided CSU in most locations of the U.S. Refer to “CSU Requirements” on page 7-3 for CSU installation. The BPTU or RPTU’s in-service bit rate is 1.544 mbps (± 4.6 ppm), but during a maintenance session, the rate may vary ± 32 ppm. The BPTU or RPTU provides Binary 8-Zero Substitution (B8ZS) and ESF with Framing Pattern Sequence (FPS) and Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking in the framing bits. Extracting the Stratum-1 clock from the ISDN PRI, BRI, or T1 provider is the most common method used to synchronize the BPTU or RPTU PCB and the Strata CTX time switch to the public telephone network. One BPTU, RPTU, RBSU, RBUU, or RDTU T1 must extract the clock from the ISDN or T1 provider. The selected unit is designated as the “Primary” timing source in Program 105. In remote cabinet applications, the Primary clock source PCB must be installed in the Base Cabinet (main location). For more information, refer to “Timing and Synchronization” on page 7-35. A dealer-supplied CSU must be installed between the ISDN PRI network line and the BPTU or RPTU PCB as shown in Figure 7-1. Some telephone companies supply the CSU and call it the Network Interface Unit (NIU). CSU Requirements In the U.S., the CSU must be UL listed and comply with Part 68 of the FCC rules. It must also comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. In Canada, the CSU must be CSA certified. The CSU is transparent to data, clock, and framing. It acts as a repeater, not a controller, for timing. The CSU also acts as a signal regenerator and must be able to perform loop-back tests and maintenance to both the network and Strata CTX BPTU or RPTU. The CSU is the same type as used for T1 circuits although it performs the function as NT1 for PRI ISDN in the ISDN reference model as shown in Figure 7-1. Slot Assignments Up to eleven BPTU or RPTU PCBs can be installed in a Strata CTX system providing up to 264 PRI lines (B-channels). If BPTU or RPTU (PRI) and RDTU (T1) PCBs are installed, the maximum combined PCBs cannot exceed eleven. The PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the cabinets. Refer to Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration, “ISDN PRI Digital Line PCBs” on page 2-40, for the guidelines regarding BPTU or RPTU PCB slot assignments. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-3 ISDN Interfaces BPTU Interface Unit BPTU Interface Unit System: DK424, DK40i, CTX100 & 670 Circuits per PCB: 24 channels per PCB Interfaces with: ISDN PRI Older Version(s): none The BPTU has an RS-232C port to trace data that is transmitted between the CTX system CPU and the BPTU. T1 Framing: ESF Line cording: B8ZS Digital PAD: Transmit side +6dB to -15dB. Receive side +6dB to -15dB (software controlled) BPTU Installation Power Factor BPTUA uses 5V only. 5V power factor = 2.30 ³ To install an BPTU PCB 1. Look for IC19 on the BPTU PCB. If it is on the PCB, move the SW10 jumper to “ROM.” If IC19 is not on this PCB, leave the jumper on the “CPU” setting (see Table 7-1). 2. If you want to run the PCB Self Test, refer to BPTU Self Test. 3. Turn the Strata CTX system power Off. 4. Insert the BPTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. Refer to Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration: • “Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-26 ...or “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37 • “ISDN PRI Digital Line PCBs” on page 2-40 (mentioned above in slot assignments) 5. After installing the BPTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. 6. For cabling information and requirements, refer to “BPTU and RPTU Cabling” on page 7-11. 7-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces BPTU Installation EQ OFF SW6 OFF ROM SW10 CPU LB Figure 7-2 Backplane Connector LB 6640 ON SW9 OFF BPTU1A ON SW8 OFF LB ROM SW10 CPU LB J1 MONITOR OFF OFF OFF SW6 J2 RS-232C Connector for Call Data Monitor (RJ-12) ON SW9 OFF RJ-45 8-pin Modular Network/CSU Interface Jack ON SW8 OFF PSYNC SSYNC SW5 EQ OFF SW5 SW4 BSY EQ R28 EQ SW4 R28 EQ LOS EQ ON ON R28 YALM/RAI ON IC19 LOS BSY PSYNC SSYNC ON BALM/AIS ON FSYNC MFSYNC BALM/AIS YALM/RAI FSYNC MFSYNC ISDN Interfaces RESET ON SW1 Status/Alarm LEDs BPTU PCB Reset Switch (resets the software) FSYNC - Not Used MFSYNC BALM/AIS LEDs YALM/RAI LOS BSY PSYNC SSYNC - Not Used RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector (to CSU) RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor (RJ-12) 6642 Figure 7-3 Strata CTX I&M BPTU LEDs and Connectors 06/04 7-5 ISDN Interfaces BPTU Installation Table 7-1 SW10 Internal or External ROM Setting Mode SW10 Note When there is an internal ROM on the CPU (TMP93PW46), BPTUA operates with the SW10. Internal ROM CPU (Default mode) Use this mode when IC19 is not on PCB. If the SW10 is in CPU position, BPTUA is operating with the internal ROM regardless of IC19 existence. BPTUA is operating with the external ROM (IC19). External ROM ROM (Upgrade) Use this mode only when IC19 is on PCB. If the SW10 is in ROM position without IC19, the BPTUA will not work. BPTU Self Test 1. Remove the RJ45 network cable to perform the Self Test. 2. Remove the BPTU and set the SW8 and SW9 switches to On (see Table 7-2). 3. Insert BPTU back into the same slot that it was in. If all LEDS turn Off except PSYNCH or SSYNCH, the PCB has passed the self test. 4. After self check passes, put the switches back into position for normal operation (both Off) and insert the BPTU PCB back into the appropriate slot. 5. Plug the RJ45 network cable back in. Note Do not use the BPTU as a clock extraction unit while in Self Test mode. Table 7-2 SW8, SW9 BPTUA Self and CSU Test SW8 and SW9 Mode BPTUA self test Both On Normal operation (non-loop back) Both Off Notes With both SW8 and SW9 On, all LEDS turn Off. If there is more than one BPTU, these LEDs will not flash. BPTU Cable Length Equalizer Switches The distance between the Strata CTX, BPTU and CSU or BPTU to other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) T1 may vary (0~655 ft.) as shown. (See “BPTU Cabling” on page 7-7.) The BPTU interface transmitter must be equalized and its impedance must be matched to the cable length connecting the BPTU to the CSU or other CPE, T1 (see Table 7-3). Table 7-3 Mode BPTU Equalizer Setting Switch Feet from CTX SW4 SW5 SW6 Short 0 to 133 feet Off Off Off Semi-short 133 to 266 feet On Off Off Medium 266 to 399 feet Off On Off Semi-long 399 to 533 feet On On Off Long 533 to 655 feet X X On X = Doesn’t matter. 7-6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces BPTU Installation BPTU Loop Back Jumper Plugs BPTU Front Panel Indicators The BPTU PCB provides seven LED indicators to show the status of BPTU: Busy or Idle condition, Alarm status, and Synchronization status. ISDN Interfaces The BPTU PCB provides jumper plugs for loop back testing. Loop back tests are described in “Loop-back Test” on page 7-34. See Table 7-2 for switch settings for Loop Back tests. See Table 7-4 for the function of each status LED. Figure 7-3 on page 7-5 shows the LED locations. Table 7-4 BPTU LED Functions BPTU LEDs FSYNC Indication Frame Sync error indication. This LED is not mounted. Multi-frame Sync error indication (same with FSYNC) MFSYNC On = No frame synchronization status Off = Frame synchronization status AIS indication BALM/AIS On = BPTU is receiving AIS Off = BPTU is not receiving AIS RAI indication YALM/RAI On = BPTU is receiving RAI Off = BPTU is not receiving RAI Signaling Loss indication LOS On = BPTU is not receiving T1 signals Off = BPTU is receiving T1 signals Busy state indication BSY On = One or more B-channels are in use. Also when BPTU does not receive far end 1.544 mbs carrier signal, BSY is on steady. Off = All B-channels are idle Primary synchronization indication PSYNC On = BPTU is assigned as the secondary timing PCB. Off = BPTU is not assigned as the CLK timing PCB Flashing = BPTU is extracting T1 CLK SSYNC Secondary synchronization indication Not mounted Ferrite Core Install the Ferrite core provided with the BPTU PCB, as shown in Figure 7-7 on page 7-13. This core is needed to comply with FCC requirements. BPTU Cabling The BPTU and RPTU PCBs use the same cabling methods. Refer to “BPTU and RPTU Cabling” on page 7-11. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-7 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit RPTU Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: 24 channels Interfaces with: ISDN PRI Older Version(s): none The RPTU provides 24 channels for ISDN PRI service. Network connection using RPTU PRI interface requires installation of a customer-provided CSU in most locations of the U.S. Refer to “CSU Requirements” on page 7-3 for CSU installation. Switches, jumpers, and interface connectors are described in Table 7-5. The RPTU’s LEDs show operation status (see Figures 7-4 and 7-5 on page 7-9 and Table 7-6). Testing procedures (local and remote loop back) are in “Loop-back Test” on page 7-34. RPTU Installation Before installing a RPTU PCB into a Strata CTX system, refer to Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration: • “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37 • “ISDN PRI Digital Line PCBs” on page 2-40 (mentioned above in slot assignments) ³ To install an RPTU PCB 1. Set the jumper wire plugs JP1 and JP2 (LB) to the Off position. 2. Turn the Strata CTX system power Off. 3. Insert the RPTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 4. After installing the RPTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Note For cabling information and requirements, refer to “BPTU and RPTU Cabling” on page 7-11. Table 7-5 RPTU Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Switches/Jumpers/Connector Description SW1 (Line length adjustment switch) Matches the RPTU impedance to the impedance of the line (length between the CSU and the RPTU). Refer to Table 7-7 on page 7-10. SW2 (Reset switch)1 Resets or initializes the RPTU firmware. Press this switch to correct an out-of-service condition, or just prior to connecting to the Network PRI. JP1 & JP2 (Loop-back jumpers) Makes loop-back tests of the cabling between the ISDN Network switch, CSU, and RPTU. J1 8-pin Modular Connector (RJ45) Connects the RPTU to the CSU/network PRI ISDN line. J2 6-pin Modular Connector (RJ11) Connects the RPTU to a terminal or PC to monitor D-channel data. 1. If this switch on the Primary Clock source RPTU is pressed, the clock source will automatically revert to the Secondary Clock source. 7-8 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation Note The RPTU2 is required for QSIG networking. ISDN Interfaces RESET SW2 J2 RS-232C CD1 SW1 Backplane Connector RPTU2 LEDs RPTU (front) CD2 FSYC AIS RAB LOS RST BSU TS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF MCC J1 ISDN (PRI) JP1 JP2 RPTU2 V .1 5819 JP1 & JP2 Figure 7-4 RPTU2 PCB Reset Switch (resets the software) Not Used RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor (RJ-12) FSYC AIS RAB LEDs LOS RST BSY TS RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector (to CSU) 2747 Figure 7-5 Strata CTX I&M RPTU LEDs and Connectors 06/04 7-9 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Installation Table 7-6 RPTU LED Functions LED FSYC Functions Frame Synchronization On: Frame alignment is lost. Off: Frame alignment is working properly. AIS Alarm Indication Signal On: Receiving an alarm from the CO. Off: Circuit is working properly. RAB Remote Alarm On: Receiving a remote alarm from the CO. Off: Circuit is working properly. LOS Loss of Signal On: IC signal cannot be detected. Off: Circuit is working properly. RST Reset On: Off: CPU is resetting the software. Circuit is working properly. BSY Busy On: Off: One or more B-channels are busy. All B-channels are idle. TS Timing Signal On: Circuit is secondary timing source. Off: Circuit is not used for system timing. Flashing:Circuit is primary timing source. The RPTU SW1 settings for the proper cable length are shown in Table 7-7. For cabling instructions, see BPTU and RPTU Cabling. Table 7-7 7-10 RPTU SW1 Cable Length Settings SW1 Short (0 - 150 ft.) Medium (150 - 450 ft.) Long (450 - 655 ft.) 1 On Off Off 2 Off On Off 3 Off Off On 4 Off On Off 5 Off Off On 6 Off On Off 7 Off Off On 8 Not Used Not Used Not Used Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces BPTU and RPTU Cabling BPTU and RPTU Cabling Important! ISDN Interfaces To meet Part 15 of FCC Rules, ISDN PRI equipment must be connected using CAT5, Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling between the CSU and the BPTU or RPTU. CAT5 STP protects against cross talk, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI), and/or Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). STP protects ISDN signal data while being transmitted through the cable and keeps the cable itself from emitting EMI and RFI. To avoid ground loops, connect only the BPTU or RPTU end of the shielded cable to ground. The Strata CTX grounds the CAT5 cable shield between the Strata CTX and CSU at the BPTU or RPTU RJ45 jack. You do not have to connect the CSU ground drain. The CSU ground should not be connected to the cable shield. Shield continuity must be maintained from the BPTU or RPTU to the CSU, particularly if using extension connecting cables. Keep the cable as short as possible between the CSU and the PRI Demarcation jack, because there is no shield between the CSU and the Demarcation jack. Toshiba provides a cable kit (Part No. RPRI-CBL-KIT), that contains all that you need to connect the network ISDN jack to the network side of most CSUs and the equipment side of the CSU to the BPTU or RPTU PCB. Depending on the manufacturer, the CSU may use DB15 or modular jacks. If the CSU is equipped with the modular jacks, the DB15/modular adapters are not used. If this is the case, make sure the CSU modular jacks are not shielded jacks. A detailed pinout diagram for the RJ45 network jack (USOC RJ48C or RJ48X) and the modular cords/adaptors are shown in Figure 7-6 on page 7-12 and Figure 7-8 on page 7-13. Cable Length The distance between the BPTU/RPTU and CSU or the BPTU/RPTU and other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) may vary (0~655 ft.). The BPTU or RPTU must be equalized and its impedance must match the impedance of the connecting cable. ³ BPTU: Set the SW settings for the proper cable length (see Table 7-3 on page 7-6 and Figure 7-3 on page 7-5). ³ RPTU: Set the SW settings for the proper cable length (see Table 7-7 on page 7-10 and Figure 7-5 on page 7-9). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-11 ISDN Interfaces BPTU and RPTU Cabling Cable Installation Use the Toshiba RPRI cable kit to connect the BPTU or RPTU PCB to a CSU. Install the kit as shown in Figure 7-6. CSU ISDN PRI Network Jack DB15 (female) RJ45 BPTU or RPTU DB15 (male) D A E B C 6645 Item A 1 Description Fifteen feet of CAT5 unshielded cable B One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to network jack) C One DB15 modular adapter (CSU to RPTU) D1 Thirty feet of CAT5 shielded cable E One Ferrite core 1. Cable A and D are straight-pinned data cables, not crosspinned telephony cables. CSU Local Power Adapter 6646 Network Interface Jack RJ48-C or RJ48-X (8-pin Modular) 1-T1 2-R1 34-R 5-T 67-Nu 8-Nu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 11 9 1 Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular cord, straight-through pinning (15 ft. CAT5, unshielded) Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular cord to DB15 female adapter 3-T1 11-R1 39-R 1-T CSU DB15 Male C S U 3-T1 11-R1 39-R 1-T CSU DB15 Female Dealer-supplied CSU 3 11 9 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1-T1 2-R1 34-R 5-T 67-Nu 8-Nu BPTU or RPTU 8-pin Modular Jack Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core Toshiba-supplied 8-wire modular cord, straight-through pinning (30 ft. CAT5, shielded) Toshiba-supplied 8-pin modular to DB15 male adapter . Network Jack/BPTU or RPTU Modular Jack Pin 1 2 Ring – Receives from the network (NT – TE) 3 Not Used 4 Tip – Transmits to the network (TE – NT) 5 Ring – Transmits to the network (TE – NT) 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used Figure 7-6 7-12 Function Tip – Receives from the network (NT – TE) Detailed Pinouts for ISDN PRI Cabling Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces BPTU and RPTU Cabling Ferrite Core ISDN Interfaces Install the Ferrite core provided with the RPRI cable kit as shown in Figure 7-7. This core is needed to comply with FCC requirements. ISDN PRI Jack RPTU Side View Tie Wrap Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN CAT5 Shielded Cable One Turn 5963 Figure 7-7 Note: The Ferrite core must be as close as possible to the RPTU. Ferrite Core Installation Connecting two BPTUs or two RDTU3s Cross-Pinned, RJ45 Modular Cord Pin Strata CTX Important Note: Set SWs on each BPTU per Table 7-3 1 2 5 4 BPTU or RDTU3 Pin T T R T R T R R 5 4 2 1 PBX or Cable BPTU or RDTU3 Ferrite Core RJ45 Network Jack RJ45 Network Jack (655 ft. max. CAT5 wire) RJ45 Cable Cross Pinning Connector Head Bottom Side Up 4 3 5 2 1 Front 6 7 8 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T R T R R T R T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Front 6644 1 8 Pin 1 of one end to Pin 5 of other end - each direction Pin 2 of one end to Pin 4 of other end - each direction To make a cross-pinned modular cord on a existing straight through cord: On one end only, swap Pin 1 with Pin 5 and then Pin 2 with Pin 4. Figure 7-8 Strata CTX I&M Direct Connect Two BPTU or RPTU2 PCBs for QSIG Networking 06/04 7-13 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units RBSU/RBSS Interface Units Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI S/T when connected to the Public Network or a BRI S-type, TE-1, or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none RBSU/RBSS switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figures 7-11 and 7-12 on page 7-17 and described in Table 7-8. LEDs on the RBSU/RBSS show a continuous status of BRI operation. Refer to Table 7-8 on page 7-17 for a list of each LED’s status. Overview The RBSU and RBSS PCBs provide the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits. The RBSU is the main plug-in PCB that plugs into the Strata CTX cabinet slots. The RBSS is an optional PCB that plugs onto the RBSU. Each PCB provides two ISDN BRI circuits. Each BRI circuit provides 2 B-channels + 1D channel for voice/data/video applications. An REBU PCB is a piggy-back PCB that plugs onto the RBSU and provides basic functions for RBSU/RBSS circuits so it must always be installed on the RBSU. The RBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) BRI lines using an Network Terminator unit (NT1); or, on the station side, they can connect to ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or Terminal Adapters (TA) as shown in Figure 7-9. TE devices include any ISDN device (telephone, fax, computer) that connects directly to S/T ISDN BRI circuits. TA devices match the protocol of non-ISDN devices (telephone, fax, computer) to the protocol of S/T ISDN BRI circuits. The TBSU and RBSU circuits can be configured as: • BRI – TE circuits which connect to Telephone Network BRI lines using a NT1. • BRI – NT circuits which connect to ISDN TEs or TAs. These devices must be S-type station devices. Important! The Strata CTX BRI circuits allocate line numbers and station ports differently. Each BRI circuit consumes two line numbers and two station port when configured as line-side or station side. RBSU Connection Options The RBSU connection options (BRI line or ISDN TE-1/TA devices) are selected in customer database programming and option switches located on the RBSU. The RBSU circuits that connect to the ISDN network side requires a dealer-supplied NTI interface box to convert the two-wire, U-interface BRI line from the telephone network to the four-wire, T-interface of the RBSU circuit. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada). The network BRI line connection is a point-to-point connection, which means that the network BRI line can only be connected to one RBSU or TBSU circuit via the NT1 (T-reference point). RBSS circuits connect directly to S-type TE-1 or TA ISDN devices only. They do not support BRITE telephone network BRI line connections. 7-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units When multiple TE-1 and TA devices are installed on a single RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit, the devices must share, or contend for, that circuit’s two B-channels. That is to say, a maximum of two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between both devices connected to the same BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B-channels is first come, first serve. BRI-NT (4-wire) 3336 . .. 1 2 TE-1 or TA TE-1 or TA BRI-TE (4-wire) RX ISDN Interfaces The RBSU, and/or RBSS circuits that connect to the Strata CTX station side, (BRI-NT, Sreference point) allows direct connection of multiple ISDN (TE-1 or TA) devices. The S point of the RBSU/RBSS supports the Toshiba Strata CTX passive bus, also known as point-to-multipoint connection. The terminal-side (S-point) of the RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit can have parallel connections of up to two TE-1s or TAs maximum. BRI (2-wire) RX DK TBSU or RBSU/RBSS TX NT1 PSTN RX/TX TX S T U S, T, and U are ISDN reference points. TE = S-type Terminal Equipment TA = S-type Terminal Adaptor Figure 7-9 RBSU/RBSS Interfaces between the S/T Reference Points Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information The RBSU/RBSS can be installed in any slot except in a slot that has been left vacant to provide capacity for RDTU, BPTU or RPTU2 or RPTU as shown in Table 2-54 on page 2-39 and Table 2-55 on page 2-40. Each RBSU and/or RBSS contains two circuits and each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two CO lines (one port/line per B-channel). Therefore, if the RBSU PCB is installed, the station port and CO line count will increment by four ports and four lines at the RBSU cabinet slot. If the RBSU/RBSS is installed, the station port and CO line count will increment by eight station ports and eight lines at the RBSU/RBSS cabinet slot. RBSU and RBSS PCBs can be installed in any combination so long as the number of RBSU PCBs is the same or greater than the number of RBSS PCBs. See “ISDN BRI Digital Station PCBs” on page 2-41 and “Worksheet 3: CO Line” on page 2-25 for the maximum BRI circuits allowed. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-15 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units PS-1 Backup Power Option The RBSU provides an optional backup power supply, R40S, that will supply backup power to TE devices in the event of an AC power loss. This power backup option only applies to RBSU or RBSS circuits that are configured in the NT mode. See Figure 7-13 to install the R40S. Also the Strata CTX system must have battery backup to allow the R40S power backup function to operate. The R40S power supply is an ISDN, PS-1 type power unit which means it supplies power to TE devices on the RBSU/RBSS transmit and receive wire pairs as shown in Figure 7-10. This power arrangement is also known as phantom power. Each of the four circuits on RBSU/RBSS can be connected to share the R40S using option switches on the PCBs (see Table 7-8). Before using the R40S as a backup power source, make sure the TE devices do not require more power than the R40S can supply and the TE is compatible with the ISDN PS-1 power arrangement. RJ45 Pin Nos. on RBSU or RBSS NT circuit TE TE Device Power sink RBSU Pin 3 RX + Pin 3 Pin 6 RX - Pin 6 Pin 4 TX + Pin 4 Pin 5 TX - Pin 5 RJ45 Pin Nos. on TE device R40S PS-1 Power Source 4774 R40S Power Limits: Voltage: 33.3VDC to 38.85VDC maximum Current: 100mA maximum (25mA maximum per each RBSU/RBSS circuit) Figure 7-10 Power Limits of the Backup Power Supply RBSU/RBSS Installation Step 1: Run Related Programs ³ Run all ISDN programs related to RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits prior to installation of the PCBs. This enables the circuits to operate immediately upon insertion. ISDN BRI programs are explained in the Strata CTX Programming Manual under the ISDN tab. Step 2: Set Option Switches/Jumpers ³ Set all option switches and jumpers on the RBSU and RBSS PCBs before plugging the RBSS onto the RBSU or inserting the RBSU into the system. RBSU/RBSS switch/jumper information and locations are shown in Figures 7-11, 7-12 and Table 7-8. 7-16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units RBSS SW7 BSY TS LOS FS P4 BSY TS LOS FS SW2 SW5 SW9 SW8 SW6 SW6 J2 J7 P7 P2 J4 RBSS1A-CM V.1 RBSU1 BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS ISDN Interfaces RBSU1A J2 SW3 TB3 J6 SW2 P6 SW5 SW4 J3 J5 SW1 P3 SW3 SW4 J1 P5 SW1 F 2788 J3 P9 P8 PFT contacts TB1 TB2 R B S U 1 A - C M V. 1 2789 Figure 7-12 RBSS PCB Figure 7-11 RBSU PCB Table 7-8 PCB RBSU RBSS RBSU/RBSS Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Circuit Option Switch Type All SW 1 1 SW 2 Circuit Type TE NT Pushbutton N/A N/A Jumper X X Description Resets firmware on all circuits of RBSU/RBSS. Drops calls off the RBSU/RBSS. Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. 1 SW 3 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 1 SW 4, 5 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 6 Jumper X X Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. 2 SW 7 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 8, 9 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 1 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 3, 4 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 2 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 5, 6 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 1. Requires programming to set as TE or NT. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-17 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units Step 3: Install the REBS Note The REBS provides a basic part of the RBSU/RBSS circuit functionality; therefore, it must always be installed on the RBSU (see Figure 7-13). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS. 2. Plug the REBS onto the RBSU. Step 4: Install the RBSS Note If one or two additional BRI-NT circuits are required, install the RBSS (see Figure 7-13). 1. Align the four connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS. 2. Plug the RBSS onto the RBSU. Step 5: Install the R40S Note If ISDN PS-1 backup power for TE devices is required, install the R40S (optional PCB) (see Figure 7-13). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the R40S. 2. Plug the R40S onto the RBSU. RBSU Optional RBSS1A REBS (always install) UP UP UP UP Two-circuit Subassembly 2761 UP Optional PS-1 Power Supply UP R40S1A-CM V.1 R40S Figure 7-13 Location of RBSU Plug-on PCBs 7-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units Step 6: Install RBSU/RBSS PCBs into Cabinet Table 7-9 ISDN Interfaces After setting the switches and jumpers and installing the plug-on PCBs as described in the preceding paragraphs, the RBSU/RBSS PCBs can be installed in the appropriate cabinet slots. Refer to RBSU/RBSS Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information on Figure 7-14. After the RBSU/ RBSS is installed in the Strata CTX cabinet, the status LEDs and connecting jacks are positioned as shown in Figure 7-14. RBSU/RBSS LED Indications LED Indication BSY Circuit Busy On – Any B-channel is in use. Off – B-channels are idle. TS Timing Source Blinking On/Off – The RBSU is extracting the clock from the BRI line and is the Primary synchronization circuit for ISDN and T1. On – The RBSU is the secondary (backup) synchronization circuit for the ISDN and T1. Off – The RBSU is not used for ISDN or T1 synchronization. LOS Loss of Signal On – Clock timing cannot be detected from the line. Off – Normal condition. FS Frame Alignment Alarm On – Frame alignment cannot be established. Off – Frame alignment is established. Modular Jack Pin Configurations BRI (S/T) Circuit Jack (TE or NT Mode) The RBSU and RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit jack is a shielded RJ45 (8-pin modular) with Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) pin numbers as shown in Figure 7-14. The Tx and Rx pin numbers change when the BRI circuit is configured with RBSU and RBSU/RBSS option switches for TE or NT (Tables 7-8 and 7-14). If the R40S is installed on the RBSU, the PS-1 voltage is carried on the Tx/ Rx wires with polarity. (See Table 7-10). The position of the RBSU BRI and RBSU/RBSS circuit jacks are shown in Figures 7-14 and 7-15 respectively. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-19 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units RBSU CKT2 BSY TS LOS FS CKT1 BSY TS LOS FS RBSS BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS CKT4 CKT3 4th Circuit 2nd Circuit RJ-45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector 3rd Circuit TB3 (FG) 1st Circuit Reset Switch (resets RBSU Firmware) RS-232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor TB1 and TB2 (PFT) 2795 Figure 7-14 RBSU/RBSS Location of LEDs and Connector Locations Table 7-10 RJ45 Pins in the 8-pin Modular Jack Pin No. TE Side NT Side PS1/R40S Polarity 1 N/C N/C N/C 2 N/C N/C N/C 3 Tx Rx + 4 Rx Tx + 5 Rx Tx - 6 Tx Rx - 7 N/C N/C N/C 8 N/C N/C N/C 87654321 3048 Front View of RJ-45 Jack Cavity Note: The RJ-45 pins are numbered as shown above. Monitor Jack The RBSU/RBSS monitor jack is an RJ12 (6-pin modular). This jack provides an RS-232 output that enables you to monitor the RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit D-channel, layer-2 and layer-3 data. The monitor jack pin configuration and communication parameters are the same as BPTU or RPTU and RBUU (see Figures 7-32, 7-35 and 7-36). For RBSU monitor jacks, see Figure 7-34 and Figure 7-14 on page 7-20.) 7-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines TB1 and TB2 are the connecting points that interface a pair of dry contacts that can be used for power failure switching purposes (see Figure 7-14 for the locations). When the Strata CTX system has power (from AC source or batteries) there is a short circuit across TB1 and TB2. In the event of no power to the Strata CTX, there is an open circuit across TB1 and TB2. The specifications for TB1 and TB2 contacts are: ISDN Interfaces Power Failure Terminal Screws • Maximum switchable voltage: 30VDC • Maximum switchable current: 80mA • Short circuit resistance: Approximately 15 ohms Grounding Terminal Screws TB3 is a screw terminal that can be used to connect a ground wire to the RBSU PCB (see Figure 7-14 for the location). This ground enables the RBSU/RBSS to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements. The RBSU complies with EMC requirements without grounding TB3 on the RBSU, so it is not necessary to connect a ground wire to TB3. BRI Wire Type Recommendations CAT3 or CAT5 wire is recommended for ISDN BRI customer-premises wiring. While the ISDN BRI signal works for some distance over almost any wire that is suitable for analog voice service, better wire enables longer runs. CAT5 provides better 100-ohm impedance matching (at little extra cost) between the RBSU/RBSS circuit and the station Terminal Equipment (TE-1). Normally the CAT3 or CAT5 wiring does not have to be shielded when used for ISDN BRI premises wiring. However, the RJ45 jacks on the RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits are shielded and provide a ground shield in the event that shielded modular plugs and cable are used. Note If using shielded cable and plugs, cable runs should only be grounded at the Strata CTX RBSU/RBSS, RJ45 jacks. To prevent ground loops, do not ground both ends of shielded cable runs. RBSU/RBSS BRI Cable Jacks and Connectors In the U.S., the standard connector for ISDN equipment is the eight-pin RJ jack. Patch cables have eight-pole plugs at both ends. The same pinout applies to both ends of an ISDN cable, which is the practice of the data world. This means that a flat untwisted cable with an RJ modular plug at both ends will have the locking tab of the plug on one end, “up;” and on the other end, “down,” as shown in Figure 7-15. Note This is the opposite of telephony “silver satin” cables which have locking tabs on both ends facing the same direction. Telephony cables cause the pins at either end to crossover while data cables provide a straight through pin-to-pin connection between modular jacks. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-21 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units A cord of up to 10 meters connects the ISDN BRI RJ45 wall jack to the desktop TE-1 or TA RJ45 jack. Bellcore recommends that all TE-1 and TA devices be attached with the same standard cord to ensure compatibility. Locking Tab 3039 Four-pair Wire RJ-45 Eight-pole Plug Figure 7-15 Modular ISDN Data Cable The standard pinouts for ISDN jacks is the TIA-568A or TIA-568B jack as listed in Table 7-11. The variants A and B to the TIA specification are electrically the same, only the wire colors are different. However, you should only use one type TIA jack in a customer installation because mixing the two may cause certain wire pairs to be swapped which would result in line faults. Table 7-11 Pin TIA-568B (RJ45) Jack – ISDN Standard Interface Modular Connector Pinout (RBSUNT mode Color Name T2 Function 1 Green Power 3 (not used on RBSU/RBSS) 2 Green/White R2 Power 3 (not used on RBSU/RBSS) 3 Orange/White R3 RX+ 4 Blue/White R1 TX+ 5 Blue T1 TX- 6 Orange T3 RX- 7 Brown T4 - Power 2 (not used on RBSU/RBSS) 8 Brown/White R4 + Power 2 (not used on RBSU/RBSS) Notes • Pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking tab down. • TIA-568A swaps pair two with pair three, changing only the color of the wires on the pins. Electrical performance is the same. 7-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units Strata CTX BRI Circuit EMC Ferrite Core Requirement RBSU or RBUU ISDN Interfaces To ensure that the Strata CTX BRI circuit meets the EMC requirements, it is necessary to run all wire connecting ISDN BRI circuits (TE, LT mode and NT mode) through a Ferrite core. Use Toshiba part number, FER-CORE-ISDN, to order the ferrite core. It is not shipped automatically with the BRI circuit cards, it must be grounded separately. Figure 7-16 shows how to dress the wiring through the Ferrite core. RBSS or RBUS ISDN PRI Jack CAT 3, 4, or 5 Cable 4697 Tie Wrap Ferrite Core FER-CORE-ISDN One Turn Note: Locate the Ferrite core as close as possible to the BRI modular jack. Figure 7-16 BRI Circuit Ferrite Core Installation Connecting RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) The RBSU only, not the RBSS, circuits can be connected to the network side of a BRI line. The RBSU circuits must be configured in the TE-mode (refer to option switches in Table 7-8 on page 7-17). In the U.S., the BRI line from the ISDN service provider is a two-wire U-type BRI line. This line connects to the RBSU TE circuit via a customer-provided NT1 as shown in Figure 7-17. The NT1 is necessary to convert the network BRI, two-wire, U interface to the RBSU BRI, four-wire, T interface. The NT1 must be UL listed (U.S.) or CSA certified (Canada). The NT1 is powered by local AC power via an AC adapter supplied with the NT1. The connection between the NT1 and the RBSU TE circuit is a point-to-point connection, so the NT1 can connect to only one RBSU BRI TE circuit. A 100-ohm Terminating Resistor (TR) is required on each end of the point-to-point connection. The TR must be switched into the RBSU TE circuit (refer to option switches in Table 7-11 on page 7-22 and Table 7-8 on page 7-17) and into the NT1 device. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-23 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units Most NT1 devices have TR option switches; if the NT1 does not have TRs, two 100-ohm TRs must be wired into the NT1 modular jack - one 100-ohm resistor across each pair (Tx and Rx). Refer to the NT1 manufacturers documentation for the maximum loop length between the NT1 and the network jack. The maximum loop length between the NT1 and the RBSU circuit is 1650 feet. RJ45 Pinout (NT1 - S/T jack) RJ45 Pinout (RBSU - BRI jack) BRI (four-wire) RBSU TE-Circuit Switch in 100-ohm TR using RBSU option switch. BRI (two-wire) 3 TX RX 3 6 TX RX 6 NT-1 Switch in 100-ohm TR. 4 RX/TX 4 RX TX 4 5 RX TX 5 5 RX/TX 5433 U T Note: T and U are ISDN standard reference points. Network BRI-line RJ11 Jack Local AC Power Demarcation Point Figure 7-17 RBSU to NT1 Point-to-point Connection Connecting RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) S-type TAs and TE-1s can be connected to the station side of TBSU, RBSU, and RBSS circuits. TA and TE devices must be powered by local AC power using AC adapter supplied with the TA or TE device. The RBSU/RBSS circuits must be configured in the NT mode when connected to TA and TE devices (refer to option switches in Table 7-8 on page 7-17 and Table 7-11 on page 7-22). The TA enables you to connect non-ISDN voice and data devices to ISDN BRI circuits. The TA matches the protocol of existing interfaces (R-reference point) to the ISDN S/T protocol (see Figure 7-1 on page 7-2). TA devices include asynchronous circuit-switched adapters that convert RS-232 sync data (like data from a PC COM port) to B-channel 64 kbps sync. TAs also enable you to connect standard telephones and non-ISDN fax machines to receive and make calls over ISDN circuits. TEs include any user device (telephone, fax, PC video conference board) that is designed to plug directly into the ISDN (S/T) interface without the use of a TA. There are two types of ISDN TA and TE-1 devices: the U-type and the S/T type. Most manufacturers of ISDN station devices make both types. On the RBSU/RBSS station side, BRI-NT circuits only function with S/T type TA and TE-1 devices. You cannot connect U-type TE-1 or TA devices to the RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuits. Also, connecting an NT1 to the RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit to convert from S/T to U interface is not supported to enable the use of U-type TE-1 or TA device on the station side of the RBSU/ RBSS. U-type TE-1 and TA device interface is provided in the Strata CTX by the RBUU/RBUS BRI circuit only. The RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT circuit supports the National ISDN 2 (NI2) S-Interface “passive bus.” It is called a passive bus, because it contains no logical functions. The RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT interface supports a point-to-multipoint connection on two twisted pairs. Up to two TE-1 and/or TA devices can be connected to one RBSU/RBSS, BRI-NT circuit. Using standardized wiring and 7-24 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units RBSU NT Circuit Insert 100-ohm TR using RBSU and RBSS option switches. RJ45 Pinout RJ45 Pinout 3 3 6 6 4 4 5 5 ISDN Interfaces modular connectors, as explained in previous paragraphs, maintains control of polarity. The pinout from the RBSU/RBSS circuit to a S-type TE-1 or TA device is shown in Figure 7-18 and Table 7-10. S-type, TE-1 or TA with 100-ohm TR or just a 100-ohm terminating resistor across each pair on a RJ45 jack. 5434 BRI (four-wire) 3 6 4 5 To local AC Power S-type, TE-1s or TAs without 100-ohm terminating resistors (maximum eight TE-1s or TAs per RBSU/RBSS circuit). To local AC Power Figure 7-18 RBSU/RBSS NT Circuit Pinout on Passive Bus As a parallel bus, the RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT passive bus will accept TE-1 and TA devices scattered on the bus; however, the locations of the TE and TA devices on the S bus is limited by timing considerations. Specifically, the round trip propagation delay of a signal from the RBSU/RBSS circuit to one device must be within four microseconds of the delay from the other device on the bus. That is to say, layer-1 frames from the RBSU/RBSS must be received within a two microsecond window. This says nothing about how large the delay can be. In fact, it can be much larger, as long as the differences remain small. To control electrical characteristics, a 100-ohm terminating resistor (TR) is required at both ends of the passive bus. One resistor should be across the Tx pair and one across the Rx pair at either end of the passive bus. Branch-type passive bus configurations, shown in Figures 7-19~7-22, may only require a TR on the RBSU/RBSS NT circuit side and not on the TE or TA device side of the bus. The RBSU and RBSS circuits provide an option switch that allows the 100-ohm TR to be switched into the circuit on the Strata CTX side of the bus (see Table 7-8 on page 7-17 and Table 7-11 on page 7-22). Most TE-1 and TA devices also provide option switches to connect 100-ohm terminating resistors as shown in Figure 7-17. If the TE or TA devices do not provide TRs, they may be permanently wired in place on a RJ45 jack at the far end of the bus. Only one terminating resistor on each pair should be on the far (TE) end of the passive bus - do not switch in TRs on more than one TE-1 or TA device on the passive bus. Important! Strata CTX I&M 06/04 The correct placement of TRs on the Passive Bus is critical to ISDN BRI circuit operation (see the following RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus configurations section). 7-25 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Interface Units RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus Configurations The placement of S-type TE and TA devices on the BRI S-passive bus is critical for good RBSU/ RBSS BRI circuit performance. Figures 7-19~7-22 show four passive bus architectures that are known to work. In all installations, follow the guidelines of any of these passive-bus models using the wire, cables, and jacks described in the previous paragraphs. TA and PC Com Port x ' ma 360 RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TR RJ45 360 5435 ' ma x ISDN Telephone Figure 7-19 Simplified Short-branched Passive Bus TE-1 PC Card * RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TR 850' * No more than 130' difference between any 2 branches. RJ45 5436 * RJ45 with TRs ISDN Telephone Figure 7-20 Branched Passive Bus 82' ISDN Telephone RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TE-1 PC Card RJ45 TR TR 1650' 5437 Figure 7-21 Extended Passive Bus 7-26 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit ISDN Telephone RBSU/RBSS NT-Mode TE-1 PC Card RJ45 ISDN Interfaces 490' TR TR 640' 5438 Figure 7-22 Short Passive Bus RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI U when connected to the Public Network or a BRI U-type TE-1 or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none The Strata CTX RBUU/RBUS interface unit (Figures 7-23 and 7-24) supports ISDN BRI U-type TE1 or TA devices. LEDs on the RBUU/RBUS show a continuous status of operation. Refer to Table 7-12 for a list of each LED’s status. Figure 7-25 shows the location of the LEDs and connectors. RBUU Installation Before you can begin installation of the RBUU, you may have to install the subassemblies. ³ To install the subassemblies (RBUS) ³ Place the RBUS card (component side facing down) onto the RBUU connectors. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of the connectors. The RBUS card should have been installed at the factory. ³ To install an RBUU PCB 1. Insert the RBUU (component side facing right) into the appropriate expansion unit slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 2. After installing the RBUU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-27 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit RBUU1A Secondary Protectors P12 P13 Circuit 1 J101 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 1 J201 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 2 Circuit 2 BSY T S LOS F S LED Indicators Circuit 1 BSY T S LOS F S Circuit 2 DIN Connector J3 RS-232C Monitor Output P10 P10 RBUU1A 2799 Figure 7-23 RBUU PCB RBUS1A P13 P12 Circuit 3 BSY T S LOS F S Circuit 4 LED Indicators BSY T S LOS F S J301 Circuit 3 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 3 J401 RBSU1A Circuit 4 P11 P10 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 4 Secondary Protectors F 2800 Figure 7-24 RBUS Subassembly 7-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit RBUS1A RJ45 Modular for Circuit 1 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 2 BSY T S PSI F S LED Indicators for Circuit 1 BSY T S PSI F S BSY T S PSI F S RJ45 Modular for Circuit 3 BSY T S PSI F S LED Indicators for Circuit 2 LED Indicators for Circuit 3 ISDN Interfaces RBUU1A LED Indicators for Circuit 4 RJ45 Modular for Circuit 4 RS-232C Monitor Output 4776 Figure 7-25 Location of LEDs and Connectors (RBUU/RBUS) Table 7-12 LED BSY TS PSI1 FS RBUU/RBUS LED Indications Definition LED Off LED On LED Blinking Busy Port is in idle. Port is busy. Port is in test mode. Time Synchronization Not CLK extraction port. Secondary CLK extraction port. Extracting CLK port. Port Status Indicator Port is in LT mode. Port is in NT mode. AIB is received by this port. Frame Synchronization Frame alignment is established. Frame Alignment error. Port is trying to establish frame alignment. 1. PSI is labeled LOS on Beta PCBs Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-29 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit RBUU/RBUS Wiring Guidelines • Strata CTX BRI-U interface circuits can be configured to connect to an ISDN line circuit (NT mode, line-side) or to ISDN U-type terminal equipment TE1 or terminal adapters TA (LT mode, station side). • Install the Toshiba-supplied Ferrite core on each ISDN circuit card per Figure 7-16 on page 7-23. The Ferrite core is not supplied with the ISDN circuit cards must be ordered separately. • For more information regarding the Strata CTX BRI-U interface, see “PRI and BRI Overview” at the beginning of this chapter. Line-side cabling • The ISDN BRI U-interface circuits are two-wire on the PSTN line-side. • The wiring from the demarc to the Strata CTX BRI circuit should be made with CAT3~CAT5 twisted pair wire. • The pinout of the Strata CTX BRI-U circuit jack is shown below. NT and LT Mode 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 NC NC NC Tip Ring NC NC NC BRI Pair NC = No Connection 4732 RJ45 Jack Figure 7-26 Strata CTX BRI-U RJ45 Circuit Jack Printout • The maximum distance between the PSTN BRI interface circuit and the Strata CTX ISDN BRI U line-side circuit (NT) is 18 kft. The Telco with the use of a repeater or fiber optic cable may extend this distance. • The U interface pair should go directly from the demarc jack to the Strata CTX interface PCB with no bridge taps to different locations or should not have loading coils installed. • BRI line-side cables should not be shielded. • Each line-side BRI circuit requires a ferrite core as shown in Figure 7-16 on page 7-23. • In the USA, most BRI-U Demarc jacks are RJ11, but they may be RJ45 eight-wire jacks. In Canada the BRI-U Demarc jack is usually RJ45. • Polarity of the U interface pair is not critical. 7-30 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit 6 5 4 3 2 1 ISDN Interfaces • The ISDN BRI-U wire pair is usually on the center pair of the Demarc jack, pins 3 and 4 on RJ11 and pins 4 and 5 on RJ45. Demarc coding is shown in Tables 7-13, 7-14 and 7-15. Typical demarc jack wiring is shown in Figures 7-27 and 7-28: BLACK RED GREEN YELLOW 4726 RJ11 Demarc Jack Figure 7-27 Six-pin Modular Plug (RJ11) Table 7-13 Quad Cable with RJ11 Demarc Coding Conductor Pair 1 Pair 2 Color Pin Use Red 3 Line 1 Green 4 Line 1 Yellow 5 Line 2/Power Black 2 Line 2/Power WHITE-GREEN GREEN WHITE-ORANGE BLUE WHITE-BLUE ORANGE WHITE-BROWN BROWN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4727 RJ45 Demarc Jack Figure 7-28 Eight-pin Modular Plug (RJ45) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-31 ISDN Interfaces RBUU/RBUS Interface Unit Table 7-14 Four-Pair with RJ45 Demarc Jack Coding Conductor Pair 1 Pair 2 T56A Pin T56B Pin Use 5 5 Line 1 Blue 4 4 Line 1 White-Orange 3 1 Line 2 Orange 6 2 Line 2 White-Green 1 3 PS3 plus power Pair3 Pair 4 Table 7-15 Color White-Blue Green 2 6 PS3 minus power White-Brown 7 7 PS2 plus power Brown 8 8 PS2 minus power Three-Pair with RJ11 Demarc Coding Conductor Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair3 Color Pin Use White-Blue 4 Line 1 Blue 3 Line 1 White-Orange 2 Line 2 Orange 5 Line 2 White-Green 1 Line 3 Green 6 Line 3 Notes ● ● PS2 and PS3 are not used with the Strata CTX BRI-U interface PCBs. Check with the BRI circuit supplier to determine the pin out of the demarc jacks because some jacks may be wired with two or three BRI-U line circuits each jack. Station-Side Cabling • The ISDN BRI U-interface circuits are two-wire on the Strata CTX station-side. • The maximum distance between the Strata CTX ISDN BRI-U, station-side circuit (LT) and the U-type Terminal Equipment or Terminal Adapter is 18kft. • The house wiring from the Strata CTX BRI circuit to the wall jack should be made with CAT3~ CAT5 twisted pair wire. • Each station-side BRI circuit requires a ferrite core as shown in Figure 7-16 on page 7-23. • The flat satin telephone cord that connects from the wall jacks to ISDN terminal equipment should be no longer than 33 feet. • BRI station-side cables should not be shielded. • Polarity of the U interface pair is not critical. • The U interface pair should go directly from the Strata CTX interface PCB to the U-type TE1 or TA with no bridge taps or loading coils to different locations. • The pin-out of the RBUU/RBUS BRI jack is shown in Figure 7-25: Call Monitor Jack Cabling The pin-out for the BRI-U interface call monitor jack is provided in Figure 7-32 of this chapter. 7-32 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting The Strata CTX provides a built-in loop back test to check the U-type, lSDN terminal connected to the RBUU or RBUS circuit. The Strata CTX performs the 2B+D loop test using the eoc ISDN, layer 1 function. This tests the U-terminal and the wire connection from the Strata CTX to the BRI device; it does not check the Strata CTX PCM highway or RBUU/RBUS functionality. ISDN Interfaces BRI-U, LT Interface Terminal Loop Back Test 1. Connect the U-terminal device to the Strata CTX BRI, RJ45 circuit jack (see Figure 7-29). 2. Connect the Strata CTX TTY port (PIOU, RSIU, TSIU, etc.) to the COM port of a PC running a communications application such as ProComm or Hyper Terminal, etc. 3. Setup the com-port parameters for 7-bits, even parity, 1-stop bit and the appropriate speed. Strata System Test data from Strata sent to Terminal. If 80% of sent data is returned test passes. RBUU (LT Mode) U-Terminal device (loop back) 1-pair BRI Circuit Line Cord RSIU or PIOU 3-pair Telephone Cord TTY Port TTY Port PC with Hyper Terminal Software 5866 Figure 7-29 Strata CTX TTY Port BRI Connection to PC 4. Press the Enter key on the PC keyboard. The Strata CTX responds with CODE. Note Make all entries from the PC keyboard in Capital letters. 5. At the CODE prompt, type the Strata CTX, four-digit code from the PC keyboard. The Strata CTX responds with MODE 6. At the MODE prompt, type TEST and press Enter from the PC keyboard. The Strata CTX responds with T. 7. At the T prompt, type LBUU ss m and press Enter from the PC keyboard. Where ss = BRI PCB slot number and m=BRI circuit number (1-4). Notes ● ● The U-terminal must be idle, and remain idle, during the loop back test. The Strata CTX sends 4 octets of data to the U-terminal during the loop back test: 0X00, 0XFF, 0XB2, and 0X4D. These octets are sent to the B1, B2, and D channels 50 times. If the Strata CTX receives 80% of the sent data back, it assumes the test to pass. (i.e., the U-terminal and wiring is good.) If the Strata CTX responds with: ## BUU LOOP BACK TEST ## SLOT=ss CIRCUIT=m B1:OK B2:OK D:OK Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-33 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Testing and Troubleshooting The above response indicates the test was passed and that the B1, B2 and D channels and the wire connections for the tested device are operating properly. If the Strata CTX responds with: TEST FAIL The test failure could be caused by: • U-terminal is in busy state when the test was started. • U-terminal is in TQ/ACB/ACD mode when the test was started • The Strata CTX BRI PCB slot or circuit number was not entered correctly. • U-terminal can not support loop back testing U-terminal, BRI PCB, or wiring is defective. If the Strata CTX responds with: TEST EXIT Test exit could be caused by: • The Strata CTX processor did not get test results from the BRI circuit within five seconds from start of the test. • U-terminal or BRI circuit was unplugged during the test. • User made the exit request during testing Loop-back Test The BPTU and RPTU have loop-back test jumpers that enable physical connections (cables/jacks/ plugs) between the PCB, CSU, and the network PRI line to be tested (see Figure 7-30). The tests check that the CSU receives and transmits the PRI signal properly in both directions. The test signals, generated by the Network PRI provider, pass through the CSU and loop around the BPTU or RPTU. The BPTU or RPTU sends the received test signal back through the CSU to the Network and the Network detector checks for a valid signal. BPTU or RPTU CSU CO ISDN PRI Test Signal ISDN PRI JP1 (RJ45) (LB-ON) ISDN PRI 1.5MHz line Interface LSI Network Jack RJ48C or RJ48X JP2 (LB-ON) Demarcation Point 6689 Figure 7-30 7-34 Loop-back Test Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization ISDN Interfaces Loop-back Test 1. Remove the PRI modular cord from the RPTU RJ45 jack and remove the RPTU from its card slot. 2. Place the JP1 and JP2 jumpers to the LB-On position. Install the RPTU with the Strata CTX power Off and the PRI modular disconnected from the RPTU RJ45 jack. 3. Turn the Strata CTX power On and connect the PRI modular cord to RPTU RJ45. 4. After the PRI line and RPTU are synchronized, have the CO generate the loop-back test sign (all “1s” or “0s”). CAUTION! Do not have the CO do a QRS loop-back test, because the test signal may cause the Strata CTX to drop all calls and/or stop operating. 5. If the loop-back test fails, perform tests to isolate the problem with an ISDN test set, such as the Sunbird, ISDN, or Trend DUET. In this case, the network PRI line is disconnected and the test set is connected to the CSU network input jack. For testing details, refer to the ISDN test set operating procedures. Timing and Synchronization The Digital Network is connected by timing clocks that synchronize the network and have various degrees of precision (stratum levels). There are four stratum levels – 1 is the highest and 4 is the lowest. They are associated with the following sources: • Stratum – 1: Public Telephone Network clock • Stratum – 2: #4 ESS Toll Switches • Stratum – 3: #5 ESS Central Offices • Stratum – 4: Digital PBXs In the Strata CTX, one PRI, BRI, or T1 PCB can be programmed to extract the Stratum clock signal. It uses the signal as the Strata CTX system Primary clock reference. The clock provider should be a reliable source, such as a Telco or common carrier (AT&T). All other PRI, BRI, or T1 lines connected to the Strata CTX will be synchronized to the same clock provider. If the PRI, BRI, or T1 are not synchronized to the same clock provider, the Strata CTX could experience “slip” problems. The timing or synchronization program determines how the Strata CTX digital voice or data transmission path is synchronized with the far-end digital path. For proper PRI, BRI, and T1 operation, the equipment at each end of the line must be synchronized. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-35 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronization The Strata CTX processor time switch is synchronized as the slave to the PRI, BRI, or T1 line (Line 1 in Figure 7-31). If a malfunction occurs and Primary reference synchronization is lost, the Strata CTX automatically switches modes and synchronizes to the Secondary reference, provided that there is another PRI, BRI, or T1 installed in the Strata CTX system. Strata CTX Processor PCB Synchronization Circuit Clock Standard Telephone Primary Reference PCB* PDKU RSTU Synchronization Circuit SS1 CTX Digital Transmission Voice Path Digital Telephone Time Switch Digital Voice Path Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI, BRI, or T1 Secondary Reference PCB* Synchronization Circuit SS2 Digital Voice Path Line 2 SS3 Synchronization Circuit 5439 AT&T or other provider PRI, BRI, or T1 Stratum-1 Clock Source Clock synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Other RDTU, RPTU, or RBSU Digital Voice Path Figure 7-31 Line 1 Line 3 Other PRI, BRI, or T1 provider Other Clock Source Clock not synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Primary and Secondary References Figure 7-31 shows the Primary reference PCB. The clock signal from Line 1 passes through the PCB Software Switch (SS1) and the synchronization circuit of the RCTU PCB. The RCTU clock passes the clock source through the time switch and synchronizes the Strata CTX digital transmission voice or data path. The Secondary reference is activated if the Primary reference fails. The Strata CTX automatically switches over to the Secondary reference PCB by opening its synchronization circuit (SS1) and closing the synchronization circuit (SS2). When this occurs, the digital voice or data path of the Strata CTX is synchronized to the Line 2 clock source. If the path is not synchronized to the Stratum – 1 clock source, calls connected through that path experience “slipping” or “jitter” in the digital voice or data path (channels). Figure 14-7 shows an unsynchronized signal from Line 3. The unsynchronized signal produces a clicking or popping sound that is heard by the people connected through this path or causes data errors on data transmissions. 7-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring PRI/BRI Call Monitoring The hardware connections and communication parameters for the ISDN monitor port are shown in Figure 7-32. Once this connection is setup and established, call monitoring data continues to be sent (on the fly) as PRI and BRI calls are originated or received. ISDN Interfaces The Strata CTX ISDN circuit cards provide an RS-232 monitor function that enables you to monitor the ISDN D-channel call progress layer two and three messages (setup, connect, and release). This data can be monitored live, saved to a file, and/or printed using a PC with communication software. Two sample printouts from the RPTU monitor are provided. Figure 7-32 shows typical ISDN PRI start-up and synchronization sequences that occur at connection and power on. Figure 7-33 shows typical ISDN PRI outgoing call setup and release sequences. BRI monitor data is similar to PRI monitor data. The communication parameters for all call-monitor jacks are 9600 bps, 7, 1, even. Strata PRI or BRI PCB Monitor Jack PC with communication software - such as ProComm™ Call-monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ12) pin numbering 4696 Note The RPTU, RBSU and RBUU ISDN interface PCBs each have a call-monitor jack. The pin numbering and communication parameters are the same for each call-monitor jack. The call-monitor jack on each PCB provides data only for the circuits of the PCB on which it appears. Figure 7-32 Call-monitor Jack for the RPTU, RBSU, and RBUU Call Monitor Output for ISDN See the following figures for examples of Call Monitor Output printouts. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 7-37 ISDN Interfaces Call Monitor Output for ISDN /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/00;00 016 Act. (F1) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ 00;00 016 Act. (F1) 00;09 634 LOS (F3) 00;12 109 Act. (F1) /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1G [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ 00;00 017 Act. (F1) 00;06 619 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;06 630 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;07 236 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;07 245 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;11 754 LOS (F3) 00;14 228 Act. (F1) 00;14 415 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;14 427 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;14 753 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 00;14 765 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;24 275 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0002 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 33 30 30 31 00;24 292 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;28 315 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0002 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 33 30 30 31 00;28 333 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 00;43 812 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8002 MT = CONN(07) [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA P F P F [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]SABME [FRAME]UA [FRAME]INFO P F P F [N(S)]000 [N(R)]000 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO [N(R)]001 [N(S)]001 [N(R)]000 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO ..........p..583 3001 ..........p..583 3001 [N(R)]002 [N(S)]000 [N(R)]002 2759 Figure 7-33 7-38 PRI Start-up and Synchronization Sequences Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces Call Monitor Output for ISDN 01;19 466 01;19 878 01;19 888 01;19 924 01;19 932 01;25 464 01;25 476 01;25 785 01;25 799 01;46 127 01;46 138 01;46 449 01;46 464 01;46 784 01;46 02;16 02;16 02;22 795 659 670 661 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]004 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]002 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]002 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]004 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]002 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 03 A9 83 97 70 08 C1 35 38 33 ..........p..583 33 30 30 31 3001 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]002 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CALL PROC(02) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]003 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]003 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = ALERT(01) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]004 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CONN(07) 18 03 A9 83 97 ..... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = CONN ACK(0F) Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 .... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 80 90 .... Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]007 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = REL COMP(5A) 08 02 80 90 .... Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]007 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]007 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]007 [N(R)]007 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0004 ISDN Interfaces 01;14 446 01;14 449 01;14 456 01;14 460 01;19 450 2760 Figure 7-34 Strata CTX I&M PRI Outgoing Call Connect and Release 06/04 7-39 ISDN Interfaces Call Monitor Output for ISDN BRI Call Monitor The call-monitor jack located on the RBSU enables you to use a PC or ASCII terminal to monitor the BRI, D-channel call setup, layer-2 and layer-3 data (refer to Figure 7-32 on page 7-37 for information about connecting the monitor jack). Figures 7-35 and 7-36 provide examples of BRI call setup message information that is available from the RBSU call-monitor jack. 06;57’958 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]021 06;57’970 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]019 07;07’166 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]021 [N(R)]019 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 0F MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 6C 05 C1 33 30 37 32 96 7B 01 81 .....l..3072.{.. 07;07’217 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]022 07;07’735 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]019 [N(R)]022 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 8F MT = SETUP ACK(0D) 18 01 89 1E 02 80 88 34 01 00 32 01 C2 95 2A 24 .......4..2...*$ 80 9E 14 44 49 41 4C 20 53 54 41 54 49 4F 4E 20 ...DIAL STATION 4E 4F 2E 20 4F 52 20 9E 0B 41 43 43 45 53 53 20 NO. OR ..ACCESS 43 4F 44 45 CODE 07;07’750 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]020 07;07’866 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]022 [N(R)]020 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 0F MT = INFO(7B) 2C 01 31 ,.1 07;07’909 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]023 07;08’171 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]023 [N(R)]020 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 0F MT = INFO(7B) 2C 01 30 ,.0 07;08’192 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]024 07;08’415 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]024 [N(R)]020 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 0F MT = INFO(7B) 2C 01 30 ,.0 07;08’450 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]025 07;08’658 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]025 [N(R)]020 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 0F MT = INFO(7B) 2C 01 35 ,.5 07;08’682 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]026 07;08’941 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]020 [N(R)]026 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 8F MT = CALL PROC(02) 18 01 89 32 01 82 ...2.. 07;08’958 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]021 07;09’086 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]021 [N(R)]026 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 8F MT = ALERT(01) 18 01 89 1E 02 80 88 34 01 40 95 2A 0B 80 9E 08 .......4.@.*.... 43 41 4C 4C 49 4E 47 20 CALLING 07;09’106 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]022 07;09’314 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]112 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]000 07;09’318 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]112 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]000 07;09’344 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]112 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]000 Figure 7-35 7-40 Outgoing Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor Strata CTX I&M 06/04 ISDN Interfaces Call Monitor Output for ISDN 07;53’514 07;53’548 07;55’488 07;55’518 07;55’781 07;55’792 07;57’585 07;57’619 07;57’942 07;57’959 07;57’979 07;58’029 07;59’447 08;05’903 08;05’907 08;05’928 08;05’932 08;05’969 08;05’973 08;05’989 Figure 7-36 Strata CTX I&M Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]113 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]113 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]113 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]113 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]127 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 04 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A2 18 01 89 31 30 30 35 70 05 80 33 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 84 MT = ALERT(01) 18 01 89 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 84 MT = CONN(07) Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 04 MT = CONN ACK(0F) 18 01 89 34 01 4F 95 2A Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 84 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 04 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 80 90 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]102 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 84 MT = REL COMP(5A) Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]102 Await. Sig.(F4) Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]112 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]112 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]112 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]112 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]112 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]112 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]112 [FRAME]RR F [FRAME]RR F [FRAME]RR F [FRAME]RR F [FRAME]RR P [FRAME]RR F [FRAME]U-INFO [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]027 [N(R)]025 ISDN Interfaces 07;40’993 07;40’997 07;41’000 07;41’005 07;41’168 07;41’180 07;53’481 1E 02 80 83 6C 06 00 83 ............l... 30 37 32 34 01 40 1005p..30724.@ [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]027 [N(R)]025 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO ... [N(R)]028 [N(S)]028 [N(R)]025 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO [N(R)]029 [N(S)]025 [N(R)]029 03 80 9E 00 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO ...4.O.*.... [N(R)]026 [N(S)]029 [N(R)]026 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO .... [N(R)]030 [N(S)]026 [N(R)]030 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]INFO .... [N(R)]027 [N(S)]030 [N(R)]027 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]031 [FRAME]RR [FRAME]RR [FRAME]RR [FRAME]RR [FRAME]RR [FRAME]RR [FRAME]RR P P F F P P F [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 [N(R)]000 Incoming Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor 06/04 7-41 ISDN Interfaces Call Monitor Output for ISDN 7-42 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8 T1 This chapter covers the RDTU T1/DS-1 interface for the Strata CTX systems. It contains information about the RDTU3 and RDTU1/2. The RDTU3 is a replacement for the RDTU1 and 2. numbered term, such as “RDTU3” is used. T1 Note “RDTU” refers to all RDTU (1, 2 or 3) PCBs. When a distinction is required, the exact Program Channels The RDTU PCB provides T1/DS-1 interface for up to 24 channels on the Strata CTX. Each channel can be individually set for loop start, ground start, Tie, or DID line operation (voice only, not data lines). Each RDTU can be set in system programming to activate (1~8), (1~16), or (1~24) channels (lines). Fractional increments of 4, 12, and 20 are also possible but the RDTU still assigns 8, 16, or 24 channels respectively in system software. Example: If only 12 channels of fractional T1 are used, assign RDTU as a 16 channel RDTU. The system assigns 16 CO lines to the RDTU even though only 12 CO lines are used. Select Slot Assignments RDTU PCBs can be installed in a Strata CTX to provide up to 264 lines (max). RDTU PCBs can be installed in any CTX cabinet, except remote CTX cabinets driven with RRCU cards. RDTU PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the Strata CTX cabinets. (See “Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-26 and “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37.) If an RDTU is installed in a cabinet (in some cases one slot to the right of the RDTU may not be used in that cabinet) the number of unusable slots in a cabinet depends on which slot the RDTU occupies and how many lines (16 or 24) the RDTU is programmed to provide. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-1 T1 RDTU3 - T1 Interface Unit RDTU3 - T1 Interface Unit System: CTX100 & 670 Circuits per PCB: 8, 16, 24 channels per PCB Interfaces with: Ground / Loop start CO lines DID or TIE lines (Wink or Immediate) Older Version(s): RDTU1, RDTU2 The RDTU3A has an RS-232C port to trace data that is transmitted between the CTX system CPU and the RDTU3A. This PCB also enables T1 line alarm data to be monitored. T1 Framing: D4 (SF) or ESF Line cording: AMI with ZCS or B8ZS Digital PAD: Transmit side +3dB to -15dB. Receive side +3dB to -15dB (software controlled) Table 8-1 RDTU3 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description SW4~SW6 Equalizer Setting Switch Jumper switches Sets the line length between RDTU and CSUs or other T1 (see also Table 8-6). SW8, SW9 Jumper switches Used for Self Test and CSU Test or for nonloop back normal operation (see also Table 8-5). SW10 3-terminal jumper plug See Table 8-3. IC19 External ROM upgrade Provides external ROM option (see Table 8-3). ON EQ OFF SW6 OFF ROM SW10 CPU 8-2 R28 Figure 8-1 Backplane Connector LB 6351 LB RDTU3A ON SW9 OFF LB MONITOR ON SW8 OFF ON SW9 OFF ROM SW10 CPU LB J1 RS-232C Connector for Call Data Monitor (RJ-12) OFF OFF OFF SW6 ON SW8 OFF J2 RJ-45 8-pin Modular Network/CSU Interface Jack ON EQ OFF SW5 SW4 PSYNC SSYNC SW5 EQ SW4 R28 EQ BSY EQ EQ ON R28 LOS R28 YALM/RAI ON ON BALM/AIS IC19 LOS BSY PSYNC SSYNC R28 MFSYNC FSYNC MFSYNC BALM/AIS YALM/RAI R28 FSYNC ON Status/Alarm LEDs RDTU3 PCB Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU3 - T1 Interface Unit Table 8-2 RDTU3 LED Functions RDTU3 LEDs Indication Frame Sync error indication FSYNC On = No frame synchronization status Off = Frame synchronization status Multi-frame Sync error indication (same with FSYNC) MFSYNC On = No frame synchronization status Off = Frame synchronization status Blue Alarm indication On = RDTU3A is receiving Blue Alarm Off = RDTU3A is not receiving Blue Alarm T1 BALM/AIS Yellow Alarm indication YALM/RAI On = RDTU3A is receiving Yellow Alarm Off = RDTU3A is not receiving Yellow Alarm Signaling Loss indication LOS On = RDTU3A is not receiving T1 signals Off = RDTU3A is receiving T1 signals Busy state indication On = One or more RDTU channels are in use BSY Or RDTU is not receiving T1 signals Off = No RDTU channel is in use Flashing = RDTU is in Remote Loop Back mode Primary synchronization indication PSYNC On = RDTU is assigned as the primary timing PCB Off = RDTU is not assigned as the primary timing PCB Flashing = RDTU is extracting T1 CLK Secondary synchronization indication SSYNC On = RDTU is assigned as the secondary timing PCB Off = RDTU is not assigned as the secondary timing PCB Flashing = RDTU is extracting T1 CLK For more detailed information on these alarms, refer to Table 8-6 on page 8-8. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-3 T1 RDTU Installation RDTU Installation ³ To install an RDTU PCB 1. Set the jumper wire plugs to the correct position for the cable length. • RDTU3 – see “RDTU3 - T1 Interface Unit” on page 8-2 • RDTU1 and 2– see “RDTU3 Cabling” on page 8-5. 2. Turn the Strata CTX system power Off. 3. Refer to Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration to determine the appropriate slot for the RDTU: • “Worksheet 5: Strata CTX100 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-26 • “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37 • “RDTU3 - T1 Interface Unit” on page 8-2 or “RDTU3 Cabling” on page 8-5 4. Insert the RDTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 5. For the RDTU3 only, set the SW10 jumper plug for internal or external ROM operation, per Table 8-3. Table 8-3 SW10 Internal or External ROM Setting Mode Internal ROM (Default mode) External ROM (Upgrade) SW10 Note When there is an internal ROM on the CPU (TMP93PW46), RDTU3A operates with the SW10. CPU Use this mode when IC19 is not on PCB (see Figure 8-1). If the SW10 is in CPU position, RDTU3A is operating with the internal ROM regardless of IC19 existence. RDTU3A is operating with the external ROM (IC19). ROM Use this mode only when IC19 is on PCB (see Figure 8-1). If the SW10 is in ROM position without IC19, the RDTU3A will not work. Note For cabling information and requirements, refer to the specific instructions for the type of card. Power Factor RDTU3A uses 5V only. 5V power factor = 2.0, -24PF = 0.0 8-4 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU Installation Ferrite Core Install the Ferrite core provided with the RDTU3 PCB, as shown in Figure 8-2. This core is needed to comply with FCC requirements. RDTU3 Side View RJ-45 Network/ CSU Interface Jack T1 CAT5 Shielded Cable 6306 Note: The Ferrite core must be as close as possible to the PCB. One Turn Figure 8-2 RDTU3 Ferrite Core Installation RDTU3 Cabling Each RDTU3 T1 PCB requires the following connecting equipment and cables to provide service (see the following sections and Figure 8-3). RDTU3 to Network If the RDTU3 must interface to a public telephone network or common carrier T1 circuit, the RDTU3 must be connected to a CSU. Use the RDTU3-CBL-KIT to connect the RDTU to the CSU. The function of the CSU is to provide the required interface between the RDTU PCB and the Public Telephone or Carrier Network. The interface created by the CSU normally provides protection and capabilities for loop back testing both the Network equipment and the RDTU PCB. Connecting the CSU to the Network Interface Unit (NIU) is specified by the CSU manufacturer— see CSU installation documentation. The RDTU3-CBL-KIT supplies the cables and connectors required to connect the CSU to the NIU. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-5 T1 RDTU Installation RDTU3 to PBX T1 (Separated More Than 655 ft.) If the RDTU3 must interface to a customer’s premises T1 circuit (PBX, key/hybrid, or another Strata CTX) to provide Tie line service, the RDTU3 must be connected to a CSU (with Toshiba cable kit RDTU3-CBL-KIT) if the other customer premise T1 equipment is more than 655 ft. from the RDTU. The T1 span on the other end must also connect to a CSU. CSU (NIU) Network Jack RDTU3 DB15 (female) RJ45 DB15 (male) D A E or RDTU3 B C 6618 Item Description A1 15 feet of CAT5 unshielded cable B 1 DB15 modular adapter (CSU to network jack) C 1 DB15 modular adapter (CSU to RPTU) D1 30 feet of CAT5 shielded cable E 1 Ferrite core (supplied with RDTU3 PCB) 1. Items A and D come with the RDTU3-CBL-KIT. Items A and D are straight-pinned data cables, not crosspinned telephony cables. Figure 8-3 RDTU3 Connection to Digital Network or OCC Table 8-4 Detailed Pinouts for RDTU3 Network Jack Network Jack/RDTU3 Modular Jack Pin Function 1 Tip – Receives from the network 2 Ring – Receives from the network 3 Not Used 4 Ring – Transmits to the network 5 Tip – Transmits to the network 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used RDTU to PBX T1 - Direct Back-to-back Connection (up to 655 ft.) If the RDTU is within 655 ft. of the far-end PBX T1 circuit, a CSU is not required. However, connecting a RDTU T1 span to another PBX or Key/Hybrid T1, in a Tie line configuration at a distance less than 655 ft. (without a CSU) will require a customer provided special cable. The transmit and receive pair of this span cable must be crossed pairs and the wires must be 24 AWG, twisted pair, otherwise 22 AWG, ABAM type cable must be used. (See Figure 8-4.) 8-6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU Installation Connecting two RDTU3 PCBs Cross-Pinned, RJ45 Modular Cord Pin Strata CTX 1 2 5 4 RDTU3 Pin T T R T R T R R 5 4 2 1 PBX or CTX RDTU3 or other T1 interface T1 Ferrite Core RJ45 Jack RJ45 Jack (655 ft. max. CAT5 wire) RJ45 Cross Pinning Connector Head Bottom Side Up 4 3 5 2 1 Front 6 7 8 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T R T R R T R T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Front 6565 1 8 Pin 1 of one end to Pin 5 of other end - each direction Pin 2 of one end to Pin 4 of other end - each direction To make a Cross-Pinned Modular Cord on a existing straight through cord: On one end only, swap Pin 1 with Pin 5 and then Pin 2 with Pin 4. Figure 8-4 Strata CTX I&M Required Cables/Connectors for RDTU Connection at Distances of Less than 655 (200 Meters) 06/04 8-7 T1 RDTU Installation RDTU3 Self Test and CSU Test Switch 1. Remove the RJ45 cable to perform the Self Test. 2. Set the SW8 and SW9 switches to On (see Table 8-5). 3. After self check passes, put the switches back into position for normal operation and insert the RDTU PCB back into the appropriate slot. Table 8-5 SW8, SW9 RDTU3A Self and CSU Test Mode SW8 and SW9 Both On RDTU3A self test and CSU test mode All LEDS turn Off except PSYNCH or SYNCH Normal operation (non-loop back) Both Off RDTU3 Equalizer Switches The distance between the Strata CTX, RDTU and CSU or RDTU to other Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) T1 may vary (0~655 ft.) as shown. (See “RDTU3 Cabling” on page 8-5.) The RDTU interface transmitter must be equalized and its impedance must be matched to the cable length connecting the RDTU to the CSU or other CPE, T1. ³ Set the appropriate SW1 Equalizer Switch setting and set SW1 to the setting that matches the RDTU cable length (see Table 8-6). Table 8-6 Mode Equalizer Setting Switch SW4 SW5 SW6 Short 0 to 133 feet Feet from CTX Off Off Off Semi-short 133 to 266 feet On Off Off Medium 266 to 399 feet Off On Off Semi-long 399 to 533 feet On On Off Long 533 to 655 feet X X On X = Doesn’t matter. RDTU3 Loop Back Jumper Plugs The RDTU PCB provides jumper plugs for loop back testing. Loop back tests are described in “Loop Back Testing” on page 8-19. See Table 8-5 for switch settings for Loop Back tests. RDTU3 Front Panel Indicators The RDTU3 PCB provides seven LED indicators to show the status of RDTU: Busy or Idle condition, Alarm status, and Synchronization status. See Table 8-2 for the function of each status LED. Figure 8-1 shows the LED locations. Busy LED (BSY)—Turns on when one or more RDTU channels (lines) are in use. Also, when the RDTU does not receive the far end 1.544 mbs carrier signal, the RDTU will cause the BSY to be on steady. 8-8 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU Installation Call Data Monitor Jack RDTU3A has an RS-232C port for maintenance monitoring and troubleshooting purposes. This should be used when requested by Toshiba Technical Support Engineers. Communication parameters are 9600bps, 8, and 1. RDTU3 Call-monitor jack PC with communication software - such as ProComm™ PC DB9 or DB25 Com port T1 Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F Call-monitor jack (RJ11) pin numbering RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Output Input Output NC Output Signal Ground 6444 Figure 8-5 Call Monitor Jack for the RDTU3 Loop Back You can put the RDTU3A in remote loop back mode with this port. The command “L” and “Q” are used for remote loop back command. L = Start remote loop back mode Q = Quit remote loop back mode Remote loop back commands are shown below. l Echo back L RDTU outputs L and BSY LED flashes q Echo back Q RDTU outputs Q and BSY LED is operating normal The RDTU3A loop back test can made with the same process described in “Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test” on page 8-20. Refer to Figure 8-12 on page 8-21. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-9 T1 RDTU3A Call Data Information RDTU3A Call Data Information RDTU3A has an RS-232C port to trace data that the RDTU3A sends and receives from the CTX system processor. The T1 line alarm data can also be monitored with the RDTU3. Commands You can type the commands in the following table to check the status indicators also described in the table below. Table 8-7 RDTU3 Status Commands Command Function Format Indication RDTU3A © TOSHIBA 2002 VER.1A U When you power On or when you enter “U,” the unit name and software version appears. UNIT MODE:FFMxx SCHxx TSxx RPDxxxx TPDxxxx ZCSxx ERR:CRCyyy SLPyyy FSYyyyy BPVyyyyy u [RTN] ALARM:YA on/off BA on/off FSL on/off CRC = CRC Error in ESF mode SLP = Slip error FSY = Frame Sync error BPV = Bipolar violation error CH.vv : DTxx DRyy DDTon/off CH MODE: Ax Explanation: CH.vv:vv = channel numbers 0~23 DTxx:xx = DHin data code for RDTU3A to RCTU (see Table 8-9) C v [RTN] v = 0 to 23 CH Channel mode check command DTyy:yy = DHout datacode RCTU to RDTU3A (see Table 8-10) DDTon/off: Note: H = 1 DDT1 = RDTU cannot receive requests from the central processor at this time (see following Notes). or 0 DDT0 = RDTU is available to receive requests from the central processor CH MODE: A8 = CO loop, A0 = CP grpimd. AA = Tie immediate, AB = Tie Wink, AC = DID Immediate, AD = DID WInk This information is the same as “2-2 Data-HWY code” and “2-5 Channel Trunk Type information.” Set RDTU3A into the Remote Loop Back mode Loop back Useful for checking remote equipment. L [RTN] L Q [RTN] Q When RDTU3A is in this mode, BSY LED will flush. Quit Loop back 8-10 Quit Loop back mode Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU3A Call Data Information Notes • There are some cases when the RDTU will not receive requests from the central processor unit (CPU), such as the time waiting for wink signal. When the RDTU attempts to move to a nonreceiving state, the RDTU sends commands to the CPU to stop sending requests. The CPU stops sending requests until the RDTU cancels the stop. “DDT1” indicates that the RDTU is in a non-receiving state. • Dial pulse digits are communicated using A/B bits, so the RDTU can detect and send out from the monitor port. DTMF digits cannot monitored because they pass through the speech path. Indicators Table 8-8 T1 When the conditions described in the “Timing” column of the table below occur, the information in the “Indication” column appears on-screen. RDTU3 Indications Indication Type Indication ALARM:YAON/OFF BAON/OFF FSLON/OFF Alarm information YA = Yellow Alarm BA = Blue Alarm FSL = Frame Sync Loss Timing Occurs when the T1 line alarm state changes. When all Alarms are OFF state, RDTU3A gets frame sync. UNIT MODE: FFMxx SCHxx TSxx RPDxxxx TPDxxxx ZCSxx FFM = Frame format mode 01 = D4 mode 10 = ESF mode SCH = Sync operation CHannel 01 = Primary CLK extraction channel 10 = Secondary CLK extraction channel TS = Voice channel number 01 = 8 PCM ch 10 = 16 PCM ch 11 = 24 PCM ch RPD = Receive digital PAD setting 0001/0010 = +3dB 0011 = 0dB 0100 = -3dB 0101 = -6dB 0110 = -9dB 0111 = -12dB If you change the card in programming, the above indication information displays. _______1000 = -15dB TPD = Transmit digital PAD 0001/0010 = +3dB 0011 = 0dB 0100 = -3dB 0101 = -6dB 0110 = -9dB 0111 = -12dB 1000 = -15dB ZCS = Zero Code Suppression mode 01 = PZC (Not used) 10 = B8ZS 11 = AMI with ZCS CH MODEx-y:Az Az Az Az Az Az x-y = channel number 0-5/6-11/12-17/18-23 Channel Trunk Type Information Az = Channel mode A8 = CO Loop A9 = CO Ground AA = TIE Immediate AB = TIE Wink If you change the trunk type in programming, the above data displays. AC = DID Immediate AD = DID Wink Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-11 T1 RDTU3A Call Data Information Table 8-8 RDTU3 Indications (continued) Indication Type TLCS-900 stack pointer and program counter information Indication Timing Watch Dog Timer reset will occur. SP = xxxxxxh PC = yyyyyyh CH.xx DTyy DRzz DDT1/0 xx = channel number, from 0 to 23 Data-HWY code yy = DHin data code (RDTU3A to RCTU) See Table 8-9. zz = DHout data code (RCTU to RDTU3A) See Table 8-10. Changing of yy or zz or DDT will occur. Each voice channel’s DHin and DHout data will be indicated. DDT1 means Don’t Disturb Time. DDT0 is normal time. Table 8-9 DT (DHin) Data Code Data (Hex) 8-12 Meaning 00 No error T1 unit operation is good. 01 Receive B-bit fall down (Ringing signal for CO Loop/Ground) 02 Receive B-bit rise up (Ringing signals for CO Loop/Ground) 09 Receive Off-Hook from line 0A Receive On-Hook from line 11 Receive DP Dial 1 12 Receive DP Dial 2 13 Receive DP Dial 3 14 Receive DP Dial 4 15 Receive DP Dial 5 16 Receive DP Dial 6 17 Receive DP Dial 7 18 Receive DP Dial 8 19 Receive DP Dial 9 1A Receive DP Dial 0 21 Receive A-bit rise up (Idle signal for CO Ground) 22 Receive A-bit fall down (Seizer signal for CO Ground) 23 Receive answer from line 40 No error 41 Frame-bit error 42 CRC error 43 Frame-bit error and CRC error 44 Slip error 45 Frame-bit error and Slip error 46 CRC error and Slip error 47 Frame-bit error and CRC error and Slip error Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU3A Call Data Information Table 8-9 DT (DHin) Data Code (continued) Data (Hex) Bipolar violation 49 Frame-bit error and Bipolar violation 4A CRC error and Bipolar violation 4B Frame-bit error and CRC error and Bipolar violation 4C Slip error and Bipolar violation 4D Frame error and Slip error and Bipolar violation 4E CRC error and Slip error and Bipolar violation 4F Frame error and Slip error and CRC error and Bipolar violation 7B Receive Dial error 7C Receive Wink error 80 Idle code 06/04 T1 Strata CTX I&M Meaning 48 8-13 T1 RDTU3A Call Data Information Table 8-10 DR (DHout) Data Code Data (Hex) 8-14 Meaning 01 Request out going call 02 Off-Hook 03 Ready to receive dial 04 On-Hook 08 Send Off-Hook 11 Send Dial Digit 1 12 Send Dial Digit 2 13 Send Dial Digit 3 14 Send Dial Digit 4 15 Send Dial Digit 5 16 Send Dial Digit 6 17 Send Dial Digit 7 18 Send Dial Digit 8 19 Send Dial Digit 9 1A Send Dial Digit 0 41 to 5F Flash time setting From 0.1S to 3.1S 61 to 7F Pause time setting From 0.1S to 3.1S A1 Status confirmation A8 Set this channel as CO Loop A9 Set this channel as CO Ground AA Set this channel as TIE Immediate AB Set this channel as TIE Wink AC Set this channel as DID Immediate AD Set this channel as DID Wink B0 Dial speed 650mS 10pps 40% B1 Dial speed 650mS 10pps 33% B2 Dial speed 500mS 20pps 40% B3 Dial speed 500mS 20pps 33% B4 Dial speed 850mS 10pps 40% B5 Dial speed 850mS 10pps 33% B6 Dial speed 850mS 20pps 40% B7 Dial speed 850mS 20pps 33% B8 Dial speed 850mS 10pps 40% B9 Dial speed 850mS 10pps 33% BA Dial speed 850mS 20pps 40% BB Dial speed 850mS 20pps 33% BC Dial speed 850mS 10pps 40% BD Dial speed 850mS 10pps 33% BE Dial speed 850mS 20pps 40% BF Dial speed 850mS 20pps 33% 80 Idle code Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU1 & 2 - T1 Interface Unit RDTU1 & 2 - T1 Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: 8, 16, or 24 channels Interfaces with: ground start CO lines loop start CO lines DID or Tie lines Older Version(s): none RDTU is configured for Tie or DID lines and an RRCS must be installed for DTMF operation. LEDs on the RDTU show a continuous status of RDTU operation. The Strata CTX can support up to eight RDTU2 or RPTU2 PCBs total. RDTU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 8-7 and described in Table 8-12. T1 The RDTU requires installation of a customer-provided Channel Service Unit (CSU). Refer to “CSU Installation” on page 8-19 for CSU installation. Testing procedures (local loop back and remote loop back) are in “Loop Back Testing” on page 8-19. SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option) The distance between the Strata CTX cabinets and the CSU (or other customer premise T1 circuit) determines the setting of the SW1 Equalizer Switch. The SW1 switch consists of a bank of smaller switches, S1~S7. ³ Set the SW1 switch per Table 8-11. Table 8-11 RDTU1 & 2 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers Mode Feet from Strata CTX S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 Short 0~150 On Off Off Off Off Off Off N/A Medium 151~450 Off On Off On Off On Off N/A Long 450~655 Off Off On Off On Off On N/A Note The maximum distance between the RDTU and the CSU or other T1 circuits can not be more than 655 feet (see “RDTU to PBX T1 (Separated More Than 655 ft.)” on page 8-6). RDTU1 & 2 Installation 1. Set jumper wire plugs P1 (LB), P2, P3, and P4 to the Off position. See “Loop Back Testing” on page 8-19 for loop back testing procedures. See “SW1 Equalizer Switch and Loop Back Jumpers (Internal Option)” on page 8-15 for the appropriate SW1 equalizer switch setting. 2. Insert the RDTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. (See “Worksheet 6: Strata CTX670 Cabinet Slots” on page 2-37 for RDTU slot assignment recommendations.) (See Figure 8-6.) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-15 T1 RDTU1 & 2 - T1 Interface Unit Strata CTX Processor PCB Synchronization Circuit Clock Digital Telephone Time Switch Primary Reference PCB* PDKU Standard Telephone RSTU CTX Digital Transmission Voice Path SS1 Line 1 Synchronization Circuit Digital Voice Path Secondary Reference PCB* SS2 Line 2 Synchronization Circuit AT&T or other provider PRI, BRI, or T1 Stratum-1 Clock Source Digital Voice Path Clock synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Other RDTU, RPTU, or RBSU SS3 Line 3 Synchronization Circuit Digital Voice Path Other PRI, BRI, or T1 provider Other Clock Source Clock not synchronized properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source 5439 Figure 8-6 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI, BRI, or T1 RDTU Primary/Secondary Reference Block Diagram OFF P3: Future Use ON OFF LED Status Indicators P4RLB CD3 CD7 CD6 CD5 CD4 P3LLB BSY FLAM MFALM YALM BALM P4: Remote Loop Back Test ON PSYNC SSYNC CD2 CD1 Equalizer Setting Switch P6 SW1 S1 OFF OFF OFF P1 P2 LB ON ON RDTU1A S8 6396 P1, P2: Self Test Network Figure 8-7 8-16 RDTU1A PCB (RDTU2 is similar) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 RDTU1 & 2 - T1 Interface Unit Alarms are used to indicate potentially serious telephone network problems. Example: when monitoring a T1 network, if a Blue or Yellow alarm is indicated, it can be concluded that there is a cable fault or some other serious transmission impairment. Table 8-12 RDTU1 and 2 LED Functions Alarm LED Function Turns On steady if the RDTU has not achieved synchronization or when the span cable is not connected. Multi-Frame Alarm (MFALM) LEDs turn On steady if the RDTU receives the 1.554 mbs T1 carrier from the far end, but has not achieved Frame synchronization or when the span cable is not connected. Also, if the RDTU is set for SF and the far end is sending ESF (or vice versa), the MFALM LED will be On steady. Red Alarm (FALM and MFALM) When FALM and MFALM are both On steady, it’s a Red alarm condition. This means the RDTU does not detect a proper carrier signal (1.544 mbs T1) on its receive pair and the RDTU is not synchronized. During a Red alarm condition, the RDTU turns the BSY LED On steady and attempts to send a Yellow alarm signal (RDTU YALM LED flashes) to the far end T1 circuit. Yellow Alarm (YALM) When the far end network or CPE T1 does not detect the RDTU transmitted 1.544 mbs T1 carrier signal on its receive pair the far end, T1 sends a Yellow alarm signal pattern to the RDTU. The RDTU should turn on the YALM LED (the YALM repeats the signal it receives from the far end—flashing or steady). If the RDTU does not receive the far end carrier signal, the RDTU sends the Yellow alarm signal to the far end and causes the BSY and YALM LEDs to flash. Blue Alarm (BALM) The Blue alarm, also known as the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), is detected by the RDTU. This signal is sent by the Far End Network equipment to RDTU when it loses the carrier from a Network T1 circuit (other than RDTU). This signal assures that the RDTU maintains synchronization when there is a problem between two Network Nodes. The RDTU BALM also lights if the far end sends a Blue alarm signal during loop back. The RDTU sends a Blue alarm signal when loop-back test is being performed. T1 Frame Alarm (FALM) See Figure 8-6 on page 8-16 – If one RDTU PCB is assigned as the Primary Timing T1 PCB in Program 105, the PSYNC LED of this RDTU PCB flashes when it is synchronized with the far end T1 span line clock provider. Primary Synchronization (PSYNC) If the Primary RDTU is not synchronized with the clock provider, the PSYNC LED will be On steady. The SSYNC LED of the Primary sync RDTU PCB should always be Off. The Primary sync RDTU PCB synchronizes the RTCU (time-switch) to the clock signal it receives from the T1 span circuit to which it is connected. The RTCU then synchronizes the Strata CTX PCM talk path (time-switch) to the far end PCM talk path. If an RDTU PCB is assigned as the Secondary time T1 PCB in Program 105, its SSYNC LED will be On steady (standby mode) when the Strata CTX is synchronized to the Primary T1 clock provider. Secondary Synchronization (SSYNC) In the event Primary synchronization is lost (4 out of 12 consecutive frame timing bits are in error), the Strata CTX switches from synchronizing to the Primary RDTU span line clock to the span line clock connected RDTU designated as the Secondary Timing Reference. When the Strata CTX is synchronized to the Secondary Reference RDTU, the PSYNC LED on the Primary Reference RDTU turns on steady and the SSYNC LED on the Secondary Reference RDTU will flash. Run Free (PSYNC/SSYNC) If the RDTU PCB is the clock provider to the Far-end T1 span circuit, both the PSYNC and SSYNC LEDs are always Off. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-17 T1 RDTU1 & 2 - T1 Interface Unit RDTU1 and 2 Cable Installation The RDTU PCB is shipped with a Toshiba cable for connecting the RDTU PCB to a CSU. The 30 ft. cable is specially made to conform with EIA specifications (see Figure 8-8). All other cables required to connect the T1 span line to the RDTU PCB are customer-supplied and must conform with EIA specification, see the Notes of Figure 8-8. Almost all CSU manufacturers supply cables that comply with T1 span specifications for connecting the CSU to customer premise equipment (like Strata CTX, RDTU) to the Network Interface equipment. RDTU To Network or Long Distance T1 Provider Customer Supplied Cable (See Notes) Network Interface Unit USOC-RJ48C or RJ48X NDTU Cable (30 ft. Maximum) (4) T (1) (1) Black T (26) (5) R (9) (9) Red R (1) (1) T1 (3) (3) White T1 (27) (2) R1 (11) (11) Green R1 Customersupplied CSU Transmit RDTU PCB (2) Receive 8-Pin Modular (RJ45 Type Jack) DB-15 Connector (Female) NDTU DB-15 Connector (Male) NDTU Amphenol Connector (Male) RDTU To Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) T1 Customer-supplied Cable (See Notes) CPE T1 (PBX or Key System) or Channel Bank Black T (26) Red R (1) White T1 (27) Green R1 (2) Transmit RDTU PCB Receive RDTU Amphenol 655 Feet Maximum 1670 Figure 8-8 RDTU Cable Connections Notes • Pins 2 and 4 of the DB-15 connector in most CSUs are frame ground. No connection is required. • NDTU cable is supplied with RDTU PCB (30 ft. maximum). • Customer-supplied span cables must be 22 AWG, ABAM cable or, if using standard 24 AWG twisted pair, the transmit pair must be separated from the receive pair by at least 5-cable pairs. Most CSU manufacturers supply cables to connect the CSU to the Network Interface Unit or other CPE equipment. 8-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 CSU Installation CSU Installation ³ Install the CSUs and wire them to the RDTU and NIU or customer premises T1 circuit, as required (see Figure 8-9). Note Before connecting the CSU to the Telco line, notify the T1 provider. You should also notify the T1 provider before disconnecting the CSU. CTX RDTU CSU NIU Receive Transmit Network Receive Transmit T1 Local Loop Back Figure 8-9 5801 Network Loop Back CSU Local and Network Loop Back Tests Loop Back Testing The RDTU provides three loop back test configurations. These loop back tests should be performed as required in conjunction with CSU loop back tests (see CSU loop back test documentation). RDTU Self Test This test should be performed upon initial installation of a RDTU PCB. Program the RDTU per the Strata CTX Programming Manual; then perform the RDTU loop back test, per the instructions in Figure 8-10, before connecting the far end (CSU, Network, or CPE) T1 span line. RDTU Self Check RDTU3 (DS2155) Remove NDTU Cable RDTU1/2 (MM8976B) P1 P2 CSU Network Interface Unit Network 6688 T1 Framer IC Chip Notes ● RDTU1 & 2, move P1 and P2 to On (see Figure 8-7); RDTU3 move SW8 & SW9 to On. ● Remove NDTU cable from RDTU amphenol connector. ● After about 12 seconds, all RDTU LEDs (except PRI/SEC SYNC) turn Off. ● Appropriate Primary or Secondary sync. LED flashes if RDTU is Primary or Secondary reference. ● ● If RDTU is not a Primary or Secondary reference, then the Primary and Secondary sync LEDs should turn Off. Do not use the RDTU3A as a clock extraction unit. Figure 8-10 RDTU Self Test Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-19 T1 Loop Back Testing Network/CSU T1 Span Test This test verifies that the far end (CSU, Network, or CPE) T1 equipment and span cabling is functioning properly. This test checks all T1 span cabling including the RDTU Amphenol cable and connector. Guidelines for this test are provided in Figure 8-11. Network/CSU Check Loop Back NDTU Cable P26, TT P1, TR P1 P2 On On CSU P27, RT Network Interface Unit Network P2, RR 1672 Notes ● ● ● ● ● P1 and P2 to On position (see Figure 8-7). Unplug RDTU from Strata CTX back plane. CSU or Network T1 equipment should receive its own transmitted signal. Indications and results depend on CSU and/or Network equipment. Do not use the RDTU3A as a clock extraction unit. Figure 8-11 Network/CSU T1 Span Test Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test This test checks all equipment that is checked with the test in the above paragraph, but this test also checks that the RDTU Mitel LSI chip is functioning. Examples for this test are shown in Figures 8-10~8-12. Note Loop back tests with CSU and Network equipment can also be performed when connecting the RDTU PCB directly to a customer premise (PBX, Key Hybrid, Channel bank) T1 circuit. The RDTU Self Test is an active test of the RDTU circuit. The Network/CSU Test checks all cables, the Network and CSU equipment (RDTU is not active). The Remote Loop Back (RLB) Test is an Active test of RDTU (LSI MM8976B or DS2155), CSU, Network equipment and all cables. 8-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 T1 Loop Back Testing Refer to Figure 8-3 and the CSU manufacturer’s Installation and Maintenance manual for information on CSU Local/Network Loopback Tests. RDTU RDTU Amphenol Pin Nos. RDTU TX Open MITEL Chip NDTU Cable P1/P26 Transmit P4 Network Interface Unit (NIU) CSU P2/P27 Receive Network MM8976B 2581 T1 LEDS ON RDTU PCB Top LED 0 Busy ON Steady 0 FALM ON OFF OFF OFF ON 0 FMALM OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 0 YALM OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 0 BALM OFF OFF OFF ON OFF T1 Bottom LED T2 T3 0 Primary SYNC ON or OFF, Steady 0 Secondary SYNC ON or OFF, Steady T4 T5 Continue to Cycle when P4 is in ON Position T6 T = About 1/2 Second 1673 Figure 8-12 Network/CSU/RDTU Span Test Notes ● ● Local loop back and network loop back test cannot be performed simultaneously. CSU local/network loop back is a function of the CSU, not all CSUs provide this function – see CSU I&M documentation for CSU loop back test procedures. Test RDTU Lines ³ After loop back testing is complete and synchronized with the far end T1 circuit, perform test calls on all RDTU lines. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 8-21 T1 Loop Back Testing 8-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP 9 This chapter explains how to install the Strata CTX Internet Protocol (IP) telephones (IPT1020-SD). It also covers installing the Internet Protocol Telephone (IPT) interface (BIPU-M2A or BIPU-M1A) units into Strata CTX systems with Release 2.0 or higher software, as well as the Strata Net QSIG over IP Interface Unit (BIPU-Q1A) that requires CTX Release 2.1 software. The BIPU-M2A provides Network Address Translation (NAT) compatibility; whereas, BIPU-M1A requires a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection for remote IP telephone connections. CTX WinAdmin 2.1 or higher is required to program CTX Release 2.0 software. This is available on FYI and on the Strata CTX WinAdmin Application Software and CTX/DK/Partner Products Documentation Library CD-ROM. Pre-installation Guidelines IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP IPTs support most CTX telephone features. As of this release, Speaker OCA is the only CTX telephone feature not supported by IPT1020-SD telephones. Handset OCA is supported. In general, it’s important to obtain as much information as possible about the client’s telephone network topology. Below are examples of the kind of information that you need to know up front. ❐ Determine what type of IPT to network connections would be best for the client: switch, LAN, or VPN. Refer to “Step 4: Connect IPTs to Network” on page 9-13 for more information. ❐ ❐ Find out who is the client’s IP carrier or provider. ❐ Are there other limitations for the IP carrier/provider regarding internet access. For example, some services require a user authorization number to access the internet. You will need this information. Inquire about Point-to-point Over Ethernet (PPOE) restrictions. ❐ ❐ ❐ How much bandwidth is available for IP connections? Strata CTX I&M Find out if that IP carrier or provider allows more than one IP address per off-site system. Some providers offer multiple IP addresses, others may offer only one. This limitation should be discussed with the client. The client’s IR department needs to extend their LAN to the networked location. Toshiba recommends that you perform a LAN Voice Readiness Assessment if installing IPTs on your LAN. Quality of Service (QoS) and calls are highly dependent on setting up correct quality parameters. Refer to “Step 1: Perform a LAN Voice Readiness Assessment” on page 9-3. 06/04 9-1 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Client Firewall Considerations When installing a CTX with IP, you need to obtain information about your client’s firewall. ❐ Will the client allow you access through their firewall? If not, you will have to configure around their firewall. In case of providing services like packet filtering by setting a firewall between the terminal used for the “IPT Anywhere” environment and the BIPU-MIA interface, you need to prepare an appropriate setting that allows IPT control signals and voice signals to penetrate the packet filter and other features of the firewall. ❐ If your clients are using Zonealarm® and Microsoft Windows XP®, you have to enable the following: • COM surrogate: access to trusted & Internet • Generic Host Process: access to trusted & Internet • Microsoft Distributed Transaction Coordinator (MS DTC) console program: access to trusted & Internet AND access as a server to trusted & Internet • Internet Information Services (IIS): access to trusted & Internet • Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI): access to trusted & Internet Dos and Don’ts for Setting Up the System CTX IP Telephones and Strata Net are not compatible with older CTX line cards. If IP Telephones access any of the line cards listed below, the user will experience unacceptable echo return loss and voice quality. For best speech quality we recommend using the appropriate CTX cards for CTX IP telephone connections. Make sure that you have Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) that are compatible with CTX R2.0 and higher software and the IP telephones. • Do not use – RCOU1A, RCOS1A, REMU1A (two-wire), RDDU1A, RGLU1A, RGLU2A • OK to use – RCOU3A, RCOS3A, REMU1A (four-wire), REMU2A (two-wire/four-wire), RGLU3A. and RDDU2A. • Must use VPN for remote IP telephones that connect over the Internet with BIPU-M1A. • With the BIPU-M2A, the IP telephone will now work with DSL and cable routers. When connecting remote IP telephones to the BIPU-M2A over the Internet, a VPN router is needed to circumvent Network Address Translation (NAT) and firewall issues by tunneling. Otherwise, the BIPU-2MA must be configured with a public IP address outside the network firewall. See “IPT Anywhere” on page 9-13. 9-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Step 1: Perform a LAN Voice Readiness Assessment Deploying many IP telephones on a data LAN can have some unexpected pitfalls if the network does not have the bandwidth and speed required to handle VoIP traffic. To prevent delay, jitter, and data loss for VoIP traffic and retain the performance of your other business-critical network applications a network Voice Readiness Assessment should be completed before installing VoIP. Important! Voice Readiness Assessments are the responsibility of the installing TSD dealer. Toshiba is not responsible for supporting problems which occur because the network on which the IP telephones are installed does not meet VoIP packet requirements. Methods of Estimating Bandwidth Requirements A “rule of thumb” way to translate voice packet use into worst-case LAN bandwidth requirements is shown below. (This is no substitute for a professional Voice Readiness Assessment). • If the system has 100 IP telephones, multiple 25 simultaneous conversations by 115K bit/sec. for an additional bandwidth requirement of 2.9M bit/sec. on the LAN. Note The “25 simultaneous conversations” assume ¼ of the IP telephone users are talking at the same time. This scenario is considered worst-case because the best quality CODEC (G.711) is used as apposed to the G.729a which 29Kbps less bandwidth per conversation. If installing IPTs on your LAN, Toshiba highly recommends downloading “A Handbook for Successful VoIP Deployment: Network Testing, QoS, and More,” located at the time of this printing at.http://www.netiq.com/products/vm/whitepapers.asp. Toshiba recommends reading this document and making sure that you have: IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP • When IP telephones use the G.711 CODEC with a packetization rate of 20 millisec. (best voice quality), the bandwidth utilization rounds up to 115K bit/sec. per conversation. • Tested Voice Over IP (VoIP) Call Quality • Prepared your Data Network for VoIP, considering your needs for bandwidth, equipment upgrades, network architecture, Quality of Service (QoS) and tuning, and classification of traffic considerations. CAUTION! If installing IP telephones remotely using cable or Digital Subscriber Lines (DSL) Internet Service Providers (ISP) providers, Toshiba recommends setting the telephone to use the G729a CODEC because upstream bandwidth restrictions are usually imposed by the provider. Even if the provider advertises an upstream rate is 128kbs, this bandwidth can still be less depending on traffic conditions. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-3 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines To assist you in estimating your particular needs, refer to the following diagram that shows typical CTX IP telephone applications. IP CTX Functional Diagram PC Attendant Console Remote Call Center IP Digital Telephone PSTN CTX VPN Server IP Digital Telephone FAX Single Line Telephone BIPU-MIA Digital Telephone Router *** *** IP Digital Telephone Internet or WAN IP Digital Telephone *** (VPN) .*** Cable Modem . . . IP Digital Telephone FWA xDSL Fiber Optics Cable Modem IP Digital Telephone Router LAN (10/100Base-T) Application Server (ACD/IVR/VM/ UM/FAX/Mail) IP Digital Telephone IP Digital Telephone LAN (10/100Base-T) Web (VPN) Server VPN Router IP Digital Telephone PC SOHO/IPT Anywhere Application Server Back/Front Office (ACD/IVR/VM/ Application Server UM/FAX/Mail) (ERP/SCM/CRM/SFA) Figure 9-1 9-4 Database Server 6706 IP CTX Functional Diagram Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Review Voice Quality Considerations For best speech quality we recommend not using the older CTX analog line cards for CTX IP telephone connections. If these cards are used, IP telephones will experience fair or bad voice quality. (See “Dos and Don’ts for Setting Up the System” on page 9-2.) The amount of bandwidth required for communications over a particular IP network segment depends on the number of voice channels supported, the anticipated call setup traffic, and how much other data network traffic is present. The quality of service (Excellent, Good, Fair, and Bad) provided by CTX IP Telephones and CTX IP QSIG channels depends heavily on the LAN parameters as shown in Table 9-1. Table 9-1 Quality of Service Speech IP Network Quality Parameters Latency (Round trip delay)2 Good Fair Poor Very few people Some people may Many people may delay.1 perceive delay.1 perceive delay.1 perceive delay.1 20ms or less 50ms or less 100ms or less 200ms or less 20ms or less 50ms or less 50ms or less 50ms or less (-10 ms ~ +10ms) (-25ms ~ +25ms) (-25ms ~ +25ms) (-25ms ~ +25ms) Packet loss2 1×10-3 or less 1×10-3 or less 1×10-3 or less 1×10-3 or less Packet error2 1×10-4 or less 1×10-4 or less 1×10-4 or less 1×10-4 or less CODEC & Packet Interval (Prgs. 250-07, 152-01) Bandwidth per channel (Single direction, control channel included) Speech quality per the combination of the network environment described above and the CODEC parameters. G.711 at 20ms 115kbps3 (Speech 88kbps) Excellent Good Fair Poor G.711 at 40ms 99kbps3 (Speech 76kbps) Excellent Good Fair Poor G.729A at 40ms 29kbps3 (Speech 20kbps) Good Good Fair Poor G.729A at 80ms 22kbps3 (Speech 14kbps) Good Fair Poor Poor IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Jitter2 Excellent No one perceives 1. Ratings of Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor were based on the tester in a quiet room and the tester could not see the other call party. IPT is usable even with a "Poor" rating if delay is acceptable. 2. When selecting router equipment, the Latency, Jitter, Packet loss and Packet error conditions above should be considered as well as the bandwidth. Bandwidth can be calculated with the CODEC and packet size. For better results, more bandwidth may be required, depending on the amount of overall data traffic. For more details on QoS refer to “A Handbook for Successful VoIP Deployment: Network Testing, QoS, and More” by John Q. Walker, NetIQ Corporation on www.netiq.com. 3. Use this number to estimate the bandwidth needed for the CODEC and interval timing required to achieve an expected Quality of Service (Excellent, Good, etc). This bandwidth includes header and control information and a 25% margin for network traffic variances. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-5 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Step 2: Install BIPU-M2A 1. Make sure the BIPS1A is installed onto the BIPU-M2A PCB (see Figure 9-2). 2. Install the BIPU-M2A into one of the following slots: • CTX100 Base and Expansion Cabinet slots (1~8, 8 or 16 IPTs per slot per Program 100) • CTX670 Base Cabinet slots (1~8, 8 or 16 IPTs per slot per Program 100) • CTX670 Expansion Cabinet slots (1~6, 8 or 16 IPTs per slot per Program 100) 3. Follow the procedure in “Worksheet 7 – System Power Factor Check” on page 2-42 to check the cabinet power factor. 4. Power up the system. 5. Program the CTX per the instructions in the Strata CTX Programming Manual, refer to the chapter titled “IP Telephone Programming” and “Appendix A – “Applications, Tips, and Tricks.” Connect BIPU-M2A to LAN or VPN Server 1. Plug one end of a straight-through CAT5/5E/6 LAN cable into the RJ45 Ethernet port on the BIPU-M2A PCB in the CTX. (See Figure 9-2.) 2. Plug the other end of the BIPU-M2A CAT5/5E/6 LAN cable into a LAN or server jack (see Figures 9-8 and 9-9.) Note The BIPU-M2A or Q1A-switch cables are straight-through cables. RS232 Maintenance Jack Ethernet Port LEDs P601 RD Factory Installed LINK P2 RD LINK SD SD YCL 0211 PTC1111-01 RJ45 Ethernet Port BIPS1A - /16 HB Heart Beat LED V.01 P705 9-6 P708 P704 P703 BIPU-M2A or BIPU-Q1A Figure 9-2 P706 P702 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Reset Backplane Connector P701 Status/Alarm LEDs For engineering purposes only P707 6632 BIPU-M2A or BIPU-Q1A PCB ZZ Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Table 9-2 BIPU-M2A or BIPU-Q1A Buttons, LEDs and Jumpers Indicator Definition RD - Indicates BIPU-M2A or BIPUQ1A receives data from switch. Ethernet Port LEDs LINK - Indicates data activity between BIPU-M2A and switch SD - Indicates BIPU-M2A or BIPUQ1A sends data to switch. Flashes at a steady rate to indicate BIPU-M1A or BIPU-M2A or BIPUQ1A is operating normally. Heartbeat LEDs Status/Alarm LEDs Reset button For Toshiba Field Support Engineering use only. Use when requested by Toshiba Field Support Engineer. RS232 Maintenance Jack For Toshiba Field Support Engineers only. BIPU-M2A Interface Unit System: CTX100 & 670 Circuits per PCB: 8 to 16 IPT telephone circuits (programmable) IP telephones Older Version(s): BIPU-M1A The BIPU-M2A PCB interfaces with Toshiba IPT1020-SD telephones only. These telephones operate the same as the DKT3000-series telephones, but do not support Speaker OCA (refer to the DKT/IPT Telephone User Guide for operating procedures). The BIPU-M2A has 16 IP telephone circuits (eight or 16 circuits are enabled in Program 100). IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Interfaces with: The BIPU-M2A supports both G.711 and G.729A standard codec compressions simultaneously. The type of compression used is set independently for each telephone in system programming (see the “IP Telephone” section). The BIPU-M2A operates on the network at 10/100 Mbps and can be connected to a fast switch router, LAN, WAN, etc. When connecting remote IP telephones to the BIPU-M2A over the Internet, a VPN router is needed to circumvent Network Address Translation (NAT) and firewall issues by tunneling. Otherwise, the BIPU-2MA must be configured with a public IP address outside the network firewall. BIPU-M2A provides MEGACO+ mobility to enable roaming with Toshiba Mobility Communications System (MCS) applications (available with Toshiba MCS R1.0). The BIPU-M2 enables remote IP telephones to be connected over VPN and non-VPN IP networks. BIPU-M2A firmware can be updated locally or remotely using CTX WinAdmin. This enables service personnel to update IP equipment with new features and enhancements as they become available. Updates require a brief interruption (a few minutes) of IP telephone operation. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-7 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Step 3: Install IP Telephones Before installing any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes: WARNING! ³ Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm. ³ Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. ³ Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. ³ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. ³ If telephone wiring exits the building, external secondary protection is required. See Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. CAUTION! When installing the station cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. CAUTION! Do not use cleansers that contain benzene, paint thinner, alcohol or other solvents on the telephone's rubber feet. The color of the rubber may transfer to the desk or mounting surface. 1. Install the AC power adapter onto the IP telephone (IPT). If using Power over LAN, install PowerDsine unit per the installation manual supplied with that unit. The IPT1020-SD must use the AC adapter that is provided with the telephone. Important! 9-8 To power your Toshiba IPT1020-SD base unit, use only UL Listed AC Adapter Model BADP120-1A (supplied with IPT) Ratings are: Input: 120VAC 60Hz, 250mA Output: 12VDC 1A 6742 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines 2. Use the supplied Ethernet 10/100Base-T (straight-through cable) with an RJ45 connector (eight pin jack) to connect to the telephone LAN jack (see Figure on right). 3. Connect the other end of the telephone LAN cord to the LAN or server (see Figures 9-3 and 9-8.) 4. The IPT operates like a switch, as opposed to a hub, so the IPT can be connected directly to the LAN and then a PC can be connected to the IPT PC jack to make a connection to the LAN. 5. Use the same type of RJ45 cable connector used in the previous step to connect the IPT to the PC. AC Adapter Connects Connects to LAN Switch, to PC Router Built in Headset or HESB Interface Power Over LAN LAN DC12V _ + PC HEADSET • A new Add-on Module (ADM) (part number DADM3120) can be connected to the IP telephone. The DKT3000 ADM is not compatible with the IPT. The installation is the same as for the older model DADMs. See “Digital Add-on Module Installation” on page 11-21 for installation instructions. 6682 Figure 9-3 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Notes IPT Connections • For details on other IPT options, see “Power over LAN” on page 9-16. If Power over LAN is used, the AC adapter should not be installed and vice versa. IPT Operation Notes The following provides information IPT operation with Strata CTX systems (see Table 9-3). Table 9-3 IPT1020-SD Operation with Strata CTX IPT1020-SD Buttons and Features Strata CTX I&M Strata CTX System with BIPU Basic LCD 2 x 24 characters LCD Feature button Operational Fixed Spdial button Operational IPT1020-SD telephones per cabinet slot 16 telephones max. Programming Mode “A” (Beep Tone On/Off, etc.) Program Mode “A” is for telephone options that are controlled by the ROM inside the telephone. Not Operational 06/04 9-9 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Table 9-3 IPT1020-SD Operation with Strata CTX (continued) IPT1020-SD Buttons and Features Strata CTX System with BIPU Same as DKT3000 telephones except: Programming Mode “B” (Flexible Buttons, One Touch, etc.) Program Mode “B” is for telephone options controlled by the Strata CTX670 processor and database memory. (See the Strata CTX DKT/IPT User Guide.) Indication code from center is abandoned. ● Keep alive control does not work in terminal setting mode. ● IPT does not notify the state of terminal setting mode to Strata CTX. ● IPT Telephone Options A number of telephone option plugs and connectors are built-in to the IPT1020-SD (see Table 9-4 for compatibility). Table 9-4 IPT Component Compatibility Item IPT1020-SD Add-on Modules DADM3120 only Desktop Computer Telephony Interface (CTI) Future Speaker OCA Future Tilt Stands BTSD for telephone only and BTSA for telephone with ADM(s) Headset Interface Mounted inside. External Ringer HESB interface connector is mounted inside. Cordless Telephones N/A IP Telephone Add-on Modules One or two DADM3120 add-on modules can be connected directly to the IPT1020-SD. Each DADM3120 provides 20 additional feature buttons. The installation is the same as the DADM3020. For instructions, refer to “Digital Add-on Module Installation” on page 11-21. Tilt Stand Installation See “Tilt Stands” on page 11-23 for instructions. External Speaker Unit (HESB) Option See Chapter 10 – Peripheral Installation for installation instructions. 9-10 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Handset/Headset Option Straps The option straps on the IPT telephones must be cut when installing carbon handsets, external power or headsets. Refer to Table 9-5 and Figure 9-4 for further instruction. Table 9-5 Station Option Interface PCB Compatibility Strap on IPT PCB Part No. Carbon W401, W402, W403, W404 Explanation If a carbon-type handset or carbon-type headset is connected to the handset jack, four jumper wire straps inside the telephone must be cut. J200 UARTO J201 LED Port J502 IPT10-SUB W403 CARBON W400 to HESB CARBON CARBON W402 CARBON Add-on Module plug Handset jack HEADSET W401 ADM J402 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pull back clips to release IPT10-SUB. P101 For wall mounting, you need to rotate the IPT10-SUB. Gently pull back the two white plastic tabs from the IPT10-SUB to release it. Carbon handset headset wires IPT10-20KSD 6525 Figure 9-4 Strata CTX I&M IPT1020-SD Strap Connection Location 06/04 9-11 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines ³ To wall mount IP telephones Refer to Figures 9-5~9-7 and the following steps. 1. Loosen the captive screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. It fits in the notch on the cradle. 4. Carefully remove the IPT10-SUB from the base unit by pulling back the plastic clips that hold it in place (see Figure 9-4). Handset Hanger 1479 Figure 9-5 5. Rotate the IPT10-SUB 180 degrees. Secure it back onto the telephone PCB with the white plastic clips (see Figure 9-6) Handset Hanger Push in clips to secure IPT10-SUB. J200 P101 UARTO J201 LED Port IPT10-SUB J502 IPT10-SUB should be turned this way (180 degrees from original placement) for wall mounting the telephone. W403 W400 CARBON CARBON W402 CARBON W401 CARBON HEADSET ADM J402 IPT10-20KSD 6751 Figure 9-6 Rotate IPT10-SUB for Wall Mounting 6. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four captive screws (see Figure 9-7) 7. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 8. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 9. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. 1480 Figure 9-7 9-12 Wall Mounting Base Rotation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines Step 4: Connect IPTs to Network The following diagrams are examples of IP connections to either a hub, LAN or VPN network. IPT Connections Figure 9-8 shows how the IP components should be connected. Refer to the Strata CTX Programming manual for IPT programming procedures. IP address of IPT1 192.168.1.241 Strata CTX IPT1 DN3001 to 120VAC LAN RJ45 Jack BIPU LAN RJ45 Jack Switch or LAN (DHCP server) with or without VPN RJ45 Ethernet Port IPT2 DN3002 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Cable/ DSL Modem LAN Figure 9-8 to 120VAC VPN Router IP address of IPT2 192.168.1.242 (VPN is optional with BIPU-M2A) 6788 IP-CTX Connections Example IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Example IP address of BIPU 192.168.1.230 IPT Anywhere IPT Anywhere enables you to connect IP telephones remotely throughout the Internet and use all Strata CTX telephone features (except Speaker OCA). IPT remote connections can be set with or without the use of Virtual Private Network (VPN). VPN connections provide increased security and is recommended for permanent type IPT remote connections. When moving IPT telephones frequently to different locations (hotels, conferences, etc.) non-VPN connections are more practical. When using home type xDSL or cable connections, only one or two IPTs may be connected because of xDSL and cable bandwidth limitations. High speed T1, fiber, or ATM-type connections are required when installing more than two IPTs at a remote site. An Internet configuration could use the following connections: • No VPN, and thus, no security (BIPU-M2A) • Third party Virtual Private Network (VPN) software residing on DHCP gateway server. To connect IPTs over the Internet, using third party or Microsoft VPN software residing on a DHCP gateway server (see Figure 9-9.) • ATM (IP over ATM virtualization by VC/VP) • Broadband Ethernet virtualization by Virtual LAN (VLAN) • IP-VPN (IP-VPN based on Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS) • Private line connection Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-13 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines • For an access line to link the user’s location with the access point of the carrier or provider, using a private line, broadband line (xDSL, CATV), or fiber optics is recommended. 9-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Pre-installation Guidelines IPT Anywhere enables IPT users working in satellite offices or off-site at home to make full use of the extension features of the CTX IP telephones. With IPT Anywhere, you should apply the following to prevent deterioration of voice quality: • Voice compression by G.729A is available in Program 250-08 if using more than one IPT or a cable or xDSL connection. • Voice attributes table should be prepared according to the user’s “IPT Anywhere” environment and provided to each terminal used for implementing this “IPT Anywhere” environment (Program 152). • Priority control functions supported by BIPU-M2A, IEEE802.1p and Diffserv (Program 15003) can be applied to the station used for implementing the “IPT Anywhere” environment. The following picture shows how the VPN components should be connected (see the Strata CTX Programming manual for IPT programming procedures). Remote Network DHCP Gateway Server with VPN software* RJ45 Ethernet Port or Internet BIPU-M2A VPN* Example IP address of BIPU 192.168.1.230 VPN* Cable/DSL Modem DHCP Gateway Server with VPN software* 6716 *VPN is optional with BIPU-M2A. With BIPU-M1A, VPN is necessary to circumvent NAT issues. Figure 9-9 PC IPT IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Strata CTX PC AC Power Router (VPN Compatible) IPT AC Power IP-CTX Virtual Private Network Connections (Example) Security Requirements The terminal authentication using MAC addresses, provides an effective means of restricting the connection of unauthorized terminals in normal LAN environment, is also applicable to “IPT Anywhere” environment. A networked security system is required in a “IPT Anywhere” environment. But by limiting the implementation of “IPT Anywhere” environment to only within an intranet environment, the required level of security can be provided. The required level of security network can be physically provided with an intranet or by a VPN service provided by the carrier or the provider, since the network will be virtually separated between each contract user of the carrier’s or provider’s VPN service. In case of providing services like packet filtering by setting a firewall between the terminal used for the “IPT Anywhere” environment and IP-CTX, you need to prepare an appropriate setting that allows IPT control signals and voice signals to penetrate the packet filter and other features of the firewall. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-15 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Power over LAN Addressing Regarding addressing of IP packets exchanged between IPT and the main system unit, the following restrictions are normally applied. • NAT (Network Address Translation)/NAPT (Network Address and Port Translation) devices NAT/NAPT devices must not be used for communication between the “IPT Anywhere” terminal and the interface card. The original IP header and UDP header must not be revised. • VPN Tunneling – By making the private IP address a capsule of the global IP address, the private IP address can be used to tunnel through the global IP network. Using tunneling makes communication between the “IPT Anywhere” telephone and the interface card transparent. Tunneling use requires that the carrier or the provider that the user is in contract with provides a tunneling device or that the user installs his/her own tunneling device separately. • Address system – It’s important to devise a control system to prevent the private IP addresses of the network for the “IPT Anywhere” telephone and the network to which the interface card installed in this terminal belongs from overlapping. Power over LAN The recommended electric power device by LAN is called Power over LANTM from PowerDsine, Ltd. http://www.powerdsine.com. Compatible models are shown in Table 9-6 Table 9-6 Power over LAN Models Port Models Model Name 24 port type Input Output AC input Voltage: 88 – 264 VAC PD-PH-6024/ACDC/48 AC Frequency: 47 – 63 Hz DC input Current: 10A at 48 VDC PD-PH-6024/AC/48 12 port type AC input Voltage: 88 – 264 VAC AC Frequency: 47 – 63 Hz AC Frequency: 47 – 63 Hz Output Voltage: -48VDC User Port Power: DC input Current: 10A at 48 VDC 16.8W (Maximum) AC input Voltage: 88 – 264 VAC PD-PH-6012/ACDC/48 PD-PH-6012/AC/48 6 port type AC input Voltage: 88 – 264 VAC AC Frequency: 47 – 63 Hz Data Rates: 10/100 Mbps AC input Voltage: 88 – 264 VAC PD-PH-6006/ACDC/48 AC Frequency: 47 – 63 Hz DC input Current: 10A at 48 VDC PD-PH-6006/AC/48 9-16 AC input Voltage: 88 – 264 VAC AC Frequency: 47 – 63 Hz Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Power over LAN Note Toshiba does not supply the Power over LAN units. When you order the Power over LAN model from PowerDsine, please indicate that you need the Power over LAN that can support the Toshiba IPT1020-SD Some models don’t support the IPT1020-SD. Be sure to order the PowerDsine products (PD-6000 product family) from a software revision that is equal to 6805 or higher (produced from March 15, 2003). The software revision numbers appear in the position shown below on the serial number label. S/N: 6 8 0 5 Software Revision An example of a typical IPT-CTX connection using a PowerDsine Power over LAN unit is shown in Figure 9-10. CAT5e Patch Panel or Termination Block 1 CTX 1 Network Jack IN 1 IPT PowerDsine 16 CAT5 Modular Cord RJ45 Figure 9-10 Strata CTX I&M 16 IN OUT 16 IPT IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Fast Switch BIPU-M1A OUT 6803 CAT5 Modular Cord RJ45 CAT5 Modular Cord RJ45 Typical IPT-CTX Connection Using PowerDsine Power over LAN Unit 06/04 9-17 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Installing and Operating the SoftIPT This section explains how to install and operate the Toshiba SoftIPTTM. It also discusses how the SoftIPT will work on wireless 802.11 networks. The SoftIPT is a software phone client that runs on wired or wireless laptops, tablets and desktop PCs with the Microsoft® Windows XP® operating software. The SoftIPT enables true mobility with access to voice mail, programmable feature buttons, and a directory that works with Microsoft Outlook® 2002. And because it’s wireless, you can access Internet services on the same PC. The main SoftIPT GUI is shown below. Live call progress display Click More Features to see more buttons or the directory. Mute turns microphone speaker On/Off. Soft Keys Volume Control Up to six flexible buttons are programmed from the Strata CTX. Select or click on dial pad buttons 6821 9-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Hardware/Software Required The SoftIPT works with the Strata CTX100-S, CTX100 and CTX670 telephone systems with CTX R2.1 MG020 or higher. SoftIPT operation requires a wired or wireless 802.11 connection over the IP network (Internet, WAN, LAN, etc.) to the CTX BIPU-M2A or BIPU-M1A PCB with firmware version 07e or higher IP interface. The voice communications uses the MEGACO+ protocol for call control signaling and RTP for voice transmission. Note The SoftIPT can work on wireless 802.11 networks (see “Application Notes for Wireless 802.11 Networks” on page 9-26 for more information). A user can install the SoftIPT on a laptop, tablet or desktop PC at the same time, but each should have a unique station ID and license. The SoftIPT works with desktop or laptop PCs with Windows XP, or higher, operating system (OS). The SoftIPT Graphical User Interface (GUI) has fixed and flexible buttons. Fixed buttons cannot be changed (Intercom, Mute, Voicemail, Directory, Settings, Call Log and Help). Flexible buttons can be assigned different features and labels. Before You Begin See the illustration below. You will need to enter items A~E during the installation process. Check with your Telephone System Administrator to make sure that you have this information. After entering this information, we suggest that you print this screen for future reference. Important! IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Access points are required for wireless systems. Customers must supply their own access points and headphone/microphones. The SoftIPT requires the use of a headset. Without the headset, the far end of the conversation will hear the echo caused by the laptop's built-in microphone picking up the output of the speaker. A. SoftDKT extension number B. Outside line access code C. Long distance dialing prefix D. Enter IP Address of BIPU-MXX PCB E. Select the network adapter used by the SoftIPT 6949 Note Changing button labels “Line 1” ~ “Line 6” is optional. You can change these labels, but it does not change the button function. See “Labeling Feature Buttons” for details. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-19 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Step 1: Install SoftIPT Follow these instructions to install the SoftIPT on a tablet, laptop or desktop PC. 1. Insert the SoftIPT CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. 2. From the Main Menu, select “Install SoftIPT.” The InstallShield Wizard performs “Preparing to Install.” 7050 3. In the Welcome window (shown right), click Next. 4. Read the TAIS TSD License Agreement, select “I accept the terms in the license agreement,” then 5. click Next to continue. 6. In the Customer Information screen, click Next. 7. In the Destination Folder window, click Next. 8. In the Ready to Install the Program window, click Install. 9. Click Finish to exit the Wizard. 7049 10. At the Restart window (shown right), click Yes, unless you want to restart at another time. 7051 9-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT 11. In the Softphone Setting window (shown under “Before You Begin” on page 9-19), enter the following: • • • • • Note SoftIPT extension Outgoing Prefix (outside line access code, if required) Long Distance prefix IP address of BIPU-MXX (xx = version number). See your System Administrator for this address If there are multiple network adapters, select the one for SoftIPT. Changing button labels “Line 1” ~ “Line 6” is optional See “Labeling Feature Buttons” on page 9-24 for details. 12. Click OK. If requested to enter an integer, make sure you have entered a phone extension or area code. From the SoftIPT main screen, click the “X” in the upper right corner (exits the SoftIPT application). 13. Double click on the SoftIPT icon to restart the SoftIPT. 15. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds and Audio Devices. 16. On the Voice tab, click Volume. Adjust the Microphone volume. Click Advanced. Make sure all check boxes are off and set MIC volume to 90% high. Select OK. The SoftIPT is ready to use. Upgrading the SoftIPT IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP 14. Plug in your headset. The next two steps are guides to adjusting the microphone/headset volume. 1. Close the SoftIPT application if you are using it. 2. Insert Strata CTX CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double click on SoftIPT-PCInstaller.exe. The SoftIPT - InstallShield Wizard runs. You will be prompted to select upgrade, repair or remove the program. 4. Click Upgrade or Repair. 5. Click Finish to exit the Wizard. Your SoftIPT is upgraded. Step 2: Start the SoftIPT ³ On a PC, double click on the SoftIPT icon on your PC desktop. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-21 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Making a Call The Toshiba SoftIPT integrates the power of a PC with all of the features available on a DKT3000series telephone, except background music. The main difference is that you use a mouse or stylus to select buttons. Other than these few differences, you can use most of the features described in the Strata CTX DKT/IPT User Guide, available on the Internet FYI site, Documentation > User Guides. Refer to this guide for instructions on using the other features. ³ To make a call 1. Click Call. Hear dial tone. (If you have “hot dialing,” skip this step. Click on a button on the dial pad and if you hear dial tone, you have “hot dialing.”) Select or click on dial pad buttons to call. If dialed numbers don't appear, click Intercom, then dial. 2. Click or select the on-screen dial pad buttons to dial a call. ...or if the dialed numbers don’t appear on-screen, click Intercom, then dial by clicking on the dial pad buttons on-screen. 3. When connected to a call, you can select any of the call buttons, such as Hangup, Redial, Hold or Conf. 4. Click Hangup to end the call. Note Do not use BGM (#490) on the SoftIPT. It conflicts with incoming calls. 6825 When you are on a call, the Call button changes to Hangup. Click Hangup to end the call. Switching a Call to Your Headset You can switch a call from your DKT3000- or 2000-series digital telephone to the SoftIPT by placing the call on Hold and using the Call Pickup feature. 1. Press Hold on your digital telephone. 2. On the SoftIPT, dial #5#72 + the extension number of your digital telephone. 9-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Creating a Directory You can create a directory with Microsoft Outlook 2002 (not Outlook Express). 1. Open Microsoft Outlook 2002. 2. Double click on the Contacts icon, click on the New contact icon. 3. Type in the contact information, click Save and Close. Add as many entries as desired. To edit an entry, double click on the name to open. 4. Open the Soft Phone. 5. Click More Features twice, click Directory. The directory displays (see below). Type Number Work Work Work Work Work Work Work 3202 4011 3249 4201 4100 3237 3200 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Click on a name, Strata CTX dials the number. Name Hugh Leon Jessica Kai Kenny Voldrich Tony Garaldi Tony Bell Bob Rogers Shayla Morgan 7052 7052 Using the Directory to Call ³ Click on the name. The SoftIPT calls the contact. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-23 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Labeling Feature Buttons From the Softphone Setting window, you can change six of the telephone button labels. Changing the label does not change the function. To change the function, see “Programming Feature Buttons” in the Strata CTX DKT/IPT User Guide. ³ To find out what features are assigned to the feature buttons 1. Dial #9876 to enter user programming mode. 2. Click on HOLD, then click on the feature button. ³ To change Feature Button Labels 1. Click More Features twice. Click Setting. Click Click again Click 6936 Softphone Setting window opens. 2. From the Softphone Setting window (shown right), type in button labels (eight characters max.), click OK. 3. Click the “X” in the upper right corner to shut down the SoftIPT. Your changes won’t appear until you shut down and restart the SoftIPT. Can enter labels l to rename Line e1~6 e Feature Button n ns. 6827 4. Click on the SoftIPT icon to restart. The new button labels will display. Note If you reprogrammed the button functions per the instructions in the user guide, you cannot manually exit from “programming mode.” Just wait a few seconds for the system to time out and the SoftIPT will return to idle. 9-24 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Using the Call Log The SoftIPT keeps a log of incoming and outgoing calls. ³ To access the Call Log 1. Click More Features until you see the Call Log button. 2. Click Call Log. The log displays (shown right). From this screen, you can: 3. Click Redial to dial the last outgoing number You can click Close to close this screen and return to the dial pad to enter an access code or to access the Mute, Voicemail, Directory or other buttons. Click Close to return to the dial pad. 6922 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Click on an incoming or outgoing number to dial it. ...or click on an incoming or outgoing number to dial it. Click Redial to dial the last outgoing number. Uninstalling the SoftIPT ³ To remove SoftIPT from your PC 1. Click on Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. 2. Select SoftIPT, click Remove. ³ To remove the SoftIPT folder, select Start > Programs > File Explorer. ³ Select My Documents > My Device > Program File > Toshiba > SoftIPT, then select Delete. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-25 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Application Notes for Wireless 802.11 Networks The Toshiba SoftIPT™ works on wireless 802.11 networks. However, current access point technology does not provide for the management of quality of service over the wireless network, which can result in a few observable degradations in voice quality. Our objective here is to describe these issues for the network engineer, and offer some recommendations. As the technology evolves, and the knowledge base grows, other problems and solutions will emerge, hence the network engineer is encouraged to search out other sources of information, from the specific access point manufacturers or from experts in the 802.11 wireless industry. Possible problems and their implications are: 1. Dropped packets may occur due to RF signal strength, especially as you get further away from the access point. When small amounts of packet loss occur, you will notice a popping or clipping sound. With larger amounts of packet loss, gaps in the conversation will occur. This is very similar to the behavior of digital cell phones in the same situations. The best way to deal with this is to design the wireless network for good coverage where it is needed. 2. Dropped packets may also occur due to excessive traffic on the wireless network. With multiple devices accessing data through the same wireless network, current access points do not have a method for prioritizing voice packets over data packets so when data applications create more traffic than the wireless bandwidth can sustain, voice packets may get dropped. In addition, access points do not have a mechanism for limiting the number of simultaneous sessions. In our lab we find that up to seven calls can take place simultaneously on a single access point. This number will vary depending on the access point, the RF environment, and any other activity in the wireless environment. 3. When one terminal is in a poor signal area for the access point that it is associated with, the access point may automatically reduce its data rate in order to achieve better communications with that terminal. This new data rate affects communications with all terminals, which will reduce the number of simultaneous calls the access point can support. Network engineers should consider whether they want to disable the Auto TX Data Rate Feature. 4. Disconnected calls will result if you move too far away from the access point, or generally are in a poor signal strength area. With current 802.11 wireless technology, when a terminal can’t communicate with an access point, it will disassociate with it. This appears to the phone application as a loss of the network, and the phone application disconnects. Even if you quickly move back into range of an access point, it will take several seconds for the 802.11 terminal to detect and re-associate with the access point. 5. Wireless networks can only get so large, before you have to break them up into multiple subnets. Somewhere between 256 and 1000 nodes is where networks begin to need to be broken up into multiple subnets. When multiple subnets are employed, the call will get dropped as the terminal gets out of range of its subnet. But the terminal can reestablish its call after associating with the new subnet. FYI: At Toshiba we are working on technology to address problems 2~4 for the SoftIPT. Check back with us. 9-26 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT Wireless Recommendations Follow these recommendations when using the SoftIPT on a wireless network. • Ensure that no more than seven SoftIPT clients are working through a single access point at one time. • Engineer your wireless network so that there is good signal strength everywhere wireless terminals will be used. • Use the ping program to test your wireless network. In Microsoft® Windows® perform the following: 1. Select Start > Run. 2. Type command, click OK. 3. At the prompt, type ping ñt ñl160 ñw250 (BIPU IP address, such as 159.119.112.32) and press Enter. • Employ a channel allocation strategy. 802.11b supports multiple data rates, from 1Mbps up to 11Mbps. At 11Mbps – the objective of most networks these days, access points that are less than five channels away will interfere with each other. This would mean that access points must be on channels 1, 6, or 11. Some wireless network engineers have suggested that using channels 1, 4, 7 and 10 would provide a very important fourth channel, and have minimal interference. • Check your environment for other access points and other equipment operating in the 802.11 band. There are many programs available that will allow you to identify access points within reach of the terminal running the program. One example is Network Stumbler (this is not an endorsement or recommendation of a particular product). Also consider that some cordless phones operate in the same 2.4GHz band as 802.11b. IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP This starts the ping program and sends packets to the BIPU. ñl160 makes the packets the same size as a 20msec. voice packet, and the ñw250 says if there is no response in 250 msec., then the packet dropped. Periodically you can press keys and see the packet loss statistics. Packet loss ratios of 1% or less can be considered acceptable This tool provides quantitative results that can be used when trying to engineer the wireless network. Considerations To get the best use from your SoftIPT, consider the following tips. • Use a headset with an attached microphone to provide good call quality and privacy. If you don’t use a microphone/headset, the called party will hear an echo. • When you are not wearing the headset, unplug it so that you can hear the phone ring. When the headset is plugged in, you can only hear ringing through the headset. • Use Microsoft Outlook 2002 to create contacts. The SoftIPT does not work with Outlook Express. • Dialing tips: When you click or select buttons on the SoftIPT, you will not hear button tones. Also, you must use the SoftIPT directory, keyboard or dial pad buttons to call another number. The SoftIPT does not recognize numbers that you “copy” and “paste” onto the screen. • If you minimize the SoftIPT, incoming calls “pop up” the SoftIPT to the foreground. If you want the SoftIPT to “pop up” for incoming calls, always minimize it after each call. • The SoftIPT disconnects immediately after the called party hangs up. If you select the Hangup button and it turns back to the Call button, it means that the other party disconnected first. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-27 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Installing and Operating the SoftIPT • The Conf button works the same as the Cnf/Trn (Conference/Transfer) button on the DKT/ IPT telephones. • You can make a Windows “shortcut” and add it to your program menu or add it as a Quick Launch item using the standard Windows method. The SoftIPT application does not automatically do this. • When you exit the SoftIPT, any Call Forwarding that you set also turns off. • Make sure that you are running only one version of the SoftIPT. If you click on the shortcut icon or start the program while you are already running it, another SoftIPT application will open. If you see “Searching BIPU...” or “Can’t Register SoftIPT” click the close button to make sure that there isn’t another SoftIPT running. • If you are on a SoftIPT call and you are viewing the Setting window, select Cancel to exit the Setting window. Avoid selecting OK during a call, since it will reset the SoftIPT and the call. The application will operate with the new Setting information after you start the SoftIPT again. • The Call Log does not record calls that have a name associated with it. It logs calls that are stored on the Strata CTX as a number. • For the SoftIPT, configure the Strata CTX BIPU PCB for G.711 CODEC at 20msec. (40msec. voice packet transmission interval is not supported and G.729 is not supported.) Note Quality of Service statistics are not available on Strata CTX for the SoftIPT. Tested Platforms The following devices and PC platforms have been tested with the SoftIPT. Audio Devices • YAMAHA AC-XG, ALi Audio Wave, or Analog Devices (ADI) PC Platforms • Portege 3500, 1.3GHz, 256MB, “ALi Audio Wave,” Windows XP pro • Satellite 5200, 2GHz, 512MB, “YAMAHA AC-XG WDM Audio,” Windows XP pro • Satellite Pro M10, 1.6GHz, 512MB, “SoundMAX Digital Audio,” Windows XP pro • Tecra S1, 1.5GHz, 512MB, “SoundMAX Digital Audio,” Windows XP pro 9-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting CTX IP Troubleshooting This section provides guidelines for troubleshooting the CTX with IP. It covers the kind of data to collect for troubleshooting and how to collect it. Toshiba TSD Technical Support will require collecting data for diagnosing problems. IP Telephone Ping Test The IPT sends 10 ping packets of 64 bytes. The time lapse between ping packets is one second. The time that the IPT waits for a reply is five seconds. When the IPT receives the reply packet within five seconds, the counter which shows received packets increases in number. 1. Press 3, 6, 9 and Hold simultaneously. 2. Press 2 Hold to select the Network Setting Mode. Refer to the following table to continue with the test. Table 9-7Ping Test Action Press FB15. 2. Press 1. 3. Press Hold. LOOP BACK MODE IPT is ready to send ping packets. PING TO BIPU In case the IP address of the IPT is not set (processing DHCP). PING TO BIPU CAN’T GET IPT ADDRESS In case the IP address of BIPU is not set (executing RAS). PING TO BIPU CAN’T GET BIPU ADDRESS PING TO 172.16.36.100 PING RESULT 5/5 When the IPT sends ping packets, it displays the IP address of BIPU on its LCD. The display format is “Number of received packets/number of sent packets.” After sending 10 ping packets, IPT displays new result. PING TO 172.16.36.100 PING RESULT 10/10 If you operate off-hook and onhook while ping is executing, the ping is stopped and changes to normal mode. The counter is continuously increased during the sending of the packets. The sending of ping packets is stopped. STOP PING EXECUTING 5/5 5. (Optional) Press 3. Previous result is displayed. PING TO 172.16.36.100 PING RESULT 10/10 If ping is not executed, the LCD displays the following: PING TO BIPU PING RESULT 0/0 06/04 It is impossible to execute ping when IP addresses of IPT and BIPU are not set. Ping packets are sent and IPT displays the number of received and sent packets. 4. (Optional) Press 2. Strata CTX I&M Remarks IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP 1. LCD Indication IPT changes into a network diagnosis mode. 9-29 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting LCD Network Failure Displays When LCD Network failure occurs between BIPU and IPT, IPT displays one of the following LCD messages. Table 9-8LCD Network Failure Conditions 1. LCD Indication Failed in TCP connection with BIPU. Remarks BIPU TCP CONNECT ERROR 2. Cut off TCP connection with BIPU. BIPU TCP PORT IS CLOSED 3. Keep alive error (DCH data from BIPU was stopped 20 seconds or more.) BIPU ALIVE PACKET STOP When this LCD message appears, IPT resets after 10 seconds. Collect CTX Trace Data on CTX SmartMedia Card The Trace Data consists of an EventTrace, Error Log, Admin Log, and ProgData.The procedure is provided in the Strata CTX Programming Manual. Collect BIPU Logs 1. Connect to PC by RS-232C cable and launch a terminal emulator software (Hyper Terminal, ProCom, etc.). See Figure 9-11. CTX BIPU PCB Monitor Jack PC with communication software, such as ProComm™ Call-monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ-12) pin numbering 6711 Figure 9-11 BIPU Monitor Jack Serial port setings: • Baud rate: 9600 • Data: 8 bit • Parity: none • Stop: 1 bit • Flow control: none 9-30 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting 2. Log onto the BIPU. At “A.B.C.D login:” prompt, type root A.B.C.D login: root (*) A.B.C.D: BIPU IP address programmed in Program 151-FB01. 3. Display the log files and put them into the text file. # cat Log0.log # cat Log0.err (*) Log0.log contains the all contents of Log0.err. Check Log0.log/Log0.err for Error Message Output The format of error message is: Date Time E module-name:error message ex 2003/02/13 17:39:49:340 E CBipulo:Reboot:vp init ³ Display the kernel boot message and put it into the text file # dmesg. BIPU Reset ³ If the BIPU resets, find the text string with the implied reset cause. Table 9-9 BIPU Reset Causes Reset cause String in the Log file IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Check Whether Message Associated Warnings/Errors Were Printed Known conditions DSP hardware initialization was failed or timed out. DSP command execution was failed or timed out. Software Reset Called CPU reset Any internal process was dead. Modify the network configuration (IP address, etc.) BIPU program update WDT Overflow Hardware WDT (PM only) Others Strata CTX I&M 06/04 WDT Timer Overflow DSP lock BIPU is overloaded with network traffic. -- CPU lock -- -- 9-31 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Verify CTX/BIPU/IPT Hardware, Software and Firmware Version Mandatory Data Which CTX BIPU BIPS IPT What How Example Software Program 901 FB1 NA200MF010, SA200MF009 Hardware Labeled on card CM4, CM5, PM FPGA Labeled on chip V.03, V.04 Firmware (BootRom version included) Program 151 FB4 BIPU10A, BIPQ02B Hardware Labeled on card CM3, CM5 Hardware Labeled on base CM9 Firmware (BootRom version included) Program 250 FB9 or Terminal Setting Mode DIP11PA, DIP11QB Optional Data for Program Update Which What Example Operating system Windows XP server, RedHat Linux Server program name IIS, wu-ftpd, CTX internal TCP/IP properties IP address, netmask, gateway address WinAdmin WinAdmin version V1.30, V2.00 BIPU Target BIPU firmware version BIPU11B IPT Target BIPU firmware version DIP11QB FTP CTX System Configuration In the following record sheets, record the card configuration for the cabinet where the BIPU is installed. Include the following information: • Mark the BIPU slot. • Input card type based on Prog100 --> upper space • Input installed card information when the problem was occurred. --> lower space • Card information: • card type • hardware version (CMx, PM) • firmware version • In addition, the version of processor board, cabinet and power unit. CTX670 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Base Exp. 9-32 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting CTX100 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Base/ Exp. Network Information Network Equipment that BIPU/IPT Directly Connects To • Switching Hub (Layer2 Switch) Port • Repeater Hub Port • Router Port • Layer3 Switch Port Acceptable settings are shown in the table below. Switching Hub IEEE802.1p tag vlan port vlan static rip igrp/eigrp others Routing protocol auto Repeater Hub Vlan, Priority full duplex half duplex 1Gbps 10/100Mbps 10Mbps Equipment type Mode N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A N/ A IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Link speed Router Layer3 Switch Network Diagram Sketch the simple network diagram. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-33 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Capture Packets Packet types to be captured are: Protocol Name Type Use, Purpose RAS (H.225) udp for searching BIPU and registering IPT with the system MEGACO+ tcp call control protocol RTP udp carry the voice data RTCP udp System uses this protocol to measure the round-trip delay of rtp packets between BIPU and IPT (currently unavailable). SNMP udp get/set CTX data from CTX WinAdmin FTP tcp to download updating file when updating the BIPU/IPT program. FTP-data tcp to download updating file when updating the BIPU/IPT program. DHCP udp request to lease an IP address (IPT only) IP-QSIG tcp encapsulate QSIG message over IP network control RTP The following is the port number used by each protocol. This is useful for filtering captured data. RAS (Registration, Admission and Status) IPT BIPU Discovery (GRQ, GCF, GRJ) 1718 1718 Registration (RRQ, RCF, RRJ) 1719 1719 MEGACO+ IPT BIPU random 2944 RTP/RTCP IPT BIPU RTP 1500 X (11000 – 13000). Always an even number. RTCP 1501 X+1. Always an odd number. FTP/FTP-data BIPU (FTP client) FTP server FTP 1024 (initial) 1026 (retry) 21 (well-known) FTP-data 1025 (initial) 1027 (retry) 20 or any port (Depends on server implementation) DHCP 9-34 DHCP server DHCP client (IPT) 67 68 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Capture Points The capture point for the BIPU and the IPT are shown in Figure 9-12. Strata CTX Mode BIPU Switch IP Network Page Scroll Feature Switch Msg Spdial Vol Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Hold IPT Capture point for BIPU Capture point for IPT 6707 Figure 9-12 Capture Point Locations How To Capture Packets Using Repeater Hub (Dumb Hub) Strata CTX Repeater BIPU Switch IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP If you want to use a repeater hub (dumb hub) for troubleshooting, it should be connected as shown in Figure 9-13.Toshiba does not recommend the use of the repeater Hub to be unable to ensure the voice quality. A repeater hub should only be used for resolving the problems. IP Network 6709 Monitor device Figure 9-13 Repeater Hub Location Using Switching Hub with Mirroring Function By using mirroring function, it is possible to capture all send/receive data to one specific port (it’s called source port). See Figure 9-14. Mirror port Source port Switch Mode IP Network Msg Spdial Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Page Scroll Feature Vol Monitor device Hold IPT 6708 Figure 9-14 Switching Hub with Mirroring Function Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-35 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Using PC or Workstation With Multiple Network Interfaces Start capture tool and specify the network interface face on BIPU/IPT. See Figure 9-15. Strata CTX Monitor device Switch BIPU IP Network 6710 Network Interface card Figure 9-15 PC or Workstation With Multiple Network Interfaces Requirement for Capture Tool The following is the better, but not mandatory. • Support GUI format (summary, details and dump). • Enable to decode VoIP protocols. Examples: • Sniffer • Ethereal • Network Monitor for MS-Windows • tcpdump (Linux, BSD) • snoop (Solaris) To analyze the captured data more efficiently, save the captured data in binary format (not text format). The libcap format is better (suffix is .cap). IP Troubleshooting Resolutions Table 9-10 No. 1 IP Troubleshooting Problems and Resolutions Problem IPT repeats reset and reboot. Action “Remove that IPT from network. Execute ping command to an IP address assigned to that IPT from PC. Do you receive the reply packets?” Cause How to Resolve IP address was duplicated with other IPTs or network equipment. Don’t duplicate IP address. Incorrect programming of BIPU IP address. Re-configure the BIPU IP address correctly. 1. LAN cable has come loose. 1. Check LAN cable on a route. 2. Gateway setting of IPT was mistaken.” 2. Re-configure the Default Gateway address correctly. Connectivity Problems: Verify the IPT configuration (enter terminal setting mode by pressing 3+6+9+Hold). 2 IPT is unable to connect to BIPU. In FK11, Check the BIPU IP address is same as that of Prog151-FK1 Ping to BIPU but no replies are received. 9-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Table 9-10 No. IP Troubleshooting Problems and Resolutions (continued) Problem Action Check the network equipment located on the routing path between BIPU and IPT. 3 IPT has harsh noise during talking or hearing any tone. “Capture the network traffic between BIPU and IPT, and analyze the captured data. Cause How to Resolve Replace to Switching HUB. Repeater HUB was used. Path band-width of the network between BIPU and IPT was too narrow. Toshiba recommends the use of SW-HUB.” Reduce the number of connected IPTs. Apply the priority control. Change voice CODEC to G.729A” Verify the following. Routing delay or packet loss (1)The interval of RTP packets is due to low performance of almost same as the value routing devices (router or L3 configured by Prog 152-FK1. switch). (2)This interval is constant. “Illegal packets were sent to BIPU/IPTs. Flow a lot of broadcast packets.” Same as above. Remove the originator. LAN Problems: 4 “If priority control function (IEEE802.1p) was set to ““enable””, return to ““disable”” and try again. If voice path was restored, verify the specification of routers/switches between BIPU and IPT.” “Routers or LAN switches were unable to interpret Ethernet frame with VLAN tag correctly (IEEE802.1p uses a part of VLAN tag field). So, these frames were discarded by the router/ switch.” Disable IEEE802.1p function. *note) Equipment not to be complied with IEEE802.1Q/1p seem to regard ethernet frames with VLAN tag field as illegal frames and to discard these frames. 5 Check the port configuration of LAN switch. The IPT connection port was configured as tag-based VLAN port. Therefore, this port passed only ethernet frames with VLAN-ID same as port configuration, and discarded other frames. Disable VLAN setting. IPCTX does not support tagbased VLAN. So, BIPU and IPT cannot belong any VLAN. restriction If default gateway is down for a while, BIPU cannot reroute another gateway automatically. Verify the specification of each Condition: repeater HUB. Two repeater HUBs were cascaded.” No voice path “IPT is unable to connect to BIPU. Condition: 6 7 IPT connects to LAN switch complied with IEEE802.1Q (tag-based VLAN).” There are two gateways in the network segment which BIPU belongs, and one of them is configured as default gateway of BIPU. IPT Problems: 8 “IPT shows ““Can’t set IPaddress””.” Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Check the DHCP server exists on the same network as that IPT. IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP 10M-repeater HUB and 10/ 100M-repeater HUB were cascaded. In case that some repeater HUB connects to the other one having different link speed each other, one of those needs to have internal bridge circuit. “IPT is unable to connect to BIPU. Setting up and starting DHCP server does not exists DHCP service, or configure IPT’s IP address and Subnet on the network. mask manually. DHCP server is located beyond the router. Setting up and starting DHCP service on the same network as that IPT. 9-37 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Table 9-10 No. IP Troubleshooting Problems and Resolutions (continued) Problem Action Cause How to Resolve IPT Problems: Verify the following: 1. BIPU is running (heart-beat LED is blinking). 9 10 11 12 13 14 “IPT shows ““BIPU not found””.” “IPT shows ““Can’t get StationID””.” “IPT shows ““StationID unmatch””.” “IPT shows ““Not exist Multicast addr””.” “IPT shows ““Not exist BIPU addr””.” “IPT shows ““Can’t register IPT:E0””.” 2. Ping to BIPU is successful. 1. BIPU was down. 2. BIPU was network unreachable. 3. Change BIPU discovery mode to ““1:Manual”” and configure BIPU IP address in IPT terminal setting mode.” 3. BIPU discovery mode in terminal setting mode. If ““2:Broadcast”” is selected, BIPUs have to locate same network segment as IPT.” 3. BIPU was located beyond the router but IPT tried to discover BIPU by broadcasting.” Check there are available Station IDs. All Station IDs are already used by other IPTs. New IPT assigns by Prog 200 and permits Automatic Station ID Assignment by Prog 150 or Prog 250. Check CTX permits the Automatic Station ID Assignment. “Programming as Automatic Station ID Assignment is set to ““disable””.” Permits Automatic Station ID Assignment by Prog 150 or Prog 250. Step 1: Enter terminal setting mode, and then press dial ““2”” to enter network configurations, and then press FK5 to display the StationID. Station ID is out of prime DN Set Station ID from within list which are assigned to prime DN list which are assigned to IPT. Step 2: Enter CTX programming IPT. mode, and then enter prime DN same as Station ID in Prog 250. Command error or not?” Enter the terminal configuration mode, and then press ““2”” to enter the network configuration. Verify the following: (1) FK11 (2) FK13” “In FK11, ““3:Multicast”” was selected, but no multicast address was assigned in FK13.” “Enter the terminal configuration mode, and then press ““2”” to “In FK11, ““1:Manual”” was enter the network configuration. selected, but no BIPU address was assigned in Verify the following: FK12.” (1) FK11 (2) FK12” 1. Enter terminal configuration mode, then press ““2”” to enter “Station ID assigned in the network configuration. Verify terminal configuration mode StationID in FK5. was out of IPT’s prime DN list. Maybe this station was 2. In Prog 250, enter prime DN same as the StationID verified deleted or prime DN was step1. changed.” Change BIPU discovery mode (FK11), or enter the multicast address for discovery. Note CTX does not support the procedure of discovery using multicast. This is future support.” Change BIPU discovery mode, or enter the BIPU address for discovery. Change Station ID. 3. If no error, move step4.” Terminal data regarding that 4. Try the following: Enter Prog StationID was not 250 with Prime DN same as the synchronized between CTX This is a known problem. Station ID verified Step 1. Select and BIPU. Maybe BIPU failed FK8 and change voice CODEC. to receive the data. 9-38 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP CTX IP Troubleshooting Table 9-10 No. IP Troubleshooting Problems and Resolutions (continued) Problem Action Cause How to Resolve IPT Problems: 15 “IPT shows ““Can’t register IPT:E4””.” 16 “IPT shows ““Can’t register IPT:E11””.” 17 “IPT shows ““Can’t register IPT:E13””.” Find the IPT which has same Station ID. “Check CTX applies Terminal Authentication feature, or, IP address filtering. Verify Prog 150 FK2 and Prog 250 FK5, FK6 for Terminal Authentication. Verify Prog 250 FK2, FK3 for IP address filtering.” Station ID duplicated. Set unique Station ID. No resources are available. Create a new IPT terminal in Prog 200. Or, Change destination BIPU having some idle resources.” 1. Terminal Authentication feature was applied but Station MAC address was different from that programmed in CTX. 2. IP address filtering was applied but Station IP address was different from that programmed in CTX.” “IPT shows ““BIPU TCP CONNECT ERROR””.” Fail to establish TCP connection to BIPU. 19 “IPT shows ““BIPU TCP PORT IS CLOSED””.” TCP connection was disconnected by BIPU. 20 “IPT shows ““BIPU ALIVE PACKET STOP””.” Keep-Alive was failing. 21 22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP 18 See Spec.1203 for Terminal Authentication. See Spec.1200 for IP address filtering.” 9-39 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Private Networking Over Internet Protocol Private Networking Over Internet Protocol Strata Net CTX multi-system networking can be implemented over an IP network using Strata CTX systems with BIPU-Q1A IP interface PCBs. The BIPU-Q1A requires CTX Release 2.1 software. This feature offers the same connection service as ISDN dedicated lines with QSIG protocol on the public network. QSIG over IP, like any other IP device (i.e., Cisco routers, etc.) does support reliable passage of modemized data signals, such as modem signal and G3 fax. BIPU-Q1A - Strata Net QSIG over IP Interface Unit Circuits per PCB: eight or 16 circuits Interfaces with: Strata Net over IP Networking Older Version(s): None The BIPU-Q1A can be configured for up to 16 channels in system programming. The BIPU-Q1A supports the same functions of call control as the dedicated ISDN QSIG interface and the two interface types can be mixed in on a Strata Net network. However, the BIPU-Q1A only interfaces with the BIPU-Q1A, not with the BPTU or RPTU interfaces and vice versa. For bandwidth requirements, refer to the section “Strata Net QSIG Over IP and IPT Bandwidth Requirements” on page 9-41. Refer to “Dos and Don’ts for Setting Up the System” on page 9-2 if you are planning to mix analog and IP QSIG circuit cards in the same Strata CTX system. An example of Strata Net QSIG over IP networking is shown below. Strata CTX Router or Server with or without VPN BIPU-Q1A LAN QSIG over IP Strata CTX * QSIG over IP VPN Tunnelling * Router or Server with or without VPN BIPU-Q1A IP Network (Internet, Intranet, WAN) LAN Strata CTX * QSIG over IP * T1, Fiber, etc. Router or Server with or without VPN BIPU-Q1A LAN 6755 Figure 9-16 QSIG Over IP Example 9-40 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Private Networking Over Internet Protocol Strata Net QSIG Over IP and IPT Bandwidth Requirements The bandwidth requirements for Strata Net QSIG over IP is the same as those for IP telephones. Refer to Table 9-1 on page 9-5 to estimate the quality of service (Excellent, Good, Fair, and Poor) provided by CTX IP QSIG channels depending heavily on the LAN parameters. When sharing voice and data on the same network segment, the data will cause some jitter in voice communications, especially on slower segments. Table 9-11 shows calculations of the amount of jitter assuming a worst case data packet size of 1500 bytes (Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) = 1500) based on a segment’s bandwidth. This also requires that the routers connecting the segment through the WAN support Diffserv. Note A router that doesn’t support Diffserv may stack multiple data packets together increasing the jitter perhaps indefinately. And the voice quality will be indeterminate. Table 9-11 QSIG over IP Jitter on Mixed Voice and Data WAN Bandwidth (kbps) 128 256 384 512 1536 Time to transmit max. MTU (ms) 93.75 46.88 23.44 15.63 1.00 Expected Jitter (ms) Class 100 50 30 20 1 Poor Fair Fair Good Excellent Class definition categories are shown in Table 9-12. Table 9-12 QSIG over IPClass Definitions Class Excellent Good Fair Poor Delay (ms) < 20 < 50 < 100 < 200 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP No. of B-Channels of WAN 2 4 6 8 24 Jitter (ms) < 10 < 20 < 50 < 100 Table 9-13 shows the amount of bandwidth required for setting up and tearing down calls independent of the amount of voice traffic. Table 9-13 QSIG over IP Bandwidth Required for Call Setup Traffic Rate (BHCA1) 1000 2000 4000 6000 Required Bandwidth 6 12 23 36 1. BHC = Busy Hour Call Attempts Strata CTX I&M 06/04 9-41 IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP Private Networking Over Internet Protocol So the amount of bandwidth that is required on a segment to support a specific number of calls is the sum of the number of channels multiplied by the bandwidth for the selected CODEC and interval, plus the bandwidth required for the selected number of busy hour call attempts. And the jitter is determined by the bandwidth of the WAN segment. Example: If you want to support 4 calls using the G..711 CODEC with a 20 msec. interval, this requires 4 x 88 kbps = 352 kbps of bandwidth. In addition, to support 1000 busy hour call attempts, 6 kbps must be added for a total of 358 kbps. If only voice is going to be carried on the segment, then a 384 kbps segment (6 B-channels) is sufficient. If voice and data are going to be mixed on the segment, then at least 25% (89.5 kbps) should be added, or more, based on the amount of data traffic desired. In this case, a total of 447 kbps will be required which would best be supported by a 512 kbps segment (8 B-channels). This would result in an expected jitter of 20 ms in the voice traffic. BIPU-Q1A Installation 1. Make sure the BIPS1A daughter card is securely installed onto the BIPU-Q1A PCB (the BIPS1A is installed on the BIPU-Q1A at the factory). See Figure 9-2 on page 9-6. 2. Install the BIPU-Q1A into one of the following slots: • CTX100 Base and Expansion Cabinet slots (1~8, 16 channels per slot per Program 100) • CTX670 Base Cabinet slots (1~8, 16 channels per slot per Program 100) • CTX670 Expansion Cabinet slots (1~6, 16 channels per slot per Program 100) 3. Follow the procedure in Chapter 2 – Strata CTX Configuration to check the cabinet power factor. 4. Power up the system. Refer to Table 9-2 for status indicators. 5. Program the CTX per the instructions in the Strata CTX Programming Manual. Connect BIPU-Q1A to LAN, Server or Router 1. Plug one end of a straight-through CAT5/5e/6 LAN cable into the RJ45 Ethernet port on the BIPU-Q1A PCB in the CTX. (See Figure 9-2 on page 9-6.) 2. Plug the other end of the BIPU-Q1A CAT5/5e/6 LAN cord into a LAN, server or router jack. Note The BIPU-M2A or Q1A-switch cables are straight-through cables. Table 9-14 BIPU-Q1A or BIPU-M2A Buttons, LEDs and Jumpers Indicator Definition RD - Indicates BIPU-M2A or BIPUQ1A receives data from switch. Ethernet Port LEDs LINK - Indicates data activity between BIPU-M2A and switch SD - Indicates BIPU-M2A or BIPUQ1A sends data to switch. Heartbeat LEDs Flashes at a steady rate to indicate BIPU-M1A or BIPU-M2A or BIPUQ1A is operating normally. Status/Alarm LEDs For Toshiba Field Support Engineering use only. Reset button Use when requested by Toshiba Field Support Engineer. RS232 Maintenance Jack For Toshiba Field Support Engineers only. Figure 9-17 BIPU-Q1A or BIPU-M2A PCB 9-42 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 10 MDF PCB Wiring This chapter contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies for the universal slot PCBs of the Strata CTX system. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB which provides the interface for, or controls the operation of, the associated equipment as listed below: Stations DKTs (BPCI, DDSS, DDCB, ADM and BATU) DKTs and DDSS PCB ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, BWDKU PDKU External Power for DKTs and DDCB DKTs or Standard Phones Standard Telephone CO Lines Analog Ground Start BDKU, PDKU RDSU ASTU, RSTU, RDSU, RSTS, PSTU PCB RGLU RCOU/RCOS Analog E911 RMCU/RMCS Caller ID with RGLU or RCOU/RCOS Analog DID/CO Lines Analog E&M Tie Lines Option Interface External Paging, Night Bell, Night Transfer Door Lock and BGM mute control Power Failure DPFT Power Failure Transfer box RCIU/RCIS RDDU REMU PEMU PCB MDF PCB Wiring Analog Loop Start BIOU PCB DPFT Notes • Before using the Connect Record Sheets (following each Wiring Diagram), make copies for future use. • The RDTU2 cable connection information is in Chapter 8 – T1. • The RDTU, RBUU, RBUS cable connection is in Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 10-1 MDF PCB Wiring Station Loop Lengths Station Loop Lengths In a single site installation, the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets must be placed within the allowed maximum distance of each other as designated by Table 10-1 Table 10-1 Station Loop Lengths1 Maximum line length (24 AWG) Mode 1 Pair2 2 Pair 1 Pair plus external power 3 DKT3000 or DKT2000-series 4 DKT with BVSU or DVSU DKT with BHEU or HHEU 1000 ft. (303m) DKT with BPCI DKT with BPCI + BHEU DKT with BVSU + BHEU or DVSU + HHEU DKT with DADM3020 or DADM2020 (1 ADM)2 675 ft. (204m) DKT with DADM3020 or DADM2020 (2 ADMs)2 500 ft. (151m) 1000 ft. (303m) 1000 ft. (303m) n/a n/a 1000 ft. (303m) 1000 ft. (303m) n/a n/a DDSS3060 or DDSS2060 BATI, RATI 1000 ft. (303m) DDCB3 Approx. 3000 ft. (909 m) with 150 ohm device. 5 Standard telephones, voice mail, AA, etc. Approx. 9000 ft. (2727 m) with 150 ohm device.5 Approx. 21000 ft. (6363 m) with 150 ohm device.5 The IP telephone interface is 10Base-T/100Base-TX and requires CAT5/5e/6 twisted pair cabling. IPT1020-SD The maximum distance between the IP telephone jack and the ethernet device it connects to is 100 meters (328 ft.). This includes the 3 meter (9.84 ft.) straight-through CAT5 cable (black) supplied with the IP telephone. Ethernet devices include BIPU-M2A, BIPU-M1A servers, routers, etc. 1. When the system is powered by backup battery, range may be less as the backup battery is discharged. 2. One-pair wiring must be used with BWDKU and BDKS (see Figure 10-3 on page 10-6). The BWDKU and BDKS do not support two pair wiring. 3. Two-pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range in all cases. 4. BDKS and BWDKU do not provide the power wire pair; an external power supply is required to achieve maximum range (see Figure 10-6 on page 10-9). 5. See manufacturer’s product specifications for exact resistance of device. 10-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Loop Lengths DKT3000-series telephone loop limits are in Table 10-2. Table 10-2 Loop Limits for DKT3000-series Telephones Telephone/Device DKT3000-series or DKT2000series models3, DKT with BVSU or DVSU or DKT with BHEU or HHEU Power Supply Unit (PSU) or Battery Backup Maximum line length (24 AWG) 1 Pair1 2 Pair 1 Pair plus external power2 PSU 1000 ft. (303m) Battery Backup 675 ft. (204m) PSU 1000 ft. (303m) Battery Backup 500 ft. (151m) PSU 1000 ft. (303m) Battery Backup 500 ft. (151m) DKT with DADM3020 or DADM2020 (1 ADM) PSU 675 ft. (204m) Battery Backup 165 ft. (50m) DKT with DADM3020 or DADM2020 (2 ADMs) PSU 500 ft. (151m) Battery Backup 33 ft. (10m) 330 ft. (100m) PSU 1000 ft. (303m) 1000 ft. (303m) Battery Backup 675 ft. (204m) 1000 ft. (303m) PSU 1000 ft. (303m) n/a n/a Battery Backup 1000 ft. (303m) n/a n/a PSU 1000 ft. (303m) 1000 ft. (303m) 1000 ft. (303m) Battery Backup 165 ft. (50m) 675 ft. (204m) 1000 ft. (303m) DKT with BPCI DKT with BPCI + BHEU DDSS3060 or DDSS2060 BATI, RATI DDCB3A 1000 ft. (303m) 1000 ft. (303m) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring 1. One pair wiring must be used with BWDKU. The BWDKU does not support two pair wiring. 2. Two pair wiring or optional telephone power supply is required to achieve maximum range in all cases. 3. BDKS does not provide the power wire pair, an external power supply is required to achieve maximum range (see Figure 10-2). 10-3 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Station Wiring Diagrams Building #1 Building #2 HESB PSTU RSTU/RSTU2/ RSTU3/ RDSU/RSTS/ ASTU/BSTU Standard Telephone DDSS Console Digital Telephone Digital Telephone or Cordless Base ADKU, BDKU/BDKS, BWDKU or PDKU Console Handset POW DDCB DTR PC Attendant Console DSR BATI MDFB MDFB DDCB RDTU, BPTU or RPTU 6687 CSU T1 Span Line or ISDN PRI Line Earth Ground REMU E&M Tie Line (to PSTA) RDDU DID Line Ground/Loop/ISDN BRI/ (to PSTA) E911 CAMA Lines (Gas tube secondary protectors provided on the interface cards per UL requirements. PCOU, RCOU/RCOS RGLU, RCIU/RCIS, RBUU/RBUS, RBSU/RBSS, RMCU/RCMS Secondary protectors – standard voltage Earth Ground Important! Figure 10-1 10-4 Secondary protectors – low voltage To protect against transient voltages and currents, solid state secondary protectors must be installed if there is outside wiring, and on all DID and E&M Tie lines. These protectors, which contain fast semiconductors in addition to fuses, shall comply with the requirements for secondary protectors for communication circuits, UL 497A. Care must be taken to ensure that they are very well grounded to a reliable earth ground. Recommended protectors are available in the fast Series 6 line from ONEAC Corp., Libertyville, Illinois 60048, (800) 327-8801. Install and test the secondary protectors precisely to the installation instructions of the manufacturer. Strata CTX Secondary Protector Diagram Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams ADKU and BDKU/BDKS Digital Station Wiring To ADKU or BDKU/BDKS W/Female Connector W-BL ADKU or BDKU BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 (-) (GND) T10 R10 T11 R11 T12 R12 T13 R13 T14 R14 T15 R15 T16 R16 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add. Power) PR1 (Add. Power) Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (1 or 2 pair. See Note 1.) Circuit 2 R GN BK Y W BL R1 Circuit 3 T1 PT1 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 2 3 4 5 PR Circuit 5 TR GND PR PT Modular Cord (-) T GND R (-) PT Circuit 6 Digital Telephone (with or w/o ADM, BDIU-DI), DSS, BATI or DDCB. Circuit 7 RPCI and PDIU-DI are not supported. Circuit 8 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG T9 (Voice/Data R9 (Voice/Data) Circuit 10 MDF PCB Wiring BDKS 26 Circuit 11 Circuit 12 R GN BK Y W BL R1 Circuit 13 Circuit 14 Circuit 15 T1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 16 3 4 (-) T Not Used 66M150 Split Block RJ11 Modular Cord GND R Notes 1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Table 10-1. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. 2. Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. Figure 10-2 Strata CTX I&M Digital Telephone (with or w/o ADM, BDIU-DI), DSS, BATI or DDCB. 5501 RPCI and PDIU-DI are not supported. ADKU and BDKU/BDKS (DKT, DDCB, ADM, DDS, BATI, BDIU-DI) Wiring 06/04 10-5 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams BWDKU Digital Station Wiring To BWDKU W/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) T1 (Voice/Data) (GND) R1 (Voice/Data) T2 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (1 or 2 pair. See Note 1.) Circuit 2 R2 R GN BK Y W BL R1 T3 R3 T1 Circuit 3 T4 R4 Circuit 4 6 5 4 3 2 1 T5 R5 Circuit 5 PR T6 R6 Circuit 6 RJ11 2 3 4 5 TR GND PR PT Modular Cord T7 R7 RPCI and PDIU-DI are not supported. Circuit 8 (-) (GND) T10 R10 T11 R11 T12 R12 T13 R13 T14 R14 T15 R15 T16 R16 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG T9 (Voice/Data R9 (Voice/Data) Circuit 10 Circuit 11 Circuit 12 R GN BK Y W BL R1 Circuit 13 Circuit 14 Circuit 15 T1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 16 3 4 (-) T Not Used 66M150 Split Block (-) PT GND R Digital Telephone (with or w/o ADM, BDIU-DI), DSS, BATI or DDCB. Circuit 7 T8 R8 (-) T Modular Cord GND R Digital Telephone (with or w/o ADM, BDIU-DI), DSS, BATI or DDCB. 6931 Figure 10-3 10-6 RPCI and PDIU-DI are not supported. BWDKU Digital Station Wiring Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams To Telephone T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Figure 10-4 Strata CTX I&M Y W BL T2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 ASTU 3 4 Modular Cord Same 4 R3 3 T3 4 R1 3 T1 J2 J1 ASTU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ11 MDF PCB Wiring 12 BK R2 6-1 11 T1 6-1 11 GN 43 9 10 R R1 43 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 6639 ASTU Wiring 06/04 10-7 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams PDKU Digital Station Wiring 25-Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To PDKU W/Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) T2 R2 PT2 PR2 T3 R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 T1 (Voice/Data) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Add. Power) PR1 (Add. Power) Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24 AWG (1 or 2 pair. See Note 1.) Circuit 2 R GN BK Y W BL R1 T1 PT1 Circuit 3 PR1 RJ11 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 2 3 4 5 PR Circuit 5 Modular Cord TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Circuit 6 Circuit 7 Circuit 8 Digital Telephone (with or w/o ADM, DSS, or DDCB. BATI, BPCI, RPCI, and PDIU-DI are not supported with PDKU. With the PDKU, 3000-series DKTs function as 2000-series DKTS 16 character LCD, no Spdial or LCD Feature buttons. Not Used 66M150 Split Block 5663 Notes 1. T/R wires are always required; PT/PR are additional power wires required only for long station runs per Table 10-1. PT/PR may be used with normal station runs also. Voltage levels: T, PT = -26.3~27.8 VDC R, PR = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. Figure 10-5 10-8 PDKU Wiring Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Digital Telephone DSS and DDCB External Power Connection W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Jacketed Twisted Pairs 24AWG (1 Pair) Station Cabling Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 (-) T1 (Voice/Data) (GND) R1 (Voice/Data) PT1 (Not Used) RT2 T2 DC Output R2 CKT 2 PT2 PR2 AC/DC External T3 Power Source R3 PT3 PR3 T4 R4 PT4 PR4 T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 T8 R8 PT8 PR8 R GN BK Y W BL R1 CKT 3 T1 AC Input 6 5 4 3 2 1 CKT 4 To 120VAC Commercial Power Outlet 2 3 4 5 TR 2-Pair Modular Cord Required CKT 5 RJ11 CKT 6 CKT 7 (-) T GND R CKT 8 Digital Telephone (with or w/out BPCI-DI, ADM) or... DDSS, DDCB, BATI PT/PR power wires are not available on the BDKS or BWDKU. AC/DC External Power Source Specifications: AC IN: 120VAC ± 10% DC OUT: 24VDC ± 10% 160 MA (Min.) DC Current 200 MV P-P (Max) AC Ripple On DC Output AC/DC power supplies that meet the above requirements are available from most telephone equipment supply houses. MDF PCB Wiring 25-PAIR CABLE W/MALE AMP CONNECTOR BDKU or PDKU Connector External Power Straps: If the external power is installed, cut the external power straps located inside the digital telephone DDSS, DDCB. See Table 10-1 on page 10-2 for external power 5665 Figure 10-6 Strata CTX I&M Digital Telephone DSS and DDCB External Power Connection 06/04 10-9 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Table 10-3 BDKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record KSU Slot Number MDF Block Number Color Code 10-10 Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O PRW-T O-W PRW-R W-G T G-W R W-Br PRW-T Br-W PRW-R W-S T S-W R R-Bl PRW-T Bl-R PRW-R R-O T O-R R R-G PRW-T G-R PRW-R R-Br T Br-R R R-S PRW-T S-R PRW-R Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O PRW-T O-Bk PRW-R Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br PRW-T Br-Bk PRW-R Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl PRW-T Bl-Y PRW-R Y-O T O-Y R Y-GN T GN-Y R Y-BR T BR-Y R Y-S T S-Y R V-BL T BL-V R V-O T O-V R V-GN T GN-V R V-BR T BR-V R CKT PDN Intercom Device/Standard Telephone 1 2 3 4 ADKU, BDKU or PDKU 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 BDKS 12 13 14 15 16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams RDSU Wiring To RDSU W/Female Connector 25-Pair Cable With Male Amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Station Cabling Jacketed Twisted Pairs (24 AWG) Tip 1 RJ11 Ring 1 R Not Used Tip 2 (See Note) RJ11 Ring 2 R GN BK Y W BL GN 654321 T3 R3 Not Used T4 R4 Not Used T5 R5 PT5 PR5 T6 R6 PT6 PR6 T7 R7 PT7 PR7 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) Standard Telephone Circuits 3 and 4 available with optional RSTS PCB. Wire the same as Circuits 1 and 2. BK Y W BL Tip Voice Mail Port Or Similar Device 654321 TIP Ring Standard Telephone 1 RING Standard Telephone 2 Voice Mail Port Or Similar Device Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or PDIU-DS or DDCB Circuit 6 to DKT 6 or PDIU-DS Circuit 7 to DKT 7 or PDIU-DS T8 (Voice/Data) R8 (Voice/Data) PT (Add Power) PR (Add Power) R GN BK Y W BL R8 PT8 MDF PCB Wiring W-S Bridging Clips 1 T8 PR8 RJ11 Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) -24VDC (J1, 25) DG -24V 2 3 4 5 PR TR PT GND PR (-) T GND R (-) PT Modular Cord 66M150 SPLIT BLOCK Digital Telephone (with or w/o ADM, DSS, or DDCB. BATI, BPCI, RPCI, and PDIU-DI are not supported with PDKU. With the PDKU, 3000-series DKTs function as 2000-series DKTS: 16 character LCD, no Spdial or LCD Feature buttons. Figure 10-7 Strata CTX I&M Digital Telephone 1603 RDSU Wiring 06/04 10-11 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Table 10-4 RDSU Station MDF Cross Connect Record MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S T S-W R R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O T O-R R R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br T Br-R R R-S PWRT S-R PWRR Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O PWRT O-Bk PWRR Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br PWRT Br-Bk PWRR Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl PWRT Bl-Y PWRR V-S Data Ground S-V -24VDC KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Directory Number 1 (Standard) 2 (Standard) 3 (Standard) (RSTS) 4 (Standard) (RSTS) 5 (Digital) 6 (Digital) 7 (Digital) 8 (Digital) N/A N/A N/A Device/Standard Telephone Location Indicate if separate BGM source connected to Circuit 2. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 DPFT – Power Failure Transfer Box Note Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. 10-12 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams RSTU or PSTU Analog Devices Wiring W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Jacketed Twisted Station Cable 24 AWG Tip 1 Ring 1 Not Used T2 R2 (See Notes) R GN BK Y W BL Not Used T3 R3 Not Used T4 R4 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not Used 1 2 3 4 5 6 T5 R5 Not Used Modular Cord T6 R6 Tip Ring Not Used Standard Telephone, Voice Mail Port, ACD/Auto Attendant Digital Announcer, or Similar Device T7 R7 Not Used T8 R8 Notes • An alternate BGM source can be connected to Circuit 2 of RSTU or PSTU. An isolation transformer may be required when connecting BGM to RSTU or PSTU. • Two ringers maximum. MDF PCB Wiring 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To RSTU or PSTU w/Female Connector Not Used DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) -24 Volts (J1, 25) DG -24V 5664 66M150 Split Block Figure 10-8 Strata CTX I&M RSTU or PSTU Wiring 06/04 10-13 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Table 10-5 RSTU/RSTU2/RDSU/RSTS/PSTU/PSTU2 Station MDF Cross Connect Record MDF Block Number Color Code Designation W-Bl T Bl-W R W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G T G-W R W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S T S-W R R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O T O-R R R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br T Br-R R R-S Not Used S-R Not Used Bk-Bl T Bl-Bk R Bk-O Not Used O-Bk Not Used Bk-G T G-Bk R Bk-Br Not Used Br-Bk Not Used Bk-S T S-Bk R Y-Bl Not Used Bl-Y Not Used V-S Data Ground S-V -24VDC KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone Location 1 2 Indicate if separate BGM source. 3 4 5 6 7 8 N/A N/A N/A DPFT – Power Failure Transfer Box Note Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. 10-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs Table 10-6 Pair Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 Color Code W-BI BI-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-BI BI-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-BI BI-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y Y-O Lead Designation R 17 O-Y T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R T R Spare Spare 18T 43 Y-G Spare R 18 G-Y Spare 19T 44 Y-Br Spare R 19 Br-Y Spare 20T 45 Y-S Spare R 20 S-Y Spare 21T 46 V-Bl Spare R 21 Bl-V 22T 47 V-O Spare Spare R 22 O-V Spare 23T 48 V-G Spare R 23 G-V Spare 24T 49 V-Br Spare R 24 Br-V Spare 25T 50 V-S Spare R 25 S-V Spare Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Function TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU TIP-TEL RING-TEL TIP-RSTU/RSTU/RDSU RING-PSTU/RSTU/RDSU PSTU/RSTU PCB Position #1 #1 #1 #1 #2 #2 #2 #2 #3 #3 #3 #3 #4 #4 #4 #4 #5 #5 #5 #5 #6 #6 #6 #6 #7 #7 #7 #7 #8 #8 #8 #8 MDF PCB Wiring 1t R 2T R 3T R 4T R 5T R 6T R 7T R 8T R 9T R 10T R 11T R 12T R 13T R 14T R 15T R 16T R 17T DPFT Connector J2/Terminal Sequence & Designations/Station Line Connection 10-15 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Table 10-7 Pair 10-16 DPFT Connector J1/Terminal Sequence & Designations/CO Line Connection & DPFT Control Pin Color Code Lead Designation Function PSTU/RSTU PCB Position 1t 26 W-BI T TIP-CO #1 R 1 BI-W R RING-CO #1 2T 27 W-O T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #1 #1 R 2 O-W R RING-PCOU/RCOU 3T 28 W-G T TIP-CO #2 R 3 G-W R RING-CO #2 4T 29 W-Br T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #2 R 4 Br-W R RING-PCOU/RCOU #2 5T 30 W-S T TIP-CO #3 R 5 S-W R RING-CO #3 6T 31 R-BI T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #3 R 6 BI-R R RING-PCOU/RCOU #3 7T 32 R-O T TIP-CO #4 R 7 O-R R RING-CO #4 8T 33 R-G T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #4 R 8 G-R R RING-PCOU/RCOU #4 9T 34 R-Br T TIP-CO #5 R 9 Br-R R RING-CO #5 10T 35 R-S T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #5 R 10 S-R R RING-PCOU/RCOU #5 11T 36 Bk-BI T TIP-CO #6 R 11 BI-Bk R RING-CO #6 12T 37 Bk-O T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #6 R 12 O-Bk R RING-PCOU/RCOU #6 13T 38 Bk-G T TIP-CO #7 R 13 G-Bk R RING-CO #7 14T 39 Bk-Br T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #7 R 14 Br-Bk R RING-PCOU/RCOU #7 15T 40 Bk-S T TIP-CO #8 R 15 S-Bk R RING-CO #8 16T 41 Y-Bl T TIP-PCOU/RCOU #8 R 16 Bl-Y R RING-PCOU/RCOU #8 17T 42 Y-O Spare R 17 O-Y Spare 18T 43 Y-G Spare R 18 G-Y Spare 19T 44 Y-Br Spare R 19 Br-Y Spare 20T 45 Y-S Spare R 20 S-Y Spare 21T 46 V-Bl Spare R 21 Bl-V Spare 22T 47 V-O Spare R 22 O-V Spare 23T 48 V-G Spare R 23 G-V Spare 24T 49 V-Br Spare R 24 Br-V Spare 25T 50 V-S PFT DG PFT GROUND (INPUT) RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN50 R 25 S-V PFT -24V PFT -24V (INPUT) RDSU/RSTU/PSTU/PIN25 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams CO Line Wiring Diagrams RGLU2, RCOU or PCOU Wiring To Network Bridging Clips T1 R1 T2 R2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Figure 10-9 Strata CTX I&M Y W BL T2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 RGLU or PCOU #4 #3 #2 #1 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 CO3+4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 CO1+2 MDF PCB Wiring 12 BK R2 6-1 11 T1 6-1 11 GN 6 543 21 9 10 R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 PCOU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 (PCOU), 02GS2 (RGLU2) 1598 RGLU2, RCOU or PCOU Wiring 06/04 10-17 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Table 10-8 MDF Block Number 10-18 CO Line (RCOU/RCOS, RGLU2, RDDU, PEMU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU) MDF Cross Connect Record CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number MDF Block Number CO Line Number PCB Type and Cabinet Slot Number Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams RCOU/RCOS Wiring To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R8 R7 T7 T8 Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 Same 5 4 3 2 R6 R5 T5 T6 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 8 7 6 5 7+8 MDF PCB Wiring 15 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-type or Equivalent 3+4 5+6 1-6 14 15 BL 1-6 13 14 W T2 1+2 6-1 13 Y 6-1 12 BK R2 6 543 21 11 12 T1 6 543 21 11 GN 6 543 21 9 10 R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 02LS2 RCOU RCOS 1602 Figure 10-10 CO to RCOU Wiring Strata CTX I&M 06/04 10-19 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams RMCU/RMCS Wiring Diagram RJ-11 2-pin To Network or PSAP T1 R1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ring Bridging Clips Tip 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 T1 R1 R 6 5 4 3 2 1 GN R1 T1 BK Y W BL T2 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 Ring 21 21 Tip 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 Ring 27 27 28 28 Tip 29 29 NB LED 30 30 CB LED 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 Ring 35 35 36 36 Tip 37 37 NB LED 38 38 CB LED 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 NB LED 44 44 CB LED 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block R2 6 5 4 3 2 1 RMCU1A RCMS1A (2/2) 4 3 CAMA #4 RJ11 2-Pin Modular Connector Network Busy (NB) LED Customer Busy (CB) LED 4 3 CAMA #3 LEDs (indicates trunk condition) RCMS1A (1/2) Ring Tip 4 3 4 3 CAMA #2 CAMA #1 Only one circuit is shown connected. 2798 NOTE: Make sure Tip and Ring are connected properly, CAMA lines are polarity sensitive. Figure 10-11 RMCU/RMCS Wiring Diagram 10-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS Wiring Bridging Jumper Wires R1 R GN R T1 R2 BK BK 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 T1 BK 6 5 4 3 2 1 T2 Y R2 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL W GN R1 T2 Y R2 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL W R T1 T2 Y GN R1 Dealer Supplied Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent (See Notes) BL W 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 CKT 7&8 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 Same CKT 3&4 6-1 Same Same 1-6 CKT 3&4 6 54 3 2 1 R4 R3 T3 T4 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 Same Modular Cords 1-6 4-Wire Modular Cord 4-Wire Modular Cord Telco RJ14C Modular Jack CKT 5&6 Telco RJ21X CKT 1&2 Pin-out Telco Jacks RJ14C Pin-out RGLU/RCOU/RCOS/PCOU/TCOU RCIU RCIS Installer Cross Connect Customer Supplied Modular Jacks 4-Wire Modular Cord Network CKT 1&2 1 RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord 2 RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord RJ14C MDF PCB Wiring Network Jack: RJ14C/RJ21X FIC: 02LS2 (Loop Start) OR 02GS2 (Ground Start) R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 R2 R1 T1 T2 6-1 5 4 3 2 6 54 3 2 1 T1 LINE X R1 T2 LINE Y R2 Duplex Modular Jack (AA-104A-4 or Equivalent) RJ21X 4-Wire Connector (267A2 Or Equivalent) Telco RJ21X 1 RCOU 4-Wire Modular Cord 2 RCIU/RCIS 4-Wire Modular Cord Network 1608 4-Wire Single Modular Jack (RJ14C) from Telco Note 4-wire modular jacks such as graybar part number AA-104A-4 could be used in place of the two modular jacks; or, a T-connector such as graybar part number 267A2 Adaptor could be used. Figure 10-12 RCIU1/RCIS or RCIU2/RCIS MDF Wiring Diagram Strata CTX I&M 06/04 10-21 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams DID and Tie Line Wiring To Network T1 R1 T2 R2 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block Y W BL T2 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 RDDU 4 3 2 1 Modular Cord Same 5 4 3 2 R4 R3 T3 T4 5 4 3 2 R2 R1 T1 T2 J2 J1 6-1 11 12 BK R2 6-1 11 T1 6 543 21 9 10 GN R R1 6 543 21 9 10 T1 R1 T2 R2 RDDU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ14C FIC: 1605 Figure 10-13 MDF Wiring/DID CO Lines to RDDU 10-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams REMU #4 #3 #2 #1 Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #4 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #3 To Network Jack Same Pinout as Line #1 8-1 Line #2 8-1 Line #1 To Network Jack (USOC: RJ1CX) LEAD — PIN # SB M — — 8 7 SG T — — 6 5 R — 4 E — 3 4WR1 — 2 4WT1 — 1 MDF PCB Wiring To Network Jack 1600 Figure 10-14 MDF Wiring REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II Strata CTX I&M 06/04 10-23 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams PEMU Wiring To Network T R E M Bridging Clips 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 R GN R T * BK Y W BL Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type or Equivalent * M E 6 5 4 3 2 1 PEMU 2-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 1 2 3 4 5 6 * * *Not Used Modular Cord 66M150 Split Block Same Same Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 E *R T *M *R T *M *R T *M *R T *M #4 #3 #2 6-1 6 7 6-1 5 6 6-1 4 5 6-1 3 4 6543 21 2 3 6543 21 2 T R E M 6543 21 1 6543 21 1 #1 PEMU Pin-out Network Jack: RJ2EX FIC: TL11M 1587 Figure 10-15 MDF Wiring/2-Wire Tie Line to PEMU 10-24 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 MDF PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams To Network T R T1 R1 E M Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 T R T1 R1 E M R R GN T 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 DK Wire Pair Functions 50 DK, Transmit T, R DK, Receive T1, R1 BK Y T1 E W BL M PEMU 4-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 E R1 R T T1 M 6-1 #4 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 6-1 #3 Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 #2 6 5 4 3 2 1 E R1 R T T1 M 65 43 21 6-1 #1 Network Jack: RJ2GX FIC: TL31M 66M150 Split Block Signaling MDF PCB Wiring Same 6 5 4 3 2 1 65 43 21 Modular Cord 65 43 21 50 R1 Telco-provided Modular Block, 625-Type Or Equivalent PEMU Pin-out E, M 1588 Figure 10-17 MDF Wiring/4-Wire Tie Line to PEMU Strata CTX I&M 06/04 10-25 MDF PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagram Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagram This section covers wiring for the option interface PCB, the BIOU, which enables external paging, Night Bell, Night Transfer, Door Lock and BGM mute control. For more information and connection diagrams, see “External Page with BIOU Interface” on page 12-10. 25 Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To BIOU With Female Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 5493 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 66M150 Split Block CRT1 CRR1 Control Relay 1 Contacts CRT2 CRR2 Control Relay 2 Contacts CRT3 CRR3 Control Relay 3 Contacts CRT4 CRR4 Control Relay 4 Contacts ALMT ALMR ALMT Sensor (not used in CTX) (ALMR is BIOU Digital Circuit Ground) SPTO SPRO 600 ohm Page Output (BIOU, SW600 must be set to SPO) Page In 1 Page Out 1 Zone 1 Page In 2 Page Out 2 Zone 2 Page In 3 Page Out 3 Zone 3 Page In 4 Page Out 4 Zone 4 Zone Page Common SPT1 SPR1 3 Watt Page Output (BIOU, SW600 must be set to SP1) (SPR1 is BIOU Analog Circuit Ground) Figure 10-18 MDF Wiring to BIOU 10-26 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 11 This chapter provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata CTX systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. The Strata CTX systems can support Toshiba corded and cordless digital telephones, as well as most standard telephones provided by other suppliers. The digital telephone information in this chapter applies to the 3000-series and 2000-series telephones that connect to the PDKU, ADKU or BDKU/BDKS interface. Strata CTX does not support Toshiba electronic telephones (EKT) or other devices supported by the PEKU and PESU interface PCBs. For information on earlier models, refer to the appropriate Strata DK manual. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles and add-on modules also appear in this chapter. Note Strata IP telephones are discussed in the IPT chapter of this document. 3000-series Digital Telephones Telephone The 3000-series digital telephone (DKT) models consist of: • DKT3010-S (10-button speakerphone model which enables users to make and receive outside and internal calls without lifting the handset) • DKT3020-S (20-button speakerphone model which enables users to make and receive outside and internal calls without lifting the handset) • DKT3010-SD (10-button speakerphone model equipped with an LCD that displays two rows of 24-characters. The speakerphone enables users to make and receive outside and internal calls without lifting the handset.) • DKT3014-SDL (14-button speakerphone model equipped with 16 buttons for LCD soft keys and a large LCD. The large LCD accommodates up to eight rows of 24 characters on a screen which tilts for easy viewing.) • DKT3001 (single line, digital telephone that enables users to make and receive outside and internal calls using the handset.) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus • DKT3020-SD (20-button speakerphone model equipped with an LCD that displays two rows of 24-characters. The speakerphone enables users to make and receive outside and internal calls without lifting the handset.) 11-1 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Installation 3000-series Telephone Installation Digital Telephone System Connection The following provides information on how to connect all 3000-series DKTs to the Strata CTX systems. 3000-series DKTs can be connected to the BDKU/BDKS and/or the PDKU interface PCB. To obtain all capabilities, the DKT3000-series telephone must be connected to the BDKU/ BDKS. For details on feature availability per station PCB, see Table 11-1. Table 11-1 DKT3000 Operation with Strata CTX and DK Systems DKT3000 Telephone and Feature Strata CTX System with BDKU/BDKS Strata CTX system w/ PDKU and DK System w/ PDKU or BDKU DKT3020/3010 Basic LCD 2 x 24 characters 2 x 16 characters, leftjustified DKT3014 Large LCD 8 x 24 characters with VM and Directory Dial softkeys 2 x 16 characters, leftjustified, no VM and Directory Dial softkeys LCD Feature button Operational Not operational Fixed Spdial button Operational Not operational DKT3000 telephones per cabinet slot 16 telephones max. 8 telephones max. DKT3000 Programming Mode “A” (Beep Tone On/Off, etc.) Program Mode “A” is for telephone options that are controlled by the ROM inside the telephone. Operational Operational Operational Strata CTX with PDKU is operational. DK system with PDKU or BDKU is not operational. DKT3000 Programming Mode “B” (Flexible Buttons, One Touch, etc.) Program Mode “B” is for telephone options controlled by the Strata CTX670 processor and database memory. (See the Strata CTX DKT3000/2000-series Digital Telephone User Guide.) Before installing any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes: WARNING! 11-2 ³ Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm. ³ Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. ³ Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. ³ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. ³ If telephone, DSS console, door phone control box, or door phone wiring exits the building, external secondary protection is required. See Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs CAUTION! When installing the station cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. CAUTION! Do not use cleansers that contain benzene, paint thinner, alcohol or other solvents on the telephone's rubber feet. The color of the rubber may transfer to the desk or mounting surface. Digital telephones connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If using 24 AWG cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for digital telephones to operate effectively at up to 1000 feet from the system. Digital telephones that are equipped with ADMs should have two-pair (or external power) to function effectively at this distance. This also applies to digital telephones supported by systems that must operate with battery reserve power (see Chapter 4 – Strata CTX670 Installation for more information). To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular digital telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 7 ft. (the maximum allowed is 25 ft.). Notes ● Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs Digital telephones can be upgraded with option PCBs to add a number of features. Each of these upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it is connected to and is not considered a station. See Table 11-2 for more information. Table 11-2 3000 Telephone Subassembly Upgrades No. per Phone BVSU1 1 Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA): Provides interface for digital telephone to receive Speaker OCA. Not required for Handset/Headset OCA. BHEU or HHEU 1 Headset and external ringer telephone interface: Can be installed with BVSU, BPCI or DADM. (See “Telephone Headset (BHEU) Upgrade” on page 11-7 for installation instructions.) BPCI 1 TAPI PC application and data calling interfaces. DADM30201 1 or 2 Function Station Apparatus Subassembly Add-on Module (ADM): Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two ADMs) additional feature buttons. 1. Only one of these options is allowed per telephone: BVSU, BPCI or DADM. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-3 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs Some of the option PCBs are compatible, meaning that more than one option can be added to a telephone. The following table shows which options are compatible. Table 11-3 Station Option Interface PCB Compatibility Item BPCI BPCI BHEU/ HHEU BVSU ADM X NC NC BHEU/HHEU X BVSU NC X X ADM NC X X NC NC X = Compatible, can be used together in the same telephone. NC = Not compatible, cannot be used together in the same telephone. Option PCBs must be compatible with type of telephone (i.e., 3000- or 2000-series) they are installed in (see Table 11-4 for compatibility). Table 11-4 DKT3000 and DKT2000 Component Compatibility Item 3000-series DKT DADM2020 only DADM3020, DADM3120 Desktop Computer Telephony Interface (CTI) n/a BPCI only Speaker OCA BVSU or DVSU BVSU only BTSD for DKT BTSD for DKT and BTSA for DKT with ADM(s) Tilt Stands Item 11-4 2000-series DKT Add-on Modules 2000- and 3000-series DKTs Headset Interface HHEU2 and BHEU External Ringer HHEU2/HESB and BHEU/HESB Cordless Telephones DKT2104 and DKT2004. When these cordless telephones are connected to a DKT3000, the DKT3000 must be placed in DKT2000 mode (see “DKT2000 Mode On/Off” on page 11-19). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (BVSU) To receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls over the digital telephone speaker, a digital telephone must be upgraded with a BVSU; the telephone making the call does not require a BVSU. Digital telephones do not require an additional wire pair to receive Speaker OCA call. The BVSU is not necessary to receive handset OCA. BVSU Upgrade Installation for DKT3000-series Telephones 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base (see Figure 11-2). 2. On the BVSU (see Figure 11-1, set strip pins SW1 and SW2 per Table 11-5. 20 Mu 30 20 A SW2 HFU SW1 SPF BVSU1A 6068 Figure 11-1 Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (BVSU1A) Table 11-5 BVSU Jumper Settings Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Description 30 (default) - use for DKT3000 telephones. SW1 6-terminal jumper plug SW2 3-terminal jumper plug 20 Mu - use for DKT2000 telephones in Mu Law countries, including U.S. and Canada. 20A - use for DKT2000 in A Law countries. SPF (default setting). Use for all DKT3000 DKT2000 telephones, except the DKT2010-H. 3. Slide the BVSU under the tabs. 4. Position the BVSU holes over the standoffs and secure with the two provided screws. (Two large head screws for DKT3000s, four smaller head crews for the DKT2000.) 5. Connect the BVSU wire plugs to the two “PCI/VSU” connectors on the PCB inside the phone, with the red wire on the side where “RED” is silk-screened on the DKT PCB (see Figures 11-7 and 11-8). 6. Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus HFU - use for DKT2010-H telephones. 11-5 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs Telephone Base Captive Screws (One in Each Corner) Knock out for HHEU or BHEU Telephone Housing Telephone PCB 6122 Figure 11-2 Removing Telephone Base Fasten Two Screws To PCI/VSU Connectors on Telephone DKT3000-series, slide the BVSU under base tabs Red Wire 6066 Figure 11-3 BVSU Installation 11-6 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs Telephone Headset (BHEU) Upgrade The BHEU can be installed into the DKT3000-series telephones to enable headset or external ringer use. For information on connecting the external ringer, refer to “Telephone (BHEU) to External Speaker (HESB) Cable Connection” on page 12-18. The BHEU can also be installed into DKT3010 and DKT3020 telephones that have either a BVSU or BPCI installed. For DKT3001 and DKT3014 telephones, the installation is same as below, only the connector location is different. Headset Modular Connector Transmission Level BHEU1A AUTO CARBON NORMAL SW2 LOW SW1 5502 BHEU Installation 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. Knock out hole for the BHEU cord (see Figure 11-2). 2. If you are connecting an ECM or Carbon-type headset to the BHEU, leave the BHEU jumper in the “AUTO” position (see Figure 11-4). P1 RED “AUTO” enables the BHEU current detector to determine which headset type is connected (less than 2mA detects EMC and more than 2mA detects Carbon). If, in a rare case the current is marginal using a carbon headset (only) and performance is not adequate, set the jumper to “CARBON.” Figure 11-4 BHEU PCB Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-7 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs 3. Make sure that the SW2 jumper plug is set to “NORMAL.” 4. If you do not want the handset receiver to work when the handset is on-hook and a headset (connected to BHEU) is being used, cut the HEU strap on the DKT PCB (see Figures 11-7 and 11-8). 5. Position the BHEU PCB (component side down) on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws (see Figure 11-5). 6. Connect the BHEU integrated wire plug to P3 (HEU) on the telephone base PCB (see Figures 11-6 and 11-9). Note the location of the red wire. To HEU connector on telephone Red Wire Turn BHEU component side down. BVSU or BPCI (optional) BHEU ...or for DKT3001 telephones only, connect the BHEU wire plug to P1 (HEU) on the telephone base PCB (see Figure 11-9). Note the location of Figure 11-5 the red wire. 5651 BHEU Installation 7. Reinstall the base on the telephone. (P3) HEU BHEU BVSU or BPCI (optional) Digital Telephone Top Assembly Red Wire Digital Telephone Base 5657 Figure 11-6 11-8 BHEU Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs Telephone Option Straps Certain option straps on the DKT3000-series phones must be cut when installing carbon handsets, external power or headsets. Refer to Table 11-6 and Figures 11-7~11-9 for further instruction. Table 11-6 Station Option Interface PCB Compatibility Name of the Strap on the DKT PCB DKT3010-S, DKT3020-S, DKT3010-SD, DKT3020-SD DKT301 4-SDL DKT300 1 Explanation If a carbon-type handset or carbon-type headset is connected to the handset jack, the carbon wire jumper straps, listed on the left, must be cut inside the telephone. When a carbon headset is connected to the BHEU, you do not need to cut the straps. See Figures 11-7~11-9. Carbon W301, W302 W301, W302 HEU W303 W303 W103 To turn off the handset receiver when the handset is on-hook and a headset is used with the BHEU, cut the “HEU” strap shown on the left. EX.POWER W101, W102 W101, W102 W101, W102 Cut the “EX.POWER” straps only when external power is connected to the second pair (pins 2 and 5) of the telephone modular jack. See Figures 11-7~11-9. SET UP W401, W402 W401, W402 Do not cut – for factory use only. EX.POWER W101 W101 P1 RED P1 RED P2 PCI /VSU HEU RED P3 PCI /VSU P2 P3 W302 HEU HEU P6 CARBON W302 W301 RED PCI/ VSU CARBON W301 RED CARBON W303 PCI/ VSU P6 W303 5668 Station Apparatus RED SET UP W401 GND W402 Carbon RED HEU W401 SET UP GND W402 RED PCI /ADM EX.POWER PCI /ADM W102 EX.POWER W102 5603 Figure 11-7 Strata CTX I&M DKT3010, DKT3020 Strap and Connector Locations 06/04 Figure 11-8 DKT3014 Strap and Connector Locations 11-9 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs W101 DKT3001 EX. POWER W102 P1 HEU 12 RED HEU 103 5653 Figure 11-9 11-10 DKT3001 BHEU Connector Location Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 3000-series Telephone Option PCBs TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades for 3000series Telephones (BPCI) Digital telephones can be upgraded with a Personal Computer Interface (PCI) to provide desktop interface with the telephone and PC USB port. The PC connected to the BPCI can place telephone calls, receive Caller ID, ANI, and DNIS information. The BPCI is compatible with Microsoft TAPI application programs. BPCI Installation 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the digital telephone base to remove it. Knock out the plastic cover on the telephone base to provide access to the BPCI USB port. See Figure 11-10. 2. Refer to Figure 11-10 and install the BPCI inside the phone base. Secure with screws. 3. Insert the three integrated unit wire plugs into connectors P1, P2 and P6 on the PCB in the telephone. Make sure that the red wire is positioned as shown. (P1-P1, P2-P2, P6-P4.) (P2) PCI/VSU (P1) PCI/ADM PC USB Connection Port (knock out plastic cover on telephone base) BPCI (P1) (P2) Digital Telephone Top Assembly Red Wire (P4) Slide BPCI under tabs on the telephone base (P6) PCI/VSU Install Two Screws 5608 Digital Telephone Base Station Apparatus Figure 11-10 BPCI Installation 4. Stick the USB label onto the base, just below the modular cord port (see Figure 11-11). Important! • BPCI requires a DKT3000-series telephone set in the DKT3000 mode (see “DKT2000 Mode On/Off” on page 11-19). • The BPCI also requires that the DKT3000-series telephone be connected to a BDKU or BDKS PCB set to the “BDKU” mode (not the “PDKU” mode). BPCI will not function on a telephone connected to a PDKU or RDSU PCB. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 6035 USB Label Figure 11-11 USB Label 11-11 Station Apparatus Install TAPI Service Provider Install TAPI Service Provider This Desktop Open Application Interface (OAI) Manual provides step-by-step instructions for installing the software application. 1. Insert the Strata CTX CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. From the Main Menu, click Install TSP. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions. Toshiba recommends that default settings be used, but alternate paths, program groups, etc., are offered to meet your specific needs. 3. When the Toshiba CTX TSP Configuration screen displays (shown right), type in the following information: • • • • Login Name: Use any name you desire. Password: Optional, leave blank if not needed. Extension: Primary DN of connected DKT3000 phone. Hostname: Typically this is “localhost.” 4. (Optional) Click on Configure Keys. This section enables you to use more useful names for the line appearances on your phone. If you do not change their name, an application will show the line appearances as FB1 through FB20. Only the 20 feature keys of the main phone can be selected for TAPI dialing, using a specific appearance. 5. Click OK to save your entries. An error box displays and you need to click OK again. 6. Click Cancel on the Toshiba CTX TSP Configuration screen to continue. The Add to Startup group screen displays (shown right). 7. If you want the Toshiba CTX TAPI Service Provider program added to the Startup group, click Yes. 8. The installation continues. On the last screen, click Finish. 9. Restart PC to complete the installation. 11-12 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Add/Edit TSP Configuration Information Add/Edit TSP Configuration Information 1. Select Start > Setting > Control Panel. Select either the Telephony or Phones and Modems (name is dependant upon the operating system used). 2. Select Advanced Tab to see a current list of providers. If “Toshiba CTX TAPI Service Provider” is not found, click ADD, select it and click OK. 3. Highlight “Toshiba CTX TAPI Service Provider” and click Configure. Enter/Edit the information on the screen (see Steps 3 and 4 above for additional information). 4. When finished, click OK > Close. Test/Use TAPI Service Provider An easy way to test or use your TAPI Service Provider is to use “Phone Dialer” supplied in most Windows® operating systems. This program is typically found in “Accessories/Communications/ Phone Dialer.” 1. From the Main Menu, select Edit/Options. 2. In the Line Tab choose the Phone option for Preferred Line for Calling. 3. In Line used for Phone Calls, pull-down the list and select the appropriate line to use when making a call. For example: Toshiba CTX TSP Ext. 3351, Address 0 is typically the primary DN for extension 3351 IPT Telephone Toshiba offers an Internet Protocol (IP) Telephone model, the IPT1020-SD. The BIPU-M2A PCB IP telephone interface must be installed in the Strata CTX100 or CTX670. The IPT has the following features: • Full DKT feature set (except Speaker OCA) • DKT Anywhere • Automatic Configuration Station Apparatus The IPT1020-SD is a 20-button speakerphone model equipped with an LCD that displays two rows of 24characters. The speakerphone enables users to make and receive outside and internal calls without lifting the handset. A full-duplex speakerphone is not supported. • Terminal Authentication (security) • Digital Add-on Modules (DADM3120) • Built-in headset interface for headsets and external speaker connection (HESB) • See Chapter 9 – IP Telephony and QSIG Over IP for more information on IPTs, the DADM31020 and the BIPU-M2A PCB. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-13 Station Apparatus 3000-series, IPT1020-SD Button Layouts 3000-series, IPT1020-SD Button Layouts The button layout for the 3010- and 3020-series telephones and IPT1020-SD telephone are shown in Figure 11-12. The DKT3014, large LCD telephone has additional buttons for features and programming (see Figure 11-13).On the DKT3001, the Msg and Flex buttons are programmable (see Figure 11-14). IPT1020-SD, DKT3020-S, DKT3020-SD LCD (24 Characters by 2 lines) Mode Q Msg Page Scroll Z Spdial Feature DKT3010-S and DKT3010-SD only (FB10) (FB20) (FB10) (FB09) (FB19) (FB09) (FB08) (FB18) (FB08) (FB07) (FB17) (FB07) (FB06) (FB16) (FB06) (FB05) (FB15) (FB05) (FB04) (FB14) (FB04) (FB03) (FB13) (FB03) (FB02) (FB12) (FB02) (FB01) (FB11) (FB01) Vol Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Hold 6717 Figure 11-12 DKT3010/3020 and IPT1020-SD Button Telephones 11-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 3000-series, IPT1020-SD Button Layouts FB buttons for 14-button phones DKT3014-SDL Mode Feature Page Scroll Q Z Msg Spdial Mic Redial Spkr Cnf/Trn Vol FB07 FB14 FB06 FB13 FB05 FB12 FB04 FB11 FB03 FB10 FB02 FB09 FB01 FB08 Hold 5442 Figure 11-13 DKT3014-SDL Buttons Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-15 Station Apparatus 3000-series, IPT1020-SD Button Layouts Msg Spdial Line Flex Spkr Cnf/Trn VOL Hold 5654 Figure 11-14 DKT3001 Buttons 11-16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Telephone Settings Telephone Settings 3000-Series/IPT Telephones Telephone Programming Mode A The 3000-series telephones enable you to set a number of features directly from the phone, including: Call Waiting Tone (On/Off), Flex Key, Msg Key, LCD contrast, Speakerphone/ Microphone Room Noise Sensitivity (On/Off), and Country settings. “Telephone Programming Mode A” programs settings on a ROM chip inside the telephone. Note Some of the procedures use Feature Buttons (FB1, FB2, etc.). When your telephone is in Programming Mode, the flexible buttons are numbered as Feature Buttons, as shown in Figures 11-12 and 11-13. ³ To place your telephone in Programming Mode A ³ Press 3+6+9+Hold simultaneously. The LCD displays “DKT PROGRAM MODE” and “SELECT=”. Your phone will not ring if it receives a call while in Programming Mode. ³ To exit from Programming Mode A ³ Go Off- and On-hook or wait for 30 seconds for Programming Mode to automatically time out. Telephone Program Option Reset This function resets all Programming Mode A option settings to their default setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). Press Vol ▲ + Msg (Msg LED On means reset is set to activate) Press Hold to activate reset. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Dial Pad and Button Beeps Digital telephones can emit a “beep” sound whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed. The “beeps” are On by default. Follow these steps to turn the “beeps” On or Off on 3000-series DKTs. FB1, LED On: buttons beep. FB1, LED Off: buttons do not beep. 4. Press Hold to set the option. 5. You must also go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press 0. 3. Press Feature Button 1 (FB1) to toggle On/Off. 11-17 Station Apparatus Telephone Settings Speakerphone/Microphone Sensitivity Adjustment When you are using the speakerphone, high ambient noise levels may cause the party you are talking with to be to cut off frequently. If this happens, follow these steps to lower the sensitivity of the microphone on a 3000-series telephone. The default is normal sensitivity. 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press 0. 3. Press Feature Button 3 (FB3) to toggle On/Off. FB3, LED On: Lower sensitivity FB3, LED Off: Normal sensitivity 4. Press Hold to set the option. 5. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Call Waiting and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option Call Waiting and Camp-on tones are sent to a busy telephone’s speaker to indicate that a call is waiting. Call Waiting and Camp-on Tones can be sent, as an option, to the telephone handset or headset, in addition to the speaker. Follow these steps to turn handset/headset Call Waiting and Camp-on tone On/Off for a 3000-series telephone. The default is Off. 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press 0. 3. Press Feature Button 4 (FB4) to toggle On/Off. FB4, LED On: Call Waiting tone FB4, LED On: No Call Waiting tone 4. Press Hold to set the option. 5. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Reset and Adjust the LCD Contrast Step 1: Adjust LCD Contrast for the LCD Telephones 1. Press and hold down the Mic button, and press and release Vol ▲ or Vol ▼ repeatedly. Each time you press Vol ▲ or Vol ▼, the contrast increases or decreases. There are eight steps in either direction. To return to the middle setting, repeat “Step 1” above. 2. Press Hold to reset the LCD contrast. 3. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Step 2: Reset LCD Contrast for the DKT3014-SDL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 11-18 Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). Press Mode. Press Msg so that the Msg LED is On. Press Hold. This sets the LCD lightness/darkness contrast on the middle setting. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Telephone Settings 3000-Series Telephones DKT2000 Mode On/Off If you have a cordless telephone (DKT2204-CT or DKT2304-CT) that is connected to a 3000series telephone, you must place your DKT into 2000-mode before connecting the cordless telephone; otherwise, the 3000-series telephone will not work. In 2000-mode: • Only 16 characters by two lines display on the LCD. • LCD Feature button does not work • Spdial button does not work Step 1: Turn DKT2000 Mode On/Off Important! You must change the mode on DKT3000 telephone before connecting a DKT2204-CT or DKT2304-CT to the DKT3000. 1. On the DKT3000 telephone, press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press #. 3. Press FB7 (or FB13 on the DKT3014). LED On = 2000 telephone. LED Off = 3000 telephone. 4. Press Hold. 5. Lift the handset to exit programming mode. Wait a few seconds for the telephone to reset itself. Step 2: Connect Cordless Telephone to DKT3000 Telephone Redial/Feature Button Activation/Deactivation (DKT3001 only) Your Flex button has been set to act as a Redial button by default. However, you can reprogram the Flex button to work as Flexible Button, as it set in system programming. These steps enable you to change how the button functions. Msg LED On: Flex button works as Feature Button Msg LED Off: Flex button works as a Redial button. 4. Press Hold to set the option. 5. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Note If you program the Flex button to work as Flexible Button 3, you can press * to redial. Station Apparatus 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press 0 7. 3. Press Msg to toggle On/Off Msg/Feature Button Activation/Deactivation (DKT3001 only) Your Msg button has been set by default to work as a Msg button; however, you can reprogram it to work as Feature Button. 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press 0 8. 3. Press Msg to toggle On/Off. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-19 Station Apparatus Telephone Settings Msg LED On: Msg operates as Feature Button Msg LED Off: Works as a Msg button. 4. Press Hold to set the option. 5. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Test the Display on Large LCD Telephones (DKT3014-SDL only) 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press Page. 3. Press 1. LCD screen is blank. 4. Press 2. Each segment shows three vertical lines, in all eight rows. 5. Press 3. Each segment contains five short horizontal lines, in all eight rows. 6. Press 4. Each segment contains a pattern of small dots, in all eight rows. 7. Press 5. All of the available characters, including numbers, display. 8. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Country Settings On/Off This procedure enables you to change the country settings for telephone CODEC operation in various countries, see Table 11-7. 1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press *. 3. Press Feature Buttons 1~4 (FB1~FB4) On/Off according to the Table below ...or, for the DKT3001, pressing 1~4 and toggle the Msg LED On/Off (see following) press 1 (Msg LED Off means that FB1 is Off) press 2 (Msg LED Off means that FB2 is Off) press 3 (Msg LED Off means that FB3 is Off) press 4 (Msg LED Off means that FB4 is Off) 4. Press Hold to set the option. 5. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode. Note On the DKT3001, the Msg LED shows if the feature has been turned On/Off. There is no visible indication on the other telephones. If the telephone ringer and busy tone buzzes or doesn’t sound clear, check the country settings. Table 11-7 Country Code Settings for Mu Law/A Law Country 11-20 FB1 FB2 FB3 FB4 USA, Canada (default is Mu Law) Off Off Off Off Mexico Off Off Off On Taiwan On Off Off Off Hong Kong, Thailand Off On Off Off Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia, Sri Lanka, India, China On On Off On Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Digital Add-on Module Installation Digital Add-on Module Installation The DADM provides 20 buttons that can be flexibly programmed for any telephone feature that is provided by the Strata CTX system. There are two DADM models available—DADM3020 and DADM3120. The differences are shown in Table 11-8. Table 11-8 DADM Comparison Add-on Module DADM3020 Telephone to be connected DKT3010-S/20-S/10-SD/20-SD, DKT3014-SDL IPT1020-SD, DKT3010-S/20-S/10-SD/20-SD, DKT3014-SDL Color of DADM Black, white Black Power Source of ADM Circuit 24 VDC 5 VDC DADM3120 Install one or two DADM to a Toshiba digital telephone (only) (shown at right) or an IP telephone. The digital telephone and the DADM must belong to the same series, i.e., 3000- or 2000-series. IPT1020-SD telephones can only be connected to a DADM3120. • See the appropriate system Installation Chapter for loop length and secondary protection requirements. • DADMs cannot be installed on telephones that have BPCI, BVSU or DVSU installed. 5843 ³ To install DADMs See Figure 11-15 and follow these steps: Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the digital telephone base and remove it. 2. Remove the base handset hanger. 3. Loosen two captive screws on DADM and remove bases. 4. Put the DADM supplied cable through the telephone and DADM bases. 5. Connect DADM cable connectors to P1 of DADM and P1 of DKT telephone. 6. Install base of DADM and telephone – tuck DADM cable into DADM and telephone base, as necessary, for proper length. 7. Secure DADM to telephone base with DADM connecting plate (using four screws). 8. If required to achieve maximum distance, install two-pair house cable (or external power) and two-pair modular cord, supplied with DADM. (See Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring.) 9. If a second DADM should be installed, connect P1 of the second DADM to P2 of the first DADM with the DADM connecting cable. 11-21 Station Apparatus Digital Add-on Module Installation (Smaller Connector) 4-Screws P1 P 2 (No Connection) 4-Screws 1 1 10 Second DADM 12 DADM Connection Plate (provided with DADM) DADM Base DADM Cable (Supplied with DADM) Remove Handset Hanger Black Wire to Pin 1 First DADM P1 P2 1 10 Telephone Base 1 Black Wire to Pin 1 12 1 DIU & ADM or PCI/ADM P1 of Bottom PCB Telephone DADMX020 DADMX020 DKT/IPT View of Bottom 6507 Figure 11-15 Digital Add-On-Module 11-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Tilt Stands Tilt Stands This section explains how to attach desktop tilt stands to 3000-series or 2000-series digital DKTs, the IPT1020-SD or to a DSS console. Use Tilt Stand model “BTSD” (not BTSA) with a standalone DKT, IPT or DSS. ³ To attach a Tilt Stand to a 3000-series DKT, IPT1020-SD or DSS 1. 2. 3. 4. Plug the phone jack into the bottom of the phone or DSS console. Slide the Address Tray out, then gently squeeze the tray and remove it (see Figure 11-16). Pull the top of the Tilt Stand so that it’s open at an angle. Slide the Tilt Stand into the former Address Tray holder. (The Stand should catch under the front tray holder notches.) Push Stand in until it snaps into place (see Figures 11-17 and 11-18). 5. Push in the Lock Release to adjust the tilt angle (0, 10, 20 or 30 degrees, see Figure 11-19). 6. Insert the Address Tray back into its holder. Plug in phone jack 5448 Squeeze and slide out the address tray 5846 Figure 11-16 Bottom View of Telephone Figure 11-17 Slide Tilt Stand into Address Tray Slot Station Apparatus Lock Button Release 5848 5847 Figure 11-18 Tilt Stand “Snaps” In Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Notice: If you change the tilt stand angle, hold the telephone in your hand when you push the release button so the unit does not fall onto the stand. Figure 11-19 Telephone on a Tilt Stand 11-23 Station Apparatus Tilt Stands Tilt Stand Installation with Add-on Modules This section explains how to attach a tilt stand to a digital or IP telephone with one or two ADMs. Follow the instructions for the appropriate number of ADMs. Use Tilt Stand model “BTSA” (not “BTSD”) for telephones with one or two ADMs. ³ To attach a digital or IP telephone with one ADM to a Tilt Stand 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Complete the steps under “To install DADMs” on page 11-21. Make sure bottom phone jack is plugged in. Remove Tilt Stand from Tilt Stand Base (see Figure 11-21). Place the spacers on the outer holes, as shown (see Figure 11-22). Attach Tilt Stand to bottom of telephone with screws (see Figure 11-20). Reinstall the Tilt Stand Base: Fit the Tilt Stand Base over the Tilt Stand so that the “bottom pegs” fit into the holder. Adjust Tilt Stand so that the “top pegs” fit into the top Tilt Stand Base holes (see Figure 11-21). Do this to both stands. 7. Pull up on the Tilt Stand Bases so that they open to the maximum angle (30 degrees). 8. Push in the Release button to adjust the tilt angle (0, 10, 20 or 30 degrees) of each Tilt Stand. 1 ADM + 1 DKT (or 1 IPT) ADM DKT/IPT Spacer Spacer 1 ADM PHONE 2 ADM 1 ADM 2 ADM PHONE 1 ADM 2 ADM 1 PHONE PHONE 1 ADM PHONE 1 ADM 2 ADM 2 ADM PHONE 1 ADM 2 ADM 6506 Put in three screws in the positions marked “1ADM.” Put in three screws in the positions marked “PHONE.” Insert a spacer beneath each stand as shown. Put in the screw with the spacer first. Then insert the other two screws. Figure 11-20 Attach Tilt Stands to DKT/IPT and One ADM 11-24 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Tilt Stands Release Button To remove the base from the tilt stand: 1. Push in lock release. 2. Open the tilt stand 90 degrees. 3. Pull the Base away from the stand to remove it. Tilt Stand Base 5475 Fit Tilt Base onto Tilt Stand Bottom Pegs Tilt Stand Figure 11-21 Release Adjustment Button Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-25 Station Apparatus Tilt Stands Tilt Stand for DKT/IPT + Two ADMs Use Tilt Stand models “BTSA” for DKTs or IPTs with one or two ADMs. ³ To attach a Tilt Stand to a 3000-series DKT, IPT1020-SD with two ADMs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Complete the steps under “To install DADMs” on page 11-21. Make sure bottom phone jack is plugged in. Remove Tilt Stand from Tilt Stand Base (see Figure 11-21). Place the spacers on the outer holes, as shown (see Figure 11-22). Attach Tilt Stand to bottom of DKT with screws. Reinstall the Tilt Stand Base: Fit the Tilt Stand Base over the Tilt Stand so that the “bottom pegs” fit into the holder. Adjust Tilt Stand so that the “top pegs” fit into the top Tilt Stand Base holes. Do this to both stands. 7. Pull up on the Tilt Stand Bases so that they open to the maximum angle (30 degrees). See Figure 11-23. 8. Push in the Lock Release button to adjust the tilt angle (0, 10, 20 or 30 degrees) of each Tilt Stand. 2 ADMs + 1 DKT (or 1 IPT) ADMs (A) Spacer ADM PHONE DKT 11ADM ADM 22ADM ADM 11ADM ADM 22ADM DKT/IPT PHONE PHONE (A) Spacer PHONE 1 ADM DKT PHONE 1 ADM 2 ADM 2 ADM PHONE 1 ADM 2 ADM 6527 Put in three screws in the positions marked “2ADM.” Put in three screws in the positions marked “PHONE.” Insert a spacer beneath each stand as shown. Put in the screw with the spacer first. Then insert the other two screws. Figure 11-22 Attach Tilt Stands to DKT/IPT with Two ADMs 11-26 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Telephone Wall Mounting 5849 Figure 11-23 Tilt Stands in Raised Position for DKT and Two ADMs Telephone Wall Mounting This section explains how to mount digital telephones to a wall. See the manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on mounting standard phones. Notes ● Digital telephones equipped with BPCIs or PDIU-DI2s cannot be wall mounted. ● DKT3014-SDL equipped with a BHEU cannot be wall-mounted. ● 2000-series digital telephones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2. ³ To mount digital telephones Refer to Figures 11-24~11-26 and the following steps. Note Tilt up the LCD of the DKT3014-SDL before fixing the base. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Plastic Tab 1478 Figure 11-24 Removing the Telephone Base Station Apparatus 1. Loosen the captive screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four captive screws. Handset Hanger 11-27 Station Apparatus Telephone Wall Mounting 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 1480 Figure 11-25 Wall Mounting Base Rotation 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. Handset Hanger 1479 Figure 11-26 Handset Hanger ³ To wall mount DKT3001 or DKT2001 digital SLTs Handset Hanger 1. Loosen the screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four screws. 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the Figure 11-27 Removing the Telephone Base base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. For instructions for installing and programming the DKT2001, see “Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT2001 only)” on page 11-57. 3633 11-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection The DSS console can be connected to a BDKU/BKDS or PDKU on any circuit. DSS consoles are associated with digital telephones via system programming. This section provides instructions on how to install the consoles. DSS Console Connections DSS consoles are connected to BDKU/BDKS or PDKU PCBs using standard twisted single-pair or two-pair jacketed telephone cable (maximum 1000 feet, 303 meters) is used for the connection. To accommodate the DSS console connection, the instrument end of the cable should be terminated in a modular station connector block (RJ11). Refer to Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details. 5842 Notes ● ● DSS console cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. See the appropriate Installation chapter for secondary protection information and loop limits. CAUTION! When installing the DDSS cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Standard Telephones Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “3000-series Telephone Installation” on page 11-2. Standard telephones connect to circuits on the Standard Telephone Interface PCBs: RSTU, RSTU2, RDSU/RSTS and PSTU via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. (See single-pair wiring in Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring for more details.) Station Apparatus This section explains how to connect standard telephones to the Strata CTX670 system. Toshiba does not provide standard telephones. Whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this manual, it refers to 500- and 2500-type standard telephones. The standard telephone cable’s overall loop resistance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms max. for PSTU; 600 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -24VDC (no R48S), and 1200 ohms for RSTU and RDSU/RSTS with -48VDC (R48S installed on RSTU, RSTU2, or RDSU PCB), including telephone resistance. This applies to all devices connected to standard telephone circuits. A standard telephone connected off-premises via the telephone network should interface with OL13A, OL13B, or OL13C lines (or equivalent) and connect to an RJ21X, FIC jack or equivalent. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-29 Station Apparatus Cordless Digital Telephones Cordless Digital Telephones Toshiba offers two cordless digital telephone models, the DKT2204-CT and the DKT2304-CT (shown right). The DKT2204-CT uses digital spread spectrum and the DKT2304-CT uses digital narrow band technology. Some of the features for both cordless models include: • Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) that wraps using two lines, total of 32 characters • Ringer and handset volume control • Single button access to: Conference, Hold, Redial, Message and Transfer features • Four programmable function buttons • Charging stand • AutoStandby • AutoTalk • Vibrate ringer alert • Out-of-range protection • Low-battery protection system • Headset jack (2.5mm) • Stand-alone or DKT operation • High quality ultra-secure conversation with 32Kbps Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) voice code combination. • Three ring tones 6828 Figure 11-28 DKT2204-CT 6829 Figure 11-29 DKT2304-CT Cordless Telephone Compatibility The chart below shows the compatibility of Strata DKT2204-CT and the DKT2304-CT with Strata CTX digital line cards. The BDKU PCB has a switch for BDKU or PDKU mode. A “standalone” cordless phone connects directly to a digital line circuit without an associated DKT. BDKS D2 PCB System Type PDKU in Strata CTX or DK BDKU in Strata DK BDKU/BDKS in Strata CTX Jumper Plug Not Applicable PDKU position BDKU position DKT-2204/ (Stand alone) DKT-2204 w/ DKT DKT-2304 (Stand alone) DKT-2304 w/ DKT Cordless DKT OK OK OK OK OK OK OK See Notes OK OK See Notes Cordless DKT OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Notes ● ● 11-30 The handset and base unit of each cordless telephone is equipped with the same security code. In order for the handset to operate, it must be installed with the matching base unit. DKT3000 telephones must be set to operate in the DKT2000 mode when used with the DKT2204-CT and the DKT2304-CT (see “DKT2000 Mode On/Off” on page 11-19). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Cordless Telephone Installation Step 1: Review Safety Instructions WARNING! Toshiba DOES NOT represent this unit to be waterproof. To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or damage to the unit, DO NOT expose this unit to rain or moisture. ³ Read and understand all product instructions. ³ Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. ³ Cleaning precautions: • Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. • Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. • Use a dry cloth for cleaning. ³ Do not use this product near water; for example, near a sink, or in any wet area. ³ Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. ³ Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The telephone could fall, causing serious damage to the unit. ³ To protect the product from overheating, do not: • Block or cover any slots or openings in the base unit. • Place near or over a radiator or heat register. • Place in an enclosed cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided. Operate this product only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. ³ Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord could be damaged by persons walking on it. ³ Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords because it could result in fire or electrical shock. ³ Never push objects of any kind into the base unit slots, as the objects could touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could cause fire or electric shock. ³ To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product. Opening or removing covers could expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect re-assembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used. Contact qualified service personnel when service or repair work is required. ³ Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: Station Apparatus ³ • When the power supply cord is damaged or frayed. • If liquid has been spilled into the product. • If the product has been exposed to rain or water. • If the product does not operate normally when following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-31 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation • If the product has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged. • If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance. ³ Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. WARNING! Do not attempt to unplug any appliance during an electrical storm. ³ Unplug all electrical appliances when you know an electrical storm is approaching. Lightning can pass through the wiring and damage any device connected to it. This telephone is no exception. CAUTION! Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by Toshiba, or operation of this product in any way other than as detailed by this User Guide, could void your authority to operate this product. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire and/or personal injury from the NickelCadmium battery, follow these instructions: ³ Use only battery model BT-2499 (DKT2204-CT) or BT930 (DKT2304-CT). Use of any other battery could cause a safety hazard. ³ Do not dispose of the battery in a fire. The cell will explode. Under federal, state and local laws, it could be illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash. Check with your local government for information on where to recycle or dispose of old batteries. If you cannot find the information you need, contact Toshiba for assistance. ³ Do not remove or damage the battery casing. ³ Do not short circuit the battery. Exercise care in handling the battery in order not to short the battery with rings, bracelets, and keys or other conductive materials. The battery or conductor could overheat and cause burns. ³ Charge the battery only in accordance with the instructions and limitations specified in the instruction manual provided for this product. ³ Do not charge the Rechargeable battery in any charger other than the one designed to charge it as specified in this user guide. Using another charger may damage the battery, or cause the battery to explode. ³ Observe proper polarity orientation between the battery and charging unit. 11-32 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Step 2: Select Location 1. Select a location that is not subject to excessive heat or humidity. Keep the base unit and handset away from sources of electrical noise, such as motors and fluorescent lighting. 2. Determine if the base unit will sit on your desk or be wall mounted. If wall mounted, go to Step 6: “Wall Installation (Optional)” on page 36. 3. Place the base unit on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120VAC outlet and within reach of the Strata CTX digital line connection. Important! Place the base unit to the right of the DKT. If placed on the left, the cordless antenna picks up a tone due to its close proximity to the DKT speaker and electronic parts. Step 3: Place DKT3000-series Telephones into 2000-Mode You must place your DKT3000-series telephone into 2000-mode before connecting the cordless telephone; otherwise, the 3000-series telephone will not work. In 2000-mode, the DKT3000 telephone operation changes are: • Only 16 characters by two lines display on the LCD. • LCD Feature button does not work • Spdial button does not work ³ To change DKT3000-series telephones into 2000-mode 1. On the DKT3000 telephone, press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press #. 3. Press FB7 (or FB10 on the DKT3014). LED On = 2000 mode. LED Off = 3000 mode. Note Flexible Buttons (FB) are numbered from the bottom up and left to right. FB7 for example would be the seventh button up on the left. 4. Press Hold. 5. Lift the handset to exit programming mode. Wait a few seconds for the telephone to reset itself. Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-33 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Step 4: Connect Telephone Cables Your cordless telephone must be connected to a digital telephone PBX port. WARNING! ³ Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. ³ Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. ³ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. ³ To connect as a stand-alone telephone ³ Connect the modular jack labeled “Line In” directly to the telephone wall jack using one of the supplied cables (shown at right). ³ To connect to a Strata DKT 1. Unplug the cable from the DKT and plug into the “Line In” jack of cordless telephone base unit (shown at right). 2. Plug the additional two-foot cable into the “Line Out” jack of the base unit and into the DKT jack located on the bottom of the telephone. 11-34 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Step 5: Connect and Apply Power Base Unit 1. Plug the AC adapter cord into the AC adapter input jack on the base unit (shown at right). 2. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. 3. Check to see that the power LED is on. Charging Unit 1. Plug the AC adapter cord into the input jack on the charging unit (shown at right). 2. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. 3. Check to see that the CHARGE LED is on. Note You can place the handset in the charging unit with or without the belt clip attached. Important! • • • Use only the supplied AC adapter. If the CHARGE LED on the charging unit and/or the POWER LED on the base unit do not light, return everything to your Authorized Dealer. Always route the power cord where it is not a trip hazard, and where it cannot become chafed and create a fire or electrical hazard. DKT2204-CT (pictured) Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-35 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Step 6: Wall Installation (Optional) Important! You must place your DKT3000-series telephone into 2000-mode before connecting the cordless telephone; otherwise, the 3000-series telephone will not work. See “Place DKT3000-series Telephones into 2000-Mode” on page 33 for instructions. Standard Wall Plate Mounting These telephones are designed to be mounted on a standard wall plate. To attach the wall mount stand to the base unit: 1. Select a wall location near a 120VAC outlet and within reach of the Strata CTX digital line connection. 2. Slide the wall mount stand into the notches at the top of the base unit, push the wall mount stand down and snap it into place (shown right). 3. Plug the AC adapter into the base unit. 4. Place the AC adapter cord inside the molded channel of the wall mount stand. 5. Plug one end of the telephone cord into the LINE jack on the base unit. Optionally, plug one end of a Strata DKT telephone into the PHONE jack. Then place the telephone cord(s) inside the molded channel(s) on the bottom of the wall mount stand. 6. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the modular wall jack. 7. Place the base unit on the posts of the wall plate and push down until it’s firmly seated (shown right). 8. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. Note Do not use an outlet controlled by a wall switch. 11-36 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Direct Wall Mounting If you do not have a standard wall plate, you can mount your telephone directly on a wall. Before mounting your telephone, consider the following: • Select a location away from electrical cables, pipes, or other items behind the mounting location that could cause a hazard when inserting screws into the wall. • Make sure the wall material is capable of supporting the weight of the base unit. • Use #10 screws with anchoring devices suitable for the wall. ³ To wall mount the base unit 1. Insert two mounting screws 3-15/16 inches apart. Allow about 3/16 of an inch between the wall and screw heads for mounting the telephone (shown right). 2. Plug and secure the AC adapter cord by following Steps 2 and 3 of the “Standard Wall Plate Mounting” on page 36. 3. Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the LINE jack on the base unit. Optionally, plug one end of a Strata DKT telephone into the PHONE jack. Then place the telephone cord(s) inside the molded channel(s) on the bottom of the wall mount stand. 4. Place the base unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it’s firmly seated. 5. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into a telephone wall jack. 6. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet by following Step 7 of the Standard Wall Plate Mounting. Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-37 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Charging Unit Wall Mounting The charging unit is also designed to be wall mounted. Before mounting your charging unit, consider the following: • Select a location away from electrical cables, pipes, or other items behind the mounting location that could cause a hazard when inserting screws into the wall. • Make sure the wall material is capable of supporting the weight of the charging unit. • Use #10 screws with anchoring devices suitable for the wall material where the charging unit will be placed. DKT2204-CT 1. Insert two mounting screws 1-9/10 inches apart. Allow about 3/ 16 of an inch between the wall and screw heads for mounting the telephone. 2. Plug the AC adapter into the charging unit as previously described. Wrap the AC adapter cord around the strain relief (shown right). 3. Place the charging unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it’s firmly seated (shown right). 4. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. DKT2304-CT 1. Insert two mounting screws 1-1/5 inches apart. Allow about 3/16 of an inch between the wall and screw heads for mounting the telephone (shown right). 2. Pass the one end through the hole of the wall mount stand and plug it into the charging unit. Wrap the AC adapter cord around the strain relief. 3. Slide the wall mount stand into the notches on the bottom of the charging unit. 4. Place the charging unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it’s firmly seated (shown right). 5. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120VAC wall outlet. 11-38 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Step 7: Raise the Base Unit Antenna ³ Before using your handset, raise the base unit antenna to the vertical position. Step 8: Install Handset Battery Pack DKT2204-CT 1. Remove the battery cover by pressing the latch and sliding the cover down and off the handset. 2. Slide the battery pack down into the handset (shown right). 3. Securely close the battery compartment cover by sliding it up until it snaps into place. DKT2304-CT 1. Remove the battery cover by pressing the latch and sliding the cover down and off the handset. 2. Connect the battery pack connector observing correct polarity to the jack inside the battery compartment. Do not exert any force on this connection. It could cause damage to the battery or handset. Once you are certain that you have made a good connection, then insert the battery pack into the battery compartment. Do not pinch the wires (shown right). 3. Securely close the battery compartment cover by sliding it up until it snaps into place. CAUTION! Rechargeable Nickel-Metal-Hydride batteries must be disposed of properly. 4. Step 9: Charge Batteries for First Time Before using your handset, the battery must be continuously charged for five hours. 1. Place the handset in the charging unit (shown at right). 2. Ensure that the CHARGE LED lights. If it does not, make sure that the AC adapter is plugged in and that the handset is making good contact with the charging unit contacts. Station Apparatus Important! DKT2204-CT Charging Unit (pictured) Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-39 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Installation Step 10: Install Headset (Optional) The optional headset provides a hands-free option. With the headset installed, you can use the belt clip to carry the handset and conduct a conversation. All feature operations remain the same except the handset earphone and microphone are disconnected. ³ Open the cover over the headset jack that is located on the top of the handset and plug in the headset as shown at right. Important! Only use headsets especially designed or modified for use with radio frequency equipment. Step 11: Attach Belt Clip (Optional) Note The belt clip is designed to fit snugly onto the handset. 1. Snap the tab out of the belt clip notch on the top of the handset. 2. Slide the belt clip into the space where the belt clip tab was, carefully aligning the belt clip sides to the notches. 3. Press firmly until it snaps into place. 4. Use the belt clip to attach the handset to your belt or pocket. ³ To remove the belt clip 1. Press the retaining clip in toward the belt clip blade and slide the clip up at the same time. Reinstall the cover tab. 11-40 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Cordless Telephone Troubleshooting and Specifications Cordless Telephone Troubleshooting and Specifications This section covers these topics: • Troubleshooting • Simultaneous conversation channels • Range and performance • Radio interference • Telephone line problems • More than one cordless telephone • Privacy • Specifications Troubleshooting If your cordless telephone is not performing to your expectations, try the suggestions in Table 1. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact your telephone System Administrator. Important! Do not attempt to service this unit yourself. All service must be done by qualified service personnel. Table 1 Troubleshooting Suggestions Condition Suggestion • CHARGE LED does not light when handset is placed on charging unit. Warning tone and NO SERVICE message. • Make sure handset is properly seated in charging unit. • Make sure the battery pack is properly placed in the handset. • • Make sure that the charging contacts on the handset and charging unit are clean. Make sure that the base unit antenna is fully vertical. • Move closer to the base unit. • • Check for low battery warning. Move closer to the base unit. • Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into the base unit and wall outlet. The battery pack may be weak. Charge the battery pack for five~six hours. • Handset doesn’t ring. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 • Make sure the base unit antenna is fully vertical. • The handset may be too far away from the base unit. • The ringer may be set to Off. • Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into the base unit and wall outlet. Station Apparatus Conversation is interrupted frequently. Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into the charging unit and wall outlet. 11-41 Station Apparatus Troubleshooting Low Battery Your cordless telephone comes equipped with one rechargeable battery: • DKT2204-CT: BT2499 battery that provides six hours of talk and four days of standby time (fully charged). • DKT2304-CT: BT930 battery that provides seven hours of talk and five days of standby time (fully charged). A “fast charge” in the handset and a “trickle charge” in the charging unit enables the extended talk and standby times. When the battery is low, the Battery icon displays on the LCD (shown right) and the handset beeps. Low battery symptoms are: • On a call • All buttons and functions operate • Handset beeps once every three seconds Note To continue your call, you must replace the battery pack within 20 seconds. • In standby mode • None of the buttons operate • LCD messages are cleared • Handset beeps every 15 seconds for three minutes • Cannot make or receive call To restore your battery capacity, return the handset to the charging unit for charging or replace the handset battery with a charged one. If the handset is on the charging unit for one minute, battery low condition is cancelled. The Battery icon is turned Off and battery low tone stops. For more information on installing and charging the battery, see Step 8: “Install Handset Battery Pack” on page 39. Cleaning Charging Unit Contacts To maintain a good charge, it is important to clean all charging contacts on the handset, spare battery pack (DKT2204-CT only) and charging unit about once a month (shown right). Use a pencil eraser or a soft dry cloth. Do not use any liquids or solvents. DKT2204-CT Charging Unit (pictured) 11-42 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Simultaneous Conversation Channels Charging Spare Battery Packs (DKT2204-CT only) The charging unit of your cordless telephone is equipped to charge the spare battery pack with or without the handset in the front slot. 1. Slide the spare battery pack into the second slot in the charging unit until the retaining clip snaps over the top of the pack. 2. Make sure the BATT CHARGE indicator lights. If the BATT CHARGE indicator doesn’t light, check to see that the AC adapter is plugged in, and that the battery pack is making good contact with the unit’s charging contacts. Note Charge the battery pack without interruption for 12~15 hours. 3. When charging is complete, press out on the latch and remove the battery pack for use. Or, if you don’t need the battery pack immediately, leave it in the charging compartment. It will not overcharge. Simultaneous Conversation Channels DKT2204-CT The DKT2204-CT cordless digital telephone has 10 operating channels available. A common misconception is that this limits a customer to 10 cordless telephones. This is not the case. Each cordless digital telephone can operate on any of the 10 channels. When you turn on a cordless digital telephone, the telephone selects an available channel within its’ range. In a given cordless range, 10 simultaneous calls can be made. In most businesses, it is unlikely that all 10 channels will be in use at the same time. Typically 20 to 30 telephones can share the 10 channels. Another factor is the distribution of the telephones in a facility. If your cordless digital telephones are disbursed throughout a facility, there should not be contention for channels. If there are more than 10 cordless digital telephones in one area and 10 users are using their cordless telephones, an 11th user would not be able to connect at that time. DKT2304-CT Another factor is the distribution of the telephones in a facility. If your handsets are disbursed throughout a facility, there should not be contention for all channels. If there are more than 30 in one area and 30 users are using their handsets, the 31st user would not be able to get dial tone. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus The DKT2304-CT cordless handset has 30 operating channels available. A common misconception is that this limits a customer to 30 handsets. This is not the case. Each handset can operate on any of the 30 channels because each one selects an available channel within its range. In a given range, 30 simultaneous calls can be made. 11-43 Station Apparatus Range and Performance Range and Performance The DKT2204-CT operates up to 1.1 miles and the DKT2304-CT .7 miles from its base in a completely unrestricted test environment. Typically, ranges of 300 to 400 feet are possible, depending on the building structure in which it is used. For optimum range and performance from your handset, try the following: • Place the base units at least three to six feet away from the DKT; three feet from metal structures; and six feet from computers, fax machines or other electronic equipment. • Use an AC outlet not associated with computer or electromagnetic equipment. • Wherever possible, put the base unit in the middle of the coverage area. • Mount the base unit high in the room for maximum range. • If you have two to three cordless telephones, put them 12 feet apart. • If you have four to 10 cordless telephones, put them 20 feet apart. • If you want to use more than one cordless telephone in your office, they must operate on different channels. Press the Channel (DKT2204-CT)/CH (DKT2304-CT) button on the handset to select a channel that provides the clearest communication. Radio Interference Radio interference occasionally interrupts conversations, which does not mean that your unit is defective. Move to a different location while you are talking. If the interference continues, move the base unit. If there is still interference, contact your System Administrator. Telephone Line Problems The FCC and IC have granted the telephone company the right to disconnect service in the event that your telephone causes problems on the telephone line. Also, the telephone company may make changes in facilities and services which may affect the operation of your unit. However, your telephone company must give adequate notice in writing prior to such actions to allow you time for making necessary arrangements to continue uninterrupted service. If you are having trouble with your telephone service, you must first disconnect your telephone to determine if it is the cause of your problem. If you determine that it is the cause, you must leave it disconnected until the trouble has been corrected. Privacy Cordless telephones are radio devices. Communications between the handset and base unit of your cordless telephone are accomplished by means of radio waves which are broadcast over the open airways. Because of the inherent physical properties of radio waves, your communications can be received by radio receiving devices other than your own cordless telephone unit. Consequently, any communications using your cordless telephone may not be private. 11-44 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Specifications Specifications For frequencies, power requirements, weight and size specifications, see Table 2. Table 2 Specifications Feature DKT2204-CT DKT2304-CT General Frequency Control Modulation Phase Lock Loop Spread Spectrum Digital 0° to 50° C (+32° F to + 122°F) Operating Temperature Base Unit Receive/Transmit Frequency 902~928 MHz Power Requirements 10VDC from supplied AC adapter Size Width – 4.25 inches Depth – 7.5 inches Height – 2.25 inches Width – 4.25 inches Depth – 7 5/8 inches Height – 2.25 inches Weight Approximately 15.4 oz. Approximately 13.7 oz. Receive/Transmit Frequency 902~928 MHz 905~925 MHz (30 channels) Power Requirements Nickel-cadmium battery pack (BT2499) NI-MH Battery Pack (BT2499A) Ni-MH Battery Pack Size Width – 2 1/5. inches Depth – 1 2/3 inches Height – 8 2/3 inches with antenna Width – 2. inches Depth – 1.25 inches Height – 5.5 inches without antenna Weight Approximately 8.8 oz. with battery Approximately 5.2 oz. with battery Battery Capacity – 800 mAh, 3.6V Talk Mode – 6 hours (typical) Standby Mode – 4 days (typical) Capacity – 800 mAh, 3.6V Talk Mode – 7 hours (typical) Standby Mode – 5 days (typical) Handset Station Apparatus Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-45 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones 2000-series Telephones The 2000-series digital telephones consist of four models: • DKT2010-S – 10-Button Digital Speakerphone • DKT2020-S – 20-button Digital Speakerphone • DKT2010-SD – 10-Button Digital Speakerphone with Liquid Crystal Display • DKT2020-SD – 20-Button Digital Speakerphone with LCD • DKT2020-FDSP – Same as DKT2020-SD with Full-duplex Speakerphone 2000-series Telephone Option PCBs Table 11-9 2000 Telephone Subassembly Upgrades Subassembly No. per Phone BVSU or DVSU1 1 Off-hook Call Announce (OCA): Provides interface for digital telephone to receive Speaker OCA. Not required for Handset/Headset OCA. BHEU or HHEU 1 Headset and loud ringing bell telephone interface: Can be installed with DVSU or DADM, but not with the Full-duplex Speakerphone External Microphone (RFDM). (See “Telephone Headset (BHEU) Upgrade” on page 11-7 for installation instructions.) DADM20201 1 or 2 ADM, DSS: Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two DADMs) additional feature buttons for DSS, System or Station speed dial, or CO line appearances. Function 1. Only one of these subassemblies is allowed per telephone: DVSU, BPCI, PDIU-DI or DADM. Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU/ BVSU) To receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls over the digital telephone speaker, a 2000-series digital telephone must be upgraded with a DVSU or BVSU; the telephone making the call does not require a DVSU or BVSU. Digital telephones do not require an additional wire pair to receive Speaker OCA call. BVSU/DVSU Upgrade Installation for DKT2000-series Telephones 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove it (see Figure 11-24 on page 11-27). 2. Loosen the four captive screws on the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base. Remove and discard the plate. 11-46 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones 3. For the BVSU only, make sure that the SW1 and SW2 pins are set per Figure 11-30 and Table 11-5 on page 11-5. 20 Mu 30 20 A SW2 HFU SW1 SPF Move jumper to the middle position (20 Mu) for DKT2000 phones BVSU1A 6073 Figure 11-30 Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (BVSU1A) Fasten Four Screws To PCI/VSU Connectors on Telephone 4. Position the BVSU/DVSU PCB on the standoffs), and secure with the four provided screws (see Figure 11-31). 5. Connect the BVSU/DVSU wire plugs to the VSU connectors on the PCB inside the phone. 6. Reinstall the telephone base. Secure it with its four captive screws. Red Wire 6072 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus Figure 11-31 BVSU/DVSU Installation 11-47 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones HHEU Installation See Figures 11-24 and 11-32~11-35 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. 2. Use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. (The HHEU modular connector for the headset is accessed through this opening.) 3. If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the SW601 switch on the HHEU to headset for the headset or loud bell application. V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have this switch, because they are automatically set for the headset/loud bell application. Component Side of HHEU SW601 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) P601 HHEU 1487 Figure 11-32 HHEU Installation 4. Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the HHEU (both HHEU1A versions and the HHEU2 have P601) if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Feed Through for HESC-65(A) Cable To HESB Block Refer to Chapter 12 – Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. 5. For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor, then remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. 1488 SW601 Note Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. HHEU ...or For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note HESC-65 Cable or HESC-65A Cable P601 Figure 11-33 HESC-65A Cabling Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. 6. Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. Note 11-48 See Figures 11-34~11-35 for Steps 7~8. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones 7. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB to the HHEU connector on the PCB in the phone. 8. If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU (for Loud Ringing Bell), locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the telephone and cut the strap. 9. If a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the HHEU strap on the PCB in the phone. Note If the HHEU PCB is removed from the phone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for proper telephone operation. 10. Reinstall the telephone base; secure with the four captive screws. W101 W102 DIU&ADM RED P1 DVSU DIU&DVSU RED P6 RED P2 P3 W203 W204 HHEU HHEU EX.SP RED W101 W102 EX.POW EX.POW P1 RED DIU&ADM W204 W204 P2 DIU&DVSU DVSU HHEU HHEU W203 BEEP Carbon W201 W202 RED P6 Carbon W201 W202 P3 W409 BEEP RED HS-BOV EX.POW EX.SP 1484 Figure 11-34 DKT2010-S Strap and Connector Locations 1485 Notes ● ● ● ● There are two types of HHEUs: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the HHEU2. 2000-series digital telephones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3 or V.4 HHEU1 for HESB operation; earlier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient for headset operation only. Station Apparatus Figure 11-35 DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-S, and DKT2020-SD Strap and Connector Locations Only digital telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. A Toshiba HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to the HESB. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-49 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones ³ To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Note TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades (RPCI-DI or PDIU-DI2) for 2000-series Telephones is not available on the Strata CTX. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the telephone, two jumper straps inside the telephone must be cut. ³ To cut the straps Note You do not need to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. See Figures 11-24 and 11-34~11-35 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. 2. For 2000-series digital telephones, and cut the W201 and W202 carbon straps. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Beep Strap A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone. ³ To eliminate the beep sound See Figures 11-24 and 11-34~11-35 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws from the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Cut the beep strap. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone models to cut off frequently. ³ To reduce sensitivity to loud surrounding noise ³ Hold down Mic button, then press the Vol ▲ button. The less-sensitive level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. ³ To reset the sensitivity back to the normal level ³ Hold down the Mic button, then press the Vol ▼ button. The normal level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. Note 11-50 On speakerphone models that are set for low sensitivity, the Mic LED flashes at the inuse rate when the speakerphone is used. When set to normal sensitivity, the Mic LED is on steady when using the speakerphone. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option Busy override and camp-on ring tones can be sent over the DKT handset or headset, in addition to the speaker. ³ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset of the DKT2010-H model 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base (Figure 11-24), and remove the base. 2. Install a strap in the HS-BOV W409 location (see Figure 11-34). 3. Reinstall the telephone base. ³ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/ 2020-S/2020-SD ³ Hold down the Redial button and press the Vol ▲ button. ³ To block the tone over the handset/headset of the DKT2010-SD/2020-S/2020-SD ³ Hold down the Redial button and press the Vol ▼ button. Note For this to function properly with headsets, make sure the speaker OCA strap or R607 is cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU strap is cut on the telephone. (See Figures 11-32, 11-34 and 11-35). External Power Straps Digital telephones equipped with options such as integrated data interface units and ADMs require two-pair wiring or external power to operate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance from the KSU. Two-pair wiring or external power is also necessary for maximum cable run lengths for digital telephones that are connected to systems that must operate with reserve power (see Chapter 4 – Strata CTX670 Installation for more information). Each digital telephone has two external power straps which must be cut for external power when the cabling of the telephone is connected to an external AC/DC power supply. ³ To cut the straps See Figures 11-24 and 11-34~11-35 and follow these steps: Note Refer to Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring for external AC/DC power supply ordering information and installation instructions. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Depending on the telephone, locate the W101 and W102 external power straps and cut them. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. 11-51 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones DIP Switches The DKT2000 V.4 series telephones have DIP switches that enable use for the international market. The DIP switches are located underneath the flexible button key strip on the DKT2000 V.4 series telephones (see Figure 11-36). On the DKT2001, the DIP switch is located on the base. S LCD Display Handset DIP Switches (some models) ON Red/Green LED Indicators 1 2 3 4 Line 9 Line 8 Line 7 Dial Pad Speed Dial Do Not Disturb Line 17 Line 6 Line 16 Line 5 Line 15 Line 4 Line 14 Line 3 Line 13 Line 2 Line 12 Line 1 Line 11 Flexible Buttons Intercom Line 10 Fixed Buttons 3926 Microphone Location Figure 11-36 DKT 2000-series V.4 DIP Switches Table 11-10 shows the correct country settings for the DKT2010-S, DKT2020-S, DKT2010-SD, DKT2020-SD, DKT2001 V.4 telephones. Note The default DIP switch settings are preset for the USA and Canada. Therefore, you do not need to adjust any of these from the default factory settings for North America. Table 11-10 DKT International DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Country USA and Canada (Default Setting) DIP Switch Position 1 2 3 4 ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON Mexico ON ON ON OFF 1 2 3 4 ON Taiwan OFF ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 Hong Kong Thailand1 Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia, Sri Lanka, India and China ON ON OFF ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5669 1. The DKT2000 V.4 is not compatible for Hong Kong and Thailand. Use the V.4A or later versions in these two countries. 11-52 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones DKT2020-FDSP Full-Duplex Speakerphone with External Microphone The DKT2020-FDSP is designed to allow both parties of a speakerphone call to speak simultaneously. This eliminates “clipping” and enables true two-way conversation. However, when two parties are talking simultaneously, the performance is not as good as on a handset. The technology necessitates some volume loss in this situation. An optional External Microphone can be connected for improved performance. However, the External Microphone is extremely directional and should only be used in certain applications. The telephone also provides half-duplex/full-duplex manual selection. The DKT2020-FDSP has three operational modes for enhanced microphone use (Best, Good and Normal). These modes allow adjustments for different room acoustical characteristics. Choosing either the Internal or External Microphone (RFDM) and proper operational mode should be preselected by the system installer. When the External Microphone option is installed, the telephone’s Internal Microphone is disabled on all but Voice First Handsfree Answerback calls and OCA calls. The External Microphone is powered by the phone (no batteries are required) and does not need to be turned off when not in use. Choosing either the Internal or External Microphone is performed on the DIP switch 5, located under the keystrip (see Figure 11-35). Important! The DKT2020-FDSP’s full-duplex operation depends on the speaker volume setting. Raising or lowering speaker volume directly affects the performance of the full-duplex operation. • Depending on the room’s echo characteristics, raising the volume of the speakerphone can cause the full-duplex operation to deteriorate. When set to maximum volume, it may be necessary to switch to half-duplex operation. • The speakerphone will automatically reduce volume in each direction when both the FDSP user and the distant party are talking at the same time. The volume reduction is required to control the echoes at high volume levels. It is possible for surrounding conversations and other sounds to trigger this effect even when you are not speaking. • When using the [PDN] or Intercom button, the performance for internal calls is not as good as for external calls. DIP Switches The DKT2020-FDSP has DIP switches that enable the External Microphone and use telephone use in other countries. The DIP switches are under the flexible button key strip (see Figure 11-35). Station Apparatus • The performance of the DKT2020-FDSP can vary on calls that involve a delay, such as wireless calls, Voice Over Internet Protocol calls, etc. With these types of calls, the quality can diminish. There are three different DIP switch settings for optimum operation in various types of environments: • Best – provides full-duplex operation with the Internal or External Microphone. This is ideal for a large enclosed area, such as an office with little echo. Echo varies according to the environment. For instance, a room that is relatively empty has more echo than a room with furniture or items that can absorb sound waves. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-53 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones • Good – provides full-duplex operation with the Internal or External Microphone. This is ideal for a small office with high echo. • Normal – provides full-duplex operation with the Internal or External Microphone. This works well with an open office area, such as an office cubicle. Table 11-11 shows the switch positions for the three different settings. Table 11-11 DKT2020-FDSP DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Full Duplex Setting 1 2 3 4 5 ON ON ON ON ON 6 7 DIP Switch Position ON Best OFF ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON Good ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Normal (Default) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON DIP Switch 5 ON for Internal Microphone; OFF for External. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5206 Note The first four DIP switches are used to select the country, same as all other DK2000-series telephones. The default DIP switch settings (1~4) are preset to On for the USA and Canada. If you need to make adjustments for other countries, see Table 11-10 on page 11-52. ³ To use the External Microphone 1. Plug in the RFDM External Microphone to the bottom of the phone (see Figures 11-37 and 11-38). 2. Turn the microphone On by opening it (see Figure 11-39). Note The High/Low switch works independently from the telephone’s speakerphone. This setting must be on High for proper operation. Important! ● ● ● ● The microphone has a narrow voice pick-up range so the front of the microphone should always point toward the person speaking (see Figure 11-40). Be sure to place the microphone at least one foot from the telephone speaker and do not point the microphone toward the telephone speaker grille. To use the external microphone in a conference room setting, place the microphone away from all parties to eliminate some of the directional effect. Parties may have to speak up to be heard. The RFDM External Microphone is not compatible with the HHEU or BHEU. CAUTION! Avoid pulling the microphone cord excessively. 11-54 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones s EXT MIC EXT MIC 5217 LOW HIGH 5218 Figure 11-37 RFDM Plug on DKT2020-FDSP RFDM Unit (OFF Position) Figure 11-38 RFDM Unit RFDM Unit (ON Position) 5352 Figure 11-39 External Microphone On/Off 5353 Station Apparatus RFDM Super Directional Microphone Figure 11-40 External Microphone Voice Pick-up Path Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-55 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones Speech Training Mode When the DKT2020-FDSP is used in speakerphone mode, it adjusts to both the telephone line’s and room’s acoustic properties. At the beginning of each speakerphone call, the echo canceller must perform Speech Training by evaluating both the FDSP user and the far-end user’s voice, background noise and line quality. ³ To train the speakerphone ³ The parties at both the local telephone and on the far end should take turns speaking for approximately 10 seconds. ³ To improve speaker quality ³ If the conversation becomes unstable during the call, or there is clipped speech, feedback or short silences, first try adjusting the volume. This forces the FDSP phone into speech training mode. The LED will go on. ³ If conversation is still unstable, press button 10 to activate half-duplex mode. You can turn off button 10 at any time to reactivate full-duplex mode. ³ To force the telephone into Speech Training mode ³ During a call, momentarily press Vol▲, Vol▼, Hold or MIC. During Speech Training mode, the speakerphone operates in half-duplex mode. Tips for best results • Avoid blocking the microphone or shuffling paper near the microphone. • Avoid placing the speakerphone where it can detect excessive background noise, especially during Speech Training mode. • Avoid moving the telephone during a call—this changes the room’s acoustic properties. If the telephone or microphone is moved, you may have to force the Speech Training mode. Special Button Operation (Button 10) When using the external or Internal Microphone, button 10 works as a toggle from full- to halfduplex on the DKT2020-FDSP. Button 10 toggles between fulland half-duplex. 5241 Figure 11-41 Button 10 on the Full-duplex Speakerphone 11-56 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones ³ To toggle full/half-duplex mode ³ Press button 10 (see Figure 11-41) to turn full-duplex mode On or Off. Full-duplex mode: Button 10 LED Off. Half-duplex mode: Button 10 LED On. Notes ● ● ● Button 10 functions the same for Internal and/or External Microphone. If DIP switch 6 and 7, in Figure 12, are turned Off, the Full/half-duplex function of Button 10 is disabled. The DKT2020-FDSP’s full-duplex operation depends on the speaker volume setting. Raising or lowering the speaker volume directly affects the performance of the full-duplex operation. Important! • If raising or lowering the volume does not improve performance, switch to half-duplex mode by pressing Key 10. • If both you and the distant party are using full-duplex speakerphones, the sensitivity to both echo paths may cause a reduction or instability of volume. If this happens, it may be necessary to switch to half-duplex mode by pressing key 10. Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT2001 only) For instructions on installing the DKT3001 SLT, see “Digital Telephone System Connection” on page 11-2. ON 1 2 3 4 4 Station Apparatus DKT 2001 Installation 1. Set the DIP switches to match Figure 11-42. The DIP switches are preset from the factory for the USA and Canada. Refer to Table 11-10 on page 11-52 for other country settings. 2. If required to achieve maximum distance (greater than 1000 ft.), install a two-pair house cable (or external power). 3482 Figure 11-42 DKT2001 DIP Switch Settings Strata CTX I&M 06/04 11-57 Station Apparatus 2000-series Telephones 11-58 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation 12 This chapter provides information and diagrams for connecting peripheral equipment to the Strata CTX interface circuits. These interfaces include those listed below: • Application PC and Server Interfaces • Strata CTX WinAdmin, ACD, Attendant Console, SMDI and SMDR • Music-On-Hold/Background Music Interfaces • External Page with BIOU Interface • Control Relays with BIOU Interface • Door Phone/Door Lock with DDCB Interface • Telephone External Ringer with HESB Interface • Amplified Page with HESB Interface • Amplified Page/Talk-Back with HESB Interface • Power Failure Cut-through with DPFT Interface • Station Message Detailed Recording Application PC and Server Interfaces Application PCs and/or servers are connected to the Strata CTX system via a Network Interface jack, RS-232 serial ports and/or a Strata CTX modem depending on the application. These interfaces are provided by the CTX system processor. The network jack and built-in modem are standard equipment on the CTX670 processor and option PCBs on the CTX100 processor. The BSIS four-port serial interface is an optional PCB that mounts on the CTX100 or CTX670 processor (see Figure 12-1). • CTX WinAdmin, Stratagy VM Proprietary Integration, Attendant Console and ACD Network Interface – These application PC/servers equipped with a standard Network Interface Card (NIC) connect to the Strata CTX network jack. One network interface jack is standard on the Strata CTX670, BBCB processor PCB. The AETS option is required on the CTX100 ACTU processor. This is the only network jack interface on the Strata CTX (see Figures 12-1~12-4). Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation • CTX WinAdmin Modem Interface – CTX WinAdmin PC servers equipped with a modem can connect the Strata CTX maintenance modem. One built-in maintenance Modem is standard on the Strata CTX670, BECU processor PCB. An AMDS option PCB is required for CTX100 ACTU processor PCB.The Strata CTX modem supports point-to-point TCP/IP connection to a CTX WinAdmin PC modem over PSTN telephone lines (see Figure 12-5 for a connection diagrams). 12-1 Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces • SMDR and SMDI or Stratagy VM Serial/RS-232 Interface – Application PC/servers equipped with standard RS-232 COM ports connect to the Strata CTX serial interface ports. The Strata CTX provides four RS-232 interface jacks on the BSIS PCB. The BSIS is an optional PCB that piggy backs on the system processor PCB (see Figures 12-6 and 12-7 for a connection diagrams). Refer to the Strata CTX Programming Manual, Programs 803 and 804 to set up these interfaces. Ribbon Cables Built-in Modem (33.6 kbps, v.34 WinAdmin PC / Server) Processor Heart Beat LED (0.4 seconds on/0.4 seconds off.) Smart Media Access Status LED 1 BSIS Serial Ports (RJ11, 6-pin modular) SMDR SMDI MOH Volume Control (screw driver adjust) Smart Media Card Socket (Smart Media card slides in, gold contacts face right, notched corner down) 2 3 Network Interface Link Connection LED. Strata CTX Receive Network Data LED. Strata CTX Send Network Data LED. 4 Network Interface Jack (RJ45, 8-pin modular) MOH/BGM Input (RCA Jack) B101 B102 S_01 BECU S_02 5447 WinAdmin PC/Server ACD PC/Server Attendant Console PC / Server BBCU Figure 12-1 Application PC/Server Interfaces Network Interface Connections Figure 12-2 shows basic network interface connections. Figure 12-3 shows application PC or server direct connections. Refer to Program 801 to set up the LAN interface. Network jack wiring guidelines are listed below: • The CTX100 and CTX670 network interface is 10BaseT and requires CAT5 twisted pair cabling. • The maximum distance between the BBCU network jack and the application PC or server is 100 meters (328 ft.) when using CAT5 cabling without repeaters. • Unshielded CAT5 cabling is adequate for most installations. • Shielded CAT5 cabling is needed to protect the cable in environments that have excessive electromagnetic interference (EMI). Network Jack LED Indications The three LEDs located on the BBCU and AETS network jack indicate activity when sending or receiving data on the network (see Figure 12-4). 12-2 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces Application PC or Server, Network or HUB Connection to Strata CTX Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord Pin Strata CTX ACTU or BBCU Processor TD+ 1 2 TDRD+ 3 RD6 Pin RD+ RDTD+ TD- 1 2 3 6 Network Interface RJ45 Jack PC or Server CTX WinAdmin Application NIC Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord Network Interface RJ45 Jack PC or Server LAN or ACD Application NIC Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord HUB Network Interface RJ45 Jack PC or Server Attendant Console Application NIC Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord Network Interface RJ45 Jack PC or Server Stratagy ES Voice Mail System NIC SMDI Link to BSIS See Figure 12-6. Straight-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord LCD Soft Key Link Figure 12-2 5595 Network Interface Connections Peripheral Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 12-3 Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces Application PC or Server, Direct Connection to Strata CTX Cross-pinned, 8-wire Modular Cord Pin Strata CTX Pin RD+ TD+ 1 2 TDRD+ 3 RD6 ACTU or BBCU Processor RDTD+ TD- Application PC or Server 3 6 1 2 NIC CTX WinAdmin, Stratagy ES, Attd. Console, or ACD Application Network Interface RJ45 Jack Network Interface Card with RJ45 Jack Network Interface Cable Cross Pinning Connector Head Bottom Side Up 4 3 2 1 5 Front 6 7 8 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TD + TD RD + TD + TD RD + RD - RD - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Front 5962 1 8 Pin 1 of one end to Pin 3 of other end - each direction Pin 2 of one end to Pin 6 of other end - each direction To make a Network Interface cross-pinned modular cord on an existing straight through cord: On one end only, swap Pin 1 with Pin 3 and then Pin 2 with Pin 6. Figure 12-3 12-4 Application PC or Server Direct Connection Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces CTX Network Interface Jack (P7) (not used) (8) (not used) (7) 1 TD+ 2 TD- (6) 3 RD+ (not used) (5) 4 Not Used (not used) (4) 5 Not Used 6 RD- 7 Not Used 8 Not Used Pair 4 RD+ TD- Pair 1 Pair 3 5499 RD- (3) (2) Pair 2 (1) RJ45 ( 8-pin jack ) P4 TD+ Strata CTX uses Pairs 2 and 3. 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 6 5 8 77 6 5 4 8 P5 TIA Network Wall Jack Wire Color Codes RJ45 Modular Male Plug Pair 2 CD101 Pair 3 CD801 TIA-568A TIA-568B Pin 1 Green White/Orange Pin 2 Green/White Orange/White Pin 3 Orange/White White/Green Pin 6 Orange Green/White CAUTION: Do not mix different TIA Wall Jack Types in an Installation. CTX100 ACTU1A CTX 670 BBCU1A AETS LAN Link Indication, LED On when Link is Connected RX LAN Data Receive Indication, LED On when CTX is Receiving Data Packets TX LAN Data Send Indication, LED On when CTX is Sending Data Packets P7 Network Interface RJ45 Network Interface RJ45 P1 LINK LINK RX TX 5594 Strata CTX I&M Network Interface Jack Pin Numbers and LEDs 06/04 Peripheral Installation Figure 12-4 12-5 Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces Point-to-point TCP/IP RS-232 Cable BCTU, BECU or ACTU/ AMDS Modem 33.6 kbps v.34 Dial #19 Modem Flash or ROM and RAM RSTU Time Switch Local CTX WinAdmin PC Modem CO Line Telephone Network CO Line CO Line Circuit Strata CTX 5592 RS-232 Cable Remote CTX WinAdmin PC CTX Modem Programs and Dialing Numbers DID – Program 309: Ring direct to built-in modem. Ground/Loop – Program 310: Ring direct to built-in modem Transfer, Tie, or DISA – Program 102: Dial #19 to transfer to or dial the modem directly. Note: The PC modem can be external or internal. Figure 12-5 CTX WinAdmin Modem Interface Connection BSIS (Port 1-4) 6-wire Modular Cord - telephone cross-pinned type (modular jack locking tabs on the same side of the cord). Toshiba PPTC or PPTC9 connectors to PC COM port ACTU or BECU Processor PCB BSIS (piggy-back) PCB Port 1 SMDI Port 2 Port 3 Stratagy Voice Mail System SMDR Call Accounting System Port 4 5604 Note: Total data rate four ports combined is 57.6kbps. maximum. Strata CTX Serial Port Modular Pins: 1 RD (Data from CTX) 2 3 4 5 6 TD DSR DTR CD SG (Data to CTX) (Data Set Ready from CTX) (Data Terminal Ready to CTX) (Carrier Detect from CTX) (CTX/Terminal Signal Ground) BSIS RJ11 (Six-pin jack) Figure 12-6 12-6 Serial Port Interface Connections Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Application PC and Server Interfaces BSIS Connector PPTC-9 2 3 6 4 1 5 (female) Connect to PC 9-pin COMX Port (DTE) 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB9 Pinout (front view) 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Strata CTX Modular Jack Pinout (front view) BSIS Connector PPTC-25F (female) 3 2 6 20 8 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 Connect to PC 25-pin COMX Port (DTE) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Strata CTX Modular Jack Pinout (front view) DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 BSIS Connector PPTC25-MDM (male) 2 3 20 6 8 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Connect to External Modem (DTE) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Pinout (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Strata CTX Modular Jack Pinout (front view) BSIS Connector PPTC (male) 3 2 6 20 8 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Figure 12-7 Strata CTX I&M DB25 Pinout (front and side view) Serial Port Adaptors Pin Numbers 06/04 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD Strata CTX Modular Jack Pinout (side view) Jumper Pin 4-5 5593 Peripheral Installation Connect to: • ASCII Terminal • Printer • Call Accounting Device • DTE RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 12-7 Peripheral Installation Music-On-Hold/Background Music Interfaces Music-On-Hold/Background Music Interfaces Strata CTX provides up to 15 MOH/BGM music source interfaces via the ACTU or BECU system processor PCB, one or two BIOU optional interface PCBs, and RSTU standard telephone interface PCBs. The destination of each music source is determined by system programming. The music sources can be standard CD music players, telephony MOH machines and/or tape players, etc. The music sources are connected to standard RCA type jacks on ACTU or BECU and BIOU and via a dealer-supplied isolation transformer to RSTU (see Figure 12-8 for a connection diagram). MOH is sent to callers placed on hold and BGM is sent to DKT telephone speakers and/or external page speakers. The ACTU, BECU and BIOU interfaces provide an input volume level control for each music source. The volume levels of music sources connected to RSTU circuits rely strictly on the music source volume controls. MOH/BGM source output requirements: • Output Impedance: 600 or 8 ohms • Output voltage level: 0.14VRMS (-15dbm) ~ 0.77VRMS (0dbm). An additional separate BGM source can be connected to the building’s external page amplifier to play music over the paging speakers when the Strata CTX Page is not in use. This interface option requires the BIOU zone relays or mute control (see External Page with BIOU Interface). 12-8 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Music-On-Hold/Background Music Interfaces MOH/BGM Source Connections MOH/BGM Destination BECU PCB MOH/BGM Source 1 P3 RCA Jack VR 901 Volume Control MOH - Ground/Loop Start DIT and DISA CO lines are each assigned individually in Program 310, PK04. BIOU 1 PCB MOH/BGM Source 4 J3 MOH3 RCA Jack MOH3 Volume Control MOH/BGM Source 3 MOH - Analog DID and ISDN DID lines / individually for each DID number in Program 309, PK02. J2 MOH2 RCA Jack MOH2 Volume Control MOH/BGM Source 2 MOH - All outgoing lines are assigned in outgoing line groups in Program 306, PK12. J1 MOH1 RCA Jack MOH1 Volume Control BIOU 2 PCB MOH/BGM Source 7 BGM - All digital telephone speaker users select their source from the telephone when they turn on BGM J3 MOH3 RCA Jack MOH3 Volume Control MOH/BGM Source 6 J2 MOH2 RCA Jack MOH2 Volume Control MOH/BGM Source 5 System Processor Time Switch BGM - External Page zones in Program 105, PK13. J1 MOH1 RCA Jack MOH1 Volume Control MOH - Stations and Tie lines are all assigned to the same MOH source in Program 105, PK02. RSTU PCB (S) MOH/BGM Source 8 Insolation Transformer 3 T MOH - Outgoing Line Group in in Program 304, PK12. R MOH - Called Party or DID numbers not found are assigned in Program 318, PK02. Up to 8 MOH/BGM devices can be connected to RSTU ports. MOH/BGM Source 15 Insolation Transformer ACD music source is on a per-call basis controlled by the ACD Application via the CSTA Link. T R Figure 12-8 Strata CTX I&M MOH/BGM Interface Connection 06/04 Peripheral Installation 5500 12-9 Peripheral Installation External Page with BIOU Interface External Page with BIOU Interface Up to two BIOU interfaces can be installed for connecting external page equipment. Each BIOU can provide up to four unique page zones for a total of eight page zones maximum per system. The BIOU interfaces can be installed in the main cabinets and/or any remote cabinet. Each BIOU provides a 600ohm, non-amplified page output and an 8 ohm, 3-watt amplified page output. Only one type of page output, amplified or non-amplified, can selected per BIOU in a given installation. The BIOU also provides a control relay which can be used to mute external BGM when the external page circuit is active (see Figures 12-8~12-12 for connection diagrams). 66 Block Wiring Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG BIOU (1 or 2) 600Ω Transformer HESB or External Amplifier and Speaker SPTO 38, BK-GN SPRO 13, GN-BK SPO Page, BGM or Night Ringing switched in by System Processor SW600 (Select SPO or SP1) SP1 SP Level Control 3 Watt Amplifier System Back Plane HESB or External Speaker SPT1 50, V-S SPR1 25, S-V (8ohm minimum) 5605 Figure 12-9 Single Zone Page Options A separate external BGM source can be connected to a building’s external Page speakers using the BIOU interface. This enables the BGM sent over the external page speakers to be different from the BGM sent to telephone speakers (see Figures 12-10) for separate BGM over external Page connections). 600Ω B BGM Mute Relay SPT (38) BK-GN SPR (13) GN-BK Output Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane External Paging Amp MDF Input 1 BIOU (1 on 2) 1 2 Mute 2 M Input 2 BGM Music Source 5601 Figure 12-10 Separate BGM Over External Page 12-10 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation External Page with BIOU Interface 66 Block Wiring MDF BIOU (1 or 2) PGOUT 1 (15) S-BK Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG A PGIN 1 (40) BK-S C B Zone 1 Relay 1 Zone 1 / Zone 5 2 M B Zone 2 Relay PGOUT 2 (17) O-Y A PGIN 2 (42) Y-O C BR-Y Y-BR A BL-V A V-BL C Zone 2 / Zone 6 M B PGOUT 3 (19) Zone 3 Relay PGIN 3 (44) Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M B PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) Zone 4 Relay M Paging Amp SPTO (38) BK-GN PG Common (23) Output GN-BK Input 600 ohm SPRO (13) Zone 4 / Zone 8 Speaker Common Line C GN-V Music Amp 6 BGM Music Source (To External Speaker Only) Output BIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cable Input BGM Night 3 Ringing and/or Page from KSU Backplane 5610 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Notes 1. Zones 1~ 4 are provided by the BIOU designated BIOU #1. 2. Zones 5 ~ 8 are provided by the BIOU designated BIOU # 2. 3. BIOU SW600 must be set to SPO for 600 ohm page output. 4. Page Zones are added to Page Groups in Program 503. 5. External BGM mute relay control can be provided using BIOU control relay (see Figure 8-12). 6. BGM over External Page with an external Music Amp is optional. 7. BGM via 600 ohm output (SPRO/SPTO) is sent to selected Page Zones per Program 105, FB13 and Program 503. Figure 12-11 Zone Page with One External Amplifier Optional Connection 12-11 Peripheral Installation External Page with BIOU Interface 66 Block Wiring MDF BIOU B Zone 1 Relay PGOUT 1 (15) PGIN 1 (40) Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG S-BK A 1 Zone 1 / Zone 5 BK-S C M PGOUT 2 (17) PGIN 2 (42) Output Input B Zone 2 Relay Amp 1 A O-Y Zone 2 / Zone 6 Y-O C M PGOUT 3 (19) PGIN 3 (44) Output Input B Zone 3 Relay Amp 2 A BR-Y Y-BR Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M Zone 4 Relay PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) A BL-V V-BL Zone 4 / Zone 8 C M 600 ohm SPRO (13) GN-BK SPTO (38) BK-GN PG Common (23) GN-V Amp 4 Output Input Night Ringing or Page from KSU 3 Backplane Output Input B Amp 3 BGM Music Source & Amplifier C 4 Output C 5496 BIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cables The Notes in Figure 12-11 also apply to this figure. Figure 12-12 Zone Page with Multiple Amplifiers 12-12 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation External Page with BIOU Interface Control Relays with BIOU Interface Up to two BIOU interfaces can be installed to provide control relays for Night Bell, Night Transfer, Door Lock and BGM mute control. Each BIOU provides four control relays for a total of eight relays (max.) per system. Each relay’s function is selected in system programming. BIOU interfaces can be installed in the main cabinets and/or any remote cabinet (see Figure 12-8). BIOU control relay contact power ratings are shown below: • 24 VDC maximum • 1.0 amperes maximum CAUTION! BIOU relay contacts are not rated to switch 120/240VAC, connecting these voltages may result in equipment damage, fire and/or personal injury. 25- Pain Amphenol Connector Pin Number BIOU (1 or 2) CRT1, Pin 28 (W-GN) B Relay 1 SW150 CRR1, Pin 3 (GN-W) M CRT2, Pin 30 (W-S) B Relay 2 SW200 CRR2, Pin 5 (S-W) M CRT3, Pin 32 (R-O) B Relay 3 SW250 CRR3, Pin 7 (O-R) M CRT4, Pin 34 (R-BR) B Relay 4 SW300 CRR4, Pin 9 (BR-R) M 5492 Notes Figure 12-13 BIOU Control Relays Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation 1. User Relay Service Program 515 to set control relay for Night Bell, Night, Door Lock, External BGM mute functions as required. 2. Relay functions can open or close contacts by setting Make/Break switches SW150~SW300. 3. Relay functions are set in Programs 503, 508 and 515. 4. Relay contacts are rated at 24 VDC, 1.0A maximum. Do not connect to 120VAC. 12-13 Peripheral Installation Door Phone/Door Lock with DDCB Interface Door Phone/Door Lock with DDCB Interface The Strata CTX supports up to eight DDCB door phone control boxes. Each DDCB supports up to three MDFB door phones which provides a total of up to 24 door phones (see Figure 12-15). Each DDCB can provide a door unlock control relay in place of one of the door phones. DDCB and MDFB Cabling For DDCB and MDFB wiring/interconnecting details and door lock control installation procedures and secondary protection information, refer to Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring. If using 24 AWG cable, the length of the cable run from the Strata CTX to the MDFB (via the DDCB) must not exceed 1,000 feet (305 meters). 1873 • DDCB cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. 1874 DDCB Wall Mounting External Power Straps (DDCB Only) The DDCB is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ³ To mount the units 1. Locate the two mounting holes on the right-hand side on the DDCB (see Figure 12-14). 2. Remove the side cover from the DDCB to expose the two left-hand mounting holes. 3. Position the DDCB adjacent to the Base KSU with regard to wiring needs. 4. Secure the DDCB to the mounting surface with four one-inch panhead wood screws. 1493 KSU Jack MDFB Jack A~C KS U DO PH OR ON E A B Mounting Screws (4) C Figure 12-14 Door Phone (DDCB) Installation Door Phone Wire Connections Up to 24 door phones can be connected to the Strata CTX system. Door phones are connected as follows: Up to three MDFB, door phones can connect to a single DDCB door phone control box, which in turn connects to a single DKT interface port (See Figure 12-16 for door phone wiring diagram). Only one of the three connected door phones can be active at a given point in time. 12-14 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Door Phone/Door Lock with DDCB Interface Calling from a Door Phone Each door phone has a push button that rings selected telephones with one of three unique bingbong sounds. The door phone’s location displays on ringing telephone LCDs. The three bing-bong ring types are permanently assigned to each of the DDCB ports (A, B and C) as shown in Figure 12-16. Door phones can also be programmed to ring over the system’s external paging equipment. When a telephone answers a door phone call, a two-way talk-path is established between the calling door phone and the called telephone. Calling a Door Phone Each door phone has a unique number (#15XX, where “XX” = 01~24 max., depending on system size) that can be dialed from system telephones. When a system telephone calls a door phone, the door phone does not ring but provides a two-way talk-path between the calling telephone and the called door phone. This enables telephone users to monitor sounds in the general area where the door phone is installed. Door Lock Control As an option, Port B of the DDCB can be connected to a door lock control device, instead of a door phone, to unlock a door. The door lock control device is not supplied by Toshiba and must be ordered separately. The door lock option is a hardware jumper located on the DDCB. This option provides relay contacts that will open, or close the Port B wire pair when a telephone’s door lock button is pressed or when a door lock feature code is dialed from a telephone (see Figure 12-16 for option settings). Door Phone/Lock Programming Door phone assignments are in Program 507 and door lock assignments are in Program 508. MDFB Wall Mounting Base 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the cover. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame (see Figure 12-15). 2. Position the metal frame and base to the mounting surface and secure with two oneinch panhead wood screws. 3. Attach cover to the metal frame and base and secure with the screw which was removed in Step 1. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 3.25 inches Two Wall Mounting Holes Door Phone 1494 Figure 12-15 Door Phone (MDFB) Installation Peripheral Installation MDFB Volume Control Adjustments 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the MDFB cover. 2. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame. 3. The volume level is changed by a screw adjustment on the back of the MDFB. Turn the screw with a flat-headed screwdriver while ringing the MDFB or while on a call with it. The volume level will change as the screw is turned. Metal Frame 12-15 Peripheral Installation Door Phone/Door Lock with DDCB Interface MDF DDCB3 J1 Power 3 4 2 5 PDKU, BDKU - T (voice data) R (voice data) KSU PR PT or BDKS 2 (any circuit) Circuit (one bing-bong ring per ring cycle) 3 4 J2 1 A 2 Door Phone A (two bing-bong rings per ring cycle) Lock Door SW2 3 4 N/C SW3 MDFB J3 1 B 2 MDFB MDFB Door Phone Door or Lock Control B N/O (one bing-bong ring per ring cycle-low pitch) Door Lock Relay Contact (24VDC, 1.OA max) 3 4 J4 1 C 2 MDFB MDFB Door Phone C Notes 1. MDFB Terminal Pins L1 and L2 are used with HESB Talk Back Amplifies Application only- See Figure 8-22. 2. Not available with BDKS. 3. Refer to Programs 123, 456, and 789. Set Lock if J3 should be door lock contacts Set to N/C If Door Lock Relay contact should open when Door Unlock button is pressed DOOR C TONE SW3 N/C Mu A SW5 Remove DDCB3 Cover for access to hardware options EX.POWER J1 KSU Cut W3 only if Door Phone C ring should sound like Door Phone A DDCU3A V.1 SW2 N/O W3 Door Phone A LOCK DOOR J4 Door Phone B Set to N/O if Door Lock contact should close when Door Unlock Button is pressed J2 Door Phone C J3 Set Door if J3 should be door phone B interface W2 W1 EX.POWER 5607 Cut W1 and W2 if External Power is wired to J1 pin 2+5 (see Figure 6-4) Must be set for MU Law in USA and Canada Figure 12-16 DDCB3 Wiring and DDCU Door Lock PCB 12-16 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Strata CTX systems provide three options utilizing an HESB: • Telephone External Ringer • Amplified Page Speaker • Talkback Amplified Page Speaker with talkback System hardware requirements vary depending on the HESB option selected. See the following installation procedures for the hardware requirements for each option. Telephone External Ringer The loud ringing bell option enables the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first and signal tone can be amplified on all electronic and digital telephones equipped with HHEU PCBs and HESB. (See Chapter 7 – Station Apparatus.) The HESB automatically turns Off once the ringing call or voice first has been manually answered from the electronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature prevents audio feedback problems. Step 1: Set Up the Telephone for the External Ringer Option 3000 Telephone Instructions ³ To Turn the Loud Ringing Bell Feature On/Off (Default is Off) 1. Press 369+Hold (simultaneously). 2. Press # FB08 (FB08 = Feature Button 08, not dial pad 8). 3. Press Msg (Msg LED turns On) to turn On the External Speaker (HESB) connection ...or press Msg again (Msg LED turns Off) to turn Off the External Speaker (HESB) connection. 4. Press Hold. 2000 Telephone Instructions Important! See Chapter 11 – Station Apparatus for instructions on the HHEU jumpers and cutting the EXSP on 2000-series digital telephones. See below for 3000 telephones. Step 2: Connect the HESB External Ringer to the 3000-series Telephone 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 2 and 10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block (Figure 12-21). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5 on the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Install a BHEU PCB and HESC-65A cable per Figures 12-17 and 12-18. modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65A using a modular block. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC-65A using a modular block. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~6 can be accomplished using the HESB VOICE 12-17 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options 6. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A cable using a modular block. 7. Connect the HACU-120 power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC ± 10VAC, 60Hz power source. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Telephone (BHEU) to External Speaker (HESB) Cable Connection The HESC-65A cable is required to connect the telephone BHEU to the HESB external speaker. The BHEU can be installed into the DKT3000-series telephones. It can also be installed into DKT3010 and DKT3020 telephones that have either a BVSU or BPCI installed. For DKT3001 telephones, the installation is same as below, only the connector location is different. HESC-65A and BHEU Installation 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. Use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. (The HESC-65 cable connector is accessed through this opening. See Figure 12-17.) 2. Connect the HESC cable to P1 of the BHEU and feed it through the telephone base. 3. Position the BHEU PCB (component side down) on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws (see Figure 12-18). 4. Connect the BHEU integrated wire plug to P3 (HEU) on the telephone base PCB (see Figure 12-19). Note the location of the red wire Feed through HESC-65A Cable To HESB Block Knock out with screwdriver for BHEU modular connector 5650 SW601 HESC-65 Cable or HESC-65A Cable BHEU P1 Figure 12-17 HESC-65A Cabling ...or for DKT3001 telephones only, connect the BHEU wire plug to P1 (HEU) on the telephone base PCB (see Figure 12-20). Note the location of the red wire. 5. Reinstall the base on the telephone. 6. Connect the HESC-65A cable to the HESB (see Figure 12-17). 7. Connect station wiring (see Figure 12-21). 12-18 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options To HEU connector on telephone Red Wire Turn BHEU component side down. BVSU or BPCI (optional) BHEU 5651 Figure 12-18 BHEU Installation EX.POWER W101 DKT3001 EX. POWER W101 W102 W102 P1 PCI /ADM P2 P3 W302 Carbon RED HEU W401 GND SET UP 12 W402 P1 RED HEU RED PCI /VSU EX.POWER RED HEU 103 HEU CARBON W301 RED PCI/ VSU P6 W303 5653 Figure 12-19 DKT3010, DKT3020, DKT3014 Strap and Connector Locations Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Figure 12-20 DKT3001 BHEU Connector Location Peripheral Installation 5603 12-19 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (-) Internal Wiring: Jumper Wires: TB1 2-10 TB2 4-5 TBI 1 2 3 4 (L2) Voice 6 1 3 4 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Not Used 115 VAC ± 10 VAC maximum HACU-120 115VAC to 12 VDC 24 AWG Jacketed Twisted Pair from Digital Telephone to HESB TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Power Supply MDF 66 Block Jumpers Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Station Cabling Tip Ring PT PR 25-Pair Cable Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG BDKU,BDKS, PDKU or RDSU Modular R GN R (+) GN (-) BK Y BK Y W BL W BL 654321 654321 123456 123456 (L2) HESC-65A Cable to P601 of HHEU or to P1 of BHEU Station OCA Strap (-) Green (L2) Yellow (+) Red P1 BHEU + P601 HHEU (V.3 or .4) R607 Do Not Cut 5606 DKT2000 or 3000-series Install BHEU, HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into base of DKT per BHEU or HHEU installation instructions in this chapter. Figure 12-21 Wiring the Telephone External Ringer with HESB Interface 12-20 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Step 3: Test the Telephone External Ringer Option 1. Test the AC input voltage by plugging power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC to 12VDC power source. 2. Make a CO or station call to the station configured for the loud ringing bell. Ringing will be heard over the HESB. 3. Use a small, slotted screwdriver to turn the volume control on the back of the HESB to the desired level and adjust the ring volume control on the telephone. 4. If ringing is heard at the station, but not over the HESB, check the following while the station is ringing: • Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the HESB TB1 terminal block. Voltage indication should be 4.5~5VDC. Note Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There should be NO voltage potential across terminals 1 and 2. • If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the telephone wiring connections to the HESB have been made properly (wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block may have been reversed). Amplified Page Speaker Option The amplified speaker option enables the HESB to be configured as a paging speaker. The HESB is connected to the BIOU 600-ohm page output to provide an amplified external speaker. ³ To install the HESB amplified speaker option 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 12-22). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 5. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 6. Connect the BIOU or ACTU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 7. Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC to 12VDC power source. 9. Set the BIOU SW600 switch to the SPO position. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. Peripheral Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 12-21 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options ³ To test the amplified speaker option 1. Make an external page. The page should be heard over the HESB. 2. Verify that someone speaking into the door phone can be heard at the paging station. (With this application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talk back through the door phone.) Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG BIOU SPT (38, BK-GN) 600Ω Page Output BIOU switch SW600 must be in the SPO position SPR (13, GN-BK) 25-Pair Cable MDF 66 Block Volume Control Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 5-8 6-7 Modular Connector May Be Used TB2 3-4 5-6 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Internal Wiring: TBI 3 4 Voice Voice 3 4 TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note • Door Phone 12V 0V 12V 0V VDC The 600 ohm page output sends three types of signals during system operation: • Voice page • Background music • Night ringing Jumpers HESB (Rear View) 5470 Power Supply 115 VAC (± 10 VAC) to 12 VDC Figure 12-22 Amplified Page Speaker with HESB Interface 12-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Talkback Amplified Page Speaker with Talkback Option The talkback amplified speaker option enables a talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the HESB is connected to the BIOU 600 ohm (duplex) output and is used as the amplifier and speaker. A door phone unit (MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as a microphone to provide talkback operation. (The MDFB push-button is inoperative, and the unit serves only as a microphone for talkback and not as the normal door phone.) Note The BIOU 600 ohm is a two-way (duplex) page output compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers – door phone not required for talkback. ³ To install the HESB amplified page speaker with talkback 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 12-23). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. Note HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and door phone modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L1 of the MDFB. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L2 of the MDFB Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 1 of the MDFB. Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 2 of the MDFB. Connect the BIOU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 9. Set the BIOU SW600 switch to the SPO position. 10.Connect the HACU-120’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 11. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 115VAC±10VAC to 12VDC. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. ³ To test the talkback amplified speaker 1. Make an external page. Page will be heard over the HESB. 2. Verify that someone speaking into the door phone can be heard at the paging station. (With this application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talk back through the door phone.) Peripheral Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 12-23 Peripheral Installation External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options MDFB (Rear View) Door Phone Talkback Microphone 1 600Ω Page Output L1 L2 Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG Jacketed Twisted Pair 24 AWG BIOU BIOU switch, SW600must be in the SPO position 2 SPT (38, BK-GN) SPR (13, GN-BK) 25 Pair Cable MDF 66 Block Volume Control L1 L2 1 2 Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 TB2 3-4 5-6 TB1 Modular Connector May Be Used Internal Wiring: TBI 4 3 TBI 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 Voice 4 3 Door Phone 4 3 2 5 Voice 654321 Door Phone 12V 0V TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 12V 0V Notes HACU-120 The 600 ohm duplex page output is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers. – MDFB not required. Power Converter Jumpers HESB (Rear View) 5469 115VAC ± 10VAC to 12VDC Figure 12-23 Amplified Page/Talk-Back with HESB Interface HESB Wall Mounting Some applications may require that the HESB is mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ³ To wall mount the HESB 1. Find a suitable location on the mounting surface for the HESB (see Figure 12-24). 2. Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw into the mounting surface. 3. Hang the HESB from the screw. One Wall Mounting Hole 1516 Figure 12-24 HESB Wall Mounting 12-24 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Power Failure Options Power Failure Options In the event of a power failure, Strata CTX uses these options: Reserve Power For information on the Reserve Power Option, see Chapter 1 – Installation. Power Failure Transfer Unit An optional Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) can be installed that automatically connects up to eight selected CO lines directly to designated standard telephones in the event of a power failure. The DPFT enables normal operation of the selected CO lines and standard telephones when the system is in service. When power is restored, each telephone is independently reconnected to system standard telephone circuit ports after it is finished with its direct CO line call. The DPFT is normally installed on the MDF. Figure 12-25 provides a circuit diagram of the DPFT. To RSTU/PSTU-T1 RDSU/RSTS J2-27 J2-26 To RSTU/PSTU-R1 RDSU/RSTS J2-2 J2-1 To TEL-T1 To TEL-R1 Telephone Current Detector To RCOU/PCOU-T1 To RCOU/PCOU-R1 J1-27 J1-26 To CO-T1 J1-2 J1-1 To CO-R1 J1-50 DG (Input) Relay RSTU or PSTU Control -24V (Input) J1-25 Notes • • Representation of first of eight circuits. Conditions shown with AC power (-24VDC) off. Figure 12-25 DPFT Circuit Diagram Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation 1498 12-25 Peripheral Installation Power Failure Options Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation 1. Mount the DPFT on or near the MDF. Note See Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring, DPFT/MDF interconnecting tables. 2. Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type connectors (female for DPFT connector J1, male for DPFT connector J2), connect the DPFT to two 66-type quick-connect blocks. 3. Connect the CO lines selected for emergency use to the DPFT J1-block “CO-TIP” and “CORING” terminals. 4. Connect the RCOU, RCOS (or PCOU) circuits related to the emergency CO lines to the DPFT J1-block “RCOU-TIP” and “RCOU-RING” terminals. 5. Connect the standard telephone stations selected for emergency use to the DPFT J2-block “TEL-TIP” and “TEL-RING” terminals. 6. Connect the RSTU, RDSU/RSTS or PSTU standard telephone circuits related to the emergency standard telephones to DPFT J2-block “PSTU/ RSTU-TIP” and “PSTU/RSTU-RING” terminals. 7. Connect the DPFT to the RDSU/RSTU/PSTU DG and -24V terminals (See Chapter 10 – MDF PCB Wiring for RSTU/PSTU and RCOU/PCOU wiring/interconnecting details). The -24V (Pin 25) and DG (Pin 50) ground terminals are available on the RSTU2, RDSU, or PSTU only. ³ To test the operation of the DPFT 1. Turn the system power switch Off. 2. Verify that CO dial tone is available at each standard telephone connected to the DPFT. 3. Call back to each telephone using an outside line. 12-26 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) For each incoming, outgoing, tandem or conference call, the Strata CTX can generate a record that includes details of the call, including the originating station or trunk, the start time of the call, its duration, authorization codes, etc. If a station user dials “911,” the Strata CTX also generates a record at the beginning of the call as part of its internal notification that an emergency call is in progress. The BSIS optional PCB attaches to the ACTU of the CTX100 or the BECU of the CTX670 to provide four RS-232 interface jacks (one for SMDR and one for SMDI). See Figures 12-6 and 12-7, starting on page 12-6 for connection information. SMDR Record Types Distinct records are generated for different types of calls. The table below lists the record types. The type of each record is identified by a letter entry in the column of the record. Table 12-1 Call Record Types Record Type Notes B (aBandoned) When a call is abandoned N (Normal) Simple outgoing or incoming call S (Start) Start of complex outgoing or incoming call or 911 call X (transfer) When a call is transferred E (End) This record is associated with a specific S or X records, and indicates termination of a call I (Initial) When system is initialized T (Time) When the system time or date is changed A (Authorization) When the input Account Code is verified and the result is successful, the Account Code is defined as the Authorization Code. C (Charge Account) When an Account Code is entered M (Charge Conference) When an Account Code is entered during a conference call The use of multiple records allows the CTX to account for multi-stage calls such as transfers and conferences. A simple outgoing or incoming call would generate a Normal record. A transferred call would generate a Start record for the first segment of the call and an End record for the second segment of the call. The appropriate times would be stored in each. A detailed description of SMDR is provided in a separate manual. Several fields in the record may displayed or masked based on system programming. They include DISA security codes, authorization codes, ANI, DNIS and Caller ID. The Strata CTX can buffer up to 1000 SMDR records in response to a loss of DTR signal from an attached call accounting device or external buffer. When the buffer overflows, subsequent call records will be lost until the buffer is cleared. The CTX buffer will be cleared by a system restart or loss of system power. Peripheral Installation Strata CTX I&M 06/04 12-27 Peripheral Installation Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Table 12-2 Line SMDR Record Format Column 1(1) Name Record Type 2(1) Space 3-5(3) Record Number 6(1) Space 7-12(6) Node number 13(1) Space 14-20(7) Orig Information Format Notes “N”/”S”/”X”/”E”/”B”/ ”I”/”T”/”A”/”C”/”M” See “SMDR Record Types” on page 12-27. XXX Record Number (000 -- 127) XX 00 - 99 “DN”+XXXXX Prime DN “CF”+ XXXXX “T”+OLG+MMM X=ID of conference “T”+ILG+MMM “T”/”A”:Answersupervised/Unsupervised ILG: Incoming Line Group “A”+OLG+MMM OLG: Outgoing Line Group “A”+ILG+MMM MMM: CO number/Channel Group Number (Left positioned and padded space) 21(1) Space 22-28(7) Term Information 29(1) Space 30-43(14) Time stamp MO/DD HH:MM:SS N/E Record: End of Call S Record:Start of Call 1 If 911, time trunk is seized. X Record: Completion of transfer B Record: The call is abandoned I Record: System initialized T Record: Original/New system time A/C/M Record: Input account code MO = Month(01 -- 12) DD = Day (00 -- 31) HH = Hour (00 -- 23) MM = Minutes 00 -- 59) SS = Seconds (00 -- 59) 44(1) Space 45-54(10) Call duration HH:MM:SS.S HH = Hour (00 -- 23) MM = Minutes (00 -- 59) SS = Seconds (00 -- 59) S = always 0 55(1) Space 56-87(32) Dial information XX….X Dials/Account Codes (Left positioned and padded space) 12-28 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Record Format (continued) Table 12-2 Line Column Name Format Notes 1(1) Spaces 2(1) New line “&” 3-19(17) Caller ID XXX…XXX Caller ID CESID “C”+ XXX…X CESID (Left positioned and padded spaces) 20(1) Spaces 21-24(4) DISA 25(1) Spaces “DISA” XXXXX...XXXX 26-38(13) 2 (00 -- 99) Area Code (000 -- 999) ANI Exchange Code (000 -- 999) Extended Exchange code (0000 -- 9999) 39(1) Spaces 40-46(7) DNIS 47(1) Spaces 48-54(7) AUXID 1 XXXXXXX (0000000 -- 9999999) “DN”+XXXXX XXXXX = Prime DN (Responsibility for outgoing) 55(1) Spaces 56-62(7) AUXID 2 NN+XXXXX NN = Node number (00 – 99) XXXXX = Prime DN 1 10 G 20 G N 001 00 DN1234 30 G T000001 40 G 06/28 50 G 12:10:50 00:10:30.0 60 G 70 G 80 G 12134567890 6038 Figure 12-26 Sample Call Record – Simple Outing Call, Outside Party Answers (Rel. 1.02 or lower) Table 12-3 Sample Call Record Explanation (Rel. 1.02 or lower) Field Notes N Normal incoming or outgoing call record. 001 Record number 1. 00 Used to identify the Node ID in a Strata Net network. Not used in a standalone system. Directory Number (DN) 1234 originated the call. T000001 The call went out on Trunk Number 1. 06/28 Date 12:10:50 Time at which call was answered. 00:10:30:0 Duration of the call to the tenth of a second. 12134567890 The destination number dialed. & Start of a new line. More complex call records may use two lines. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation DN1234 12-29 Peripheral Installation Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Record Formats (Release 1.03) Table 12-4 Line SMDR Record Format (Software Release 1.03) Column 1(1) Name Record Type 2(1) Space 3-5(3) Record Number 6(1) Space 7-12(6) Node number 13(1) Space 14-22(9) Orig Information Format “N”/”S”/”X”/”E”/”B”/ ”I”/”T”/”A”/”C”/”M” See “SMDR Record Types” on page 12-27. XXX Record Number (000 -- 127) XX 00 - 99 “DN”+XXXXX Prime DN “CF”+ XXXXX “T”+OLG+MMM+N N X=ID of conference “T”+ILG+MMM+N N OLG: Outgoing Line Group “A”+OLG+MMM+N N “A”+ILG+MMM+N N 1 23(1) Space 24-32(9) Term Information 33(1) Space 34-47(14) Time stamp Notes MO/DD HH:MM:SS “T”/”A”:Answersupervised/Unsupervised ILG: Incoming Line Group MMM: CO number/Channel Group No. NN: ISDN-Bch if caller seizes non-ISDN trunk, then “00” is shown as NN value. (Left positioned and padded space) N/E Record: End of Call S Record:Start of Call If 911, time trunk is seized. X Record: Completion of transfer B Record: The call is abandoned I Record: System initialized T Record: Original/New system time A/C/M Record: Input account code MO = Month(01 -- 12) DD = Day (00 -- 31) HH = Hour (00 -- 23) MM = Minutes 00 -- 59) SS = Seconds (00 -- 59) 48(1) Space 49-58(10) Call duration HH:MM:SS.S HH = Hour (00 -- 23) MM = Minutes (00 -- 59) SS = Seconds (00 -- 59) S = always 0 59(1) Space 60-91(32) Dial information XX….X Dials/Account Codes (Left positioned and padded space) 12-30 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Record Format (Software Release 1.03) (continued) Table 12-4 Line Column Name Format 1(1) Spaces 2(1) New line “&” 3-19(17) Caller ID XXX…XXX CESID “C”+ XXX…X 20(1) Spaces 21-24(4) DISA 25(1) Spaces 26-38(13) ANI 39(1) Spaces 40-46(7) DNIS Notes Caller ID CESID (Left positioned and padded spaces) “DISA” XXXXX...XXXX (00 -- 99) Area Code (000 -- 999) Exchange Code (000 -- 999) Extended Exchange code (0000 -- 9999) XXXXXXX (0000000 -- 9999999) “DN”+XXXXX XXXXX = Prime DN (Responsibility for outgoing) NN+XXXXX NN = Node number (00 – 99) XXXXX = Prime DN 2 47(1) Spaces 48-54(7) AUXID 1 55(1) Spaces 56-62(7) AUXID 2 Figure 12-27 Sample Call Record – Simple Outing Call, Outside Party Answers (Software Release R1.03) 1 10 G 20 G 30 G 40 G 50 G 60 G 70 G N 001 00 DN1234 T00100100 06/28 12:10:50 00:10:30.0 12134567890 N 024 110 DN2021 A02002023 06/28 13:45:05 00:00:26.0 9495833705 Example of B-channel Call Record (B-channel is last two digits in term field) Table 12-5 80 G 6516 Sample Call Record Explanation (Software Release R1.03) Field Notes N Normal incoming or outgoing call record. Record number 1. 00 Used to identify the Node ID in a Strata Net network. Not used in a standalone system. DN1234 Directory Number (DN) 1234 originated the call. T00100100 The call went out on Trunk Number 1, OLG 1. 06/28 Date 12:10:50 Time at which call was answered. 00:10:30:0 Duration of the call to the tenth of a second. 12134567890 The destination number dialed. & Start of a new line. More complex call records may use two lines. Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Peripheral Installation 001 12-31 Peripheral Installation Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 12-32 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Index Index A a law, 11-20 ABCS, 2-18, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-18, 3-23 ABR circuits, 3-22 license control, 2-4, 2-7 ABTC-3M, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-14 AC adapter, 11-35 access point, 9-26 ACD, 2-18 license control, 2-4, 2-7 ACTU, 2-18, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22, 3-23 ACTU2A, 2-2, 3-19 ACTU2A-S, 2-2 add-on modules capacities, 2-9 IPT, 9-10 addressing, 9-16 ADKU, 2-14, 6-3 ADM limits, 1-22 AETS, 2-18, 3-23 AMDS, 2-3, 2-7, 2-18, 3-23 amplified page speaker, 12-17 ANI, 2-12 APSU112, 2-18, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17, 3-22 APSU112A, 3-23 ARCS, 3-22 ASTU, 2-14, 6-4 attach belt clip, 11-40 B background music (see BGM) backup memory module (BBMS), 4-51 BACL, 4-39 bandwidth requirements, 9-41 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 base cabinet CTX100, 2-3 CTX670, 2-8 base unit, 11-35 antenna, 11-39 battery, 11-32 charging, 11-39 charging spare packs, 11-43 CTX28 reserve power battery/charger (HPFB), 1-18 install in handset, 11-39 low, 11-42 removing and charging, 11-39 warnings, 11-32 battery cable, 3-11, 3-12 battery charger, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-18 battery jumper, 3-19, 3-20 BBMS, 2-3, 2-7, 3-20, 4-51 BCCB, 4-39 BCTU, 2-5, 2-55 BCTU/BEXU, 4-44 BDKU, 2-14 BDKU/BDKS, 6-7, 6-8 BECU, 4-52 BECU/BBCU, 4-50, 4-52 beep strap, 11-50 belt clip, 11-40 BEXS, 2-3, 2-7, 4-52 BEXU, 2-5, 2-55 BFIF, 4-35, 4-39 BGM, 2-3, 2-6, 6-9 interfaces, 12-8 over external page, 12-10 BHEU, 11-7, 12-18 BIOU, 2-18, 6-9, 12-8, 12-10 BIOU/BIOUS, 6-9 BIPS1A, 9-42 IN-1 Index C~D BIPU-M1A, 9-2 BIPU-M2A, 2-15, 9-6, 9-42 BIPU-Q1A, 9-40, 9-42 BPCI, 11-11 BPSB, 4-39 BPTU, 2-17, 7-3, 7-4 BSIS, 2-3, 2-7, 2-18, 3-23 interface ports, 12-6 BSTU, 2-15, 6-11 busy override, 11-18, 11-51 buttons, 2-11 BVPU, 6-15 BVSU, 11-5 BWDKU, 2-15, 2-55, 6-17, 10-6 C cabinets (CTX670), 2-5 cabling DDCB/HDCB/MDFB, 12-14 call monitoring, 7-37 call park orbits, 2-12 caller ID, 2-12 interface, 2-16, 6-20 lines (see also BRI, PRI lines) CAMA trunk, 2-16 direct interface (RMCU/RCMS), 6-38 camp-on ring tone, 11-18, 11-51 capacities, 2-4, 2-5, 2-7, 2-9 buttons, 2-11 carbon headset/handset strap, 11-50 charging unit, 11-35 cleaning contacts, 11-42 CHSUB112, 3-22 CHSUE112, 3-22 CNIS abandoned call numbers, 2-12 CO line interface unit, 6-22 CO lines capacities, 2-10 groups, 2-12 common control units, 4-44, 4-50 compatibility IP, 9-2 PCBs and IPT, 9-2 conference capacities, 2-12 ports, 2-12 connect and apply power, 11-35 IN-2 connect telephone cables, 11-34 connecting to station devices (NT-mode), 7-24 control relays, 6-9 cordless digital telephones, 2-9 cross connect record RCOU/RCOS, RGLU, RDDU, REMU, RDDU, RDTU, 10-18 station PDKU, 10-10 RDSU, 10-12 RSTU2/PSTU, 10-14 CTX attendant console, 2-9 CTX WinAdmin, 2-3, 2-6, 12-6 CTX100, 3-1 PCBs, 3-22 processor, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21 CTX100-S, 3-1 CTX28 cabinet installation, 1-6 CO, DKT, CLID PCB,CTX28 100Base-TX PCB, 1-9 GCDU, 1-9 GCTU, 1-9 GETS, 1-9 GMAU1A, 1-10 PCB installation, 1-8 processor, 1-9, 1-14, 1-16 secondary protector diagram, 1-23 voice mail PCBs, 1-12 D DADM, 11-21 DADM3120, 2-9, 9-10 DDCB/HDCB, 12-14 cabling, 12-14 wall mounting, 12-14 DDSS limits, 1-22 destination restriction level (DRL) capacities, 2-13 DID, 2-10 CTX100 configurations, 2-34 RDDU, 2-16, 6-28 RDTU, 2-17, 8-2 digital add-on module (see DADM) digital telephone capacities, 2-9 limits, 1-22 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Index E~I E E&M tie line unit, 2-17 E911 CAMA trunk, 2-16 direct interface (RMCU/RCMS), 6-38 subassembly (RCMS), 2-16 EMC ferrite core requirement, 7-23 ethernet LAN, 3-23 expansion cabinets, 2-3, 2-8, 4-33 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 installation, 4-6 external page, 12-10 BGM, 12-10 zones, 2-13 external ringer, 12-17 external speaker unit (HESB), 9-10, 12-17 Index PCBs, 6-8 system connection, 9-9, 11-2 upgrade, 11-5, 11-46 beep strap, 11-50 busy override/camp-on ring tone over handset/headset, 11-18, 11-51 carbon headset/handset strap, 11-50 external power strap, 11-51 loud ringing bell/headset, 11-7, 12-18 2000-series, 11-48 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment, 11-18, 11-50 simultaneous voice/data, 11-11 TAPI, 11-11 telephone speaker off-hook call announce, 11-5, 11-46 digital telephone interface unit, 6-3, 6-7, 6-19 digital/standard telephone interface unit, 6-30 direct inward dialing (see DID) direct station selection (see DSS) distributed hunt, 6-28 DIU limits, 1-22 DKT capacities, 2-9 DKT2000 mode, 11-19 DKT2010 strap/connector locations, 11-49 DKT2104-CT, 2-9 DNIS, 2-12 door locks, 2-9, 12-14 door phones, 2-9, 12-14 capacities, 2-10 DPFT installation, 12-26 DSL, 9-3 DSS consoles, 2-10, 11-29 DTMF license control, 2-4, 2-7 DTMF receiver (CTX100), 3-22 DVSU, 11-46 F flash memory, 2-3, 2-6 functional block diagram, 2-18 G G3 fax, 9-40 GCDU, 1-9 GCDU1A, 1-16 GCTU, 1-9 GCTU1A, 1-14 GETS, 1-9 GMAU1A, 1-10 ground/loop start interface CO line interface unit, 2-16 grounding terminal screws, 7-21 GSTU1A, 1-8 GVMU1A, 1-12 H handset OCA stations, 2-12 headset upgrade, 11-7, 11-48, 12-18 HESB, 9-10, 12-17 amplified speaker installation, 12-21 installation test, 12-22 loud ringing bell, 12-17 installation for DKT, 12-17 test, 12-21 talkback amplified speaker installation, 12-23 HHEU, 11-48 hunt groups, 2-12 I installation base cabinet, 4-6 BPCI, 11-11 DADM, 11-21 DPFT, 12-26 installation instructions, 11-31 IN-3 Index L~O installing optional headset, 11-40 Internet Protocol (IP), 9-1 IP interface unit (BIPU-M2A), 9-6 telephone, 9-1, 11-13 add-on modules, 9-10 capacities, 2-9 ping test, 9-29 telephone installation, 9-8 telephony, 9-1 troubleshooting, 9-29 IPT, 9-1 anywhere, 9-13 bandwidth requirements, 9-41 interface PCB, 9-6 network connection, 9-13 PCB compatibility, 9-2 phone installation, 9-8 pre-installation guidelines, 9-1 security, 9-15 ISDN BRI, 2-10 R40S PCB, 7-18 RBSS PCB, 7-18 RBSU/RBSS, 7-14, 7-23, 7-24 call monitor, 7-27 capacities and slots, 7-15 installation, 7-16, 7-19 LED indications, 7-19 LEDs, 7-19, 7-20 monitor jack, 7-20 passive bus configurations, 7-26 premise wiring guidelines, 7-21 PS-1 backup power option, 7-16 RBUU, 7-27 RBUU/RBUS, 7-29, 7-30 REBS PCB installation, 7-18 performance monitoring, 7-40 PRI, 2-10, 2-17 BPTU/RPTU overview, 7-3 testing and troubleshooting, 7-34 timing and synchronization, 7-35, 7-37 IVP8, 1-12 line buttons, 2-11 line capacities, 2-10 lock control unit, 12-14 loop limits, 1-22 loop start CO line interface, 2-17 loop start line limits, 1-22 loop-back testing, 7-34 loud ringing bell upgrade, 11-7, 11-48, 12-18 LSI, 2-2, 2-6 L off-hook call announce (OCA), 2-12, 2-13 off-premises stations, 2-10 one touch buttons per system, 2-11 LAN QSIG over IP, 9-42 large-scale integrated circuit, 2-2, 2-6 license control, 2-4, 2-7 IN-4 M main processor CTX100, 3-21 CTX670 PCBs, 4-44, 4-50 maintenance modem, 2-3, 2-6, 12-6 MDFB, 12-14 cabling, 12-14 volume control, 12-15 wall mounting, 12-15 memory SmartMedia, 2-3, 2-6 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment, 11-18, 11-50 modem, 3-23 AMDS, 2-3, 2-7 MOH, 2-3, 2-6, 6-9 interfaces, 12-8 MOH/BGM adjust volume, 4-50 mu law, 11-20 multiple call ring group, 2-12 music-on-hold (see MOH) N networking, 2-4, 2-7 IPTs, 9-13 Strata Net QSIG over IP, 9-40 night bell, 6-9 night ring, 12-10 night transfer, 6-9 O Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Index P~R P Q QSIG, 2-10, 2-17, 2-56, 7-9 BPTU or RPTU, 7-13 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Index paging, 12-17 external zones, 2-13 max. simultaneous stations, 2-13 paging output, 6-9 PCBs, 1-16, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21 compatibility, 9-2 CTX100, 3-22 station, 2-14, 2-16, 2-17 universal slot, 2-14 PCOU, 6-27 PCOU2, 6-27 PDIU-DI, 11-11 PDKU2, 2-14, 6-19 performance, 11-44 phantom directory numbers per system, 2-11 pickup groups capacities, 2-13 power TE devices backup, 7-18 power failure options, 3-17, 12-1, 12-25 power over LAN, 9-17 power requirements, 2-47, 3-4, 4-4 power supply, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17, 3-22 connectors, 3-16 CTX100 removal, 3-17 replacement, 3-18 wiring, 3-11 PRI BPTU/RPTU, 7-3 primary directory numbers, 2-11 privacy, 11-44 processor CTX100, 2-2, 3-19, 3-20, 3-21 CTX100/CTX100-S, 2-2 CTX100-S, 2-2 CTX28, 1-16 CTX670, 2-5 PCB subassemblies, 2-3, 2-7 PSTU2 installation, 6-11, 6-38 networking RPTU2, 2-17, 7-3 QSIG over IP, 2-10, 9-1, 9-41 bandwidth requirements, 9-41 BIPU-Q1A, 9-42 R R40S, 7-18 R48S, 6-11 rack mount cabinets ac cable, 5-10, 5-33 ac power component requirements, 5-27 amphenol cable, 5-9 assemble rack, 5-5 basic specifications, 5-1 changing power strip plug, 5-30 ground system, 5-18 inspection, 5-2 install expansion cabinets, 5-8 first cabinet, 5-5 power strip, 5-13 processor/universal PCBs, 5-18 reserve power, 5-14 mesh tie (B50MT), 5-12 move flange, 5-5 power requirements, 5-3 power supply unit, 5-28 primary power cabinet hardware, 5-24 remote expansion cabinet unit, 5-35 site requirements, 5-2 wiring, 5-11, 5-20 radio interference, 11-44 range, 11-44 RBSS, 7-18 RBSU, 2-16, 7-14 RBSU/RBSS, 7-14, 7-19, 7-20 RBUU, 2-17, 7-27 RBUU/RBUS, 2-17 RCIS, 2-16, 6-20 RCIU1/RCIU2, 6-20 RCIU2, 2-16, 6-20 RCMS, 2-16, 6-38 RCOS, 2-17 RCOU, 2-17 RCOU/RCOS, 6-22 RDDU, 2-16, 6-28 IN-5 Index S~U RDSU, 2-15, 6-30, 6-31 R48S ring generator, 6-30 RDTU, 2-17, 6-31, 6-32, 8-1, 8-2 RDTU1/2, 8-15 REBS, 7-18 remote CTX WinAdmin PC, 2-18 remote expansion cabinets, 2-9, 2-18, 4-55 REMU, 2-17 reserve power CTX100, 3-17 CTX670, 4-4 RGLU2, 2-16, 6-36 ring generator, 6-30 ring tones, 2-13 RMCU, 2-16, 6-39 RMCU/RCMS, 6-38, 10-20 RPTU, 7-3 RPTU2, 2-17 RRCU, 2-9, 4-55, 4-58 RSTS, 6-30, 6-31 RSTU, 6-11 RSTU2 illustration, 6-14 installation, 6-11, 6-38 RSTU3, 6-11 RWBFS, 4-35 S safety instructions, 11-31 security for IPTs, 9-15 select location, 11-33 serial interface ports, 12-6 simultaneous conversation channels, 11-43 simultaneous voice/data upgrade, 11-11 SmartMedia, 1-14, 2-3, 2-6, 3-19, 3-20 SMDI, 2-3, 2-4, 2-7, 2-18, 12-6 SMDR, 2-3, 2-7, 2-18, 12-6, 12-27 SoftIPT, 9-18 buttons, 9-24 call log, 9-25 calling, 9-22 directory, 9-23 label feature buttons (Line1~Line6), 9-24 speaker OCA stations, 2-13 speakerphone, 11-18, 11-50 specifications, 11-45 speed dial, 2-13 IN-6 standard telephone, 2-10, 11-29 interface unit, 6-4, 6-11 station buttons, 2-11 station apparatus, 11-1 station hunt groups, 2-12 strap beep, 11-50 carbon headset/handset, 11-50 external power, 11-51 Strata Net, 9-41 Stratagy, 2-18 interface, 12-6 subassemblies, 2-14 processor, 2-3, 2-7 system capacities, 2-5, 2-9 T T1 interface unit, 6-32 RDTU1/2, 8-15 T1/DS-1 interface unit, 2-17 interfacing, 8-1 lines, 2-10 TAPI upgrade, 11-11 TCP/IP, 2-3, 2-6 telephone battery backup, 1-22 telephone line problems, 11-44 telephones, 11-1 3000-series, 11-1 capacities, 2-9 cordless, 11-30 installation, 11-2 IP, 11-13 SoftIPT, 9-18 standard, 11-29 wall mounting, 11-27 tenants, 2-13 tie lines, 2-10 troubleshooting, 9-29, 11-41 U universal slot PCB, 2-9, 2-14 ADKU, 6-3 BDKU/BDKS, 6-7 BIOU, 6-9 BVPU, 6-15 Strata CTX I&M 06/04 Index V~W RDSU, 10-11 RSTU/PSTU/RSTU2 standard telephone/voice mail/ DPFT, 10-13 Index BWDKU, 6-17 PCOU2, 6-27 PDKU2, 6-19 RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS, 6-20 RCOS, 6-22 RCOU/RCOS, 6-22 RCOU2, 6-27 RDDU, 6-28 RDSU, 6-30 REMU, 6-32 RGLU, 6-36 V verified account codes, 2-13 Virtual Private Network, 9-13 voice mail interface (Stratagy), 12-6 SMDI, 2-13 VoIP, 9-3 lines, 2-10 VPN, 9-2, 9-13 W wall installation charging unit wall mounting, 11-38 direct wall mounting, 11-37 standard wall plate mounting, 11-36 WinAdmin modem, 3-23 PC, 2-18 wireless 802.11 networks, 9-26 wireless access point, 9-26 wiring RMCU/RCMS, 10-20 wiring diagram 2-wire tie line PEMU, 10-24 4-wire tie line PEMU, 10-25 ADKU and BDKU/BDKS, 10-5 CO line to MDF RCIU1/RCIU2/RCIS, 10-21 RCOU/RCOS, 10-19 RDDU, 10-22 REMU 2/4 Wire Type I/II, 10-23 RGLU2 or PCOU, 10-17 CO/tie line, 10-17 CTX28 secondary protector, 1-23 station to MDF Strata CTX I&M 06/04 IN-7
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : Yes Page Count : 495 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePage XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6 About : uuid:ac8a4104-2126-4212-852c-6a29d23630ac Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.0 Modify Date : 2004:06:16 11:28:51-07:00 Create Date : 2004:06:16 11:00:41Z Metadata Date : 2004:06:16 11:28:51-07:00 Document ID : uuid:0a6b9c31-c6e4-4d7b-8925-baebf049fc7d Format : application/pdf Title : Strata CTX Installation & Maintenance Manual Creator : Toshiba DSD Author : Toshiba DSDEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools